KR20170075687A - The method of changing a part of character in the characters which is allocated on the button of keyboard - Google Patents

Abstract

The twin input method is called the keypad
Two combinatorial buttons that perform the same function are to be placed,
When multiple letters are assigned to one button,
A plurality of letters are grouped into predetermined groups,
It is easy to enter the letters of each order of each group ...

Description

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 1. Field of the Invention The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for changing a character of a button on a keyboard,

Character input method in small keypad including mobile phone

Text input technology using small keypad

I want to enter letters quickly on a small keypad.

The twin button method is used.

In the second paragraph of the detailed contents for carrying out the invention,

It is shown in the section `` The twin advantages ''.

Chapter 1 Twin character input method (character accelerator)

In the following, the `twin character input method` is shortened to `twin`.

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++

Behind this commentary is a description of the twin

Details of the multi-tap method, the T9 method, the `* &#` method, the 2-TOUCH method, the adjacent key input method, and the advantages and disadvantages,

After you open the search box with CONTROL + F

In the multi-tap method, enter the `multi-tab description` as a search word,

For T9 method, enter `T9 Detailed Description` as a search term,

`* &# Way` `search for` * &# detailed description `as a search term,

For the `2-TOUCH method`, search for` 2-TOUCH Detailed Description` as a search term,

You can search `adjacent key input method` by inputting `adjacent key detailed description` as a search term.

The `twins` are outlined in the `twin details' or Figure 01, pictures 06 ~ 08 and their descriptions.

(If you look at only a part of that unit, you can see how it works.)

And,

How to apply twin to Chinese input by Pinyin input, please input `Chinese input detailed description`

For the explanation of the meaning of `auto cursor time setting`, search `AUTO` as a search term,

The explanation of the meaning of `combination induction button` can be found by inputting `combination induction button detailed description` as a search term

Conventional Hangul input methods

The explanation of Samsung's `Cheonjiyin way` is given in the explanation of figure 21,

A description of Pantech's `Sky` or` Curitel` method is shown in Figure 24,

The explanation of LG's `EZ` method is in the description of Figure 28,

A description of the Motorola approach is given in the discussion of Figure 34.

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++

Twin Advantages

Twins

Such as mobile phones, fixed telephones

Among the advantages of applying to devices with small keypads, which usually include 0-9, *, and # buttons

Some of the important things are:

(There are some of the following advantages when twins are applied to devices with QWERTY keyboards, including QWERTY keyboard phones.)

1. In the conventional character input modes, it is possible to perform twins in parallel without changing the mode.

So there is no risk to the manufacturer or carrier in applying the twin.

It can be applied to all the same models, or only necessary users can download and use them.

(Although twins can be used independently, the twins are not exclusive to other character input methods, and they can be used in combination with other character input methods in a different character input mode without changing the character input mode, It is also called `character accelerator '.

In other words,

Samsung Electronics' EZ method, LGT's EZ method, Pantech's Sky, Curitel method, Motorola method, Hanlord code method, etc. in multi-tap method, T9 method, `* &#` method, 2-TOUCH method .

So the twins are faster than the world's fastest on the small keypad.

In foreign countries, two methods using multi-tap method and DB including T9 are applied to almost all mobile phones.

It also helps other input methods, but it also makes you think that you do not need to use other input methods (especially T9 type). Conventional Hangul input has the speed and convenience of the first place in the world because it is a combination of multi tap method and unique character transformation of Hangul without T9 method, but if twins are applied to foreign language, foreign language can be inputted faster than Hangul.

- Because you can input the English alphabet quickly, it is possible to express the Chinese character in the English alphabet, that is, to use it as a Pinyin after the Pinyinization, or to convert Chinese to Pinyin

- In countries that do not have their own country, they can be converted into an English alphabet

You can type characters quickly

2. It is possible to increase the speed of the conventional system by applying the twins in the conventional system mode while keeping the conventional keyboard layout as it is, and to input the new style twins without changing the mode.

3. Each of the phonemes used in almost all languages

The first phoneme of each button is 1, and all the remaining phonemes can be entered as 2, making it easy to input characters.

(Two strokes with two hands, so you can enter all the phonemes at the speed of touching the touchpad with a pen (stylus) with one hand or the speed of pressing a phone number with one hand. I can say that I can input a bit faster than speed.

So, writing a novel with a cell phone with a small keypad is not inconvenient.

And because it feels like one beat because it is two by two combination of combination induction button and letter button, it feels more psychologically than double button or two different buttons to input different phonemes. The combination of the combination induction button and the letter button has two strokes, not two strokes, but a psychological fatigue of 1 to 1.3 strokes.)

4. You can easily input about 100 special characters (punctuation marks, symbols, figures, emoticons, etc.) that you use frequently in 2 ~ 3 characters without changing the character mode in normal character mode.

5. You can create six pairs of twin combination buttons on the 12 buttons, so you can enter up to 6 characters for each button.

6. It makes it easy to use function keys that are not found in computer keyboard buttons but mainly in keyboards (including QWERTY keyboards, especially small keypads).

7. If there is a sequence of letters in the same sequence, such as when you enter FOLLOW or CIRCLE described later, you can use the previous combination-induction button as it is, so the number of bats is greatly reduced. As a result, the copper line is also reduced.

8. Since the character button is a combination induction button

Figure 42 As you type `WING`

When the copper wire is 0, the letter button of the previous letter becomes the combination guide button for inputting the later letter.

In the state where the copper line is 0, the combination induction button for inputting the previous letter is a letter button of the later letter,

The phenomenon of minimizing the copper wire occurs.

If the copper line is 0, there is a speed increase effect that the batting number decreases by one.

You can type letters as if you were playing relay games.

So when entering the second letter of each button, it is strongly recommended to enter it as a twin instead of a double click.

9. Since there are two or more combination buttons for the same function,

The first row covers the left hand, the third row covers the right hand, and the second row covers the right or left hand depending on the situation,

It is possible to drastically reduce the horizontal line for pressing the combination induction button, to achieve equalization of both hands more easily, to avoid the situation in which both hands are biased in one row or three rows, so that there is no interference of both hands, The stability of holding the device is also improved.

In addition, since the character buttons in the first to third lines can be made into a combination induction button, the vertical lines for pressing the combination induction button can be dramatically reduced.

So the input speed of a small keypad phone is not so much faster than the input speed of a small QWERTY mobile phone.

10. A function button or a letter button other than the combination induction button may be a combination induction button in addition to the original function. In other words, any button can be a combination induction button, so that there is no distinction between combination induction button, function button, and letter button.

(This is also because the function button can be turned into a letter button or combination induction button.)

11. Since T9 mode, which is mostly applied in countries other than Korea and Japan, can be eliminated, DB memory for T9 system and good processor chip are not needed,

When a low-priced mobile phone is manufactured, it is possible to further reduce the manufacturing cost of the mobile phone and easily input characters through such a mobile phone, so that it is possible to communicate with a convenient text message to some extent, Along with the explosive increase of the thumb can bring.

(Twins should be applied to middle and low-end phones with high demand in poor countries and developing countries, remote phones for home and office use, internet telephones, and text input.)

12. The combination of the button assigned to the desired character and the combination induction button suitable for the character sequence (second or more) to be input requires less typos because the desired character can be input.

(The multi-tap method is sometimes misleading because of the number of characters you want to pass.)

13. Other benefits are outlined in the application and in this guidebook.

(And as well as the benefits described in this commentary, there are likely to be some advantages that you have not yet discovered, so you can assume that twins are applied to your cell phone, so you can use twins as words, sentences, ) Try to enter the twins while feeling the convenience, look for new advantages and expand the applications of twins.

Applying future twins to entering foreign characters

- English, Russian, and Greek letters,

- Arabic,

- Indian characters including Southeast Asian characters

It may be faster than the conventional Hangul input.

sure

- Because you can input the English alphabet quickly, it is possible to express the Chinese character in the English alphabet, that is, to use it as a Pinyin after the Pinyinization, or to convert Chinese to Pinyin

- In countries that do not have their own country, they can be converted into an English alphabet

You can type characters quickly.

 You can also quickly input Japanese that uses mainly 50 letters.

Eventually, you will be able to type characters in almost any language quickly.

(Hereinafter, English, Japanese, Korean, and Chinese only twins are applied.)

Until now, it has been said that Korean characters can be inputted in the smallest keypad expressing the language at the earliest, so that even if a user wants to smoothly input Hangul characters in a mobile phone, a phone having a QWERTY keyboard is not necessary. The sales ratio of mobile phones with less than 1%. Mobile phones with a small keypad of 99% or more are being sold. If you are a Korean, you will know if you look around.

In recent years, in some foreign countries, the number of people working on the Internet with mobile phones has increased, making it inconvenient for users to input characters in a conventional manner (mainly a multi-tap type and a T9 type) in a small keypad. . (In most countries outside of Korea, you can select the desired character input mode from among the two character input modes with multi-tap and T9.

US mobile phone consumers, as well as Korean consumers, are one of the key factors in mobile phone selection.

However, when a twin phone is manufactured, it will be possible to input characters easily and quickly with a small keypad in such areas, so the sales ratio of QWERTY keyboard mobile phones is expected to be reduced to about a percentage of Korea.

As you'll see later, typing in a twin on a small keypad is very small compared to typing on a QWERTY handset.

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ +++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Proving the fastest way to enter in twinning on a small keypad:

A small keypad usually refers to a keypad that is often used in telephone airflow, consisting of 0-9, *, #, or 12 buttons,

Since only 12 characters can be entered in a single word, the first letter of each button is entered as a single letter,

The remaining letters, that is, the second or more ordered lines of each button

The method of inputting with different pressing times including the long-term is delayed too much, and if the kind of pressing time is increased,

If you type in a multi-tap method,

The T9 method is also uncomfortable,

You have to enter in combination of two buttons anyway,

Like the `* &# method`

When the button * or button # in the fourth row which is mainly deviated from the line 1 to 3 which is assigned letters is used as a combination guidance button (= shift button)

The copper wire in the vertical direction becomes larger,

There is a situation in which the copper wire of the horizontal direction is also enlarged and the thumb of both hands is biased in one or three rows because the combination induction button having the same function is designated only one by itself, It's not stable.

If you type in twins

The first character of each button can be entered as a single character, and all characters of the second character or more can be input as two characters,

Since the buttons in the first to third lines assigned to almost all the characters are used as a combination induction button (= shift button), almost all the characters in the first to third lines The entire character) can be input, so that the vertical line is reduced,

You can designate two or more combination induction buttons (= shift buttons) that have the same function (usually assigned to 1,3 columns), so you can select the combination guide button that is close to the situation,

The situation in which the thumb of both hands is biased to the first or third row does not occur, interference between the fingers does not occur, the stability of holding the device increases, the load of both hands becomes equal to the maximum,

It is the fastest character input speed on the small keypad because it also shows the items of the 'Twins' several advantages mentioned at the beginning.

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Reasons to improve text input on small keypads

(= Why mobile phones with QWERTY keyboards in other countries may still have a low market share in the future)

Understand the psychological state of the consumer.

The majority of consumers in the world 80 ~ 90% (99.9% in Korea)

Do not select mobile phones with QWERTY keyboards. Select a mobile phone with a small keypad.

The reasons are as follows.

With current technology, it is possible to have all mobile phones have QWERTY keyboard,

QWERTY keyboard phone

Since the size of the mobile phone itself is large,

The QWERTY mobile phone is mainly a horizontal folder or a horizontal slide, which makes you feel uncomfortable when you press a phone number or call with one hand,

Vertical folder or vertical slide QWERTY mobile phone is small compared to the size of the button button, so I feel it is hard to press the right button properly,

Though some mobile phones are equipped with a small keypad and a QWERTY keyboard, their thickness becomes thick.

However, in countries outside of Korea, QWERTY keyboard phones are a dislike for most users who do not write text very much.

And in real life, most customers do not enter a lot of characters to buy a QWERTY cell phone.

(A normal small-sized keypad phone is a portrait folder or portrait slide.)

Bar-type QWERTY handsets, which are not folders or slides, are not sophisticated in design either.

And mobile phones with QWERTY keyboards are mostly expensive.

For the above reasons, I bought a mobile phone equipped with a small keypad. After purchasing it, I feel inconvenienced when I input a search word when searching for a phone number or when I need to send a character. However, the next time you buy a cell phone, you must buy a cell phone with a QWERTY keyboard is not inconvenient enough to make you feel uncomfortable.

By the way,

Even from the perspective of Korean input, which is the fastest way to enter characters in the world on a small keypad,

At the time of purchase, customers who did not select a cell phone with a QWERTY keyboard,

After purchase, in inputting characters,

- Samsung's way of heaven is the best way,

- The best way to get the EZ EZ,

- Motorola is the best way,

- When I changed the phone manufacturer, the keyboard layout and the character input method were not my style, so it was too hard for me to enter the characters.

I have a lot of background. Especially, when the person who input the character by the LG EZ method is used by Samsung's method of skyrocketing or Pantech's Sky or Curitel method, many people say that they should buy LG's mobile phone again.

In order to achieve customer satisfaction in such a situation, it is necessary to improve the character input method in a small keypad.

Hangul input is now

Combining twin pairs with conventional methods including Samsung's Chun Ji-in, LG Electronics's EZ, Pantech series Sky or Curitel, Motorola method,

By innovatively improving the conventional method,

In the conventional character mode,

While it is possible to input in the conventional manner ( satisfying the person who likes the conventional method )

Without changing the character input mode

In parallel with twins

You can input various advantages of the twins mentioned above, such as allowing you to input all 40 Hangul phonemes in less than 2 words. ( Satisfying the user who wants to input characters quickly )

So, there is no risk to the manufacturer or carrier in applying the twin.

So now

- Samsung's way of heaven is the best way,

- The best way to get the EZ EZ,

- Motorola is the best way to say the words have no meaning,

- It's the best way to combine Samsung's twosome with heavenly people,

- The best way is to combine the ELJ EZ method with the twins,

- The best way to combine the Pantech Sky and Curitel methods and the twins,

- Motorola is the best way to combine the twins with the way you will be the only words.

Anyway, the way to apply a twin on a small keypad is to be the first.

(Is currently

If you look at the various mobile community bulletin boards and portal site comments,

`Samsung's Tianjin can learn quickly, but if you try to use it, you will get a lot of beats and problems with the same button, and it will be uncomfortable.` And `LG EZ method is difficult to learn because it has lots of hidden phonemes. There is less number of batters, and the same button problem does not occur, so it can be entered easily and quickly.

In fact, in the case of the LG EZ system, it occupies the first place in various character input contest, and it is said that it is recognized in excellence in the speed.

(In fact, the LG EZ method has 15 phonemes that require more than 3 strokes to input, and there is a problem that there is a lot of lines for pushing button * (stroke addition function) and button # (double consonant function)

Twins allow you to enter all phonemes in less than two digits, and copper lines can be very small within one to three lines.)

Forward,

When combined with the twin, the Chungjin method can be input much faster than the conventional LG EZ method. However, I do not know if it will be faster than the conventional way of combining the LG EZ and the twin.)

Conventionally,

Korean characters with the fastest character input speed

In other countries, it is too inconvenient to input characters by using any of various input methods including the multi-tap method and the T9 method in the small keypad. In case of inputting a lot of characters, the user can only purchase a mobile phone having a QWERTY keyboard,

Now that there are twins, characters in languages other than Hangul can be entered faster than Hangul input speed on a small keypad,

In some regions outside of Korea, where the sales ratio of QWERTY handsets has increased by 10 ~ 20%, QWERTY mobile phone sales ratio will be reduced like Korea, because the small keypad can input characters at speeds of more than Hangul.

(We know that worldwide 2008 QWERTY mobile sales ratio targets 10 ~ 15%.

We know that Samsung Electronics' sales target for QWERTY in 2008 will be around 15%.)

In addition, it is possible to say that the ratio of QWERTY cell phone may increase in Korea because of the increase of information exchange through mobile phones such as mobile phones and the Internet. However, due to the advantages of miniaturization by small size keypads, More than 50%, or more than 500 million units a year worldwide, will be in demand globally (Currently, the world market for mobile phones is just over 1 billion units a year.) The market for fixed-line telephones with the same small- Which is more than 1 ~ 200 million units a year.)

And, if you need a horizontal screen for internet search in a vertical small keypad, you can rotate the liquid crystal 90 degrees like some conventional models.

Smaller keypads. Twins are essential for information exchange in mobile phones.

(And, it is not much in terms of information exchange, but it is much easier than ever to apply twins to phone book search, simple sentence input, and English word input of English dictionary built in mobile phone.)

If you only look at the alphabet,

In QWERTY mobile phones, all phonemes can be input as singular, so the average number per pitch is 1,

In the case of a small keypad, the average number of bats is 1.7 [(1x8 + 2x18) /26=1.69], because the first phoneme, which is the first phoneme, is short and the remaining 18 phonemes are two,

The small keypad is much smaller than the QWERTY keyboard, and once the other advantages of the twins mentioned above (particularly the 5th, 6th, and 7th advantages) mentioned in the previous section " It seems. In other words, it seems to be almost the same speed as the QWERTY keyboard.

Note that

Since a mobile phone having a touch pad can electronically represent a keyboard on a touch pad, it is easy to express two small keypad and QWERTY keyboards.

However, when I represent the QWERTY keyboard vertically, the size of the button becomes very small, so if I touch the finger with too much input error, there is inconvenience to touch with (stylus) pen, There is also an inconvenience to use.

And with the present technology, even when the small size of keypad is represented on the touchpad, the input error is large, and the touch sensitivity is not good. One example is Samsung's full-touch mobile phone, which only provides a small keypad, but is still more inconvenient than a physical button when entering text. (Of course, tweezers can be applied to mobile phones that are both touchpad and mini-keypad, which makes typing faster and easier than with conventional touch miniature keypads.)

Nowadays, when inputting a telephone number or entering a character, use a physical button that is the same as the conventional small keypad on the lower panel,

Games, photo albums, programs, and other functions that are advantageous to work with the touch pad are gaining great popularity with the launch of a new type of touch-pad phone. Samsung Electronics 'soul phone or LG Electronics' secret phone is a good example.

(It is not important that you return to the physical button on the touchpad, but it is important that the small keypad is still in use anyway.)

A cell phone with the lowest price is nothing but a cell phone with a small keypad,

(Small-sized keypad phones range from low-end models to high-end models, but most QWERTY phones are expensive, with a large number of buttons, a large display screen, and high power consumption.

The twins need to be applied so that the user can enter characters conveniently.

Twins should be applied to mid- and low-priced handsets, which are in high demand in poor countries and developing countries, or home and office line phones.

Cost reduction in the mobile phone market, which is becoming more and more intense in emerging countries, has become a major issue in the mobile phone industry these days.

(Especially, in recent years, as technology has been leveled, prices have risen as one of the biggest differentiators.) Emerging markets such as Southeast Asia, Latin America, and Africa have also emerged as growth engines, and Samsung, Motorola, LG, Sony It is becoming increasingly important that Ericsson's "Big Five" makers monopolize 80% of the market to lower prices by building a "scale economy." Samsung Electronics has been focusing on its existing business portfolio The company has been actively involved in coordinating and targeting emerging markets, thanks to the success of this strategy, which has secured Motorola's second place in terms of volume.

Since the T9 mode, which is mostly applied in countries other than Korea and Japan, can be eliminated, the DB memory required for the T9 system and a good processor chip are unnecessary, so that it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost of the mobile phone when the low-

(Now, it is possible to input characters in the mobile phone with a small keypad as fast as possible, so communication can be saved by making the communication somewhat free even in the lowest price type mobile phone used by the poor.

In a poor country, the facility skips the hard-wired telephony stage and goes straight to the mobile stage where it can be opened without the need for a telecommunication line. Anyway, it is the ability to buy a mobile phone with great care in a poor country. Some people do not. Now, even with mobile phones with small keypads, most of the communication is made possible by text messages, so even those people can buy mobile phones to make communication and receive more civilization benefits. And even though it is not poverty, the public can greatly reduce communication costs.)

So far, you can only enter the keypad without touching it with a physical touch-tone phone with a small keypad.

(Even if it is a small keypad, if it is a touch pad, if you do not see the touch pad, you can not know whether you pressed the desired button correctly, so you can not input text even if you have memorized the keyboard layout.) Physical buttons are buttons Of course, it is possible to apply twin to touch-pad as well as small-size keypad, so that it is more convenient than conventional touch mini-keypad. You can type letters quickly and easily.)

Note that,

Regarding the touch of the keypad,

By dividing the computer keyboard into two major types,

Divide into membrane type and mechanical type.

Membrane and mechanical, both touchpad and not physical buttons,

There is a difference in touch feeling as below,

In addition, the lowest price among membrane type is 3000 won, and the lowest price among mechanical type is 25000 won. Typically, most users use a (99%?) Membrane formula.

Needless to say, there is a difference in touch feeling between the touch pad and the physical button in the mobile phone.

(Membrane type

When I press the key, there is a little repulsion,

There is a silicon pad on the membrane contact substrate, which covers the entire key. When you press the key on the membrane keyboard, the feeling is that the silicone pad is contracting and coming out of the elasticity.

It feels like pressing the remote control button.

Mechanical

The feeling of repulsion of the key is better and it is a feeling of euphoria, and the fatigue of the finger is decreased when the batter is long. The rate of typo is also less than the membrane method. The reason is because of the noise.

Below the keys on the mechanical keyboard are individual metal contacts and springs. So when you hit the key on the mechanical keyboard, you can feel the light touch. The advantage of a mechanical keyboard is that it has a good sense of key press (there can be personal variation) and can detect if the key is pressed down. It also has a long life. Instead, it is expensive because you have to create contacts for each key.

It feels like pressing the mouse button.)

)

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Definition of Terms

Hereinafter, the term " button " refers to an electronic touch button of a touch pad, a physical button such as a general computer keyboard, and a button of a laser pad.

In the following, the term `` character '' includes the following three.

1. A character that represents a language

2. Special characters

   Yes)

   - punctuation marks

   - Common special characters (mainly special characters in the word processor's special character set - mainly black and white)

   - Character emoticons (mostly letters, punctuation, classic emoticons with common special characters)

   - Emoji, animated or flash emoji - mostly colored

3. Function: It is a button mainly on the computer keyboard. It has the function of the button which is not on the cell phone keypad, the function of changing the Korean phoneme, or the change of the character mode or the selection function. A cell phone with a QWERTY keypad also has many buttons that are not listed below, so it would be good to apply it to a QWERTY cell phone.

( Yes:

   - The `DEL` button function of the computer keyboard (Normally, the` Cancel` button of the mobile phone only performs the BACK-SPACE function and not the DEL button function)

   -INSETRT` button function,

   - `INSETRT` button reverse function (On the computer keyboard,` INSETRT` button is the toggle key, but the toggle key is always mistaken. It is possible. )

   - `SPACE` button function (In Hangul input method, there is no space dedicated button, and mainly use the right arrow key to space one space. In English button, there is space dedicated button in 4th row. However, if twins are used, You can add that function to line 3),

   - `ENTER` function: It performs the same function as the ENTER function of the computer keyboard, such as line feed function in case of inputting characters and confirmation function after inputting an Internet search word.

   Functions such as `HOME`,` END`, `PAGE DOWN`,` PAGE UP`, `ESC`` TAB`,` CAPS LOCK`, and `NUM LOCK` buttons

   - Hangs one syllable, not one syllable. (If the cursor is moved to the next space with wrong input of the diphthongs in the way of the ceiling, if you press the cancel button, the whole letter will be erased. If you want to erase the wrong letter of the previous letter Can be used.

If you press the CANCEL button (BACK SPACE on your computer) when the cursor is moved to the next space with the wrong input of the previous letter, you can erase the previous letter. When you can use it)

- Korean input method

In LG EZ system, double consonant button, stroke add button,

In Motorola, the `#` button (= button that actually adds strokes),

Including character end button and shift button in VK Hangul coded method

Hangul phonetic conversion button function ==> In some cases, it is recommended that the character button is treated as a combination induction button (= shift button).

In the following, `the same button problem`

As a phenomenon that occurs when inputting by the multi-tap method,

This occurs when you want to input characters assigned to the same button in succession.

In the case of a letterless system like English, it can occur in every spelling of a word,

In the case of a character with a backslash (= backslash) such as Hangul, it occurs when the leading character's leading character and the leading character's leading character are the characters assigned to the same button. It is also called a consonant collision phenomenon. The vowel does not occur in vowels unless the phoneme array is stupid.

E.g

When "ABC" is assigned to button 2,

If you press button 2 twice in succession to enter `AA`, the device recognizes that you want to enter the second character` B`, so press button 2 once and press the space button to move the cursor to the next space It is a phenomenon that `AA` is inputted without error after pressing button 2 again after moving (or after the cursor has been moved to the next space by itself after waiting for about 2 seconds).

In the English alphabet, the button * or the button 0 or the button # in the 4th line out of the 1 ~ 3 lines, in which most of the alphabet is assigned, is used as a space button, so that the larger one line is increased.

Also in Korean, if `ㅋㅋ ㄲ` is assigned to button 1,

If you want to enter `country`, you need to input phoneme in order of `ㄱ ㅜ ㄱ ㄱ`

When inputting the third character, a seed `ㄱ`, and the fourth character `

If you press button 1 twice consecutively, the device recognizes that you want to type `ㅋ` and displays it as `guka. 'So press button 1 once, move the cursor to the next space by pressing the right button (Or wait for 2 seconds before the cursor automatically moves the cursor to the next field).

If you need to type `ㅅ び ㄱ ㅋ` `

When inputting the third character, a seed `ㄱ`, and the fourth character `

If you press button 1 once and then press button 1 twice again, the device recognizes that you want to type `ㄲ`

Pressing button 1 once, moving the cursor by pressing the right button and then pressing button 1 again 2 times, the `ㅋ ㅋ` is correctly recognized and the `knife` can be entered without errors. In case of Hangul, there is no space button, so you have to move the cursor by pushing the right button. The line from the thumb to the right button and back to the small keypad of 4 rows and 3 columns becomes very big.

If you encounter the same button problem as above, you can usually solve it by using the right button or the space button only. However, the space button is also used when the space is out of the line 1 ~ 3 Because it is in the fourth row, it can be said that the copper wire is large.

However, when entering characters in all languages,

When the same button problem occurs, a large one of the copper lines increases. It is perceived that the user is doing psychological unnecessary work, and the copper wire is too large, stressful, irritating and causing a lot of typos.

Therefore, a person who inputs a lot of characters will prefer an input method in which the same button problem is small, especially in the case of a Hangul input with various input methods.

Since Samsung's Sky or Curitel method of Pantech series is based on purely multi tap method, the same button problem occurs frequently, and the LG EZ method does not cause the same button problem at all.

So when considering the vowel,

One of the reasons why the LG EZ method is preferred to the Pantech series input method with less number of strokes per phoneme is the difference depending on the presence or absence of the same button problem.

When a word consisting of each phoneme is input,

This is because the same button problem does not occur, so there is less total number of batters in the eliza EZ that do not need additional batters, and psychological stress or irritation occurs even when the total number of batters in the eliza EZ type is more.

Among the many things a twin can do

The same button problem is hardly caused even when it is performed in parallel with the multi-tap method,

Please note that in the twin-only mode, the same button problem may not occur at all.

Let's list a few examples of the same button problem in Hangul

1 ㄱ a (the words of the case where both the first letter and the second letter are a)

: Angular, each, spot, each, country, angular, angular, angular, angular, biceps, angular, angular, each, flu, eating, eating, eating, carving, cut, tableware, instrument, writer, angle, illusion, tactile , Touch, chin, tyranny, academia, department, school, school district, semester etc.

2 ㄱ ㅋ: Eat knife, Kitchen knife, Hellclub , Maekjoko midi, Every caller , etc.

(When the first letter of the preceding letter and the second letter of the back letter are a or k)

From now on, I will give an example as I think of only one person.

3 ㄴ ㄴ: across, nobody

4 ㄴ:: Simple, ~ Harmony (words in the case of the preceding letter and the beginning of the back letter b or d)

5 c: Pour

6 ㄷ

7 с с: Cowboy

8 F: rich

9 F

10 Thoughts:

11 It looks like:

12 ㅅ ㅅ: Bullshit

13 Do not tear it.

14 Do not chase me

15:: Lacquer

16 o o: this force, the charging property, property lines, primary infantile ~

17 ㅇ ㅁ: Name

18 Klitschko: Reduction

19 ㅁ Si: Thank you

20 ㅇ Heh: saranghae , mellow , strong

21 ㄱ ㄲ: Dingy

22 ㄷ ㄸ:? (I do not think)

23 ㅃ ㅃ: Hip bone

24. Shovel: male wedge

25 ㅉ ㅉ:? (I do not think)

1 to 18 occur mainly in Samsung Heaven,

1 to 10, 12 to 16, 19 and 20 occur in the Sky and Curitel system of the Pantech system

21 to 25 occur in Motorola.

In the future, if more new words such as compound words, abbreviations, and foreign words are added, it is likely that the same button problem will occur.

Combination guidance button Detailed explanation

To understand the meaning of `Combination guidance button` below, you can think of it as `shift button` on the computer keyboard.

For mastery, I will say "combination button" (a shift button) a few more times below, and after that, it will be called "combination button."

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Twin detailed description

This twin commentary explains a number of examples of various applications of the patent application (supplement the explanation of the advantages and applications of the twin input method in the patent application).

From now on I will slowly explain twins.

Although the twin can be usefully applied to the QWERTY keyboard (sometimes it does not have much effect), the effect is much greater when applied to the small keypad. Therefore, the following description mainly focuses on the application to the small keypad, I will refer to that when it seems to be useful for the keyboard as well.

The twin input method is called the keypad

Two combinatorial buttons that perform the same function are to be placed,

When multiple letters are assigned to one button,

A plurality of letters are grouped into predetermined groups,

It is a method of easily entering the letters of each order of each group.

For example, in a conventional mini-keypad with 12 buttons (0-9, *, #)

When 30 letters are assigned to each button, they are grouped into groups of 6, divided into 5 groups, and the letters of each order of the first to sixth groups of the five groups are easily inputted.

What you need

The signal to ask for the second group

It is a signal that tells you to enter some sequence of letters in a particular group called `the second`.

To enter the second letter (usually a special character) from the computer keyboard, hold down the shift button and press the letter button assigned to the target special character

Twins button way

The signal for inputting characters in the order of the second order is also obtained by pressing a suitable combination induction button (= shift button) among six kinds of combination induction buttons (= shift buttons) for inputting characters in the first to sixth order on the small keypad The character button to which the target character is assigned is pressed,

The signal to input the group of the second group is a method of giving the signal by changing the combination induction button (= shift button) and the pressing method of the letter button.

At this time, it is difficult to physically create six kinds of combination induction buttons (= shift buttons) physically because of space constraints. Even if it is made even if it is made, it is tired when the movement line is large inside the 12 letter buttons. If there is a combination induction button (= shift button), the copper wire becomes too large.

So, I added a combination induction button (= shift button) function to the original function of the 12 buttons, and a method of making the letter button momentarily as a combination induction button (= shift button)

What do you do with it?

When each of the 12 buttons is turned on and then turned off, a conventional character button function or a function button function (for example, a character mode change function, a function for selecting a target word among candidate words in T9, An additional button function, and a double consonant button function)

When there is a button combination in which a button is pressed (= turned on ) in a state in which any one of the 12 buttons is being held (= the ON state) , any one of the two buttons is called a combination induction button Buttons), and the other buttons become letter buttons.

Like the computer shift button, it is usually recommended to turn on the combination guide button (= shift button) before the letter button, but you can turn it on later.

At this time, the twin input method adopts the form in which the same combination induction button (= shift button) function is added to each of two letter buttons.

Because there are 12 buttons, you can add 6 kinds of combination induction button (= shift button) function.

(Do not necessarily add the same combination direction button (= shift button) function to only two buttons,

When added to three buttons, four kinds of combination induction buttons (= shift button) are added,

In addition to the four buttons, there are three kinds of combination guidance buttons (= shift button). However, except for the special cases below, the same kind of combination induction button (= shift button) Add functionality.)

If you apply this approach to a computer keyboard (though not very beneficial)

By adding the shift button function to the Q and P buttons,

Add control button functions to A and L buttons,

It is the same as adding the Alt button function to the Z and M buttons,

Small devices like the QWERTY mobile phone that maximize space efficiency can eliminate shift, control, and alt buttons.

(Of course you can get rid of it on computer keyboard, but it does not seem to be very effective.)

On a computer keyboard, control buttons and alt buttons do not have the ability to write text, so there is a space constraint problem, and most of the QWERTY phones do not have control buttons or alt buttons, .)

Now you can easily implement control buttons or alt buttons without having to use those buttons on your phone.

in front

The signal to input a few groups is said to give the signal while changing the combination induction button (= shift button) and the letter button

Specifically, it is shown in the following table.

(You can easily understand the whole thing if you look at the following table for a while, but you do not need to understand it right now, so just look at it briefly and then explain some of the examples in detail later.)

In order to mention the sequence of pressing the combination induction button and the letter button in the twin method, as shown in the <Figure 01> table or the <Picture 02> table, Predecessor  There is a method, there is a method to follow,

As shown in the <Figure 01> table

It is recommended that the combination induction button precedes the letter button in almost all cases (because there are more advantages than the trailing approach, as will be explained later)

`Combination induction button precedes letter button` is that when entering the second letter of a certain button on the computer keyboard, while holding down the shift key, while holding down the combination button, , And "

 The way that the combination induction button trails the letter button is that the opposite of the above is to press the combination induction button while holding the letter button, as if typing the second letter of a button on the computer keyboard Now it means to press the shift button while holding the letter button.

It is rarely recommended to follow a combination button to follow a character button. But

. 2-TOUCH method and the twin

. The conventional input method of Hangul (for example, the EZ-EZ method) by itself pushes the letter conversion button (for example, the stroke addition button and the double consonant button) to the letter button in the case of performing the conventional Hangul input method in parallel with the twin , The character combination button (for example, the stroke addition button and the double consonant button) is added to the other character buttons by the combination induction button, so that the combination induction button precedes the character button so that the twins When applied, it is confused with the conventional method. Therefore, when applying twins, it is recommended that the combination induction button is used to the degree that it follows the letter button.

If you are confident that you will not be confused at this time, you are encouraged to do better.

Also, when applied to actual products, it is sufficient to achieve the desired purpose of quickly and easily inputting many letters including punctuation marks and emoticons even if only one or two groups or one to three groups of input methods are applied, Since the input method seems to be almost unnecessary, it is obviously unnecessary to further expand further by changing the push method.

(In fact, the second to fifth group letter input method is also called the application of the first group letter input method.)

At the top of <Figure 01> and <Figure 02>

There are 30 'cumulative alphabetical order' in one button, which means that 30 characters are assigned to one button,

The `group` is up to the fifth group letters, which means that 30 letters are divided into five groups,

The `group order in letters' is up to 6, which means that 30 letters are divided into 5 groups, 6 letters per group,

The contents of the <Figure 01> and <Figure 02> tables below are in the form of "A button + B button", which means press the B button while holding down the A button. (The `A button + B button 'format is 2, but I feel psychologically as one.)

For example, when the combination induction button is a third combination induction button,

`Combination induction button precedes letter button`

`Third combination induction button + letter button shortcut` means to press the button assigned to the desired letter in a short time while holding the combination induction button for inputting the third letter,

`Third combination induction button + letter button long 'means to press long button (for example, more than 0.5 seconds) of the button assigned to the character to be input while holding the combination induction button for inputting the third letter `KEYZET`, a shortcut key program for computer keyboard,

`Third combination induction button double-click + letter button fastener` is a button for double-clicking a combination induction button for inputting a third letter, and then holding the finger off the button, Means to press the button briefly

`Third Combination Judgment Button Double-click + Character Button Combination` is a combination button that allows the user to input the third character. After double-clicking the combination button, do not release the finger from the button, Means to press the button long (for example, more than 0.5 seconds)

`Third combination induction button double click + letter button double click` is a method of double-clicking combination induction button for inputting the third letter, and then holding the finger off the button, This means double-clicking the button,

And

`How the combination induction button follows the letter button`

`Letter button + third combination induction button 'means to press the combination induction button which allows the user to input the third letter while holding down the button assigned to the desired letter,

`Letter button + third combination induction button long 'means to press a combination induction button (for example, 0.5 seconds or more) to input a third letter while holding a button assigned to a desired letter,

`Double-click on the letter button + Third combination induction button Double-click on the button to assign the desired letter to the input, then do not remove the finger from the button, Means to press the button briefly

`Double-click the letter button + the third combination induction button, double-click the button assigned to the desired letter, then do not remove the finger from the button, Means to press the button long (for example, more than 0.5 seconds)

`Double-click on letter button + Double-click on third combination induction button` is a combination of double-clicking a button assigned to a desired letter and then inputting a third letter while holding down the finger It means to double-click the Judgment button.

In the <Figure 01> and <Figure 02> tables below,

In a method of inputting a first character of a character sequence in a group among characters of a first group

If the combination induction button is preceded by a letter button, the `first combination induction button +

If the combination induction button is followed by a letter button, the `character button + first combination induction button

You can also enter 2 tarot

It should be noted that in the method of inputting the first letter of the first group of characters, it is possible to input a letter button only, that is, one letter in the case of the parallel mode or in the twin exclusive mode.

The basic types of combinations of push buttons and letter buttons in twins are shown below in figures 01 and 02 (the changed form will be explained later).

<Figure 01>: Combination guidance button This is the way to precede the letter button (recommended in most cases)

group One
Inside the button
Cumulative Characters
turn group
of mine
letter
order Push method Remarks The first group
letter One One Letter button shortcut <possible in parallel with multi-tap mode or in dual-only mode> or
First combination induction button + letter button singlet 2 2 Text button Press twice continuously (= double-click) <Only in parallel with multi-tap method> or
2nd combination induction button + letter button 3 3 Letter button Press 3 times continuously (= Triple-click) <Only in parallel with multi-tap method> Or
Third combination guiding button + letter button singlet 4 4 Letter button Press 4 times continuously <Only in parallel with multi-tap method> Or
Fourth combination induction button + letter button 5 5 Letter button Press 5 times continuously <Only in parallel with multi-tap method> Or
Fifth combination guiding button + letter button 6 6 Letter button Press 6 times continuously <Only in parallel with multi-tap method> Or
Sixth Combination Induction Button + Text Button The second group
letter 7 One Letter button
First combination induction button + letter button battle 8 2 2nd combination induction button + letter button battle 9 3 Third Combination Induction Button + Character Button 10 4 Fourth Combination Judgment Button + Character Button 11 5 Fifth Combination Judgment Button + Character Button 12 6 6th Combination Induction Button + Character Button Group 3
letter 13 One First combination induction button Double click + letter button singlet 14 2 2nd combination induction button double click + letter button singlet 15 3 3rd combination guidance button double click + letter button singlet 16 4 Fourth Combination Judgment Button Double Click + Text Button Single 17 5 5th Combination Judgment Button Double-click + Text Button Single 18 6 6th Combination Judgment Button Double-click + Font Button Single Group 4
letter 19 One First combination induction button Double click + letter button 20 2 2nd combination induction button double click + letter button battle 21 3 Third Combination Judgment Button Double-click + Character Button 22 4 4th Combination Judgment Button Double-click + Character Button 23 5 5th Combination Judgment Button Double-click + Character Button 24 6 6th Combination Judgment Button Double-click + Character Button Group 5
letter 25 One First combination induction button double click + letter button double click 26 2 2nd combination induction button double click + letter button double click 27 3 Third combination induction button double click + letter button double click 28 4 Fourth Combination Judgment Button Double-click + Double-Click 29 5 5th Combination Judgment Button Double click + double click button 30 6 Sixth combination induction button double click + letter button double click

(If the combination induction button precedes the letter button,

When a certain button is turned on, it is possible to display the characters of each button that can be input when a certain button acts as a combination inducing button, together with the button number, on the display screen, assuming that the button acts as a combination induction button. It is recommended when there are too many letters to be assigned so that the buttons can not be displayed at all. )

<Figure 02>: How the combination induction button follows the letter button (rarely recommended)

group One
Inside the button
Cumulative Characters
turn group
of mine
letter
order Push method
Remarks The first group
letter One One Letter button shortcut <possible in parallel with multi-tap mode or in dual-only mode> or
Letter button + 1st combination guiding button 2 2 Text button Press twice continuously (= double-click) <Only in parallel with multi-tap method> or
Letter button + 2nd combination induction button 3 3 Letter button Press 3 times continuously (= Triple-click) <Only in parallel with multi-tap method> Or
Letter button + third combination guiding button 4 4 Letter button Press 4 times continuously <Only in parallel with multi-tap method> Or
Letter button + fourth combination guiding button 5 5 Letter button Press 5 times continuously <Only in parallel with multi-tap method> Or
Letter button + 5th combination guiding button 6 6 Letter button Press 6 times continuously <Only in parallel with multi-tap method> Or
Letter button + 6th combination guiding button The second group
letter 7 One Letter button
Letter button + first combination guide button 8 2 Letter button + second combination guiding button 9 3 Letter button + third combination guiding button 10 4 Letter button + fourth combination guiding button 11 5 Letter button + fifth combination guide button 12 6 Letter button + 6th combination guiding button Group 3
letter 13 One Double-click the letter button + First combination guide button 14 2 Letter button double click + 2nd combination induction button singlet 15 3 Letter button double click + third combination guiding button 16 4 Double-click on the letter button + 4th combination guiding button 17 5 Double-click on the letter button + 5th combination guide button 18 6 Double-click the letter button + Group 4
letter 19 One Double-click the letter button + first combination guide button 20 2 Double-click on character button + 2nd combination guiding button 21 3 Double-click the letter button + Third combination guiding button 22 4 Double-click the letter button + the fourth combination guiding button 23 5 Double-click the letter button + 24 6 Double-click the character button + Group 5
letter 25 One Double-click the letter button + the first combination guiding button 26 2 Double-click on the letter button + Double-click on the second combination induction button 27 3 Double-click the letter button + the third combination induction button 28 4 Double-click on the letter button + double-click on the fourth combination induction button 29 5 Double-click on the letter button + double-click combination of the 5th combination 30 6 Double-click on the letter button + Double-click on the sixth combination induction button

(If the combination induction button is followed by a letter button,

When there are too many letters to be assigned and the buttons can not be all displayed,

Once a button is turned on, it is possible to display the characters assigned to a button on the display screen, assuming that the button is a character button to be combined with the combination induction button.)

A button + B button double-click can be applied to the pressing method of two tables as shown in <Figure 01,02>. However, the application of 'A button + B button double' (Pressing the B button with the other hand twice while holding the A button.) `And the signal may be confused with each other.

By simply typing in the first group letters above

In the conventional keyboard, in particular, in a small-size keypad, a conventional input method and twins of almost all language expressing characters including English, Korean, and Japanese are performed in parallel without mode change, The input method is innovatively improved, and special characters of about 10 to 40 (about 40 for English, 30 for Korean, and 20 for Japanese) It is obviously practical in countries that input their own words by using the English alphabet, including inputting Chinese by pinching Chinese characters in English in Chinese.

Although the method of inputting letters of the second group or more mainly improves the special character input method,

Even though the pronunciation is the same as English, there are upper and lower case letters, and even though the pronunciation is the same as in Japanese, like Hiragana and Katakana,

Even in the case of the same type of language,

The user can quickly input the second character without changing the character mode in the first character mode (for example, letting the user enter the capital letters quickly without changing the character mode in the English lower case mode or promptly inputting the katagana without changing the character mode in the Japanese hiragana mode)

The first character can be quickly input without changing the character mode in the second character mode. (For example, in lower case letters mode, you can enter lower case letters quickly without changing the character mode, or in Japanese katakana mode, you can enter hiragana quickly without changing the character mode)

Furthermore, among Japanese input methods, similar to T9,

The input method using the DB and the method of inputting the search term only with the definite letter (mainly called the PREDICTION method) are frequently used. At this time, the word presented as the candidate word

One of the second to fifth group input methods can be applied as a signal when only the kanji or hiragana or katakana only needs to be presented.

For example, in `Hiragana / Hanja` mode

Conventionally, candidate words composed of hiragana or kanji are all presented, but now

When the first group input method is used, candidate words composed of hiragana or kanji are all presented,

If the second group input method is used, candidate words composed only of katakana may be presented,

Using the third group input scheme, candidate words composed of only hiragana may be presented,

The fourth group input method can also be used to suggest candidate words consisting of only Chinese characters. (However, I can not even read the Japanese 50, so I do not know if it is as useful as the following explanation.)

기호가 배정되어 있다 : 뒤의 그림03 참조) 을 대문자, 소문자 변환버튼으로 이용하는 것 같은 데, 버튼*을 누를 때 마다 아래의 3가지 모드로 순환하는 것 같다. (멀티탭방식이라고 할수도 있고 토글키 방식이라고도 할수 있다.)Normal mode in English mode * (

Symbol: see Figure 03 below) is used as the upper and lower case conversion buttons, and each time the button * is pressed, it seems to cycle to the following three modes. (It can be called multi tap or toggle key.)

    1. Only the first letter of the sentence in upper case mode

    2. Upper case mode

    3. Lowercase mode

It is a mistake to mistake this mode for correct mode change, and it is likely to make a mistake to input uppercase and lowercase characters differently from the intention of the user. (On the computer keyboard, change the uppercase / lowercase letter mode mode button <`CAPS LOCK` button> This toggle key has many mistakes and is not an English speaking country. For example, in Korea, there is a lot of mistakes because the toggle key is used to change the Korean / English letter mode)

Even if the mode change is made correctly,

If you want to type in lower case letters and capital letters, press the button * once, change the first letter of the sentence to upper case mode,

The process of changing to the lower case mode again by pressing the button * twice is very troublesome and seems to be very troublesome.

Therefore, in the present invention, when an uppercase letter is input in a lower case mode, a method of inputting uppercase letters one by one using a second group letter input method, which is a combination of a combination induction button and a letter button first letter, , It is proposed to use the same in addition to the conventional method used as the lower case conversion button. (However, if you want to enter a long, consecutive capital letter, you can type capital letters by changing it to `upper case mode`.)

Note that

If you need to type capital letters in the middle of a sentence in English, let's look at just a few.

It seems to be trivial, but if you do not observe this rule, the sentence seems to be very poor.

1 `I` meaning `I`

2 uppercase letters in a person's name

ex) Last night Mrs. Harvey visited Gil-dong Hong.

(1 and 2 appear especially during chatting)

3 The first letter of every sentence must be an uppercase letter

ex) The more John read of the book, the more he enjoyed it.

4 Words in the calendar are capitalized

   Day of week, month, national holiday

ex) Thursday, Saturday, January, April, Valentine`s Day, Easter.

5 Well-known places are in uppercase

   When talking about a part of the map (country, continent, etc.), when talking about provinces or provinces, cities, towns, streets, islands, mountains,

ex) Europe, Korea, Newyork, Jeju Island

As such, the use of uppercase letters somewhat in the middle of a sentence makes it necessary to be able to type uppercase letters in a lowercase mode quickly and accurately with twins.

I will explain the process of typing the sentence `Hi, I am Susy`, followed by lowercase letters. You can see even the explanation of <Figure 08> table which is coming soon.

Note that

Let's take a look at the uses of hiragana and katakana.

1. Hiragana: This is the most basic character that expresses everyday language with Chinese characters.

2. Katakana: Pronunciation is the same as hiragana and is usually used in foreign language, in proper language, in the right language, in a sentence, in the name of a plant, in an advertisement, or when specifically emphasizing.

(Katagana is said to be used only about 10% of its frequency compared to hiragana.)

Note that,

Almost all phones

In the call waiting mode, when the telephone number is pressed or the call button is pressed, the cellular phone reacts as soon as the button is turned on,

In the character input mode, the cellular phone does not react as soon as the button is turned on, but checks the time until the ON button is turned off and reacts accordingly. If the time is short, the normal character or special character is usually input. If the time is long (usually more than 1 second), the number assigned to the button is input.

In this state, when the shift button is turned on like another computer shift button and the other button is turned on, the button pressing method required by the twin can be realized if the command is executed by the combination key (hot key).

I will explain concrete examples from now on.

There are various kinds of letter colors in English, Japanese, and Hangul placements including figures 03 ~ 06 and 17 ~ 36.66.

Black is originally written on a conventional keyboard,

Green is a character that was not typed on a conventional keyboard but could be input by pressing it several times in a multi-

The blue color is a character that can be input by continuously operating the character button and character change button (for example, a stroke addition button or a double consonant button) although not shown on a conventional keyboard,

The red color is the letters that the inventor added arbitrarily (eg punctuation marks, symbols, and Hangul phonemes).

(The emoticon of course was added by the inventor.)

Green and blue color are only in Hangul phoneme in this commentary.

Characters that are not black may be displayed smaller than black, memorized, or a portion of the display screen may be displayed so that a person who likes the conventional method may feel less uncomfortable at the first impression.

It is recommended that you change the color of the letters so that the user can easily recognize the origin of the letters even when adding cell phone notation to apply twins. Especially in the case of Hangul phonemes.

One. In English

<Figure 03>: Conventional A type English keyboard (= standard keyboard)

: The future English explanation is only in the <Picture 03> type.

(Button 1 is not assigned an alphabet,

 Button 7 is assigned `PQRS`

Button 9 is assigned `WXYZ`.)

Button 1, *, 0, # to /:. , @? ! Depending on the manufacturer, 0 ~ 7 special characters are assigned. There are many types in which two or three special characters are assigned.

<Figure 03> Type is a keyboard layout applied to almost all mobile phones in the world. It can be said almost standard.

LG Electronics and Motorola are in the <Figure 03> type for sales in Korea or for sales outside Korea.

Sharp Electronics, Nokia, etc. are also produced only in <Figure 03> type.

Samsung Electronics, Pantech group SKY and Curitel are sold in Korea as <Figure 04> type, but export type is <Figure 03> type.

(In the application form, we do not know that the type is the world standard, and we only describe it as the type of Fig. 04;

In <Figure 03>

(버튼#)는 문자입력 모드에서 스페이스를 입력하는 기능을 하는 버튼이라는 뜻이고,

(Button #) means a button for inputting a space in the character input mode,

(버튼*)는 영문모드에서 대문자, 소문자 전환 기능을 하는 버튼이라는 뜻이다.

(Button *) means to switch between uppercase and lowercase letters in English mode.

The following symbols on the above keyboard do not have any function in the character entry mode, so do not worry.

(버튼1)는 통화 중에 녹음하는 기능을 하는 버튼이라는 뜻이고

(Button 1) means a button that functions to record during a call

(버튼*)는 대기모드에서 소리가 안나게 진동으로 바꾸는 기능을 하는 버튼이라는 뜻이고,

(Button *) means that the button is functioning to change the sound from silent mode to standby mode,

(버튼#)는 대기모드에서 전화기 보안상 열쇠를 잠궈놓는 기능을 하는 버튼이라는 뜻이고,

(Button #) is a button that locks the key for phone security in standby mode,

+ (Button 0) is a symbol to be added after the country code when entering international phone numbers in standby mode.

With the conventional button notation being maintained,

Newly assigned punctuation marks or other special characters or emoticons

You can memorize, use a part of the display screen, or carry a set of assignments (we will explain in detail later). Naturally, the newly assigned letter may be different from the letter group.

<Figure 04>: Conventional B type English keyboard (It is said that it is not a standard keyboard)

 (Button 1 is assigned `QZ`,

 Button 7 is assigned `PRS`

Button 9 is assigned `WXY`.)

<Figure 05>: English keyboard: Improvement - 2 lines per button

<Figure 05> Keyboard explanation will be explained in <Figure 06> explanation.

And if you think this is too complicated for the first time, you should start to look at the assignment of buttons 0-9 in Figure 16.5 or 16.6.

For all other languages, it is also possible to add only a few characters, as in Figure 16.5 or 16.6.

<Figure 06>: English keyboard: Improvement: 3 lines per button

If you understand <Figure 06>, you understand 99% of the improvement of Hangul keyboard and Japanese keyboard.

<Figure 06> In addition to the traditional keyboard, <Figure 03>, the keyboard is assigned additional special characters such as red, and emoticons are assigned.

As shown in <Figure 03>, which is a conventional keyboard, letters are not assigned to the buttons 1, * and #. In FIG. 06, three letters are conventionally assigned to the other buttons. Additional letters were assigned.

(SPACE)가 이미 배정되어 있어도 3글자(` = # / `)를 추가로 배정할 수 있고, 버튼*에는

(대문자모드,소문자모드 변경기능)이미 배정되어 있어도 3글자(·．*)을 추가로 배정하여 입력할 수 있다. (이렇게 하는 것이 가능한 이유의 상세 설명은 뒤에서 하겠다.)(Button #

(`= # /`) Can be additionally allocated even if SPACE is already allocated, and the button *

(Upper case mode, lower case mode change function) Even if it is already assigned, it is possible to input 3 characters (·. *) More. (We'll go over the details of why this is possible.)

Each button has three additional lines of text (special characters or emoticons).

You can divide the letters of each button in <Figure 06> into 2 groups or 3 groups

First, let's divide into three groups.

In the lower case mode, with reference to button 6

6개,The first group is mno?

6,

6개,The second group is MNO

6,

(In the case of lower case mode, this assignment rule is set up to input capital letters without mode change)

3개로 해서The third group is blank

Three

Divide into three groups.

Now that we have divided the group, let's look at an example of making a combination button as a combination button as in <Figure 07> below.

<Figure 07>: Combination guidance button assignment table

1 (1) 2 (4) 3 (1) 4 (2) 5 (5) 6 (2) 7 (3) 8 (4) 9 (3) * (6) 0 (5) # (6)

I will explain the Combination Indicator Button Table in <Figure 07> above.

The case where the combination induction button precedes the character button will be described first.

The numbers 1 ~ 6 in parentheses, which means the combination induction button to input a few letters, can be varied as shown in <Figure 07.1 ~ 07.8>. I will explain.

The 0 ~ 9, *, # 12 buttons in <Figure 06>

When it is ON after it is ON by itself

It performs a function including inputting the first character assigned to each button, a function for changing a character mode or a stroke addition function, and a function for inputting characters including a double consonant function,

When each of the 12 buttons is ON and the other button is ON,

It functions as a combination induction button, as shown in <Figure 07>

The buttons 1 and 3 function as a combination inducing button for inputting the first letter of an arbitrary group,

The buttons 4 and 6 serve as a combination induction button for inputting the second letter of an arbitrary group

Buttons 7 and 9 function as a combination induction button for inputting the third letter of an arbitrary group

Buttons 2 and 8 serve as a combination induction button for inputting the fourth letter of an arbitrary group

Button 5,0 acts as a combination induction button for inputting the fifth letter of an arbitrary group

The buttons * and # mean that they act as a combination induction button that allows you to enter the sixth letter of any group.

In addition to <Figure 07>, the combination induction button assignment can be changed as shown in the following table, and another change is possible. However, the following description is based on <Fig. 07>.

<Figure 07.1>: Combination guidance button 2

1 (1) 2 (5) 3 (1) 4 (2) 5 (4) 6 (2) 7 (3) 8 (4) 9 (3) * (6) 0 (5) # (6)

<Figure 07.2>: Combination induction button assignment table 3

1 (1) 2 (4) 3 (1) 4 (2) 5 (5) 6 (2) 7 (3) 8 (5) 9 (3) * (6) 0 (4) # (6)

<Figure 07.3>: Combination guidance button 4

1 (1) 2 (5) 3 (1) 4 (2) 5 (5) 6 (2) 7 (3) 8 (6) 9 (3) * (4) 0 (6) # (4)

<Figure 07.4>: Combination guidance button 5

1 (1) 2 (5) 3 (1) 4 (2) 5 (6) 6 (2) 7 (3) 8 (5) 9 (3) * (4) 0 (6) # (4)

<Figure 07.5>: Combination guidance button 6

1 (1) 2 (6) 3 (1) 4 (2) 5 (6) 6 (2) 7 (3) 8 (5) 9 (3) * (4) 0 (5) # (4)

<Figure 07.51>: Combination guidance button assignment table

1 (2) 2 (1) 3 (2) 4 (3) 5 (5) 6 (3) 7 (4) 8 (1) 9 (4) * (6) 0 (5) # (6)

<Figure 07.6>: Combination guidance button assignment table

1 (1) 2 (1) 3 (1) 4 (2) 5 (2) 6 (2) 7 (3) 8 (3) 9 (3) * (4) 0 (4) # (4)

<Figure 07.65>: Combination guidance button assignment table

Currency (1) Cancel (6) Termination (1) 1 (2) 2 (6) 3 (2) 4 (3) 5 (7) 6 (3) 7 (4) 8 (7) 9 (4) * (5) 0 () # (5)

<Figure 07.66>: Combination guidance button assignment table

1 (2) 2 (6) 3 (2) 4 (3) 5 (6) 6 (3) 7 (4) 8 (1) 9 (4) * (5) 0 (1) # (5)

<Figure 07.7>: Combination guidance button assignment table

1 (1) 2 (2) 3 (3) 4 (1) 5 (2) 6 (3) 7 (1) 8 (2) 9 (3) * (One) 0 (2) # (3)

<Figure 07.75>: Combination induction button assignment table

1 (1) 2 (2) 3 (3) 4 (4) 5 (5) 6 (6) 7 (1) 8 (2) 9 (3) * (4) 0 (5) # (6)

<Figure 07.76>: Combination guidance button assignment table

1 (1) 2 (2) 3 (3) 4 (1) 5 (2) 6 (3) 7 (4) 8 (5) 9 (6) * (4) 0 (5) # (6)

<Figure 07.8>: Figures in parentheses of the assignments from 07 to 07.76 plus any number including 1:

For example, Figure 07 plus 1

1 (2) 2 (5) 3 (2) 4 (3) 5 (6) 6 (3) 7 (4) 8 (5) 9 (4) * (7) 0 (6) # (7)

<Figure 06> Since the letters of each button are divided into 3 groups, only the first to third group letter input method is needed among the table contents of <Figure 01>. Therefore, after extracting only necessary parts, Let's see how to enter letters in

First, let's look at how to enter the letters assigned to button 6 in parallel with the twins without changing the mode in multi-tap mode, as shown in <Figure 08> below.

<Figure 08>: In the case of twin in parallel mode in multi-tap mode, divide the letters assigned to button 6 into three groups in the lower case mode and input the combination guidance button (see Fig. 07)

group One
Inside the button
Cumulative Characters
turn group
of mine
letter
order Push method Input characters The first group
letter One One Letter button button or
First combination induction button + letter button singlet

1. 6 OR
2. Possible to input 1 + 6 OR 3 + 6
In other words
1. With button 6 off,
2. Since Button 1 and Button 3 are combination induction buttons that let you enter the first letter (see Figure 07 below)
A. Hold down Button 1 and press Button 6,
B. Press button 6 while pressing button 3.
(At this time, method B recommends method A because the thumb of both hands is centered on the third row, causing interference between the thumbs of both hands, and since the mobile phone tilts to one side, the stability of the holding position is lowered.)
(I use 99% of the first method, but sometimes I use the second method, which I will explain later) m
(small letter) 2 2 Press the letter button twice rapidly (= double-click) or
2nd combination induction button + letter button

1. 66 OR
2. 4 + 6
In other words
1. Double-click Button 6
2. Because button 4 and button 6 are combination induction buttons that let you enter the second letter
Hold down Button 4 and press Button 6. (Pressing button 6 while holding down button 6 should not do so.)
n
(small letter) 3 3 Press the letter button 3 times continuously (= triple click) or
Third combination guiding button + letter button singlet

1. 666 OR
2. 7 + 6 OR 9 + 6
In other words
1. Quickly click button 6 three times in a row,
2. Since Button 7 and Button 9 are combination induction buttons that let you enter the third letter
A. Hold down Button 7 and press Button 6,
B. Press button 6 while pressing button 9.
(At this time, method B recommends method A because the thumb of both hands is centered on the third row and interference occurs between the thumbs of both hands and the cell is tilted to one side, o
(small letter) 4 4 Letter button Quickly press 4 times or
Fourth combination induction button + letter button

1. 6666 OR
2. 2 + 6 OR 8 + 6
In other words
1. Quickly click button 6 four times in a row,
(However, if a person who prefers the conventional multi-tap method inputs an alphabet, it may be inconvenient if the number of characters to be circulated is large. Therefore,
2. Since Button 2 and Button 8 are combination induction buttons that let you enter the fourth letter
A. Press and hold Button 2, press Button 6,
B. Press button 6 while pressing button 8. ? 5 5 Letter button Quickly press 5 times or
Fifth combination guiding button + letter button

1. 66666 OR
2. 5 + 6 OR 0 + 6
In other words,
1. Press button 6 quickly five times in a row,
(However, if a person who prefers the conventional multi-tap method inputs an alphabet, it may be inconvenient if the number of characters to be circulated is large. Therefore,
2. Because button 5 and button 0 are combination induction buttons that let you enter the fifth letter
A. Hold down Button 5 and press Button 6,
B. Press button 6 while holding down button 0.

6 6 Letter button quickly press 6 times or
Sixth Combination Induction Button + Text Button

1. 666666 OR
2. * + 6 OR # + 6
In other words
1. Quickly press button 6 six times,
(However, if a person who prefers the conventional multi-tap method inputs an alphabet, it may be inconvenient if the number of characters to be circulated is large. Therefore,
2. Since the button * and button # are combination induction buttons that let you enter the sixth letter
A. Press and hold button *, press button 6,
B. Press button 6 while pressing button #.
(At this time, method B recommends method A because the thumb of both hands is centered on the third row and interference occurs between the thumbs of both hands and the cell is tilted to one side,

The second group
letter 7 One Letter button
First combination induction button + character button long (for example, over 0.5 seconds)

1. 6 ~
2. 1 + 6 ~ OR 3 + 6 ~
In other words
1. Press and hold Button 6 (for example, 0.5 seconds or longer)
(In the conventional text mode, if you press a button for more than 1 second, you can confine it to only the number 2 method if it is confused because there are many mobile phones that function to input the number assigned to that button, or if there is a lot of operation mistakes.)
2. Since Button 1 and Button 3 are combination induction buttons that let you enter the first letter
A. Press and hold Button 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds or longer)
B. Press and hold button 6 (for example, 0.5 seconds or more) while pressing button 3.
(At this time, method B recommends method A because the thumb of both hands is centered on the third row, causing interference between the thumbs of both hands, and since the mobile phone tilts to one side, the stability of the holding position is lowered.)

It is much simpler than typing, but it is much simpler than changing the mode to upper case mode as in the conventional method, and then typing it in uppercase letters and changing it in several lowercase letters.
This is because the conventional method has a large number of errors and a large number of mode change errors. The same goes for the following.

(In the following table, pressing for 0.5 seconds or longer is an example of long depression.) M
(capital letter) 8 2 2nd combination induction button + letter button battle

4 + 6 ~
In other words
Since button 4 and button 6 are combination induction buttons for inputting the second letter
Press and hold Button 4 for more than 0.5 seconds while holding Button 4, (Pressing Button 6 for more than 0.5 seconds while Button 6 is being held is not possible.) N
(capital letter) 9 3 Third Combination Induction Button + Character Button

7 + 6 ~ OR 9 + 6 ~
In other words
Since button 7 and button 9 are combination induction buttons for inputting the third letter
A. Press and hold Button 7 for more than 0.5 seconds,
B. Press and hold button 9 for more than 0.5 second.
(At this time, method B recommends method A because the thumb of both hands is centered on the third row and interference occurs between the thumbs of both hands and the cell is tilted to one side,
O
(capital letter) 10 4 Fourth Combination Judgment Button + Character Button

2 + 6 ~ OR 8 + 6 ~
In other words
Since button 2 and button 8 are combination induction buttons for inputting the fourth letter
A. Press and hold Button 2 for more than 0.5 seconds,
B. Press and hold Button 8 for more than 0.5 seconds.

11 5 Fifth Combination Judgment Button + Character Button

5 + 6 ~ OR 0 + 6 ~
In other words,
Since button 5 and button 0 are combination induction buttons for inputting the fifth letter
A. Press and hold Button 5 for more than 0.5 seconds,
B. Press and hold Button 0 for more than 0.5 seconds.

12 6 6th Combination Induction Button + Character Button

* + 6 ~ OR # + 6 ~
In other words
Because the button * and button # are combination directing buttons that let you enter the sixth letter
A. Press and hold Button 6 for more than 0.5 seconds,
B. Press button 6 for more than 0.5 second while pressing button #.
(At this time, method B recommends method A because the thumb of both hands is centered on the third row and interference occurs between the thumbs of both hands and the cell is tilted to one side,

Group 3
letter 13 One First combination induction button Double click + letter button singlet Blank 14 2 2nd combination induction button double click + letter button singlet Blank 15 3 3rd combination guidance button double click + letter button singlet Blank 16 4 Fourth Combination Judgment Button Double Click + Text Button Single

2 Double +6 OR 8 Double +6
In other words
Since button 2 and button 8 are combination induction buttons for inputting the fourth letter
A. After double-clicking Button 2, press and hold Button 6 while holding your finger away from Button 2,
B. After double-clicking button 8, press button 6 while holding the finger away from button 8.

17 5 5th Combination Judgment Button Double-click + Text Button Single

5 Double +6 OR 0 Double +6
In other words,
Since button 5 and button 0 are combination induction buttons for inputting the fifth letter
A. After double-clicking button 5, do not remove your finger from button 5, press button 6,
B. After double-clicking button 0, press the button 6 while holding the finger away from button 0.

18 6 6th Combination Judgment Button Double-click + Font Button Single

* Double +6 OR # Double +6
In other words
Because the button * and button # are combination directing buttons that let you enter the sixth letter
A. After double-clicking the button *, do not remove your finger from the button *, press button 6 while holding it down,
B. After double-clicking the button #, press the button 6 while holding the finger away from the button #.
(At this time, method B recommends method A because the thumb of both hands is centered on the third row and interference occurs between the thumbs of both hands and the cell is tilted to one side,

(In the state where the twins are not yet mastered, the combination induction button is selected while thinking about the order of the letters to be input to the buttons in the order of the buttons. In the mastered state, .

In the case of twinning in the multi-tap mode, the characters assigned to the button 9 in the lower case mode are divided into three groups, and the method of inputting the combination induction button in advance of the letter button is shown in the table of FIG.

And

In the case of twinning in twin mode in multi-tap mode, the method of dividing the letters assigned to button # in lower case mode into three groups and inputting the combination induction button in advance of the letter button is almost the same as the table of FIG. The only difference is that you type `=`, the first letter of group 1.

In other words, the following methods 1 and 2 are not possible. No method 1 is possible. Only method 2 is possible.

1. # (impossible) OR

2. Input by 1 + # OR 3 + #

In other words

1. Make button # out of order (impossible)

2. Since Button 1 and Button 3 are combination induction buttons that let you enter the first letter

A. Press and hold button 1, press button #

B. Press and hold button 3 and press button #.

(In this case, method B recommends method A because the thumb of both hands is centered on three rows, causing interference between the thumbs of both hands, and the mobile phone tilts to one side and the stability of the holding position is lowered.)

(SPACE)가 이미 배정되어 있어서 단타로는 SPACE가 입력되기 때문에 2번 방법인 조합방식으로만 입력 가능하다. (단타로 글자입력하는 기능 외의 기능(스페이스)이 이미 배정되어 있어도 글자를 추가로 배정 할 수 있게 되는 것이다. 이것이 혼동될 것 같으면 1번째 글자는 스페이스라고 간주하고, 추가되는 글자는 2번째 순번부터 자리를 채우는 것으로 간주해도 된다.) Because Button # already has

(SPACE) is already assigned, so SPACE is inputted, so it is possible to input only the combination method of the second method. (Even if the function (space) other than the function of inputting a single character is already assigned, it is possible to assign additional characters. If this is confusing, the first character is regarded as a space, It may be considered to fill the seat.)

So, in the last sentence that explains how to input `m`, the first letter of group 1 of button 6 in Figure 08, I use 99% of method 1 (but sometimes I use method 2). I will. "

(대문자모드,소문자모드 변경기능)이미 배정되어 있어서 단타로는 대문자, 소문자 모드가 변경되기 때문에 버튼*의 1번째 글자도 위의 2번 방법인 조합방식으로만 입력가능하다.In the same way, the button *

(Upper case mode, lower case mode change function) Since the upper case and lower case modes are changed because it is already assigned, the first character of the button * can be inputted only by the combination method of the above 2 method.

As mentioned later, the same button problem has been solved by using the right button or the space button in the past, but it can be solved by the above-described combination method. T9 method or 2- TOUCH method , the input method is different when the first step of each button is input by the combination method without inputting the first letter of each button in the combination of the multi-tap method and the twin. I will explain this later.

now

Let's split the letters of each button in <Figure 06> into two groups

How to enter each letter

It is the same method as the first and second group letter input method of <Fig. 08>. I will not explain it separately.

And in <Figure 06>

In the 6th letter of the first group of buttons 1

In the 6th letter of group 1 of button 2

In the 6th letter of 1 group of letters in button 3

가 배정되어 있는데In the 6th letter of the first group of letters in button 5

Is assigned

These are the functions that are present on the computer keyboard buttons but are added to the phone keypad to eliminate the inconveniences. It seems to be essential functions in the era when mobile phones are also available.

You can also add function buttons like HOME, END, PAGE UP, PAGE DOWN, and ESC if you like.

In order to continuously perform functions such as CLR, INS, DEL, ENTER, etc., the button 1 or 2, or the button 3 or the button 5 is continuously pressed in a state in which the combination induction button for inputting the sixth letter is pressed .

If you want to delete multiple letters by using DEL function, DEL function is the 6th letter of button 3, so press the button * (or button #) which is the combination induction button to input the sixth letter The button 3 with DEL assigned thereto is pressed successively with the right hand as many times as desired

기능은 종래 휴대폰에도 존재하나 보통 4*3(4행3열)의 키패드 바로 위, 즉, 4*3(4행3열)의 키패드에서 약간 벗어난 위치에 존재하므로, 동선이 커서, 이제는 2타로 조작한다고 해도 동선이 적은 쌍둥이 방식을 선호하는 사람을 위하여 배정하였다.

Function is present in the conventional mobile phone, but exists in a position slightly out of the keypad of 4 * 3 (4 rows and 3 columns) right above the keypad of 4 * 3 (4 rows and 3 columns), so the copper wire is now large, Even if they manipulated, they were assigned to those who prefer twins with less movement.

Although this would not be a great benefit in English,

In Hangul, you do not erase the whole Hangul characters, but you want to erase only the wrong phonemes

Erase one phoneme

Cancels a function that was realized immediately before, including a stroke add-on function or a double-

If you use it as a function, you can say that it has a big gain (you can use it like a CONTROL + Z shortcut on your PC, or you can add CONTROL + Z as a new character).

For example,

When you operate the Global button to input ㅙ

. ㅡ ㅣ. We have to operate in order

. When you enter ㅡ ㅣ ㅣ

기능을 한글자 전체를 지우지 않고, 실수로 잘 못 입력한 음소까지만 지우는 기능으로 발휘하여(6번째 글자를 입력하게하는 조합유도버튼을 누르고 있는 상태에서

이 배정된 버튼5을 누른다) 잘못 입력한 마지막 ㅣ 만 지우고 난 후에 . ㅣ 순으로 더 입력하면 되는 것이다.

The function can be used to erase only the phonemes that have not been entered by mistake, without erasing the whole character (by pressing the combination induction button to input the sixth character

Press the assigned button 5) After erasing only the last one that was entered incorrectly. You can input more in order.

If you assign only `emoji 'to emotions in a specific group (eg, the third group), you can assign` emoji' to specific groups (eg, group 3) You can also assign changes.

(In this state, you do not need to mark the letters of other groups (eg, the fourth group).

However,

Can you assign so many letters to the phone buttons like <Figure 05> or <Figure 06>?

There may be a question, but let's see that it is possible. And even if it is possible, we'll show you how to get more margins for the button in Figure 15 ~ 16.3.

First, let's feel that we can assign a lot of letters to the buttons of the mobile phone. `<Figure 14>: LG Electronics 706ie (wine phone) for export to Japan` The picture and the description can be felt most certainly.

<Figure 09>: Samsung SPH-V9150 4 rows (1,4,7, *) Slide type

The button has a border, so the button space is small.

Still, there are three lines in the vertical, three lines in the vertical, four lines in the vertical, and four lines in the horizontal line. Suffice it to say, Since there is more space to be marked, a total of 5 ~ 6 lines can be written horizontally.

The `@ 'pattern of button # makes it clearer. Therefore, simple patterns or emoticons can be expressed sufficiently.

However, it is recommended that the buttons have no borders, as shown in Figures 10 to 14, so that the button space is slightly larger.

<Figure 10>: Samsung SCH-B820 4 rows (1, 4, 7, *) Slide type

(There is no border on the button, so the button space is big)

However, since the button space is so large that the letters are displayed in a larger size, the number of characters that can be assigned to each button is different from that of Fig.

<Figure 11>: LG Electronics sh-650 5 lines (call button, 1,4,7, *) Slide type

The slide type

Usually, as shown in Figure 9 ~ 10,

<Figure 11> shows 5 rows of slides, and even if the button spacing is narrower than the 4th row slide phone, there are enough 3 vertical lines for the buttons and 4 lines are possible. If you slide more, you can also make the vertical length of the button bigger, so you can add more characters or make it bigger.

There is a phrase of "add stroke" of button * and a phrase of "double consonant" of button #. In actual product, it is possible to see more clearly letters, and since we can write 3 letters of the letters side by side, Can be written.

If the number is marked slightly smaller or moves a little to the left, there will be more space to display one or two lines horizontally, so a total of 7 to 8 lines can be displayed horizontally.

It is obvious that the four-row slide phone shown in Fig. 10 can be laid out more freely.

As shown in Figures 11, 12, and 13, LGE's Hangul phonemes are printed on the keyboard considerably larger than the English alphabet. However, as other manufacturers, including Samsung, reduce the size of the Hangul phonemes to the size of the English alphabet, the space becomes larger.

<Figure 12>: LG Electronics SV-300 (wine phone) folding type

See Figures 14, 13, and 11 for explanation.

<Figure 13>: Enlarging the keypad of `LG-SV-300 (wine phone) folder type`

Figure 12 is an enlarged view of the keypad.

See Figures 11 and 14 for an explanation.

<Figure 14>: LG Electronics 706ie (wine phone) Japan export clamshell type

Figure 14 shows the LG-SV-300 (wine phone) folder type of Figure 12 shown in Figure 12 for export to Japan.

There are 2 lines of Japanese and Chinese characters displayed on the button 0, and you can recognize them clearly. There is space for inputting more than 2 lines vertically. There is space for 1 line even further on the side.

Therefore, the total length of 4 lines and 4 lines of letters can be written.

If you put a small number on the bigger number or move it to the left a little, you will be able to write 5 ~ 6 lines horizontally because there is more space for 1 ~ 2 lines.

It is easy to recognize the Chinese characters, but it is obvious that you can write enough simple patterns or picture emoticons.

In Korea and Japan, the wine phone has a large button size, so the letters are also printed on a large scale. In Korea, the wine phone has been hit by the elderly people because they can see the letters on the keyboard and LCD,

It is now possible to assign a large number of letters to a large button to input characters quickly, and since the button size is appropriate, it is easier to operate the button at a high speed, so it is likely to be reborn as a high-speed character phone .

In this regard, it seems to be more advantageous to provide convenience to the user by realizing twinning of folder type rather than slide type.

Although we have seen that we can assign many letters to the buttons of the mobile phone by looking at <Figure 09 ~ 14>

For those who want to assign a small number of special characters to the keypad so that there are lots of margins on the buttons, or for those who want to add more letters, here's one way.

<Figure 15> is a photograph of a mobile phone display screen that Samsung Electronics exports to Japan. (The status of the keypad is almost the same as that of <Figure 14>.)

Because there are many Japanese residents in Japan, I seem to be able to enter the Hangul Hangul,

If you put Hangul on the keypad, it will hinder you from selling it to a Japanese person who does not use Hangul,

On the keypad,

In the Hangul input mode, a portion of the display screen is used, and the actual input is displayed by pressing the button on the keypad while viewing the Hangul phonemes on the display screen.

(Do not touch the display screen to input.)

Even if there are complicated Chinese characters in button * and button # in Fig. 15, it is enough to recognize, so it is possible to assign 4 emoticons per electronic button on the display screen.

In fact, in some countries, special characters are typed almost in this way.

just

In special character mode, you can see the phrase that you have typed on the display screen, and you can type in special characters (for example, some models of Samsung Electronics)

Currently, there are only certain types of special characters (eg, some models of LG Electronics) that display only the space below the display screen.

<Figure 16> shows a specific example of how to allocate the emoticon by allocating a part of the display screen mentioned above and input the emoticon of the display screen by pressing the button of the keypad. If you want to assign more than one special character, you do not have to specify the button number, but if you are a person who is thirsty for special characters, you will be able to use it even if you do not have a button number. Numbers can be written as in 16.3.

Samsung's Haptic 2 (SCH-W550 model), launched in the second half of 2008, is a full front touchscreen phone with no physical buttons and only an electronic virtual button that is a touchpad. 14.6>, in special character mode, there is no button number on the keypad. Of course, the twin can be applied to the mobile phone, which is a touch pad and a small keypad, so that it can be entered faster There is.

<Figure 14.5>: Haptic 2 (SCH-W550 model) Touch screen keypad in Hangul mode

<Figure 14.6>: Haptic 2 (SCH-W550 model) Touch screen keypad in special character mode

And to display a character placeholder for entering special characters that take a part of the display screen as shown in Figures 16.1 to 16.3

It would be better if you could let the user choose to be able to do it every time, or even make it invisible.

(The default setting is to make the user who uses a lot of special characters visible,

It would be better to allow users with fewer special characters to set the default to not show.)

This is because some people do not like to display a lettering table for entering special characters on a part of the display screen.

One way to do that,

Conventionally, in the character input mode,

A part of the display screen has a character set for entering special characters.

What if I run it with a toggle key that makes it visible and invisible.

(As in the conventional character input mode, volume adjustment in addition to the button and nothing happens, the call button, button 2, the Internet Connection button, it also camera button can be toggled such a button, key, or when the touch pad more than the physical buttons way As a way of thinking, a new button (a physical button or a touch pad button) may be added so that a portion of the display screen can be used as a dedicated toggle key to make the character assignment table for entering special characters appear or disappear .

The toggle key means that the current state is not clearly visible and always causes a lot of typing mistakes to the user. In this case, the assignment table is displayed on the screen, and the current state is clearly displayed. )

(Or, as in the example mentioned above,

Just as the CLR, INS, DEL, and ENTER functions are assigned to the sixth letter of the different buttons,

The function of whether to show or not can be assigned as a letter.

Or a combination induction button.)

And,

In a state in which a part of the display screen shows a character placement table for inputting special characters,

You can also create multiple grouping page groups.

(Of course, it is recommended to place the most frequently used special characters close to the first page as in the past, and not just to make multiple special page pages, It may be a letter representing a language.)

It is as if there are several special character group pages in the conventional special character mode.

That way, in fact, the special character mode becomes almost unnecessary.

All special character group pages are displayed even in normal text mode including Hangul mode, English upper case mode, English lower case mode, Hiragana mode, and Katakana mode, and input is possible without changing the character mode.

In this situation, how do you change each special character group page?

Also at this time,

In the conventional text input mode, if there is no response, operate the volume control button as a page change button.

(In addition to the conventional character input mode, volume control, the button and nothing happens button, call button, an Internet connection button, it also camera button can also be used for such a button, the page change button, or a better way when the touch pad rather than physical buttons A new button (a physical button or a touch pad button) may be added to use a portion of the display screen as a dedicated button for changing a special character group page.

Pressing the volume up button will move to the upper page, and pressing the volume down button will change the page to the lower page.

Alternatively, if any button is pressed while the direction button is held down, the page can be changed.

E.g

If you press button 1 while holding up button,

Pressing the button 1 while holding down the down button changes the page to the lower page.

(Or, as in the example mentioned above,

Just as the CLR, INS, DEL, and ENTER functions are assigned to the sixth letter of the different buttons,

The function of whether to show or not can be assigned as a letter.

Or a combination induction button.

And if you have a touchpad, you can create a page change button on the touchpad.)

And every page. The input method may be the same or different.

For example, whatever the page you are currently viewing, all the special characters displayed on the display screen can be entered using the third group letter input method,

The first page is input by the third group character input method,

The second page is input by the fourth group character input method,

The third page can be input by the fifth group character input method.

(It would be better to have the same input method for each page.

And, in the normal character mode including the Hangul mode, English upper case mode, English lower case mode, Hiragana mode, and Katakana mode, the `direction button button` moves the cursor, so the page can not be changed with the `direction button button. .)

In addition, the above-

Display screen  Letting some of the letters appear in the space for entering special characters, Invisible Of the toggle key  Function and each special character group page change function can be combined by a single button.

For example, conventionally, In text entry mode  Press the unanswered call button once Display screen  Some of the special character groups are used to make the character assignment table appear, which is one page of each special character group page. When the call button is pressed once again, the page continues to be changed to two of the special character group pages . The last page Display screen  If you do not have a character set for entering some special characters The display screen  It is recommended that the screen is not a special character table like the screen.

Anyway, you can assign a special character by allocating a part of the display screen so that special characters can be directly input in the normal character mode without changing the character mode from the normal character mode to the special character mode.

In the past,

When changing from the normal character mode to the special character mode, it is necessary to press the character mode change button several times,

There are many cases where it is troublesome to press the character mode change button many times even when returning from the special character mode to the normal character mode again, and the process is troublesome even when trying to input special characters.

Conventionally,

Since only one special character is associated with each button, a special character is input using a special character assignment table of a very large number of pages. Therefore, it is troublesome to change a number of pages in order to display a desired special character on a display screen.

Now, since several special characters per button may correspond to each other as shown in <Figure 16>, it is possible to display a large number of special characters with a small number of special character pages, and to display desired special characters on the display screen, The page may be changed.

(After that, there are several kinds of combination induction buttons, so you can easily input the special characters you want.)

However, if you feel that the number of special characters is insufficient (even though it is unlikely to be) by showing a character assignment table for entering special characters on a part of the display screen, a thin tape measure like a cell phone case or a cellular phone , Or on a separate sheet of paper. Or you could use a hologram.

As with any text system, you can further expand the group by adding more letters to the display screen and other parts, as in the English text.

In non-English speaking countries,

In the past, alphabets were basically written on buttons,

Now, in order to make room for assigning a lot of special characters to a button, it is possible to assign an English alphabet to the display screen as shown in <Fig.

However, in the past, it was very difficult to input three or four small numbers of characters per button. However, since twins have too many letters that can be easily input, It will make you worry about whether you will be able to.

And I think it would be nice if the user could change the special character assignment of the button so that the button would be reflected in the button, by allowing the button to display the button notation electronically rather than the paint containing the individual organic light emitting diodes. In non-English speaking countries, the letter mode of the national language does not require the English alphabet, so the English alphabet can not be displayed. Thus, additional special characters may be assigned to the place. In all countries, including English-speaking countries, there is almost no need for numbers in normal text mode, so no numbers are displayed, and special characters can be additionally assigned to the place of a conventional number. Even if you enter a number by pressing a long time, most users are already memorized, so there is no need to display it. Alternatively, a special character may be additionally assigned to the newly created free space by displaying a small number. (And if the buttons are marked electronically rather than paint containing individual organic light emitting diodes, even if you input the same language, you can also embed various types of character input methods with different basic character notation on the buttons. In such a situation, it is also possible to express various forms such as a form in which only Korean alphabet characters are additionally assigned to each character input method, an additional form is assigned to a punctuation character, and an additional form is assigned to a picture emoticon. See also 36.65.

Alternatively, you can use a display screen that is not an organic light-emitting diode, as shown in Figure 16.3 and its commentary.)

Instead of electronically marking the button including the organic light emitting diode button,

Even with the usual buttons that paint with buttons,

In non-English speaking countries

In the past, the English alphabet was assigned and printed in the standard enumeration order,

Now, even if you print only one or two English alphabets per button, it will not interfere with recognizing the order of the untranscribed phonemes, so you can print only one or two alphabets per button to maximize the space to display national language and special characters have.

If the third group input method is used only on the button, the fourth group character input method on the display screen and the fifth group character input method that is separately written on a note or the like are input.

As shown in <Figure 14.6>, if only one special character is assigned to each button on the display screen, it may be possible to do so. Since the thumb is thick, it is difficult to input exactly one of several special characters because it is assigned.

The keypad itself is the touchpad.

As shown in <Figure 14.5> or <Figure 14.6>, which was released in the second half of 2008,

Button-sized small keypad type

Even the touchpad,

It is very difficult to input the button itself without error, and there are many misunderstanding errors, and the touch sensitivity is worse than the actual physical button,

In Korea and in other countries, users have inconvenienced the inconvenience of the touch pad type (the haptic 2 on the Internet has seen a lot of haptic 2 developments compared to haptic 1, It is still difficult to input a character with a finger while looking at the touch pad keyboard of the hit 2. Because the touch feeling is not good compared with a physical button and a character input is performed without looking at the keypad, Of course, twinning is applied to mobile phones, which are touchpads and miniature keypads, which makes it possible to input letters faster and more easily than with conventional touch miniature keypads)

This is because a full-touch screen type mobile phone has appeared a long time, and the top plate is a touch screen, but only a character input is available that takes a conventional physical button type. Samsung's Soul phone (no SCH-W590 picture) and LG Electronics' disco phone (SH-650 in picture 11 above).

Also, even if only one special character is assigned to each button on the display screen, it will be a problem because it is smaller than the small keypad type touch button of the full touch screen which is conventionally large but troublesome.

Meanwhile,

Conventionally, only one character input mode change button has been set.

Usually, the button at the upper right of the button '*' or the function buttons is used as a button for changing the character input mode.

The character input mode has a plurality of character input modes including a native language mode, English lower case mode, English upper case mode, special character mode, and numeric mode,

The character mode change button is pressed to select and input any one of the character input modes.

In the following description,

The general character mode refers to a mode for inputting characters representing a common language such as a national language mode, an English lower case mode, or an English upper case mode except for the special character mode.

The selected normal character mode refers to a general character mode currently selected among the normal character modes. In most cases it will be in the native language mode.

When you enter characters, you will most commonly use the selected normal character mode and special character mode,

It is necessary to press the character mode change button several times to change from the selected general character mode to the special character mode,

A plurality of character mode change button presses are required to change from the special character mode to the general character mode selected,

There were inconveniences to press the change mode button several times to and from the special character mode and the selected general character mode.

So, now,

Special character mode and selected general character mode It is proposed to newly create a special character mode change button to come and go only two character modes.

So, by pressing the dedicated text mode change button, you will be able to go to the special character mode and the selected normal text mode with a single hit.

Special character mode and selected general character mode To add a special character mode change button to come and go only two character modes

It is possible to add actual physical buttons to the conventional number of buttons,

A call button, a volume control button, an internet connection button, a camera button, or the like, which is not responded to in the conventional character mode, that is, the character mode has not yet assigned a special function, can be used as a dedicated character mode change button.

The special character mode, which can be selected by the dedicated character mode change button to come and go only in the two character modes of the selected general character mode and special character mode,

May be in the form of a special character mode in a conventional general special character mode or in a plurality of character modes (e.g., a national language mode, an English lower case mode, an English upper case mode, a special character mode, a numeric mode)

And may be a form different from the conventional general special character mode including a special character mode in which only special characters frequently used are collected.

anyway,

(In most cases, using a toggle key) as a function key, such as a call button, a volume control button, an Internet connection button, and a camera button, which are not responded to in the conventional character mode, Letters in the letter table that are shown by taking a part of

1. If it is considered to be seen in the selected normal character mode,

It can be said that the characters in the character table displayed by taking a part of the display screen are directly inputted in the selected normal character mode, and the function key (or toggle key) at this time is a function of whether or not such characters are displayed You can think of it as a function key (or a toggle key), or you can type those letters even if they are not shown.

That is, a part of the display screen is allocated The character table (= special character table) Not seen  Even if you do not have a part of the display screen Show  Can Character tables  Quot; can be entered on any one or more of the pages, Character tables  If you have not memorized them, To be seen  Function key (or not) Toggle key , Easy to say Cheat Sheet  To show Invisible  Function key) so that they can use a portion of the display screen To be seen  After that, you can type those letters while looking at them with your eyes.

2. If it is considered to be seen in special character mode,

It can be said that the characters in the character table that are displayed by taking a part of the display screen are inputted in the special character mode.

At this time  A special character (of the book)

Conventionally existing Special character mode  Alternatively,

Conventionally existing Special character mode  Other used in parallel It may be special character mode  have.

Special characters Mode and  Conventionally existing Special character mode  As for one difference,

Conventionally existing In special character mode  While only one special character is assigned to one button,

The In special character mode  It is a type in which several special characters are assigned to one button. As usual In text mode  It is the same as the format in which several normal characters are assigned to one button.

Therefore, In special character mode , A special character assigned to a specific sequence number of a specific button is assigned to that particular button At a certain order Continuous pressing Multi-tap method  Or conventional Shift button  It is also possible to input using twin method.

For example, In special character mode , Button 5  The third special character is Button 5  number 3 Continuous pressing Multi-tap method  Or conventional Shift button  It is also possible to input using twin method.

Function key when there may be other special character mode is used in combination with the special character mode, which conventionally generally present (or toggle) that is the character of only a store coming only a selected normal character mode and a special character 2 the character mode It may be regarded as a mode change button (or a function key or a toggle key).

When the characters shown in Table devote a portion of the display screen shows, the current character input mode is a typical character as a special character mode will work in most cases can not be entered, including the multi-tap method It is possible to input a special character in a character table, which is displayed in a twin manner including a character input method such as a conventional character input method or a group character input method or a group character input method, by showing a part of the display screen. This is because the character mode is different.

And,

Whether it's a touch pad button or an organic light-emitting diode pad button, Laser Pad  Buttons that do not have a letter on the button

The above

Part of the display screen Visible In the character table  The letters

remind Like number one  Selected generic In text mode Visible  Would Considered  If

remind Like number two  special In text mode Visible  Would Considered  In any case, including the case, anyways ,

I tried to show off a part of the display screen In the character table  For example, if you have a page like <Figure 05> or <Figure 16.5>, you might see pages with different pages. May continue to appear I have .

You can use a part of the display screen to display the character table (= special character table) Although not shown, characters on any one or more of the character tables that can be shown by taking a part of the display screen may be input.

<Figure 15>: Samsung Japan 920SC: When entering Hangul, a photo showing the keyboard on the display screen

<Figure 16>: Example of displaying special characters on the display screen

Even when the conventional button notation is maintained,

A portion of the display screen may be allocated, and new punctuation marks or other special characters or picture emoticons may be additionally assigned.

It is likely that this form will be the most acceptable form for conventional users.

(Since conventional punctuation marks are rarely indicated, it is recommended to assign punctuation marks from the punctuation marks per screen display button as shown in <Figure 16.1>.

In addition, when applying the notation of the conventional Hangul input method as it is, it is recommended to allocate the added Hangul complete form phoneme as shown in <Figure 16.2>.

<Figure 16.3> is an example of how to standardize on the display screen when standardization of Hangul input method is not uniform on the button.)

As described above, it is not necessary to use the special character mode as shown in FIGS. 16 to 16.2, and it is possible to input special characters in the normal character mode without changing the character mode in the normal character mode.

What is on the display screen will probably be entered in the way that the letters on the buttons are typed and other group letter input (eg second group letter input method).

Alternatively, the characters on the display screen can be input by a group letter input method such as a method of inputting the letters displayed on the button. When doing this, the characters on the display screen are assigned to the buttons in the order of the letters on the button, and they can be input by the same group letter input method, but they may be recognized as not being represented due to restriction of the button space It is.

(Anyway, that is, any one of the twin input methods including the first through fifth group input methods may be selected and input.)

<Fig. 16> shows only the first group (page) of the special character group (page). If you want to display another group (page), you can operate the volume control button. Even if you look at only one page, 36 special characters can be input without changing the mode.

If you feel rejection, you can not forget to use special character assignments or carry special character assignments. (Naturally, the newly assigned letter may be different from the letter group.)

<Figure 16.1> Assignment of punctuation marks to the display screen

<Figure 16.1> is the first page of the display screen,

<Figure 16> can be the second page of the display screen.

(Assuming that the emoticons shown in Figure 16 ~ 16.1 are duplicated, but not).

<Figure 16.2> Assignment of Korean-language phonemes to the display screen

The assignment of <Figure 16.2> arbitrarily displays Hangul phonemes not assigned to completion type in the conventional Hangul input method, so that the displayed Hangul phonemes are displayed differently according to the type of the conventional Hangul input method.

(In the case where the conventional character input method and twin are parallel,

The method of inputting the letters assigned to the actual buttons and the method of inputting some or all of the letters of the buttons on the display screen of <Figure 16.2> may be the same.

For example, Hangul phonemes and punctuation marks on the buttons on the actual buttons and buttons on the display screen can be input in the 1st group letter input method).

<Figure 16.2> is the first page of the display screen,

<Figure 16.1> is the second page of the display screen,

<Figure 16> can be the third page of the display screen.

(Assuming the emoticons shown in Figure 16 ~ 16.2 are duplicated, but not so).

<Figure 16.3> Assigning standard Hangul-type phonemes to the display screen

Since there is no standardization of Hangul input method due to disagreement with handset makers and communication companies,

Although the items indicated on the buttons may be marked differently for each manufacturer as in the conventional art,

New standard input method

It is possible to display the standard character assignment even on the display screen.

This level of standardization is possible at any time since no consultation is required.

Of course, it is recommended to use dual-mode or twin-only mode as input method.

In this case, since the conventional phoneme assignment indicated on the physical button is different from the standardized phoneme assignment indicated on the electronic button on the display screen,

Since the phonemes input to the phoneme are different from each other,

In principle, the method of inputting phonetic assignment of the display screen without changing the character input mode is not parallel to the conventional Hangul input method in which the physical button is input.

(In parallel, the first letter of each electronic button in the standard phoneme assignment on the display screen must also be entered as twins, and the twin (first group letter input method) is not parallel to the traditional Hangul input method indicated on the physical button Only the standard phoneme double-spacing twin (first group letter input method) of the display screen can be input.

(In Fig. 16.3 above, the assignment of Hangul to Pantech series (see Figure 23 ~ 26.7) and the basic phoneme array are the same. In this case, the assignment of Pantech series can be done in parallel.)

Set <Figure 16.3> as the first page of the display screen,

<Figure 16.2> is the second page of the display screen,

<Figure 16.1> is the third page of the display screen,

<Figure 16> can be the fourth page of the display screen.

(Assuming that the emoticons shown in Figure 16 ~ 16.3 are duplicated, but not so).

or

In addition to standard letter assignment as above,

Even without standardization,

By embedding multiple Hangul input methods in a mobile phone,

By setting several Hangul input mode,

When a specific Hangul input method mode is selected,

The phoneme assignment table is displayed on the display screen in a form in which the selected Hangul input method is improved ,

It is also possible to input in the conventional method of the selected Hangul input method and the method in which the twins are combined (or the twin only mode).

`Improved Hangul input method '

In the case of the improvement of the sky-line method, the form is expressed as shown in <Figure 22.8>

In the case of improving the Pantech system sky or curitel system, it means to display as shown in <Figure 26.8>

The form in which the LG EZ method is improved is expressed as shown in <Figure 32.8>

When the Motorola method is improved, the form is shown as <Figure 36.66>.

This way, even if the manufacturer purchases a different mobile phone, he or she can use his / her preferred character input method, but can also use the twin to input more quickly.

Of course, it is recommended that the input method be performed in parallel with the selected conventional method or in a twin-dedicated mode method.

(Although it is possible to change only the page by inputting the desired input method among the forms in which the plurality of Korean input methods displayed on several pages are improved without changing the character mode,

Again, at this time, as in the case of typing the standard letter assignments mentioned above,

Since the phoneme assignment of the conventional method indicated on the physical button is different from the phoneme assignment indicated on the electronic button of the display screen,

Since the phonemes input to the phoneme are different from each other,

In principle, the method of inputting phonetic assignment of the display screen without changing the character input mode is not parallel to the conventional Hangul input method in which the physical button is input.

(In parallel, the first letter of each electronic button in the phoneme assignment on the display screen must also be entered as a twin. This is also true when the twin (first group letter input method) is not parallel to the traditional Hangul input method indicated on the physical button , And the phoneme double degree twin of the display screen (the first group character input method).

<Figure 16.5>: English: Improvement: 2-line margin

The button has a smaller number of special characters or emoticons than the <Figure 05> or <Figure 06>

(More than that, you can display a part of the display screen.)

I do not think the explanation is necessary.

<Figure 16.6>: English: Improvement: No 2-line emoticons

Buttons are assigned additional special characters compared to <Figure 03>, and the form without emoticons

(More than that, you can display a part of the display screen.)

I do not think the explanation is necessary.

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

If you want to make sure that you can enter very quickly and conveniently even if you only input common English words consisting of only English alphabets, you can look at an example of entering the English word in the `Writing Practice` section.

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Now let's look at the Japanese input method.

<Figure 17>: Japanese Keyboard: Conventional

To understand the explanation of the Japanese input method below, you need to know a little about the Japanese character system.

Japanese expresses using kanji, hiragana and katakana.

Hiragana and Katakana are pronounced the same as upper and lower case letters in English, but have different letter shapes. Unlike English, Katagana uses only 10 percent of the combined Chinese characters and hiragana.

Hiragana and Katagana are described in the previous section.

Hiragana and Katakana each have about 50 letters (= 50 notes).

As shown in <Figure 17>, the small keypad contains the letters in the first column of the list of all the hiragana below

1 (a), 2 (ka), 3 (sa), 4 (ta), 5 (na), 6 (ha), 7 (ma), 8 Ra) and 0 (wa wa) are shown in the representative letter.

The following is a description of the conventional assignment of letters to hidden letters other than representative letters.

First, Hiragana's conventional allocation situation in Hiragana mode is as follows.

Button 1 has (a) (i) (u) (e) (o)

Button 2 has a (ka) ki (ku) ke (ke)

Button 3 will su (sa) (su) (se) so (so)

Button 4 has (ta), (ti), (tu), (te) and (to)

Button 5 has no (ni) (nu) (ne) (no)

Button 6 has (ha) to (hi) (hu) to (he)

Button 7 is also (ma) mi (mi) (mu) (me) (mo)

Button 8 has (ya) yu (yu) yo (yo)

The button 9 has (ra) (ri) (ru) (re) ro (ro)

For button 0, we designate wa as wo (ng)

And in Katakana mode, the traditional assignment situation is as follows (pronunciation is the same as above hiragana).

Button 1 has a

Button 2 has a keypad

Button 3 has a "

Button 4 has a touch-

Button 5 has a button

Button 6 contains the

Button 7 has a memo memo

Button 8 has

Button 9 has a

Buttons 0

After all, five Japanese characters per button are assigned. You only need to know this.

Thus, conventionally,

In the case of inputting in a multi-tap manner, each time the button is pressed, characters are inputted while circulating five characters.

If it is selected to activate the PREDICTION mode, a Japanese word or a Chinese character including the letters input so far is presented as a candidate word, and the user may take a form of selecting a desired word among the candidate words .

If you take an example with a Korean word

If you enter `academic`

School, academy, school, academy, academy, school, academy, academy, academy, academy, academy, academy, The candidate words such as school are presented as hiragana and kanji, and the user selects the desired word. In order to input Japanese, it is necessary to move the cursor several times to the desired word. Therefore, many bats are needed, It is very difficult and inconvenient to enter into many Chinese characters by typing in multi tap and convert them into Chinese characters, because there are many cases that are not in DB. I try to utilize the commercial phrase of, but it is still inconvenient.

Just as the Korean input does not need this PREDICTION function,

If twins are applied to Japanese characters (hiragana and katakana), such a function can be entered faster than conventional Hangul, and special characters can be input freely as English is improved by twins. (It seems that it is possible to improve Hanji conversion speed by adding the function to help Japanese character to Hanja conversion, including the ability to speed up area selection for Hanja conversion in additionally assigned characters.)

And on Button 1 . @ /: Is assigned, but in Japanese mode, it can not be input.

With the conventional button notation being maintained,

Newly assigned punctuation marks or other special characters or emoticons

It can be memorized, used for some display screens, or carried around with a list of assignments (of course, new assignments may have different groups of letters).

<Figure 18>: Japanese keyboard: Improvement: 2 lines per button

I will explain only the buttons 0 ~ 9 in Figure 18 above.

As mentioned before.

Special characters in color, including letters and punctuation

Black is originally written on a conventional keyboard,

The red color is the letters (eg punctuation marks, symbols) that the inventor added arbitrarily.

(The emoticon is also added by the inventor.)

It is assumed that the current letter mode is hiragana mode.

Each button in <Figure 18> has two lines of Japanese characters, punctuation marks, emoticons, and an English alphabet,

In the first line (= upper line), one hiragana, one punctuation mark and one emoticon are assigned.

Why,

Each hiragana hiragana and hiragana four hiragana are put together in each button and five hiragana are assigned.

A total of six hiragana characters and one punctuation mark are input as the first group character input method,

I want to input a total of 6 characters in the second group letter input method by combining five katagana characters and one emoticon character.

So in hiragana mode you can enter katagana without changing mode.

In this way, you can enter hiragana without changing mode even in katakana mode.

Buttons * and #

In the first line, there are five punctuation marks and one emoticon, which are input by the first group letter input method,

The second line contains four emoticons, which can be typed in the second group of letters.

Conventionally, it is inconvenient to enter only Hiragana in Hiragana mode, but twins can easily input Katagana, special characters, emoticons without changing mode. It is such a big gift.

It seems that some people prefer to apply the <Figure 07.65> as shown below. This is because the combination induction buttons for inputting the first to fifth letters are arranged in a straight line in the first and third columns, which makes it easy to memorize.

(But from a very fine point of view, there is a big drawback for people who type a lot of characters.)

<Figure 07.65>: Combination guidance button assignment table

Currency (1) Cancel (6) Termination (1) 1 (2) 2 (6) 3 (2) 4 (3) 5 (7) 6 (3) 7 (4) 8 (7) 9 (4) * (5) 0 () # (5)

The concept of using the call button and the end button as a combination induction button to input the first letter,

In fact, the combination-induction button that lets you enter the first letter is rarely used,

When you press the call button in the character input mode, the mobile phone has no response,

If there is even 1 letter on the character input screen, if you press the end button, a screen asking whether you want to stop the character input is displayed.

If you do not like the way you ask,

The function of the end button is different from the conventional method including the function of the conventional end button in the character mode and the function of the end button of the related art in the combination of pressing the call button and the end button at the same time It is possible to avoid the unpleasant situation. (And, even in the conventional text input mode, if you press and hold the end button, the power will be turned off.

In particular, `Figure 11 ': LG Electronics sh-650 5 line (call button, 1,4,7, *) Slide type` and below `Figure 18.5 LG Electronics L705ix Slide type` It seems to be easy to apply to mobile phones or most folding mobile phones. The folder type is like the one shown in <Figure 18.6> Sharp Electronics: W61SH folder type ', which has a row with button 1 and a row with call button like <Figure 07.65>.

<Figure 18.5>: LG L705ix 5 row slide cell phone

<Figure 18.6>: Sharp Electronics: W61SH Folding type

<Figure 19>: Japanese keyboard: Improvement: 3 lines per button

For each button in <Figure 19> above,

) 글자들이 배정되어 있다.The first line contains five hiragana and other (punctuation marks or

) Letters are assigned.

In this case,

6 characters (5 hiragana and 1 other) in the first line are input by the first group character input method,

Three letters in the second and third lines, and a total of six letters (= emoticon) can be input by the second group letter input method.

or

The six letters in the first line are input by the first group letter input method,

The three letters in the second line (= emoticon) are input by the second group letter input method,

The three letters in the third line (= emoticon) can be entered in the third group letter input method.

or

The six letters in the first line are input by the first group letter input method,

Remove two of the three emoticons in the second line and leave only one, enter five characters and one letter (= emoticon) in the Hiragana mode without changing the mode,

The three letters in the third line (= emoticon) can be entered in the third group letter input method. (At this time, the emoticons in the second and third lines of the button * and button # may be divided into the second group and the third group, or may be grouped into the second group or the third group.)

Of course, the conventional method and the twin can be performed in parallel without changing the character mode.

Hiragana is entered as a method of inputting a group of characters,

In the case of a combination of a multi-tap and a twin,

For those who prefer the conventional multi-tap method, the multi-tap method can be limited to inputting only the hiragana while circulating. Then, the punctuation marks and DEL, INS, ENTER, and CLR, the sixth letter, can only be entered as twins.

When an alphabetic character needs to be input once, the alphabetic character may be input in the third or fourth group character input method. This is applicable to all non-English speaking countries.

Also, it is recommended for the twin beginners that the combination induction buttons that allow the 2nd to 5th characters to be entered as straight lines as shown in Fig. 07.65 and Fig. 07.66.

<Figure 19.5>: Japanese keyboard: Improvement: No emoticons

Buttons are assigned special characters only and do not display emoticons

(More than that, you can display a part of the display screen.)

I do not think the explanation is necessary.

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Now, let's look at improvement of Hangul input method.

<Figure 20>: Chun Ji Jin: Conventional

With the conventional button notation being maintained,

You can add new complete phonemes, punctuation, or other special characters or emoticons

You can memorize, use a part of the display screen, or carry it with you. (Naturally, the newly assigned letter may be different from the letter group.)

<Figure 21>: Chun Ji-in: Conventional + Hidden

As mentioned above,

Special characters in color, including letters and punctuation

Black is originally written on a conventional keyboard,

Green is a character that was not typed on a conventional keyboard but could be input by pressing it several times in a multi-tap manner.

To introduce the conventional input method

The vowel is a combination of the ichijin (ㅣ ㅡ)

Consonants are entered in multi-tabs.

The input method of 40 Korean phonemes is shown in <Figure 21.5> below.

(Numbers in the input sequence mean that you press a numbered button.)

<Figure 21.5>

NO phoneme Input sequence Total Number of Bats One A 4 One 2 N 5 One 3 C 6 One 4 D 5.5 2 5 ㅁ 0.0 2 6 F 7 One 7 G 8 One 8 ㅇ 0 One 9 I 9 One 10 The 9.9 2 11 ㅋ 4.4 2 12 I 6.6 2 13 The 7.7 2 14 He 8.8 2 15 ㄲ 4,4,4 3 16 ㄸ 6,6,6 3 17 ㅃ 7,7,7 3 18 ㅆ 8,8,8 3 19 ㅉ 9,9,9 3 20 A 1,2 2 21 ㅑ 1,2,2 3 22 ㅓ 2,1 2 23 ㅕ 2,2,1 3 24 ㅗ 2,3 2 25 ㅛ 2,2,3 3 26 ㅜ 3.2 2 27 ㅠ 3,2,2 3 28 ㅡ 3 One 29 ㅣ One One 30 ㅢ 3.1 2 31 ㅐ 1,2,1 3 32 ㅔ 2,1,1 3 33 ㅒ 1,2,2,1 4 34 ㅖ 2,2,1,1 4 35 ㅚ 2,3,1 3 36 ㅘ 2,3,1,2 4 37 ㅙ 2,3,1,2,1 5 38 ㅟ 3,2,1 3 39 ㅝ 3,2,2,1 4 40 ㅞ 3,2,2,1,1 5 summary 1: 9
2: 12
3: 13
Four: four
5: 2
(Total of 40) Average per phoneme
steersman 2.45

<Figure 22>: Cheonjiyin: Improvement: 2 lines per button

As mentioned before.

Special characters in color, including letters and punctuation

Black is originally written on a conventional keyboard,

Green is a character that was not typed on a conventional keyboard but could be input by pressing it several times in a multi-

The red color is the letters that the inventor added arbitrarily (eg punctuation marks, symbols, and Hangul phonemes).

(The emoticon is also added by the inventor.)

Since English is required in English mode, it is not necessary to describe it in the Hangul input method. However, in most conventional devices that do not adopt buttons such as organic light emitting diodes, they are expressed with Hangul because they should be indicated on the button anyway.

However, when an alphabetic character is required to be input once, the alphabetic character may be defined as an extra group including the third or fourth group, and may be input by the group character input method.

Each button in <Figure 22> has two lines of letters

The first line is mainly allocated to 4 Korean phonemes,

The second line is usually assigned four punctuation marks and emoticons.

There are a total of eight, so you can not bind more than six to one group.

1 &lt; th &gt; line character is input by the first group character input method,

The second line should be entered in the second group letter input method.

or

Six of the first four letters and two of the second letters are input in the first group letter input method,

If the second group of letters is not bound to the first group, the second group can be input by the letter input method.

In any method, Hangul phonemes are input by first group letter input method,

The following restrictions may be added for those who prefer the conventional method.

In the input of the vowel, it is necessary to input only letters other than midi (ㅣ, ㅡ) in the multi tap and enter only twins (for example, when pressing button 2 in <Figure 22> , 'ㅢ `should not be input. Combination of <Figure 07> Judgment button Based on the table,` ㅢ `, the second letter of button 2, is a combination of buttons 4 or 6 Must be entered as 4 + 2 or 6 + 2 only).

In the case of consonant input, red letters can not be input by multi tap, but only twins can be input. (For example, when button 4 of <Figure 22> is pressed several times, only `ㅋ ㄲ` Should not be displayed. `ㅑ` should only be entered as 8 + 4 or 2 + 4 using button 8 or button 2, which is a combination guideline that allows you to enter the fourth character)

In this way, it is possible to input the same as the conventional method, or to input as twins without changing the character mode, so that all 40 Korean phonemes can be input as one or two. (Or can be entered in twin-only mode).

40 Korean phonemes

1. 14 basic consonants: ㄱ, ㄴ, ㄷ,,, ㅁ,,, ㅅ, ㅈ, ㅊ, ㅋ, ㅌ, ㅎ, ㅎ

2. Five consonants: ㄲ, ㄸ, ㅃ, ㅆ, ㅉ

3. 10 basic vowels: a, ㅑ, ㅓ, ㅕ, ㅗ, ㅛ, ㅜ, ㅠ, ㅡ, ㅣ

4. 11 voices: ㅐ, ㅒ, ㅔ, ㅖ, ㅚ, ㅘ, ㅙ, ㅟ, ㅝ, ㅞ, ㅢ

(On the computer keyboard, ㅚ, ㅘ, ㅙ,., ㅝ, ㅞ, ㅢ are not assigned to completion type.

If you apply twin, you will be able to enter the concept of one beat even with 2 tiny keys on the small keypad. And if you want faster speed, you can assign twin consonants such as ㄳ ㄵ ㄶ ㄶ ㄺ ㄻ ㄼ ㄽ ㄾ ㄿ ㄿ, which is used only as a consonant, to the completion type and enter it as twin. This is also applicable to other Hangul input methods except for the Chunjiin method.)

And special characters including punctuation marks and emoticons can be easily entered without changing the character mode.

And even those who are uncomfortable in assigning additional punctuation marks or emoticons are already memorizing the assignment of the green letter, so we can memorize the red lettering more and memorize the red letters so that we can use all the 40 Korean phonemes as 1 or 2 .

As a result, if you memorize only the phonemes that are added to the conventional cell phone, you can easily enter them in parallel with the twins. This applies to both the EZ-based system, SKY, Curitel, and Motorola.

Because the red lettering has a certain degree of regularity, if it is Korean, it can memorize as much as two minutes as the Hangul assignment of the first line of each button in <Figure 22>.

Since button 1 is assigned an additional button, button 4 and button 7 are assigned to button 4 and button 7, respectively,

Since button 3 is assigned additional button, button 3 is assigned to button 3 and button 9 is assigned to button 3,

Since Button 1 has been assigned to ㅣ and Button 3 has been assigned from the past, a combination of two buttons has been additionally assigned to Button 2,

The button * has been additionally assigned to ㅘ and its stroke additional characters ㅘ,,

Button # has been assigned additional characters ㅝ ㅟ and its stroke additional characters,

Button 5 has the same pronunciations,

Button 8 is assigned an additional letter, ㅒ,

It is easy to memorize when you think that button 0 is added additional letter ㅖ of stroke.

Also, if it is unfavorable to assign different vowels to buttons 1, 2, and 3 assigned to a heavenly person (ㅣ, ㅡ) You can do this by replacing the emoticons with inversions, or by deleting the inverted emoji.

(Also, if you are only familiar with the input method, you may be horribly embarrassed by assigning phonemes to button * and button #

It should be recalled that the LG EZ system, the Pantech system Sky or the Curitel system, and the Motorola system have conventionally been conventionally used for assigning a phoneme to a button * or a button, or a Korean phoneme button such as a double consonant button or a stroke addition button. Or you can move the added Hangul phoneme of button * or button # to button 4 ~ 0.)

<Figure 22.3>

In Hangul input methods,

In the past,

4 or more letters per button,

By assigning three letters per button, you can combine or modify basic phonemes to enter the rest of the assigned phonemes.

It is almost the same with many batting,

In particular, in the case of vowels, it was not meaningful to allocate all 21 phonemes as completion type,

After twins have been developed, all 21 vowels will be assigned to completion, and you will be able to enter them within two digits.

<Figure 22.4>: Heavenly Man: Improvement: 3 lines per button

I will explain the above table.

Each button has 12 letters assigned to it.

You can group them into 6 groups and divide them into 1 group and 2 groups.

The first line is input by the first group letter input method,

The second line is input by the second group character input method,

The third line may be input by the third group character input method.

See Figure 21 for other details.

<Figure 22.5>: Heavenly Man: Improvement: 2 lines per button margin

Buttons contain a small number of complete phonemes, special characters, or emoticons

(More than that, you can display a part of the display screen.)

I do not think the explanation is necessary.

<Figure 22.6>: Cheonjiyin: Improvement: No 2-line emoticons per button

Buttons are assigned full phonemes and special characters, but not emoticons

(More than that, you can display a part of the display screen.)

I do not think the explanation is necessary.

<Figure 22.7>: Cheonjiyin: Improvement: Addition of Korean-only complete phoneme

If you want to input in the same way as the conventional method while the twins are in parallel, the additional assigned red phoneme can be inputted by the multi-tap method. No, you can limit it to only twins.)

I do not think I need explanation.

<Figure 22.8> All Hangul phoneme-based type assignment on the display screen

If there is a rejection of the Korean phoneme assignment pattern of <Figure 22.7> on the button,

Conventionally, the marking on the button remains unchanged,

As shown in <Figure 16.2> and <Figure 22.8>, all Hangul phonemes are additionally assigned to the display screen,

In the conventional character input mode, the conventional method and the twin may be input in parallel, or may be input in the twin-exclusive mode.

(The assignments in Figure 16.2 are arbitrary representations of phonemes that are not assigned to the completion type in the conventional character input method, so they are displayed differently according to the type of the conventional character input method.)

<Figure 23>: Pantech series: Sky Curitel: Conventional

With the conventional button notation being maintained,

You can add new complete phonemes, punctuation, or other special characters or emoticons

It can be memorized, used for some display screens, or carried around with a list of assignments (of course, new assignments may have different groups of letters).

<Figure 24>: Pantech Series: Sky Curitel: Conventional + Hidden

To introduce the conventional input method

In the vowel input,

The short vowel sound "ㅑㅓㅕ ㅑㅓㅕ ㅗㅛ ㅜ ㅠ ㅡ ㅣ"

Diphthongs are entered as a combination of short vowels.

The consonants are input by the multi-tap method.

The input method of 40 Korean phonemes is shown in <Figure 24.5> below.

<Figure 24.5>

NO phoneme Pantech:
Sky, Curitel
Way Total Number of Bats One A One One 2 N 5 One 3 C 4 One 4 D 5.5 2 5 ㅁ 7 One 6 F 8 One 7 G 7.7 2 8 ㅇ 0 One 9 I * One 10 The *, * 2 11 ㅋ 1,1 2 12 I 4.4 2 13 The 8.8 2 14 He 0.0 2 15 ㄲ 1,1,1 3 16 ㄸ 4,4,4 3 17 ㅃ 8,8,8 3 18 ㅆ 7,7,7 3 19 ㅉ *, *, * 3 20 A 3 One 21 ㅑ 3.3 2 22 ㅓ 6 One 23 ㅕ 6.6 2 24 ㅗ 9 One 25 ㅛ 9.9 2 26 ㅜ # One 27 ㅠ #, # 2 28 ㅡ 2.2 2 29 ㅣ 2 One 30 ㅢ 2,2,2 3 31 ㅐ 3.2 2 32 ㅔ 6.2 2 33 ㅒ 3,3,2 3 34 ㅖ 6,6,2 3 35 ㅚ 9,2 2 36 ㅘ 9.3 2 37 ㅙ 9,3,2 3 38 ㅟ #,2 2 39 ㅝ #, 6 2 40 ㅞ #, 6.2 3 summary 1 ride: 12
2: 18
3: 10
4: 0
5: 0
(Total of 40) Average per phoneme
steersman 1.95

<Figure 25>: Pantech series: Sky Curitel: Improvement: 2 lines per button

It is easier to apply twins than heaven.

For a description of the above table, please refer to the description of the input method.

Anyway, the basic concept is the same as the improvement of the sky and the traditional method of Sky and Curitel,

You can input 40 Hangul phonemes as 1 or 2, and special characters including punctuation marks and emoticons can be easily input without changing the character mode.

(Or can be entered in twin-only mode).

<Figure 26>: Pantech series: Sky Curitel: Improvement: 3 lines per button

Please refer to the description of the input method of the skypeed.

<Figure 26.5>: Pantech series: Sky Curitel: Improvement: 2 lines per button margin

Buttons contain a small number of complete phonemes, special characters, or emoticons

(More than that, you can display a part of the display screen.)

I do not think the explanation is necessary.

<Figure 26.6>: Pantech series: Sky Curitel: Improvement: No two-line emoticons per button

Buttons are assigned full phonemes and special characters, but not emoticons

(More than that, you can display a part of the display screen.)

I do not think the explanation is necessary.

<Figure 26.7>: Pantech series: Sky Curitel: Improvement: Korean-only complete phoneme assignment

If you want to input in the same way as the conventional method while the twins are in parallel, the additional assigned red phoneme can be inputted by the multi-tap method. No, you can limit it to only twins.)

I do not think the explanation is necessary.

<Figure 26.8> All Hangul phonemes based on the Pantech system are assigned to the display screen

If there is a rejection of the Hangul phoneme assignment pattern of <Figure 26.7> on the button,

Conventionally, the marking on the button remains unchanged,

As shown in <Fig. 16.2> or <Fig. 26.8>, all Hangul phonemes are additionally assigned to the display screen,

In the conventional character input mode, the conventional method and the twin may be input in parallel, or may be input in the twin-exclusive mode.

(The assignments in Figure 16.2 are arbitrary representations of phonemes that are not assigned to the completion type in the conventional character input method, so they are displayed differently according to the type of the conventional character input method.)

<Figure 27>: LG EZ: Conventional

With the conventional button notation being maintained,

You can add new complete phonemes, punctuation, or other special characters or emoticons

It can be memorized, used for some display screens, or carried around with a list of assignments (of course, new assignments may have different groups of letters).

<Figure 28>: LG EZ: Conventional + Hidden

To introduce the conventional input method

The buttons for adding strokes are buttons *

A button functioning as a pair of consonants is a button #

In the vowel input,

The input is input by a multi tap method using a single or double push.

E.g

Button 3,

Press button 3 twice to enter.

However,

After you open a box, press the Add stroke (button *) to enter it

After adding a stroke, click Add stroke (button *) to enter

After adding a stroke, click Add stroke (button *) to enter

After typing ㅜ, click on Add stroke (button *) and input

Enter other combinations of voices as a combination of ㅑㅓㅕㅑㅓㅕ ㅗㅛ ㅠ ㅠ ㅡ ㅣ.

The consonant input method

The basic consonant, ㄱ ㄴ ㄷ ㅁ ㅇ ㅇ,

The remaining consonants are added to the basic consonants or converted into a pair of consonants.

The buttons for adding strokes are buttons *

A button functioning as a pair of consonants is a button #

E.g

If you want to enter ㅆ

Press button 7 to open the menu, then press a pair of consonants (button #),

If you want to type

Press button 7 to open the menu, press Add stroke (button *),

If you want to enter ㅉ

Press button 7 to open the menu, then click Add stroke (button *) to open it,

In this way, you can press the double consonant (button #).

The input method of 40 Korean phonemes is shown in <Figure 28.5> below.

<Figure 28.5>

NO phoneme LG
EZ
Way Total Number of Bats One A One One 2 N 2 One 3 C 2,* 2 4 D 4 One 5 ㅁ 5 One 6 F 5, * 2 7 G 7 One 8 ㅇ 8 One 9 I 7, * 2 10 The 7, *, * 3 11 ㅋ One,* 2 12 I 2,*,* 3 13 The 5, *, * 3 14 He 8,* 2 15 ㄲ One,# 2 16 ㄸ 2,*,# 3 17 ㅃ 5, *, # 3 18 ㅆ 7, # 2 19 ㅉ 7, *, # 3 20 A 3 One 21 ㅑ 3, * 2 22 ㅓ 3.3 2 23 ㅕ 3,3, * 3 24 ㅗ 6 One 25 ㅛ 6, * 2 26 ㅜ 6.6 2 27 ㅠ 6,6, * 3 28 ㅡ 0 One 29 ㅣ 9 One 30 ㅢ 0.9 2 31 ㅐ 3,9 2 32 ㅔ 3,3,9 3 33 ㅒ 3, *, 9 3 34 ㅖ 3, 3, *, 9 4 35 ㅚ 6.9 2 36 ㅘ 6.3 2 37 ㅙ 6,3,9 3 38 ㅟ 6,6,9 3 39 ㅝ 6,6,3 3 40 ㅞ 6,6,3,9 4 summary 1 ride: 10
2: 15
3: 13
4: 2
5: 0
(Total of 40) Average per phoneme
steersman 2.175

<Figure 29>: LG EZ: Improvement: 2 lines per button

For a description of the above table, please refer to the description of the input method.

In any case, the basic concept is the same as the improvement of the Tianjin method, while using the conventional EZ method as it is,

You can input 40 Hangul phonemes as 1 or 2, and special characters including punctuation marks and emoticons can be easily input without changing the character mode.

(Or can be entered in twin-only mode).

Special characters in color, including letters and punctuation

Black is originally written on a conventional keyboard,

The blue color is a character that was not displayed on the conventional keyboard but could be input by manipulating the letter button and character change button (for example, a stroke addition button or a double consonant button)

The red color is the letters that the inventor added arbitrarily (eg punctuation marks, symbols, and Hangul phonemes).

(The emoticons are arbitrarily added by the inventor.)

To propose a special condition for a person who prefers to use the conventional EZ method as it is

Conventionally, since consonants are not input by a multi-tap, consonants can not be inputted into a multi-tap even in an improved method,

Since the buttons assigned to Button 3 and the buttons assigned to Button 6 are conventionally input by the multi-tap, a button can be input by the multi-tap method,

Since the rest of the vowels are not input by the multi-tap, it is also possible to prevent the input of the multi-tap in the improved method.

When applying twins to the LG EZ system

You can input letters of all groups, such as English or Korean, Sky, or Curitel, using the Combination Indicator Button Assignment Table of <Fig. 07 ~ Fig. 07.8>.

The advantages of doing so are:

You can enter all the phonemes within two digits,

It is possible to improve the inconvenience that the line is too large when pressing the double consonant button or the stroke addition button, which is the most stubborn problem of the conventional LG EZ system.

In the past,

Despite the fact that both hands must cover 1 to 4 rows,

Add stroke button (button *) or The consonant button (button #)  To do so,

Since characters other than `ㅡ` of button 0 are on lines 1 to 3, the 4th line with the stroke addition button (button *) or the twin consonant button (button #) in line 2, which is approximate to the vertical average position of the character buttons , That is, two rows must be moved,

The average vertical lines are two very large rows

Using the combination induction button table as shown in <Fig. 07> and applying the twin using the letter assignment table as shown in <Fig. 29>

Only one to three lines (average) assigned to button 0 (except when you assign the button * assigned to the button 0 and the short vowel assigned to the button # 1, The position is in two rows). Therefore, in the second row, which is the approximate value of the approximate position of the button to which the character is assigned, the average vertical line from the average position to which the combination induction button is assigned to the second row is zero rows .

In the past,

In order to use both hands alternately, in a situation where both hands are in charge of one to three rows, that is, in the case of two rows of average horizontal positions of both hands,

To press the stroke add button (button *), the button * is in one row, so either one of the thumbs of both hands should always move to one row,

To press the double consonant button (button #), the button * is located in three columns, and one of the thumbs of both hands must always move to three rows,

The average transverse line of one hand is one

The horizontal line was large,

When twins are applied

The first column is the left hand,

The third column is the right hand,

In the situation where the left hand or right hand is responsible for the situation according to the second column,

In other words, in the case where the average horizontal hand position is 1.33 rows for the left hand and 2.67 rows for the right hand,

Since there are two combinations of a stroke combination induction button and a pair consonant combination induction button both in the first row and the third row, since the user can select any one of them and press any one of them, the width of the horizontal line becomes smaller. Is 2.67 rows, so the average transversal line can be moved from 1.33 rows to 1 row, and the right hand from 2.67 rows to 3 columns, so the average transverse line of one hand is 0.33 rows . The left hand is 1.5 times the left hand, and the right hand is 2.5 times. The reason is that the left hand is responsible for one row, the right hand is for the third row, And the second row takes care of alternating hands of the left hand and right hand, so the average position of the left hand side is 1.33 rows, which is slightly closer to the first row than the middle row between the first row and the second row , The median position of the right hand is 2.67, which is a little closer to the third row than the middle between the second and third rows.)

But

The characters of the second group or more can use the combination induction button assignment table of FIG. 07 to FIG. 07.8 and the combination induction button assignment table of FIG. 30 below when inputting the first group letters. The reason for doing this is to reduce the copper wire, reduce the thumb interference, and improve the stability of the device while taking a similar approach to the conventional method.

However, it is not recommended to use the combination induction button assignment table of <Fig. 07 ~ Fig. 07.8>. Also, by using the combination guidance button assignment table of <Fig. 07 ~ Fig. 07.8>, it is possible to reduce the movement line, reduce the interference of the thumb, and improve the stability of holding the device by inputting the letters of all groups.

However, it is introduced for those who prefer the conventional EZ method.

<Figure 30>: Combination guidance button assignment table

(Do not worry about the numbers in parentheses at this stage)

1 (pair consonants) 2 (4) 3 (double consonant) 4 (add stroke) 5 (5) 6 (add stroke) 7 (3) 8 (4) 9 (3) * (6) 0 (5) # (6)

Conventionally, since the stroke addition button or the pair consonant button is operated after the character button, in the improved method, the stroke addition combination guidance button or the pair consonant combination guidance button is led to the letter button.

Let's take a few examples. (In the example below, you can use a combination induction button to enter the rules differently.)

Conventionally, in order to input `ㅆ`, 7, # (` ` are turned ON / OFF, and the button # which turns on the double consonant function is turned ON)

In the improved method, the conventional method can be implemented as it is

Using the Combination Indication Button Table in Figure 30, press button 1, which is a combination of two consonant combinations, while holding button 7 with 7 + 1 or 7 + 3 assigned to it, or press button 7 And press button 3, which is a dual consonant combination induction button). We recommend 7 + 3 rather than 7 + 1. This is because if both 7 and 1 are in both hands, both hands are present in one row, which causes interference between fingers and the stability of holding the device drops.

The same number of times as before, but the vertical line is reduced.

The reason why the vertical lines are reduced is that,

To make a pair of consonants

Conventionally, it should always have moved to the button # of four lines,

Now, if the twins are applied in this way, the average distance traveled in the vertical direction is only one row since the user must move to the first position with the button 1 or the button 3, The reason for this is that if the twins are applied in this way, only the input of `ㅡ ㅢ` moves to the fourth line, and all the remaining characters can be input in the first to third lines.

To add a stroke

In the past, you should always have moved to the 4-line button *

Now, if twins are applied this way, you can only move up to 2 rows with button 4 or button 6, which is a combination of stroke add-on buttons in the average position of 2 rows, so that the average moving distance in the vertical direction is only 0 rows. In this way, if you enter `ㅡ ㅢ`, you can move up to 4 lines, and all remaining characters can be input in 1 ~ 3 lines.

In the past,

To press the stroke add button (button *), the button * is in one row, so either one of the thumbs of both hands should always move to one row,

To press the double consonant button (button #), the button * is located in three columns, and one of the thumbs of both hands must always move to three rows,

The average circulation of both hands is 2, and the average circulation of one hand is 1

The copper wire was large,

When twins are applied

Since there are two combinations of a stroke combination induction button and a pair consonant combination induction button both in the first row and the third row, since the user can select any one of them and press any one of them, the width of the horizontal line becomes smaller. Is 2.67 rows, so the average copper line moves from 1.33 rows to 1 row, and the right hand only moves from 2.67 rows to 3 rows, so the average movement of one hand is 0.33 rows.)

Previously, if you want to input `ㅉ`, you can turn on / off button 7, which is assigned 7, *, # (` Button # is turned on). However,

In the improved method, the conventional method can be implemented as it is,

Using the Combination Indicator button in Figure 30, we know that the second pair of consonants of button 7 is `ㅉ`, so press 7 + 1 + 1 or 7 + 3 + 3 The user can press the button 1, which is a combination button for two consonants, twice or the button 3, which is a combination button for two consonants, while pressing the button 7, twice). Because I just set the rule like this. In the conventional method, it is also possible to change the rule by inputting 7, #, # instead of 7, *, and #.

The same number of teeth as the conventional one, but the copper wire is reduced and the stability of holding the device is improved.

Because the reduction of the copper line

Conventionally, you have to manipulate * and # so you have to move from column 1 to column 3 with button * or button #

Since we had to move from line 3 to line 4, we had to move from line 3 to line 4, but there was no such line in the improved method. In the past,

What it means is that the stability of holding the device improves. Conventionally, when both hands are used to operate 7, *, both hands are present in one row. Therefore, interference between fingers occurs and the stability of holding the device drops. 7 + 3 + 3, so the left hand is a button 7, and the right hand 3 is a button 3, so it is stable.

Conventionally, in order to input `ㅑ`, 3, * (inputting only the button 3, which is assigned a`

In the improved method, the conventional method can be implemented as it is

Using the Combination Indication button table in Figure 30, press button 4, which is a combination of stroke addition combination, while holding button 3 with 3 + 4 or 3 + 6 (`a` is assigned, or press button 3 And press button 6, which is a stroke addition combination induction button, in the state). We recommend 3 + 4 rather than 3 + 6. Because 3 + 6 with both hands is present in the third row of both hands, interference occurs between fingers and the stability of holding the device drops. The number of wires is the same as that of conventional wires.

Conventionally, in order to input `ㅕ`, 3,3, * (` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` (`` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `

In the improved method, the conventional method can be implemented as it is

3 + 4 + 4 or 3 + 6 + 6 (button 3 with `a`) assigned to it is already know that the second stroke added note of button 3 is `ㅕ` The user can press the button 4, which is a stroke addition combination induction button, twice or the button 6, which is a strobe addition combination induction button, is pressed twice while the button 3 is being depressed. The same number of teeth as the conventional one, but the copper wire is reduced and the stability of holding the device is improved.

And a little more advanced form, as shown in Figure 31 below

A pair of consonant combination buttons is divided into a pair of consonant and a pair of consonant combination buttons,

It is also possible to divide the stroke addition combination induction button into one stroke addition and two stroke addition combination induction buttons.

<Figure 31>: Combination guidance button assignment table

(Do not worry about the numbers in parentheses at this stage)

1 (first pair consonant) 2 (3) 3 (first pair consonant) 4 (first stroke added) 5 (3) 6 (first stroke added) 7 (second stroke added) 8 (4) 9 (second stroke added) * (Second pair consonant) 0 (4) # (Second pair consonant)

If you use the combination induction button assignment table in <Figure 31>

 To type `ㅉ`

Previously, if you want to input `ㅉ`, you can turn on / off button 7, which is assigned 7, *, # (` Button # is turned on). However,

While the conventional method can be implemented as it is,

If you use the Combination Indicator button in Figure 31, you know that the second pair of consonants of button 7 is `ㅉ`, so press 7 + * or 7 + # A pair of consonant combinations can be input by pushing a button * that is a guidance button for a pair of consonant combinations or by pressing a button #, which is a second pair of consonant combination buttons, while holding the button 7). One less than the conventional one, the copper wire is reduced, and the stability of holding the device is improved.

 To enter `ㅕ`

Conventionally, in order to input `ㅕ`, 3,3, * (` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` (`` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `

While the conventional method can be implemented as it is

If you use the Combination Indicator button in Figure 31, you know that the second phoneme of Button 3 is `ㅕ`, so press and hold 3 + 7 or 3 + 9, The second stroke addition combination guidance button 7 is pressed or the button 3 is depressed, the second stroke addition combination guidance button 9 is pressed). One less than the conventional one, the copper wire is reduced, and the stability of holding the device is improved.

At this time, the first stroke addition and the first pair consonant combination guidance button may also function as a stroke addition and a pair consonant combination guidance button in FIG.

Anyway, if you add a stroke to a combination button with a combination of letter buttons as shown in Figure 30 or Figure 31,

The copper line decreases. Conventionally, in order to press the stroke add button (button *) or the double consonant button (button #), the user must always move to line 4. Now, in the method using the combination guide button table of FIG. 30, This is because, in the method using the combination induction button table, only 3 lines (up to 4 lines only when inputting D, D, R, and T) are moved.

If you do not want to have any lines up to line 4, you can assign the combination induction button as below <Figure 31.5>.

<Figure 31.5>: Combination guidance button assignment table

(Do not worry about the numbers in parentheses at this stage)

1 (first pair consonant) 2 (third pair consonant) 3 (first pair consonant) 4 (first stroke added) 5 (3) 6 (first stroke added) 7 (second stroke added) 8 (third pair consonant) 9 (second stroke added) * (4) 0 (3) # (4)

The interference between the fingers is reduced, and the stability of holding the device is increased. This is because it is possible to avoid situations where hands are biased in one or three rows. I explained it in detail in the foregoing.

Using the combination induction button table in <Figure 31> or <Figure 31.5>

In the past, it is possible to input 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,

In the past, it was possible to input three characters, which was input only to four characters.

As a result, all of the 40 Hangul phonemes below can be entered as 1 ~ 2 except for ㅒ, ㅔ, ㅖ, ㅙ, ㅟ, ㅝ, ㅞ. In addition, it provides considerable convenience in terms of copper wire, interference, stability, etc. mentioned above.

40 Korean phonemes

1. 14 basic consonants: ㄱ, ㄴ, ㄷ,,, ㅁ,,, ㅅ, ㅈ, ㅊ, ㅋ, ㅌ, ㅎ, ㅎ

2. Five consonants: ㄲ, ㄸ, ㅃ, ㅆ, ㅉ

3. 10 basic vowels: a, ㅑ, ㅓ, ㅕ, ㅗ, ㅛ, ㅜ, ㅠ, ㅡ, ㅣ

4. 11 voices: ㅐ, ㅒ, ㅔ, ㅖ, ㅚ, ㅘ, ㅙ, ㅟ, ㅝ, ㅞ, ㅢ

However, it is recommended to use the combination induction button assignment table of <Fig. 07 ~ Fig. 07.8> which can input all phonemes in one or two.

In the method using the combination-induction button table of FIG. 30 or FIG. 31,

The conventional method is a method in which the stroke addition button or the double consonant button is followed by the letter button. In the improved method, the stroke addition combination induction button or the double consonant combination induction button is followed by the letter button. However, A person may initially have a crosstalk, but the preceding method is recommended because the preceding method is more advantageous.

<Figure 07 ~ Fig. 07.8> We recommend the preceding method even for the method of using combination button guidance button.

Because if you enter `

Using Figure 30 or Figure 31, in the `trailing 'method, press button 6, which is a stroke addition combination button with 8 + 6, 6 + 4 (` While holding down the button 6 assigned to `ㅗ`, press the button 4, which is a stroke addition combination induction button, to make `ㅛ`), that is, only four strokes can be input

Using Figure 30 or Figure 31, in the `preceding 'method, press the button 4 with 4 + 8 + 6 (the stroke combination combination induction button with the left hand), and the right hand with the button 8 with the stroke additional character` ㅛ `button 6, which is assigned to the stroke additional character), that is, three strokes.

<Figure 07 ~ Fig. 07.8> The combination method of guiding buttons is much more advantageous in the method of using the button assignment table than in the preceding method.

If you want to type `

Using Figure 30 or Figure 31, you can also use the buttons 4, 5, 6, and 6 (button 4, which is a combination of stroking combination, with the left hand) and the button 5 And then press button 6, which is assigned to `ㅗ`, twice to make `ㅜ`).

<Figure 07> Combination Induction Button In the method of 'preceding' using the assignment table, press the button 4, which is a combination induction button for inputting the second letter of 4 + 5 + 6, with the left hand, 6 is pressed sequentially, the second letter of button 5 is `f` and the second letter of button 6 is` ㅜ `).

As shown in Figure 30 and Figure 31, it is possible to combine the stroke addition function and the double consonant function in the combination induction button table, as well as the Motorola stroke addition function (button #), the Hanlode code character end button, It is possible to achieve almost the same effect as the improvement in the LG EZ.

The disadvantage of the LG EZ method is that it overlaps with the disadvantages of the `* &# method`, so the disadvantages of the other LG EZ method and the problems that the twins solve are the details of the `* &# I hope.

<Figure 32>: LG EZ: Improvement: 3 lines per button

No explanation is needed. See Figure 29

<Figure 32.5>: LG EZ: Improvement: 2 lines per button margin

Buttons contain a small number of complete phonemes, special characters, or emoticons

(More than that, you can display a part of the display screen.)

I do not think the explanation is necessary.

<Figure 32.6>: LG EZ: Improvement: No 2-line emoticons per button

Buttons are assigned full phonemes and special characters, but not emoticons

(More than that, you can display a part of the display screen.)

I do not think the explanation is necessary.

<Figure 32.7>: LG EZ: Improvement: Addition of Korean-only complete phoneme

Of the 40 Korean phonemes, only the ones that were not assigned to the completion type in the conventional way were added to the completion type.

I do not think the explanation is necessary.

<Figure 32.8> All Hangul phonemes based on LG EZ system on the display screen

If there is a feeling of rejection of the Korean phoneme assignment pattern of <Figure 32.7> on the button,

Conventionally, the marking on the button remains unchanged,

As shown in <Figure 16.2> and <Figure 32.8>, all Hangul phonemes are additionally assigned to the display screen,

In the conventional character input mode, the conventional method and the twin may be input in parallel, or may be input in the twin exclusive mode.

(The assignments in Figure 16.2 are arbitrary representations of phonemes that are not assigned to the completion type in the conventional character input method, so they are displayed differently according to the type of the conventional character input method.)

<Figure 33>: Motorola: Traditional

With the conventional button notation being maintained,

You can add new complete phonemes, punctuation, or other special characters or emoticons

It can be memorized, used for some display screens, or carried around with a list of assignments (of course, new assignments may have different groups of letters).

<Figure 34>: Motorola: Conventional + Hidden

To introduce the conventional input method

Button # has almost the same function as the stroke add button of this EZ method

In the vowel input,

You can enter the number by typing in multi-tap using double or double-tapping

E.g

Button 3,

Press button 3 twice to enter.

However,

After you open the box, click Add stroke (button #) to enter it

After you have opened the cursor, click Add stroke (button #) to enter it

After you have opened the cursor, click Add stroke (button #) to enter it

After entering ㅜ, click Add stroke (button #) to enter

Enter other combinations of voices as a combination of ㅑㅓㅕㅑㅓㅕ ㅗㅛ ㅠ ㅠ ㅡ ㅣ.

For consonant input

The basic consonant (ㄱ b ㄷ) is entered by inserting the assigned button of each character,

The double consonant is input by pressing the button assigned to the basic consonant twice,

The second letter of each consonant button is input by pressing the stroke addition (button #) after each basic character sounds.

E.g

If you want to enter ㄲ, press button 1 twice.

If you want to enter ㅋ, press button 1 to open, then press Add button stroke (button #).

The input method of 40 Korean phonemes is shown in <Figure 34.5> below.

<Figure 34.5>

NO phoneme Motorola
Way Total Number of Bats One A One One 2 N 2 One 3 C 4 One 4 D 5 One 5 ㅁ 2,# One 6 F 7 One 7 G 8 One 8 ㅇ 0 One 9 I * One 10 The *, # 2 11 ㅋ One,# 2 12 I 4,# 2 13 The 7, # 2 14 He 0,# 2 15 ㄲ 1,1 2 16 ㄸ 4.4 2 17 ㅃ 7.7 2 18 ㅆ 8.8 2 19 ㅉ *, * 2 20 A 3 One 21 ㅑ 3, # 2 22 ㅓ 3.3 2 23 ㅕ 3,3, # 3 24 ㅗ 6 One 25 ㅛ 6, # 2 26 ㅜ 6.6 2 27 ㅠ 6,6, # 3 28 ㅡ 9.9 2 29 ㅣ 9 One 30 ㅢ 9, # 2 31 ㅐ 3,9 2 32 ㅔ 3,3,9 3 33 ㅒ 3, #, 9 3 34 ㅖ 3, 3, #, 9 4 35 ㅚ 6.9 2 36 ㅘ 6.3 2 37 ㅙ 6,3,9 3 38 ㅟ 6,6,9 3 39 ㅝ 6,6,3 3 40 ㅞ 6,6,3,9 4 summary 1 ride: 12
2: 19
3: 7
4: 2
5: 0
(Total of 40) Average per phoneme
steersman 1.975

<Figure 35>: Motorola: Improvement: 2 lines

In any case, the basic concept is the same as the improvement of the Tianjin method, while using the conventional Motorola method,

You can enter 40 Hangul phonemes as one or two letters, and special characters including punctuation marks and emoticons can be easily entered without changing the character mode.

(Or can be entered in twin-only mode).

I will not explain Motorola's explanation. This is because the description of LG EZ can be applied.

When applying the block diagram using <Figure 30> and <Figure 31> of LG EZ to Motorola,

In the conventional Motorola method, the button # can be applied by considering that it is a stroke addition button function of the LG EZ.

See how to use button # in the Motorola method.

For the consonant button, turn the consonant button on / off and press the button # to input the second letter, black letter,

For collection buttons, it is the same as the button for adding strokes of LG EZ.

<Figure 36>: Motorola: Improvement: 3 lines per button

No explanation is needed. See Figure 35 for an explanation.

<Figure 36.5>: Motorola: Improvements: 2 lines per button margin

Buttons contain a small number of complete phonemes, special characters, or emoticons

(More than that, you can display a part of the display screen.)

I do not think the explanation is necessary.

<Figure 36.6>: Motorola: Improvements: 2 lines per button margin

Buttons are assigned full phonemes and special characters, but not emoticons

(More than that, you can display a part of the display screen.)

I do not think the explanation is necessary.

<Figure 36.65>: Motorola: Improvement: Assignment of Korean-only complete phoneme

If you want to input in the same way as the conventional method while the twins are in parallel, the additional assigned red phoneme can be inputted by the multi-tap method. No, you can limit it to only twins.)

I do not think the explanation is necessary.

<Figure 36.66> Assignment of all Korean-language phonemes based on Motorola to the display screen

If there is a feeling of rejection of the Korean phoneme assignment pattern of <Figure 36.65> on the button,

Conventionally, the marking on the button remains unchanged,

As shown in <Figure 16.2> or <Figure 36.66>, all Hangul phonemes are additionally assigned to the display screen,

In the conventional character input mode, the conventional method and the twin may be input in parallel, or may be input in the twin-exclusive mode.

(The assignments in Figure 16.2 are arbitrary representations of phonemes that are not assigned to the completion type in the conventional character input method, so they are displayed differently according to the type of the conventional character input method.)

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

In order to improve Hangul input method, all 40 Hangul phonemes are assigned to completion type, so there will be 4 buttons assigned to phonemes, which will be very strange at first.

The English alphabet has the lowest number of phonetic characters in Greek alphabet, but four letters are assigned to buttons 7 and 9.

And most Greek and Roman alphabets have more than 30 phonemes. There are 33 phonemes in Russian, 46 in Hindi, 44 in Myanmar, 50 in Japanese, and 76 in Thai, so 4 to 6 phonemes per button have been assigned.

It is not surprising that four phonemes in Hangul are assigned to one button.

However, if a feeling of rejection is felt in the new assignment of Hangul phonemes, only the assignment of a few complete phonemes newly assigned to the character enthusiast may be memorized while maintaining the conventional button notation. Nothing is for the character enthusiast.

(Alternatively, you can display the display screen as shown in Figure 16.2 or Figure 16.3.)

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Without considering special characters,

If you want to make sure that you can enter very quickly and conveniently even if you input only Korean Hangul words with only Hangul phonemes as twins based on various Hangul input methods, Of the Korean alphabet.

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

When you want to run twins with conventional mobile phones

In order to apply twins to conventional mobile phones, it is recommended that the buttons be replaced with buttons with more letters than the conventional ones, and twin operation programs can be downloaded to drive the twins.

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Until now,

Of all 40 Hangul phonemes

In conventional Hangul input methods,

I have only looked at the additional assignment of the entire unassigned phonemes,

It is possible to allocate only a part.

You can assign additional phonemes that require more than three taps,

You can assign additional phonemes that require more than four tones,

Only the phonemes that require more than five strokes can be assigned.

Looking at Figure 36.9,

Of the phonemes that require more than three strokes,

In the conventional method, only the phonemes not allocated to the completion type are further allocated (even if the number of phonemes is 3 or more, phonemes that have been previously assigned to the completion type and can be input in the multi-tap manner are not added)

In Samsung's Tianjin way

Of the 19 phonemes that require more than three strokes, they are not shown on the conventional buttons, but there are five consonants (ㄲ ㄸ ㅃ ㅆ ㅆ ㅉ)

ㅑ ㅕ ㅕ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,

Additional assignments can be made.

In Pantech's Sky or Curitel system,

Of the 10 phonemes that require more than three tones, they are not shown on the conventional buttons but are already assigned to the completion type, so that the five consonants (ㄲ ㄸ ㅃ ㅆ ㅆ ㅆ)

 ㅢ ㅒ ㅖ ㅖ ㅙ ㅞ The five phonemes,

Additional assignments can be made.

In the LG EZ system

All 15 phonemes that require more than three

,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,

Additional assignments can be made.

In the Motorola way

All nine phonemes that require more than three

ㅕ ㅔ ㅔ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,

Additional assignments can be made.

In addition,

Of the phonemes that require more than four strokes,

Considering the addition of only additional phonemes not assigned to completion in the conventional manner

In Samsung's Tianjin way

All six phonemes that require more than four

ㅒ ㅖ ㅘ ㅘ ㅙ,,,,

Additional assignments can be made.

In Pantech's Sky or Curitel system,

There are no phonemes that require more than four strokes, so there is no additional assignment.

In the LG EZ system

Two phonemes that require more than four strokes

However,

Additional assignments can be made.

In the Motorola way

Two phonemes that require more than four strokes

However,

Additional assignments can be made.

However, in the conventional method, phonemes that can be inputted by combining two phonemes of different buttons are assigned to the completed phonemes and the advantages of inputting two phonemes as twins are as follows.

In the case of the LG EZ system, although the two buttons can be used to combine the buttons and the buttons, it is assumed that the two buttons are assigned to the completion type,

1. Once the position of the keyboard on the keyboard is memorized, it is easy to feel psychologically that it is a one-beat when you press the buttons assigned to the completed type by the combination guidance button and the twin type combination button.

2. If you have a habit of typing a third or more letters as twins, you may feel comfortable typing the second letter as a twin. (And, whatever you type in a language, you can enter it with a double-click, which makes typing easier.) Even though the twins have many advantages, you can simply type two hands in a single hand It feels easier to enter it as a twin even if it is.)

3. Double-click the phonemes that you can type to add tweezers to the twins, including the 5th and 6th advantages of the twins' Multiple Advantages section above. There is a number.

- If there is a sequence of characters in the same sequence, such as when you enter FOLLOW or CIRCLE as described below, you can use the previous combination pushbuttons as they are, so the number of bats is greatly reduced. As a result, the copper line is also reduced.

- Since the letter button is a combination induction button

Figure 42 As you type `WING`

When the copper wire is 0, the letter button of the previous letter becomes the combination guide button for inputting the later letter.

In the state where the copper line is 0, the combination induction button for inputting the previous letter is a letter button of the later letter,

The phenomenon of minimizing the copper wire occurs.

If the copper line is 0, there is a speed increase effect that the batting number decreases by one.

You can type letters as if you were playing relay games.

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Conventional Hangul input methods and

Comparing the method of applying all 40 Hangul phonemes to completion type but not applying twin (how to apply twin)

(In the conventional methods, only a small number of basic phonemes are displayed on the keyboard, and no consonants or double voices are displayed

Even if the phoneme assignment is not in the standard enumeration order to easily memorize the buttons assigned to the double consonant or double tone,

A beginner who did not touch the keyboard a few times would be able to get used quickly, but to find out that he was not successful in satisfying the expert who wanted to reduce the number of strokes and shorten the number of strokes, no.)

In the Hangul input method,

In the past,

4 or more letters per button,

Only three letters per button can be used to input or modify basic phonemes.

It is almost the same with many batting,

In particular, in the case of vowels, it was not meaningful to assign all 21 vowels to the completion type,

After twins have been developed, all 21 vowels will be assigned to completion, and you will be able to enter them within two digits.

To be more precise, all 40 Hangul phonemes are assigned to completion as shown in <Figure 36.7>

The combination of multi-tap and basic phoneme

Rather than enter in a conventional way, including Chun Jiin and LG EZ

You can see that the number of batters is low as below.

(However, it is recommended to input the completed form in parallel with the conventional method, but it is not recommended that the method is not parallel with the conventional method as shown in <Figure 36.7>.

That is, in the conventional methods, only a small number of basic phonemes are displayed on the keyboard, and even if the phonemic assignment is not in the standard enumeration order in order to easily memorize the buttons assigned the twin consonants or the double pronunciations, Even a beginner who did not touch the keyboard a few times could get used to it, but he was not successful in satisfying the expert who wanted to reduce the number of strokes and enter letters quickly.

(In addition, in the conventional methods, in order to facilitate memorization, the system tried to assign the same phonemes to the same button. However, in the case of trying to assign all the consonants to the same button of the same phonemes except for the EZZ, I did not finish it.

However, as shown in <Fig. 36.7> below, all of the consonants and basic vowels have almost the same difficulty of memorizing, since all of the related phonemes can be assigned to each other as they are allocated to the completion type. Assigning consonants in the standard enumeration order makes it easier to memorize.

Figure 20:

Button 2 is assigned, button 0 is assigned to button 0,

Figure 23 Pantech series Sky and Curitel

Button 5 is assigned, button 7 is assigned to button 7,

Figure 33 The Motorola way

Button 2 is assigned to ㄴ ㅁ.

Different phonemes in the system are assigned to the same button, making it difficult for beginners to memorize.

For reference, the phonetic diagram of Korean consonants is as follows (same as LG EZ).

ㄱ - ㅋ - ㄲ

ㄴ - - - - - ㄸ

ㅁ - ㅂ - ─ - ㅃ

D

- - - - - - ㅆ - ㅉ

ㅇ - ㅎ)]

To find out the above, first let's look at how to assign 40 Hangul phonemes to the completion type as shown in <Figure 36.7> below, and input the combination of multi tap and basic phoneme.

You can also use the multi-tap method to enter the following:

ㅢ is the second and the second,

I have two taro with 와 and ㅣ,

ㅔ is the two taro of ㅓ and ㅣ,

ㅚ is the two taro of ㅗ and ㅣ,

Two taro of 와 and ㅣ

The two ㅗ and a taro

The two ㅗ and a taro

It is possible to input it by a combination of basic phonemes because it can input it by reducing the number of strokes. When the multi-tap method is particularly preferred, it can be inputted by a multi-tap method.

<Figure 36.7>

1 ㅋ ㅋ ㄲ 2 ㅣ ㅢ 3 ㅑ ㅐ ㅐ ㅒ 4 c 5 ㅡ ㅙ ㅞ 6 ㅓㅕ ㅔ ㅔ 7 8 9 ㅗㅛ ㅚ ㅚ * ㅇ Tweet 0 ㅉ # ㅜㅠ ㅟ ㅝ

As shown in <Figure 36.7>, when the keyboard is assigned, you can input all 40 Hangul phonemes using the combination of multi tap and basic phoneme. (Even if you can input the same phoneme by more than two methods, Most of the diphthongs are a combination of short vowels, but since ㅙ is assigned to the second letter of button 5, you may have pressed button 5 twice by pressing the multi-tap method like..)

<Figure 36.8>

NO phoneme all
Completion type
Assignment Total Number of Bats Remarks One A One One 2 N 4 One 3 C 4.4 2 4 D 8,8,8 3 5 ㅁ *, * 2 6 F 7 One 7 G 8 One 8 ㅇ * One 9 I 0 One 10 The 0.0 2 11 ㅋ 1,1 2 12 I 2.2 2 13 The 7.7 2 14 He *, *, * 3 15 ㄲ 1,1,1 3 16 ㄸ 4,4,4 3 17 ㅃ 7,7,7 3 18 ㅆ 8.8 2 19 ㅉ 0,0,0 3 20 A 3 One 21 ㅑ 3.3 2 22 ㅓ 6 One 23 ㅕ 6.6 2 24 ㅗ 9 One 25 ㅛ 9.9 2 26 ㅜ # One 27 ㅠ #, # 2 28 ㅡ 5 One 29 ㅣ 2 One 30 ㅢ 5.2 2 31 ㅐ 3.2 2 32 ㅔ 6.2 2 33 ㅒ 3,3,2 3 34 ㅖ 6,6,2 3 35 ㅚ 9,2 2 36 ㅘ 9.3 2 37 ㅙ 5.5 2 38 ㅟ #,2 2 39 ㅝ #, 6 2 40 ㅞ #, 6.2 3

(Sky and Curittel of Chun Jiin and Pantech series have already assigned consonants to complete type.

The first phoneme required to complete a consonant that is not assigned to the completion type of LG EZ or Motorola is already assigned to a certain button. If you can not memorize it, you can not input the desired phoneme. The same thing can be said.

For example, if you want to input ㅉ in the LG EZ method, you can not input ㅉ in the first basic phoneme by selecting button 1 of button 1. Beginning with button 7, you must add a stroke and make it a pair of consonants.

Therefore, even if all the phonemes are assigned to the conventional keyboard such as Chun Ji-In, it is not difficult to memorize the keyboard because the number of the phonemes is more than ten.

Let's compare 40 different Hangul phonemes as the completion type, and compare it with the conventional Hangul input methods when inputting with a combination of multi tap and basic phoneme.

(Even if twins are not applied, it can be seen that the number of batters is smaller than that of the conventional method when all 40 are assigned to completion type.)

<Figure 36.9>

NO phoneme All phonemes
Completion type
Input after assignment Total Number of Bats Samsung
Heavenly Father
Way Total Number of Bats Pantech:
Sky, Curitel
Way Total Number of Bats LG
EZ
Way Total Number of Bats Motorola
Way Total Number of Bats One A One One 4 One One One One One One One 2 N 4 One 5 One 5 One 2 One 2 One 3 C 4.4 2 6 One 4 One 2,* 2 4 One 4 D 8,8,8 3 5.5 2 5.5 2 4 One 5 One 5 ㅁ *, * 2 0.0 2 7 One 5 One 2,# One 6 F 7 One 7 One 8 One 5, * 2 7 One 7 G 8 One 8 One 7.7 2 7 One 8 One 8 ㅇ * One 0 One 0 One 8 One 0 One 9 I 0 One 9 One * One 7, * 2 * One 10 The 0.0 2 9.9 2 *, * 2 7, *, * 3 *, # 2 11 ㅋ 1,1 2 4.4 2 1,1 2 One,* 2 One,# 2 12 I 2.2 2 6.6 2 4.4 2 2,*,* 3 4,# 2 13 The 7.7 2 7.7 2 8.8 2 5, *, * 3 7, # 2 14 He *, *, * 3 8.8 2 0.0 2 8,* 2 0,# 2 15 ㄲ 1,1,1 3 4,4,4 3 1,1,1 3 One,# 2 1,1 2 16 ㄸ 4,4,4 3 6,6,6 3 4,4,4 3 2,*,# 3 4.4 2 17 ㅃ 7,7,7 3 7,7,7 3 8,8,8 3 5, *, # 3 7.7 2 18 ㅆ 8.8 2 8,8,8 3 7,7,7 3 7, # 2 8.8 2 19 ㅉ 0,0,0 3 9,9,9 3 *, *, * 3 7, *, # 3 *, * 2 20 A 3 One 1,2 2 3 One 3 One 3 One 21 ㅑ 3.3 2 1,2,2 3 3.3 2 3, * 2 3, # 2 22 ㅓ 6 One 2,1 2 6 One 3.3 2 3.3 2 23 ㅕ 6.6 2 2,2,1 3 6.6 2 3,3, * 3 3,3, # 3 24 ㅗ 9 One 2,3 2 9 One 6 One 6 One 25 ㅛ 9.9 2 2,2,3 3 9.9 2 6, * 2 6, # 2 26 ㅜ # One 3.2 2 # One 6.6 2 6.6 2 27 ㅠ #, # 2 3,2,2 3 #, # 2 6,6, * 3 6,6, # 3 28 ㅡ 5 One 3 One 2.2 2 0 One 9.9 2 29 ㅣ 2 One One One 2 One 9 One 9 One 30 ㅢ 5.2 2 3.1 2 2,2,2 3 0.9 2 9, # 2 31 ㅐ 3.2 2 1,2,1 3 3.2 2 3,9 2 3,9 2 32 ㅔ 6.2 2 2,1,1 3 6.2 2 3,3,9 3 3,3,9 3 33 ㅒ 3,3,2 3 1,2,2,1 4 3,3,2 3 3, *, 9 3 3, #, 9 3 34 ㅖ 6,6,2 3 2,2,1,1 4 6,6,2 3 3, 3, *, 9 4 3, 3, #, 9 4 35 ㅚ 9,2 2 2,3,1 3 9,2 2 6.9 2 6.9 2 36 ㅘ 9.3 2 2,3,1,2 4 9.3 2 6.3 2 6.3 2 37 ㅙ 5.5 2 2,3,1,2,1 5 9,3,2 3 6,3,9 3 6,3,9 3 38 ㅟ #,2 2 3,2,1 3 #,2 2 6,6,9 3 6,6,9 3 39 ㅝ #, 6 2 3,2,2,1 4 #, 6 2 6,6,3 3 6,6,3 3 40 ㅞ #, 6.2 3 3,2,2,1,1 5 #, 6.2 3 6,6,3,9 4 6,6,3,9 4 summary 1 ride: 12
2: 19
3: 9
4: 0
5: 0
(Total of 40) 1: 9
2: 12
3: 13
Four: four
5: 2
(Total of 40) 1 ride: 12
2: 18
3: 10
4: 0
5: 0
(Total of 40) 1 ride: 10
2: 15
3: 13
4: 2
5: 0
(Total of 40) 1 ride: 12
2: 19
3: 7
4: 2
5: 0
(Total of 40) Average per phoneme
steersman 1.925 2.45 1.95 2.175 1.975

(As shown in <Figure 36.9> above, the same button problem occurs in the method of inputting words by the multi-tap method even though the average number of each phoneme is small, as in the Pantech series method. >, The same button problem does not occur at all, and if you use the multi tap and twins, the same button problem occurs only when the first letter is input continuously.)

Although the first method of the above table, "Input after all phonemes," has a small average number of phonemes per phoneme, it is not difficult for beginners to memorize the keyboard,

As described in Figures 22-36.5, if you apply twins in addition to the conventional method, you can quickly enter all the phonemes as fast as two or more, and you can use other twins Inputting can satisfy both novice and expert. If you are a full-fledged expert, it is the fastest to enter in twin-only mode.

If the twin together with the multi-tap method

The first letter,

The second letter is double click or twin

The third letter is a triple click or twin

The fourth character is fast four times in a row or twin

The fifth character can be entered quickly five times in a row or twinned.

(It is recommended that you enter the second or more characters as twins, except those who prefer the multi-tap method.)

Twin-only mode refers to the following method.

The first letter is

The second letter is only twins,

The third letter is only twins,

The fourth letter is only twins.

The fifth letter is only entered as a twin.)

The method of inputting by multitap method and basic phoneme combination after all completion type assignment

The reason why Pantech's Sky and Curitel methods and results are similar

The Pantech system is composed of 30 Korean phonemes and 30 phonetic phonemes.

Then, in the improved method of <Figure 22 ~ 36.65>, do not assign ㅢ ㅐ ㅔ ㅚ ㅟ ㅘ ㅘ as a combination of basic vowels, but why?

If you prefer a multi-tab,

Figure 22 ~ 36.65, which is an example of applying twins to Hangul input, was applied to the conventional character assignment as it is. However, the conventional Hangul phoneme assignment is not the same as <Figure 36.7>. > You can not use the two phonemes as a combination of basic phonemes as described above,

Even if you can input two phonemes by combining basic phonemes

In particular, if two basic vowels are combined in the same row, such as when you want to enter ㅘ ㅝ, if you try to press them with both hands, interference will occur between both thumbs, The stability of holding the device by pulling it toward the side is poor, but if it is assigned to the completed type and entered into the twin, other advantages including solving such a disadvantage are exhibited.

Also, from a microscopic point of view, when you want to add ㅣ to ㅓ ㅗ ュ, you need to manipulate the buttons in column 2 because ㅣ is assigned to column 2, like Pantech series. This is because it is more inconvenient than operating the buttons in columns 1 and 3. This is because the motion of the thumb increases further. However, there are other disadvantages as well, such as assigning `ㅣ` to one column and arranging the vowel in the third row, which is mainly assigned to the vowel, if the vowel is not well formed and difficult to memorize.

And if you assign it to a completed type and enter it as a twin, there are more advantages mentioned before or after.

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

So far, I have learned how to add and assign various colorful emoticons.

At present, the color picture emoticons built in conventional mobile phones tend to be incompatible with 80-byte short messages unless they are made by the same manufacturer's mobile phones. It is compatible well with services that are linked with mobile phone internet.

The form that is transmitted through the Internet is several times as expensive as a text message.

In order to increase the profit of the telecom companies, it seemed to neglect the phenomenon that is compatible only with the services that are linked with the Internet.

I would like to develop and standardize them so that they will be compatible with the short message in the future, so that they can exchange text messages rich in emotions with a lot of color picture emoticons at low prices.

In the emoticon for a short message, the color picture emoticons shown above can be replaced with the following monochrome emoticons and assigned to the buttons because the following black and white punctuation marks, symbols, figures, and emoticons are compatible with each other.

Black and white special characters and emoticons (in addition to the ones below if you look)

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Why should I be able to type special characters quickly on my phone?

There are about 200 special characters, including punctuation marks, glyphs, and emoticons, embedded in the special character mode of the mobile phone, and I would like to input them into the sentence, but it is often troublesome to input and leave it alone.

In conventional mobile phones, special characters can be input only in special character mode.

So if you want to use special characters such as punctuation marks and emoticons in the middle or end of a sentence in normal text mode

To change the character mode in special character mode, press the change character mode button several times,

To find the desired special character mode, many arrow key operations are required,

This is because when you enter a special character and then return to the normal character mode, you also have to go through different character modes by pressing the change mode button several times.

Even if you want to use the built-in thing to use it, there are a lot of cases to give up use because it is troublesome to use. It is not necessarily necessary to deliver the contents, but it is somewhat unfortunate.

Special characters, such as punctuation marks and emoticons, are used to perform roles such as facial expressions and accents during the actual conversation that face to face.

Therefore, in a mobile phone text message conversation which only talks with a character, if such a special character is used a lot, the meaning transmission becomes more accurate, and a conversation which is rich in sensitivity and interesting can be conducted.

Let's take a look at the following example of a mobile phone text message conversation.

If you do not have special characters or emoticons

(The emotional state and intention of men and women can not be known accurately, and conversation is dry.)

Man: baby what are you doing now

Woman: Just stay home.

Man: do the bath

Woman: It's crazy to be cold.

Man: Congratulations on your birthday today.

Woman: Thank you. But you are the only one.

Man: I'll give you a birthday present. I also watch movies

Woman: Yeah, we'll watch a movie, eat some rice, have a cocktail and have a glass of beer.

Man: Good, even karaoke.

Woman: Let's have a look

Man: All right.

If you have special characters or emoticons

This way, as the importance of emoticons is released these days

Many handset makers have a variety of emoticons in their special character mode. Emoticon services are also available from the carrier (eg KTF's message cone service).

Emoticon is a compound word of EMOTION (emotion) and ICON (icon), and is becoming popular as a new communication tool of the new generation.

In addition, it is possible to input special characters more quickly and conveniently in a twinned small keypad than in a conventional computer keyboard.

Of course, it is even better than the QWERTY keyboard phone.

Note that,

Even in the case of inputting a normal character representing a language other than a special character,

KTF has built a font phone with built-in fonts that can download about 130 kinds of fonts. LG Electronics `KH6500` and` KH6400` including 6 types of fonts, mobile phone sales declined in October 2008, despite the total number of more than 100,000 subscribers to collect a large number of people who acted like a normal character input The significance is increasing day by day, and if you read to the back of this book, you will feel that the twins are desperately needed even in the case of general character input, not special characters.

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

About letter life and text message of youth

According to statistics released by the National Statistical Office,

In 2007, the daily amount of text messages sent by teenagers (aged 15 to 19) was 60.1, and 30.9 for 20-24 year olds.

If you open your eyes in the morning, check the characters first. The subway and bus also continue without interruption. At school, he shoots letters from a teacher to his friend. When the letter is not coming, it is blurred. It is the worst that characters chew. It sounds like a ringing sound all day long.

Almost 100% of teenagers are able to send text messages without looking at their phone book.

(During class, the eyes send a letter to the desk while watching the teacher)

Compared to simple voice calls, text messages that are exchanged with friends in a rally game are addictive.

Fanned thumbs are riding on cell phone keypad.

If so, to find out how much text messages are,

Let's look at the benefits of text messaging.

1) It enables conversation that is burdensome to do through face-to-face or voice call (like, love, sorry)

For example, when you say a word to meet, you can meet the person in person and avoid the worry of rejecting the other person.

2) It allows you to hide your feelings and express them more accurately.

3) You can express intimacy through emoticons. (^^ ;; indicator), which provides relatively vital information that can provide a facial expression or visual effect that a voice call can not provide, but also an objective expression that can not be provided by a video call nowadays. I will define the objective expression as an action of unconsciousness that the sign of ^^ rather than I laugh will convey the emotions that I want to make others feel better.

4) Low price

5) Private use (In the case of voice communication or other communication, unless you are in a space of your own, your actions will be exposed to others.) However, in the case of letters, I do not know if it contains it - it has the advantage of being able to encrypt your actions)

6) It is possible to deliver to unspecified number of people (group message, meeting communication, etc.)

The origins of cell phone text messages are very strictly speaking a wireless pager (aka pager) text service. Before the emergence of mobile phones, the predominant mobile communication means was a wireless pager, and the service that maximized the function of the pager was a text service.

Although it was desirable for the text service to be specifiable because the technology centered on the mobile phone is capable of moving the voice communication, the advantage of the wireless pager, which was the communication medium of the previous stage, to secure the poor communication quality when the mobile phone first appeared, We started the text messaging service that made use of the characteristics of their own technologies.

This type of service was born from a poor situation in which voice calls were inconvenient, and when the service was first launched, no one could predict that the text service would become a product that would give birth to a golden egg as long longevity service succeeded for such a long time.

Character service has become a culture through unexpected success, and has become a mountain of mobile phone functions with voice call service.

In addition, recent mobile communication terminals are gradually developed as portable information devices by adding various additional functions in a simple telephone, and it is now possible to surf the web using a terminal. Therefore, in addition to improving the quality of a call, a terminal maker also has an important research task that facilitates inputting of characters in order to enhance user's convenience.

The twins can be applied regardless of the shapes of the buttons, whether they are touch pads or physical buttons, so that twins can be applied to both the touch pad and the mobile phone, which is a small keypad, so that the characters can be input faster and easier than in the conventional touch small keypad,

For reference, the touchpad has a poor sense of touch, and it is hard to know whether the desired button is touched. In particular, it is very difficult to write text without seeing the keypad, including when sending text during class. The touchpad is still a lot of typos when you look at the touchpad.

For users who want to type characters quickly, physical buttons are still better.

A button-type mobile phone with a small keypad is most convenient to enter without looking at the keypad.

(Even if it is a small keypad, if it is a touch pad, if you do not see the touch pad, you can not know whether you pressed the desired button correctly, so you can not input text even if you have memorized the keyboard layout.) Physical buttons are buttons This tilted texture, the touch when touching the button and the button, etc., can tell you which button is currently pressed.)

So the keypad itself

Even a small keypad type touchpad with a large button size, not a QWERTY keyboard,

It is still very difficult to touch the button itself without error,

In Korea and abroad, users are inconvenienced about the inconvenience of the touch pad type. (Of course, it is possible to input letters faster than conventional touch small keypad by applying twin to touch-pad and small-size keypad. .),

While a full-touch-screen mobile phone appeared,

The top plate is a touch screen, but only the letter input has been released to take the conventional button type. This is the case with Samsung's Soul phone (no SCH-W590 picture) or LG's disco phone (SH-650 in figure 11).

 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

About space input

(It is also recommended to apply it to mobile phones with QWERTY keyboard)

The space button function also has a great advantage if it is a combination induction button.

On the computer keyboard, the space button is the most commonly used button for inputting sentences, so the button size is the largest.

(You need to move the cursor to the space function to solve the same button problem that happens when typing characters in multi-tab on a small keypad of any language.

However, in English small keypad, button * or button 0 or button # is used as a space dedicated button. However, in Korean or non-English speaking countries where there are many phonemes, It is often impossible to place a button and the space button function with the right button.

If the space is activated by right button, the copper line is too big. In addition, in the multi-tap method, the same button problem always occurs. When the cursor is moved by pushing the right direction button at that time, too much copper wire is too stressed at that time.

In Korean, Pantech's Sky or Curitel method requires less number of phonemes to input each phoneme separately than the LG EZ method. However, when inputting words, the Pantech system is a multi-tap system, There are many people who prefer the LG EZ system that does not cause problems.

(In addition, the Samsung CheilJin method has the advantage that a beginner can easily input a vowel, but since consonants are input in a multi-tap manner, the same button problems occur and the average number of sounds per phoneme is also large. There are many people.)

In assigning an English alphabet, even if there is a space dedicated button on the button * or button 0 or button #, the letters are mainly assigned to the first to third lines, and the lines are also large because they have to move up to four lines in order to press the space button.

The space button on the keyboard of the computer is always in a position where it is easily caught on the thumb without moving the hand, but in case of the mobile phone, the thumb is consciously moved to the space dedicated button, which is troublesome. Mobile phones with QWERTY keyboards also push all the buttons with their thumbs, which is cumbersome because you have to consciously move your thumbs to the space buttons.

In any case, the conventional mobile phone is not the most careful about space even though it is the most frequently used character (?).

So let me introduce some ways to easily handle spaces in a telephone stream.

1. The space of a specific sequence number of the first group is set.

As in <Figure 06>

To the sixth letter of group 1 of button 1

In the 6th letter of group 1 of Button 2

To the sixth letter of group 1 of button 3

가 배정되는 형식을 말한다.To the sixth letter of group 1 of button 5

Is the type in which the system is assigned.

It is easy to enter a space as you assign a large number of space letters with a large number of specific sequence numbers.

In the case of using the right direction button as a space function button without the space dedicated button like the conventional Hangul input method, if the space is inputted by the first method, the number of the strokes increases by one, but since the average copper line decreases, It's faster, and you can feel more convenient. A space is assigned only to the sixth character of the buttons 4 and 6, and a combination induction button for allowing the button 5 and the button 0 to input the sixth character,

At 5 + 4 or 5 + 6, typing the space in a convenient way at your current two-handed thumb position is quite convenient. Since the two rows are the average vertical positions of both hands, if all of the buttons 4, 5, and 6 in the second row are combined and input as 5 + 4 or 5 + 6, the copper lines are very few, Is smaller than pressing the in button # and there are more benefits if the various advantages of the twin are exhibited.

This is because, even in the case of English, even if button # is designated as a space-dedicated button, the average curvature of the vertical and horizontal directions is larger than 5 + 4 or 5 + 6

(The average position of the thumb of both hands is 1.33 rows of 2 rows in the left hand and 2.67 rows in 2 rows in the right hand.

The average copper wire to button #

On the left hand, line 2, line 1.33, line # 4, line 3, button #

(4-2) ^ 2 + (3-1.33) ^ 2 + (3-1.33) ^ 2) + (3-1.33) ^ 2) + 2 + Root ((4-2) ^ 2 + (3-2.67) ^ 2)] = 2.31

The average copper line to 5 + 4 or 5 + 6

The copper line to 5 + 4

The left hand moves from the second row, row 1.33, to the second row, which is the position of button 4, and the right hand, from row 2, row 2.67, to row 2 and row 2, ) ^ 2) + root ((2-2) ^ 2 + (2-2.67) ^ 2)] = 1

The copper line to 5 + 6

The left hand moves from row 2, line 1 .33, to row 2 and row 2, which is the position of button 5. The right hand moves from row 2. 2.67 to row 2, row 3, ) ^ 2) + root ((2-2) ^ 2 + (3-2.67) ^ 2)] = 1

Become

The copper difference is 2.31: 1, and when it is twinned, the copper wire is 2.31 times smaller. If there are fewer copper lines, you can reduce the speed difference by more than one (see below). ),

If you enter 5 + 4 or 5 + 6, the line to the next letter is naturally smaller than pressing button #, and the various advantages of twins can also be expressed,

5 + 4 or 5 + 6 may be more advantageous in terms of input speed or convenience. (The same applies to the case where the button * or button 0 is used as a space button.) If the button * is a space button and the button # is a space button, When trying to enter the space with the most frequent letters, the two-handed load is not equalized well.)

When the button # is pressed in the fourth row of the button #, the bending angle of the last node of the thumb is also large, which is inconvenient.

You can also add spaces to other buttons to make it easier to enter spaces in other combinations, including 5 + 4 or 5 + 6, as well as 2 + 1 and 2 + 3.

The following two methods, which are more convenient than Method # 1, would almost certainly be more convenient than typing a space with the conventional right button or button #. The third or fourth method would be more convenient.

2. Create a space combination induction button and press any button while pressing the button to input space.

(The more space guiding buttons you have, the easier it will be to enter spaces.)

For example, you can assign a combination induction button function as shown in the table below.

<Figure 37>

1 (first pair consonant) 2 (space) 3 (first pair consonant) 4 (first stroke added) 5 (space) 6 (first stroke added) 7 (second stroke added) 8 (space) 9 (second stroke added) * (Second pair consonant) 0 (space) # (Second pair consonant)

<Figure 38>

1 (pair consonants) 2 (3) 3 (double consonant) 4 (add stroke) 5 (3) 6 (add stroke) 7 (Space) 8 (4) 9 (space) * (space) 0 (4) # (space)

<Figure 38.5>

1 (pair consonants) 2 (space) 3 (add stroke) 4 (add stroke) 5 (double consonant) 6 (space) 7 (Space) 8 (add stroke) 9 (double consonant) * (Double consonant) 0 (add stroke) # (space)

<Figure 38.6>

1 (1) 2 (space) 3 (1) 4 (2) 5 (space) 6 (2) 7 (3) 8 (space) 9 (3) * (4) 0 (space) # (4)

<Figure 38.6> is useful when the number of characters assigned per button does not exceed four.

3. If a character input method does not perform any function with a button combination in which two buttons are pressed at the same time,

If there is a state where two or more buttons are pressed at the same time, a space is inputted. Just close your eyes and press anything more than 2 - it is applicable to almost all conventional letter input methods.

4. If there are some (or many) cases in which a button combination with two buttons simultaneously pressed, such as a twin or `adjacent key input method`

If there are three or four buttons pressed simultaneously, a space is inputted. The thumb of both hands is pressed one or two buttons. You can see that it is easy to do by yourself, as it is pressed between the button and the button so that it is at the center of the pressing part of the thumb. It is easy to move the pressing part slightly toward the center of the fingerprint of the thumb.

You can think of pushing 3 ~ 4 buttons for about 0.2 ~ 0.5 seconds.

(Although a phone with a button border like <Figure 09> may have 3 or 4 buttons pressed at the same time, it is easier to do so if there is no button border. If you press the button for a long time, it will be pressed by 3 ~ 4 buttons at the same time.

Nos. 3 and 4

Since the current line for inputting only the space is 0 (ZERO), the number of strokes is reduced by one strokes, since the current position of the thumb can be just pressed on the spot or moved to the position of the button necessary for inputting the next character. The speed increase effect is.

Although you have to press more than two buttons, it is much faster than pressing the conventional right button and is faster and easier on average than pressing the 4-line space-only button. So it is best to use 3 and 4.

Of course, this can be done in parallel with pressing a conventional right button or pressing a space dedicated button of 4 rows.

You can also combine steps 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Note that,

Overall,

Although the function of any function button including the INS, DEL, CLR, and ENTER buttons of the computer keyboard is added in the character format of a particular group (usually the first group), the character including the stroke addition or the consonant button The function of any function button including INS, DEL, CLR, ENTER button can be combined induction button, just like the combination induction button.

(And it is possible to implement the space button function new way 1 ~ 4.

However, it is not highly recommended because the space button function is a higher priority than the function of any function button including INS, DEL, CLR, ENTER button. The functions of only the buttons unique to the mobile phone, including the addition of a stroke or a double consonant button, can also be made into a combination induction button instead of a letter format. )

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

The dilemma of Hangul input method and solution through twin

For foreign language characters other than Hangul

Phoneme assignments on small keypads are standardized.

There are many different types of input methods. There are various methods including multi-tap method, T9 method, `* &# method`,` adjacent key input method` and 2-TOUCH method.

Changing from a small keypad cell phone to a small keypad cell phone does not have to worry about what a character input method is. (99% most of the time, multi-tap method and T9 method are built in basically, and other methods are not built in.)

However, in the case of Hangul

Phoneme assignments are different depending on the character input method.

Hangul can change other phonemes by changing basic phonemes, so phoneme assignments depend on how to set basic phonemes. Notation on the button is also different.

So, if you change from a small keypad cell phone to a small keypad cell phone, you should consider whether the character input method is your preferred type.

In case of Samsung Electronics'

The basic phoneme (?) Of the vowel is the heaven and earth (ㅣ. ㅡ)

Consonants are assigned to all consonants in complete form and entered in a multi-tap manner.

In case of LG EZ method

The basic phoneme of a vowel is ㅓ ㅓ ㅗ ㅡ ㅣ

The basic phoneme of the consonant is ㄱ ㄴ ㅁ ㅇ ㅇ.

For Pantech's Sky and Curitel method

The basic phoneme of a vowel is ㅑ ㅑ ㅗ ㅗ ㅗ ㅛ ㅜ ㅠ ㅡ ㅣ

Consonants are assigned to all consonants in complete form and entered in a multi-tap manner.

For Motorola

The basic phoneme of a vowel is ㅓ ㅓ ㅗ ㅜ ㅡ ㅣ (like LG Electronics).

The basic phoneme of the consonant is a consonant like a heavenly man.

There are many other ways and it will continue to be born in the future.

If you are a Korean person, you can create a new letter input method.

However, there is a dilemma in Hangul input method.

If you have fewer basic phonemes (= fewer phonemes assigned to completion), it is easy for you to memorize the assignment of the keyboard,

The consonants are very uncomfortable due to the increase in the number of consonants and vowels (especially the double vowels).

For example, this is especially true for the vocabulary entry method.

Chungjin method is the method which is preferred by more than 30 generators who want to reduce the input of characters.

If you have a lot of basic phonemes (= more phonemes assigned to completion), it is difficult to memorize the assignment of the keyboard,

When a pair of consonants and a vowel (especially a double vowel) are inputted, the number of the batters is small and the thumb members are satisfied.

For example, the consonant and vowel input method of the LG EZ method is the same.

The Motorola method is that way too.

Teenagers and 20s with a lot of character input are preferred.

In addition, each character input method has its own unique advantages and unique drawbacks. In other words, there is neither a merit or a disadvantage.

From 2001 to 2007, several governmental agencies including telecommunication research institute (ETRI) and telecommunication technology committee (TTA) negotiated with the handset makers to unify keyboard layouts. However, And it was always lost. However, it is also because there are a lot of people who prefer each method rather than selfishness.

However, as mentioned above, there are advantages and disadvantages for each character input, and the method preferred by the user is each one. In addition, according to the conventional method as described above in the present invention, If twins are assigned, 40 Chinese phonemes can be input as one or two, regardless of the input method of the conventional input method,

The novice who likes the conventional input method can be satisfied, and the nobler who craves the input more quickly can be satisfied with the twin.

This is because the twins can be conveniently input without changing the character mode, whatever the conventional manner, while maintaining the same input method.

In 2008, as the number of foreign-made handsets of Taiwan HTC, etc. increased, the number of Korean handset input systems for overseas handset makers was increased. Therefore, the consumer inconvenience increased,

In the future, if you have to unify, you will have to unify it in a way that includes twins.

Even if it is not a perfect unification, the reunification of <Figure 16.3> can be done at any time without consultation between the mobile phone maker and the related company including the telecommunication company. Therefore, if the telecommunication government agency recommends the unification of <Figure 16.3> to the manufacturer, It seems.

In fact, twins can be a new world standard after the multi-tap and T9 methods. (Even if it is not a new input method, but a character accelerator that helps other methods).

Recall that the complex phonemes of Hangul phonemes break the stereotypes of typing only through the transformation and combination of basic phonemes, and the method of assigning many phonemes to completion as many as possible.

It is difficult to agree on phonemic assignment, and efforts to unify phonemic assignment are now seen as a hindrance to various changes in the development of Hangul. Therefore, there is no need to try to unify keyboard assignment and input methods .

There are twins!

(Or, as mentioned earlier, an organic light-emitting diode or an equivalent to standardization may be performed using the display screen shown in Figure 16.3 and its commentary.)

When twins are applied, they can be input in the conventional input method, so there is no risk in applying the twin to the product.

In addition, conventionally, phonemes not assigned additional phonemes are not indicated, and the phonemes can be memorized by the user (especially, the thumb), so that the twins can be applied so that quick input can be performed.

Koreans can memorize only 1 minute if they are not a thumb, but can remember long if they enter a few times.

Also, it is the same mobile phone, but it can be sold in two types of notation that the markings on the buttons can be assigned to conventional ones and additional ones.

Above

`There are many other methods and will continue to be born in the future.

If you are a Korean person, you can invent a new way of entering characters.

Hangeul has many input methods depending on what is the default letter and whether to change or combine the basic letters.

E.g

The steps to select the default letter in the vowel are as follows.

1 天地 人 (ㅣ ㅡ): ex) Samsung 天地

2 Added 획 ㅡ ㅣ Add: ex) LG EZ system, Motorola system

3) ㅓ ㅕ ㅗ ㅣ ㅣ: Example) Pantech family (Sky, Curitel), Motorola system

4 ㅑ ㅑ ㅓ ㅐ ㅔ ㅔ ㅔ ㅔ ㅔ ㅔ:

5 All 21 vocabulary assignments: Ex) Some forms presented in this guidebook

6 Other

The steps for selecting basic letters for consonants are as follows.

(1 ~ 4 just think of it alone.)

One.

ㅇ ㅡ ㅣ / \ (You can add a phonetic end button and a double consonant button.)

   This is a method of inputting consonants by combining circles, horizontal straight lines, vertical straight lines, and two oblique lines. It is just pressing in the order of writing by hand.

The specific input strokes rule is specific. (The same applies to methods 2 to 4.)

E.g

To enter a, press and to enter

To enter ㅡ, press ㅡ, ㅣ, ㅡ, Ⅰ and ㅡ

To enter a number, press / and \ to enter it.

To enter the name, press and

To enter a number, type ㅡ and ㅡ and / and \

You can type ㅡ by typing ㅡ and ㅡ and ㅇ.

Other characters other than ㅇ ㅡ ㅣ / \ are no longer assigned, so there is nothing to memorize.

However, in particular, when inputting two consonants consecutively, which is the case of inputting the first letter of the preceding letter and the second letter of the back letter, it is possible that only one line of consonants Your device may not be recognizable, so you may need a phonetic finish button.

As shown in <Figure 38.7> below, there is also a way to input Chinese characters by inputting Chinese character input method in Chinese KF600 model keyboard drawing and manual. (Button 1,2,3, A stroke of Chinese characters is written on the 4th and 5th alphabets.)

In this way, it seems that it is much easier to input Korean consonants than Hanja. If Chinese characters can be entered completely easily by this method, it seems to be a very good thing for Chinese people, but it does not seem to be.

However, it is not recommended to apply method # 1 to Hangul input because it has a large number of strokes. The following methods 2, 3 and 4 are also not recommended.

However, if you prefer to use vowel input as a source of verse, I will try using it once. (It seems to be enough to try about four times.)

<Figure 38.7>

2.

/ / / ((/ / / / / / / / /

(If you want to enter d, press a, ㅡ and b to enter faster than method 1,

To enter ㅁ, press ◁ and ▷ to enter faster than method 1,

 If you want to enter a c, press ㅡ and b to enter it faster than the first method,

 To enter ㅌ, press 2 and then press ㅌ to enter faster than method 1.

3.

ㅅ ㅇ ㅡ ㅣ / \ (You can also add a phonetic end button, a double consonant button.)

(Refer to the explanation of No. 4)

4.

ㄱ ㅅ ㅇ ㅡ ㅣ (You can also add a phonetic end button, a double consonant button.)

(If you want to enter the number, press ㅡ and 을,

 If you want to type ㅡ, press 2 and 을 to type faster than 2nd method.)

5.

ㄱ ㄴ ㅁ ㅇ ㅇ Double consonant button, stroke addition button: ex) LG EZ system

6.

14 consonants except for ㅋ ㅁ 19 of 19 consonants to be completed, add stroke button: Ex) Motorola system

7.

All 19 consonants are assigned to completion type: ex) Samsung Cheonjin method, Pantech system - Sky

8.

Others: In some cases, there is a symbol called "ㅗ" to promptly enter the head of a word or phrase. There is also a way to enter the upper part of a character, such as ㅋ or 빨리.

For the elderly who have a lot of memory, it may be easiest to enter the vowel as a celestial person and consonants as ㅇ ㅡ ㅣ / \ (or consonants 2 ~ 4).

What about the next generation of old-fashioned phonemes?

(This method can be very awkward because it is not familiar with Hangul phonemic assignments yet, but habits may be perceived in a decent way.

In the past, since the consonants were already habituated to the completion type, it is only necessary to habitually assign the vowel to the completion type in the future.

It is also possible to input all phonemes in the form of a vowel, consonants in ㅇ ㅡ ㅣ / \ (or consonants 2 ~ 4), and assigning all the phonemes in addition to the completion type. If you enter a vowel as a celestial person, it seems that the consonant is better suited to ㅇ ㅡ ㅣ / \ (or consonant 2 ~ 4 method) rather than assignment of all 19 conventional consonants.

However, this method is not highly recommended, and if you are a Korean person, anyone can think of methods similar to the above methods, so that the method of inputting Hangeul can be born in the future, but such methods are likely to satisfy both beginners and practitioners at the same time Since there is almost no such method, phonemes that are not assigned to completion type are assigned to completion type, and it is meant to satisfy both novice and experienced person in parallel with twin.

The English alphabet, in fact,

ㅡ ㅣ / \ ⊂ ⊃ J O U U You can complete all alphabets with a combination of degrees,

In order to reduce the number of strokes, all are assigned to the completion type.

anyway,

Although the conventional method can be used, even the beginner is satisfied,

All of the Korean phonemes should be assigned to the completion type so that they can input quickly and be satisfied with the expert. (Sky and Curittel of Chun Jiin and Pantech series have already assigned consonants to complete type.

The first phoneme required to complete a phoneme that has not been assigned to the completion form of the EZ or Motorola is already assigned to a particular button,

If you can not memorize it, you will not be able to input the desired phoneme, so it can be said that such method is already assigned to completion type.

For example, if you want to input ㅉ in the LG EZ method, you can not input ㅉ in the first basic phoneme by selecting button 1 of button 1. Beginning with button 7, you must add a stroke and make it a pair of consonants.

Therefore, even if all the phonemes are assigned to the conventional keyboard such as Chun Ji-In, it is not difficult to memorize the keyboard because the number of the phonemes is more than ten.

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

to the next

Let's examine the major disadvantages of various conventional Hangul character input methods, and see that twins can solve the drawbacks.

 <Figure 39>

Conventional
Input method  Disadvantages What the twins do Heavenly Father The same button problem (consonant collision phenomenon) occurs because consonants are inputted in a multi-tap manner. The same button problem does not occur at all in the twin-only mode, in which the first letter is a single letter and the rest letters are twin letters. (When a multi-tab and a twin are in parallel, when the first letter in the same button is continuously input The same button problem occurs, but it can be resolved almost automatically by setting the auto cursor time - described later.) Since the basic vowel is only one (ㅣ. ㅡ), the other vowels are excessive when inputting other basic vowels and double vowels. All 40 phonemes can be assigned a complete phoneme that is not assigned as completed, and all the phonemes can be entered as one or two phonemes in parallel with twins (also applicable to LG and Pantech Motorola). LG EZ Each time you press the Add Consonant or Stroke button, a large line of 4 lines will be generated. If you use the combination button assignments in Figure 30, even if you add a double consonant or a stroke, a copper wire occurs only in one or two lines. <Figure 07 ~ 07.8> Even if you use a line, the line will only occur in the 1st to 3rd lines (<Fig 07 ~ 07.8> is recommended) Pantech family (Sky, Curitel) The same button problem (consonant collision phenomenon) occurs because consonants are inputted in a multi-tap manner. The same button problem does not occur at all in the twin-only mode, in which the first letter is a single letter and the rest letters are twin letters. (When a multi-tab and a twin are in parallel, when the first letter in the same button is continuously input The same button problem occurs, but it can be resolved almost automatically by setting the auto cursor time - described later.) Motorola When you enter the second letter of the consonant button, or when you enter a character with a stroke in the basic vowel, you must press the # button, which results in a large line of 4 lines each time. Figure 30 Combination of induction buttons When assigning a button, a character button within 1 ~ 2 lines can be made into a combination induction button that functions as button #, so that a copper wire occurs only in 1 ~ 2 lines. <Figure 07 ~ 07.8> Even if you use a line, the line will only occur in the 1st to 3rd lines (<Fig 07 ~ 07.8> is recommended) The same button problem occurs because the 1st consonant and the consonant are input in multi-tap method The same button problem does not occur at all in the twin-only mode, in which the first letter is a single letter and the remaining letter is a definite twin. (When a multitap and a twin are in parallel, the same button problem occurs on successive input of the first letter on the same button, but it can be solved almost automatically by setting the auto cursor time setting - described later.)

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Word Writing Practice

So far, I could certainly feel that I could conveniently enter special characters or emoticons, but I could not quite feel that it was convenient to type characters that represent language, I want to input it.

Let 's try to enter the English word and feel the convenience.

Convenience in the case of English also appears in inputting other language characters besides English. The advantage of a twin is that it works almost the same in all languages.

It is possible to feel that a character expressing a language can be entered easily, quickly, and conveniently without leaving the conventional keyboard as it is, without having to worry about assigning additional characters such as punctuation marks or emoticons.

If the twin together with the multi-tap method

The first letter,

The second letter is double click or twin

The third letter is a triple click or twin

The fourth character can be quickly pushed four times or twinned.

(It is recommended that you enter the second or more letters as twins, and the same button problem will occur only if the first letter in the same button is entered consecutively, but the auto cursor time setting can be shortened have.)

If the multitap and twins are not parallel (= twin-only mode)

The first letter,

The second letter is the twin

The third letter is the twin

The fourth letter is entered as a twin.

(For characters in languages other than English, in the twin-dedicated mode, the letters of the second or higher order are entered as twins.)

In this case, the same button problem as the consonant collision does not occur.

And the advantages of twins are exercised more.

Even in multi-tap and twin modes

Suppose that the user tries to input the letters of each button in a twin-only mode as shown below

The first letter,

The second letter is the twin

The third letter is the twin

Enter the fourth letter as twin

In such a situation, if the user repeatedly inputs a first letter of the same button in succession and presses a letter button several times in succession, the device does not recognize that the first letter of each button is inputted several times, The same button problem occurs when trying to input the first letter a number of times.

(The same button problem does not occur because the second or more characters are entered as definite as twins.)

For example, if you press button 2 twice consecutively to enter `AA`, the device recognizes that you want to enter the second letter of button 2 and you just type` B`.

However, when inputting the second or more letters, they are input as twins, so the same button problem does not occur as in the conventional multi-tap method.

For example, when trying to enter `AABBCC`, when entering BB and CC, the same button problem does not occur because it is entered as twin without typing in multi tap.

Since the same button problem occurs for each spelling since A, B, and C are assigned to the same button in the conventional multi-tap method, the cursor must be manually moved for each spelling,

In the above form, when the multitap method and the twins are concurrently performed, the cursor is shifted according to the conventional method only after the first A, or when the second A is inputted, a combination induction button Button 1 or button 3), the same button problem does not occur. Alternatively, the auto cursor time setting may be shortened to almost automatically resolved.

If only the same button problem has not occurred, even if the twin combination is input as the twin combination, that is, when the twin combination is input, the unnecessary one is increased like the conventional artificially moving the cursor, The movement is much less than moving the cursor artificially using the button, and the copper line is reduced when you look more closely at the cursor than with the button * or button 0 or button # in the 4th row. Because the combination induction button for inputting the first letter is present in one row, only one row in the second row, which is the average position of the letter buttons, is moved vertically, and a combination induction button for inputting the first letter is arranged in the first row and the third row There are fewer copper lines in the first and third columns depending on the situation, and there are few copper lines because you can choose a convenient combination guide button.

Since the space-dedicated button must move from the average position of the letter button, 2 rows, to the specific row of 4 rows at all times, it is necessary to move two lines vertically. As twins do not have the option of choosing one or the other of the three columns, the horizontal line is also large.

Also, by adjusting the auto cursor's time setting, you can automatically and conveniently solve the same button problem when you enter the first letter consecutively without using the artificial method like above.

The L705ix model of LG Electronics' Japanese export model is able to set the time of auto cursor

Auto cursor time setting means that when characters are input by the multi-tap method,

This is a way to prevent the same button problem from happening by allowing the cursor to automatically move to the next space when the set time elapses when entering the characters in the same button continuously.

The Japanese characters assigned to the mobile phone have 5 letters assigned to each button, so it seems that the same button problem occurs more frequently than Hangul or English, so it needs to be the auto cursor time setting.

In the conventional multi-tap method, if the cursor is not artificially shifted, usually after 2 seconds, the character is confirmed by the character currently displayed on the cursor, and the cursor moves to the next space. Since 2 seconds is too long, press the space button or the right- The rules were moved artificially.

If the character input speed is fast when setting the auto cursor time, the time setting can be made as short as possible.

If you set a short time for a character whose input speed is slow, you have to press the same button several times until the desired letter is displayed. If the pressing speed is later than the set time, the cursor moves to the next space, Unwanted characters are entered.

So, there are 4 setting times as below.

One. OFF: The cursor should be artificially moved using the right button.

2. SLOW: After 2 seconds, the character of the current cursor is confirmed and the cursor moves to the next space. (Most mobile phones released in Korea are only 2 seconds and can not be changed.)

3. NORMAL: After 1.5 seconds, the character of the current cursor is confirmed and the cursor moves to the next space

4. FAST: After 1 second, the character of the current cursor is confirmed and the cursor moves to the next space

I think it is better to use a new setting time of 0.2 ~ 0.5 second because you can usually press 5 times per second when pressing the same button in multi tap mode.

(The shorter the setting time is, the better, but the shorter the interval of the continuous pressing speed is, the shorter the setting time can be set by the user. It is recommended that you do so.)

In this case, even if you enter the first letter of each button continuously, you do not need to manually move the cursor, so you can press the button with an interval of 0.2 to 0.5 seconds. You may feel like you are not.

If you want to type `AA`, you do not need to move the cursor manually by pressing Button 2, just press Button 2 again after 0.2 to 0.5 seconds have elapsed.

In this way, when the conventional multi-tap method and twin are combined,

The consecutive first letters can be inputted without feeling inconvenience,

If you enter more than the third number of letters in the twin,

If you enter the second letter as a twin, it is recommended that you enter it as a twin instead of a double-click, because the twin's various advantages can be demonstrated. This is because even if the number of teeth is the same, the effect of reducing the copper line and other advantages are exerted.

As above

The same button problem only occurs when trying to input the first letter of each button continuously,

Even if it is more convenient than solving the problem by solving the problem by typing in the twin in the multi-tap system or resolving it by the auto cursor time setting by pressing the space button or the right button additionally,

If you do not want the same button problem to occur at all, you can enter it in twin-only mode.

In the explanation for inputting the specific words below, since there are few words including the first letter consecutively, the same button problem rarely occurs, regardless of whether the twins are in parallel with the multi-tap method or in the twin-exclusive mode, There is little difference.

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Enter an English word

Now let's look at entering specific English words.

The assignment of the keyboard is based on the above-mentioned figure 03

The combination induction button is used as shown in the following figure 07. However, the combination induction button for inputting the first to fourth letters as shown in the combination induction button of FIG. 07.3 to FIG. 7 * It is possible to do so if you prefer to line up buttons 3, 6, 9, #, especially in Hangul input method)

<Figure 03>: Conventional A type English keyboard (= standard keyboard)

<Figure 07>: Combination guidance button assignment table

1 (1) 2 (4) 3 (1) 4 (2) 5 (5) 6 (2) 7 (3) 8 (4) 9 (3) * (6) 0 (5) # (6)

In comparison with the multi-tap method, only the numbers were compared in explaining the input of the word as the twin below,

Because the multi-tap method uses one hand each time one character is entered, one hand is very busy and the other hand is not.

<Example: To enter F, press button 3 three times in succession with one hand, not with right hand or left hand>

Because twins use almost both hands at the moment of typing, they tend to equalize both hands, so even if they are the same, the speed is nearly double that of the multi-tap method. <Example: F is the third letter of button 3 to enter F, Press button 3 while holding down the combination induction button to enter the third letter. That is, there is a speed increase due to equalization of the two-handed load by using both hands almost every two rudder units. >

(The multi-tap method is to go to the target point in a series of two to three consecutive shoulder runs and to change the foot. The twins walk normally with their hair (or jump) to the target point.)

It is therefore recommended to double-click the twin.

And if twins and tapes are in parallel, if you have a habit of typing a third or more letters as twins, you may feel comfortable typing the second letter that you can enter by double clicking. (And, whatever you type in a language, you can enter it with a double click, which makes you feel more comfortable. It is convenient to enter twins even if you are able to enter 2 shots comfortably in one hand by using one hand.)

Therefore, in the case of the following FOLLOW and CIRCLE, the input speed difference of the multi-tap method and the twin is almost caused only by the difference in the number of teeth, but the difference of the input speed in the other case is the difference in the number of teeth, It is important to bear in mind that even things are caused.

It should be noted that there are also speed differences due to the various other advantages of the twins.

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Let's enter FOLLOW.

If you type in the conventional multi-tap method, you will get: (total 17)

3, 3, 6, 6, 6, 5, 5, 5, 5, 5, 6, 6, 6, 9

        F O L L O W

(`#` Refers to the act of artificially moving the cursor with the right button or the space button when the same button problem occurs.)

The twin method is as follows. I need a total of seven.

7 + 3 + 6 + 5 + 5 + 6, 9

      F O L L O W

The right and left hands are shown in the table below.

<Figure 40>: FOLLOW

process One 2 3 4 5 6 7 Left hand
Thumb (L) button
number 7 text
Confirmation right hand
Thumb (R) button
number +3 +6 +5 +5 +6 9 text
Confirmation F O L L O W

In the table above, the process also speaks to the batsman.

The absence of an alphabet below the button number means that it acts as a combination induction button.

(I'll explain below.)

Since the button 7 is a combination induction button for inputting the third letter

While pressing button 7 with your left hand, press buttons 3, 6, 5, 5 and 6 sequentially with your right hand to enter F O L L O.

Press button 9 with your right hand and enter W

A continuation of the button number with `+` does not mean that you are continuing to hold all the buttons, but it means that the other buttons are turned on and off sequentially with the other hand while the first button is held down.

If you want to type! @ # $% ^ & * () On your computer keyboard

It is like pushing the buttons 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 in sequence with the right hand while pressing the shift button with the left hand.

Since button 9 is a combination induction button for inputting the third letter, it can be used instead of button 7, but when button 3 or 6 is pressed while button 9 is pressed, both hands are concentrated on row 3, , It is recommended to use button 7 because the stability of holding the device is low.

Since twins are assigned two or more combinations of the same function combination buttons, there is an advantage in that an optimal combination induction button can be selected according to the situation.

So, like FOLLOW, when each button has a sequence of letters in the same sequence, it can be seen that the combination-induction button previously held can be used as it is when the letters after the letter are input.

However, this advantage does not necessarily occur only when a sequence of characters in the same order of each button is present, but there is such a merit even if there is a spelling that can be inputted to the other button assigned to another button in the middle. (Of course, typing letters in any character, including Hangul and Japanese characters, will cause all of these phenomena to appear)

E.g

NAKED's

When entering NAKE, N, K, and E are the second letters of buttons 6, 5, and 3, respectively.

Even if the first letter A of button 2 is interposed in the middle ( L under the button number below means to press with the left hand and R with the right hand)

Like 4 + 6, 2, 4 + 5 + 3

L R R L R R

      Na K E

Button 4, which is a combination induction button used when inputting K and E, can use button 4, which is a combination induction button used for inputting N, in a state where the copper wire is 0.

If the copper line is 0, there is a speed increase effect that the batting number decreases by one.

REMEMBER's

When entering EMEMBE, E, E, B, and E are the second letters of buttons 3, 3, 2, and 3, respectively.

Even though the first letter M of the button 6 is interposed in the middle

4 + 3, 6, 4 + 3, 6, 4 + 2 + 3

L R R L R R L R R

      E M E M B E

Button 4, which is a combination induction button used when entering E, B, and E on the back, can use Button 4, which is a combination induction button used for inputting the first E, in a state where the copper wire is 0.

When entering LADY, L and Y are the third letters of buttons 5 and 9, respectively.

Even if the first letters A and D of buttons 2 and 3 are interleaved

Like 7 + 5, 2, 3, 7 + 9

L R R R L R

      LA D Y

The button 7, which is a combination induction button used when inputting Y, can use the button 7 which is the combination induction button used when the L is inputted, while keeping the state of the copper line at zero.

Of COTTON

When entering COTTO, C, O, and O are the third letters of buttons 2, 6, and 6, respectively.

Even if the first letters T and T of button 8 are interleaved

Like 7 + 2 + 6, 8, 8, 7 + 6

L R R R R L R

      C O T T O

Button 7, which is a combination induction button used for inputting the last O, can be used as it is in the state where the copper wire is 0, as the combination induction button 7 used for inputting the previous CO.

For more examples, type in the most frequent 1000 words of the attached English word, and look at the words you have checked.

 Enter C I R C L E

If you type in the conventional multi-tap method, you will get: (total 17)

2, 2, 4, 4, 4, 7, 7, 7, 2, 2, 2, 5, 5, 3, 3

        C I R C L E

The twin method is as follows. (8 total is needed)

9 + 2 + 4 + 7 + 2 + 5, 4 + 3

      C I R C L E

<Figure 41>: CIRCLE

process One 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Left hand
Thumb (L) button
number +2 +4 +7 +2 +5 4 text
Confirmation C I R C L right hand
Thumb (R) button
number 9 +3 text
Confirmation E

Since the button 9 is a combination induction button for inputting the third character

While holding down button 9 with your right hand, press buttons 2, 4, 7, 2, 5 in sequence with your left hand to enter C I R C L.

Since button 4 is a combination induction button for inputting the second letter

While holding down button 4 with your left hand, press button 3 with your right hand and enter E.

In step 1, since button 7 is a combination induction button for inputting the third letter, it can be used in place of button 9. However, when button 4 is pressed while button 7 is pressed, both hands are concentrated on one row, , It is recommended that you use button 9 because it is less reliable to hold the device. Also, since the button 7 can not be pressed again while the button 7 is being pressed, the button number 9 must be changed to the button 9, so that the number of bats is increased.

Therefore, we recommend that you use button 9 because it is a combination induction button that lets you enter the third letter.

With this in mind, choosing a combination induction button is also very easy, if you just type in a few, and even if you make a mistake and choose your bats more than optimal, you are far less than the traditional multi-tap method.

The basics of selecting a combination induction button are

When entering letters in one column, select the combination guide button in column 3,

When entering letters in three columns, select the combine guidance button in column 1,

When entering letters in two columns, you can select a combination of one or three columns.

Even if other buttons such as FOLLOW are selected, when the letters in the same order of the second and third column buttons are continuous,

Even if other buttons such as CIRCLE are selected, it is possible to input the minimum number of combinations by selecting the combination guide button of three columns when the letters of the same order of the first and second column buttons are continuous.

I will not comment on why any button was chosen as a combinatorial button in the future.

If you think about it, you know it and you have a personal taste.

Particularly, when inputting the characters assigned to the two-column button, it is convenient for the user to select the combination guide button for one column, and there are some users who are comfortable to select the combination guide button for the three columns.

And, as you type in the twins repeatedly, when typing a certain word, it is more advantageous to use one of the two same function combination induction buttons to input spellings.

For example, the LOV for LOVE is the third letter of buttons 5, 6, and 8,

The combination induction button for inputting the third letter is button 7 and button 9,

It also means that it is easier to use button 7 than button 9.

When the button 9 is used, when the button 9 is pressed with the right hand and the button 6 is pressed with the left hand, both hands are concentrated on the third row, and the buttons 9 and 6 are attached to each other. (But if a button like the "wine phone" in Figure 12 ~ 14 is made in a much bigger form than a regular phone, it would be light if you only look at finger interference.)

 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Let's enter W I N G

The input in the conventional multi-tap method is as follows. (7 total is needed)

9, 4, 4, 4, 6, 6, 4

W I N G

The twin method is as follows. . (6 total is needed)

9, 9 + 4, 4 + 6, 4

W I N G

<Figure 42>: WING

process One 2 3 4 5 6 Left hand
Thumb (L) button
number +4 4 4 text
Confirmation I G right hand
Thumb (R) button
number 9 9 +6 text
Confirmation W N

Press button 9 with your right hand to enter W

With the right hand already on button 9,

Since the button 9 is a combination induction button for inputting the third character

While holding down button 9 with your right hand, press button 4 with your left hand to enter I,

(Since the button 9 has already had the right hand, the line for pressing the combination induction button is 0)

With button 4 already on your left hand,

Since button 4 is a combination induction button for inputting the second letter

While holding down button 4 with your left hand, press button 6 with your right hand to enter N,

(Since the button 4 has already had a left hand, the line for pressing the combination induction button is 0)

Also, if you already have button 4 on your left hand

Press button 4 with your left hand and enter G.

(Since the button 4 has already had a left hand, the line for pressing the letter button is 0)

Since the twins have a combination of the letter buttons as shown above,

As in steps 1 to 2 or 3 to 4, with the copper line at zero, the previous letter button became a combination induction button for entering letters later.

As in steps 4 and 6, a very good phenomenon occurs when the copper line is 0 and the combination induction button for inputting the previous letter becomes a letter button for the latter letter.

If the copper line is 0, there is a speed increase effect that the batting number decreases by one.

Because of the above phenomenon, very few copper wires are made, which is one of the advantages of twins.

So it is strongly recommended to enter the second letter of each button as a twin instead of a double click.

In twins

Even if the character button becomes the combination guidance button and the combination guidance button does not become the character button,

The combination induction button is always in one to three rows and the letter button is also in one to three rows,

In row 2, the average vertical position of the letter buttons

There are two rows of vertical lines for pressing the combination induction button having an average position of two rows and a total of two copper lines for each of the first row and the third row,

Since it is possible to select a combination induction button having few copper lines according to the situation,

You can select one or three columns with the Combination Direction button at the 1.33 or 2.67 column horizontal position, so you can move from 1.33 column to 1. column, 2.67 column to 3 column combination button And the number of copper wires is 0.33.

But

A combination induction button for inputting the second character of the button *

Used as a combination-induction button that lets you enter the third letter of button #

The `* &# method`

The combination induction buttons * and # are always on line 4

Since the character buttons are in the first to third lines,

In row 2, the average vertical position of the letter buttons

The vertical copper lines for pressing the combination buttons "*" and "#" in the fourth row are enlarged as two lines, and the copper line is increased even when returning to the average position again,

In the average horizontal position of the letter buttons, column 1.33 or column 2.67

To enter the second letter, always use the button * only with the combination induction button.

To enter the third letter, you always use the button # only as a combination guiding button, so you always have only three lines

The horizontal line is also large. Again, the copper wire will return to its average position,

If the letter button for inputting the previous letter is a combination inducing button for inputting a letter at a later time, such as when I of the WING WI is input,

This advantage does not only occur when two spells that cause such a case are consecutive, but also when there is a spelling that can be inputted in the middle of a single button assigned to another button. (Of course, typing letters in any character, including Hangul and Japanese characters, will cause all of these phenomena to appear)

E.g,

When entering SMALL ( L under the button number below means left hand, R means right hand press)

8 + 7, 6, 2, 7 + 5 + 5

R L R R L R R

      S MA L L

Even if the first letters M and A of the buttons 6 and 2 are interleaved

Button 7, which is a combination induction button used for inputting the last LL, can be used as it is in the state where the copper line is 0, as the letter button 7 for inputting the previous S

When entering GAME

Like 4, 2, 6, 4 + 3

L R R L R

GE M E

Even if the first letters A and M of the buttons 2 and 6 are interleaved

Button 4, which is a combination induction button used when entering the last E, can be used as it is when the copper wire is 0 in the button 4, which is a letter button for inputting the previous G

Of STORE

When entering STO

Like 8 + 7, 8, 7 + 6

R L R R R

      S T O

Even if the first letter T of the button 8 is inserted in the middle

The button 7, which is a combination induction button used when inputting the O, can be used as it is in the state where the copper wire is 0,

CONSIDER

When entering the IDE

Like 9 + 4, 3, 4 + 3

R L R R R

      I D E

Even though the first letter of button 3 is interposed in the middle

Button 4, which is a combination induction button used when inputting E, can be used as it is in the state where the copper wire is 0,

For more examples, type in the most frequent 1000 words of the attached English word, and look at the words you have checked.

And

In the case where the copper wire is 0 and the combination induction button for inputting the previous letter is a letter button for inputting a later character as in the case of inputting NG of the WING, This advantage does not only occur if spelling is continuous, but also if there is spelling that can be entered in the middle of a single button assigned to another button. (Of course, typing letters in any character, including Hangul and Japanese characters, will cause all of these phenomena to appear)

E.g,

When entering CAMP

Like 7 + 2, 2, 6, 7

L R R R L

      Ca M P

Even if the first letters A and M of the buttons 2 and 6 are interleaved

Button 7, which is a character button used for inputting P, can be used as it is in the state where the copper line is 0, as the combination induction button 7 for inputting the preceding C

When entering FAR

Like 7 + 3, 2, 9 + 7

L R R R L

      Fe R

Even if the first letter A of button 2 is inserted in the middle

Button 7, which is a character button used for inputting R, can use button 7, which is a combination induction button for inputting the preceding F, in a state where the copper wire is 0

For more examples, type in the most frequent 1000 words of the attached English word, and look at the words you have checked.

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Let's enter C O P Y

The input in the conventional multi-tap method is as follows. (10 total is needed)

2, 2, 2, 6, 6, 6, 7, 9, 9, 9

          C O P Y

The twin method is as follows. (6 total)

7 + 2 + 6, 7, 7 + 9

    C O P Y

<Figure 43>: COPY

process One 2 3 4 5 6 Left hand
Thumb (L) button
number 7 7 7 text
Confirmation P right hand
Thumb (R) button
number +2 +6 +9 text
Confirmation C O Y

Since the button 7 is a combination induction button for inputting the third letter

While holding down button 7 with your left hand, press buttons 2 and 6 sequentially with your right hand to enter CO

With button 7 already on your left hand

Press button 7 with your left hand and enter P.

In the state where the left hand is already on the button 7 and the copper wire is 0,

Since the button 7 is a combination induction button for inputting the third letter

While holding down button 7 with your left hand, press button 9 with your right hand to enter Y.

In steps 1 and 4, in the state where the copper line is 0, the combination induction button for inputting the previous letter becomes the letter button of the later letter,

In steps 4 to 5, with the copper line at zero, the previous letter button became a combination induction button for entering letters at a later time.

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Enter T A X I

The input in the conventional multi-tap method is as follows. (7 total is needed)

8, 2, 9, 9, 4, 4, 4

TA X I

The twin method is as follows. (6 total)

8, 2, 4 + 9, 9 + 4

TA X I

<Figure 44>: TAXI

process One 2 3 4 5 6 Left hand
Thumb (L) button
number 8 4 +4 text
Confirmation T I right hand
Thumb (R) button
number 2 +9 9 text
Confirmation A X

Press button 8 with your left hand to enter T.

Press button 2 with your right hand and enter A

Since button 4 is a combination induction button for inputting the second letter

While holding down button 4 with your left hand, press button 9 with your right hand to enter X,

With the right hand already on the button 9,

Since the button 9 is a combination induction button for inputting the third character

While holding down button 9 with your right hand, press button 4, which already has your left hand, and enter I.

To input `X I`

In steps 3 and 6, when the copper line is 0, the combination induction button for inputting the previous letter becomes the letter button of the later letter,

In the steps 4 to 5, a phenomenon occurs in which the copper wire is reduced to double, in which the copper wire is 0, and the previous letter button is a combination guide button for inputting later letters.

4 + 9, 9 + 4, it means that there is only a copper wire to input X and no copper wire to input I.

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Let's enter the fourth letter (S) once.

Let's enter S T Y L E

The input in the conventional multi-tap method is as follows. (13 total is needed)

7, 7, 7, 7, 8, 9, 9, 9, 5, 5, 5, 3, 3

               S T Y L E

The twin method is as follows. (8 total is needed)

8 + 7, 8, 7 + 9 + 5, 4 + 3

    S T Y L E

<Figure 45>: STYLE

process One 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Left hand
Thumb (L) button
number +7 7 4 text
Confirmation S right hand
Thumb (R) button
number 8 8 +9 +5 +3 text
Confirmation T Y L E

Since the button 8 is a combination induction button for inputting the fourth letter

While holding down button 8 with your right hand, press button 7 with your left hand to enter S

With button 8 already on your right hand

Button 8 is torn off with the right hand, T is input,

When the button 7 has the left hand and the copper wire is 0,

Since the button 7 is a combination induction button for inputting the third letter

While holding button 7 with your left hand, use buttons 9 and 5 with your right hand to enter Y L.

Since button 4 is a combination induction button for inputting the second letter

While holding down button 4 with your left hand, press button 3 with your right hand to enter E.

In steps 1 and 3, in the state where the copper line is 0, the combination induction button for inputting the previous letter becomes the letter button of the later letter,

(There are many words with ST in English.)

In steps 2 and 4, with the copper line at zero, the previous letter button became a combination induction button for entering letters later.

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Type S S P E N D

The input in the conventional multi-tap method is as follows. (17 total is needed)

7, 7, 7, 7, 8, 8, 7, 7, 7, 7, 7, 3, 3, 6, 6, 3

               SI S P E N D

The twin method is as follows.

8 + 7, 4 + 8, 8 + 7, 7, 4 + 3 + 6,

    SI S P E N D

<Figure 46>: SUSPEND

process One 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Left hand
Thumb (L) button
number +7 4 +7 7 4 text
Confirmation S S P right hand
Thumb (R) button
number 8 +8 8 +3 +6 3 text
Confirmation U E N D

Since the button 8 is a combination induction button for inputting the fourth letter

While holding down button 8 with your right hand, press button 7 with your left hand to enter S

With the button 8 already on the right hand,

Since button 4 is a combination induction button for inputting the second letter

While holding down button 4 with your left hand, press button 8 with your right hand to enter U.

In a state in which the right hand is already on the button 8 and the copper wire is 0,

Since the button 8 is a combination induction button for inputting the fourth letter

While holding down button 8 with your right hand, press button 7 with your left hand to enter S

Press button 7 with your left hand and enter P.

Since button 4 is a combination induction button for inputting the second letter

While holding down button 4 with your left hand, press buttons 3 and 6 sequentially with your right hand to enter E N.

Press button 3 with your right hand and enter D

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Enter F E E D

The input in the conventional multi-tap method is as follows. (11 total is needed)

3, 3, 3, #, 3, 3, #, 3, 3, #, 3

         F E E D

The twin method is as follows. . (6 total)

7 + 3, 4 + 3 + 3, 3

     F E E D

<Figure 47>: FEED

process One 2 3 4 5 6 Left hand
Thumb (L) button
number 7 4 text
Confirmation right hand
Thumb (R) button
number +3 +3 +3 3 text
Confirmation F E E D

Since the button 7 is a combination induction button for inputting the third letter

While holding down button 7 with your left hand, press button 3 with your right hand to enter F,

Since button 4 is a combination induction button for inputting the second letter

While pressing button 4 with your left hand, press button 3 twice in succession with your right hand to enter E E,

Press button 3 with your left hand and enter D.

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Enter M O N O

The input in the conventional multi-tap method is as follows. (12 total is needed)

6, #, 6, 6, 6, #, 6, 6, #, 6, 6, 6

M O N O

(`#` Refers to the act of artificially moving the cursor with the right button or the space button when the same button problem occurs.)

The twin method is as follows. (7 total is needed)

6, 7 + 6, 4 + 6, 7 + 6

M O N O

<Figure 48>: MONO

steersman One 2 3 4 5 6 7 Left hand
Thumb (L) button
number 7 4 7 text
Confirmation right hand
Thumb (R) button
number 6 +6 +6 +6 text
Confirmation M O N O

Press button 6 with your right hand and enter M.

Since the button 7 is a combination induction button for inputting the third letter

While holding down button 7 with your left hand, press button 6 with your right hand to enter O,

Since button 4 is a combination induction button for inputting the second letter

While holding down button 4 with your left hand, press button 6 with your right hand to enter N,

Since the button 7 is a combination induction button for inputting the third letter

While holding down button 7 with your left hand, press button 6 with your right hand and enter O.

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Let's practice a few words more easily.

SIX

8 + 7, 9 + 4, 4 + 9

R L R L L R

      S I X

HAPPY

6 + 4, 2, 7, 3 + 7, 7 + 9

R L R L R L L R

      HE P P Y

The reason for entering 3 + 7 when entering the second P

The same button problem occurs when the first letter P of the button 7 is inputted continuously and the twins are in parallel with the multi-tap method. Therefore, in order to solve the same button problem, Button 3 was used.

In the case of the first letter sequence as above, it may be more convenient to input PP by 3 + 7 + 7 by using button 3 which is a combination induction button for inputting the first letter from P to the first letter have. (It is easier to think that if the same letter is continuous, regardless of which letter of the same letter is the letter of the same button, if the same letter is continuous, unconditionally use the combination induction button.)

If you set the auto cursor time setting to a shorter value, you do not need a combination guide button when typing PP, just press button 7 twice.

(In the twin-only mode, the same button problem does not occur, so you do not have to use Button 3, which is a combination induction button that lets you enter the first letter when entering PP.

ADD

2, 3, 1 + 3

L R L R

A D D

The reason I entered 1 + 3 when entering the second D

The same button problem occurs when the first letter D of the button 3 is inputted continuously and the twins are in parallel with the multi-tap method. Therefore, in order to solve the same button problem, Button 1 was used.

In the case of the first letter as above, it is more convenient for the psychological type to input DD to 1 + 3 + 3 by using button 1 which is a combination induction button for inputting the first letter from D to the first letter have.

If you set the auto cursor time setting to short, you only need to press button 3 twice when entering DD.

(In the twin-only mode, you do not need to use Button 1, which is a combination induction button that lets you enter the first letter when you enter DD, because you do not have the same button problem.) Just press Button 3 twice.

EGG

4 + 3, 3 + 4 + 4

L R R L L

       E G G

In order to solve the same button problem, when the GG, which is the first letter of the button 4, is inputted, when the twins are in parallel with the multi-tap method, the same button problem occurs. Therefore, I tried typing GG with 3 + 4 + 4 using button 3, which is a combination induction button to input.

If you set the auto cursor time setting to short, you only need to press button 4 twice when entering GG.

(In the twin-only mode, you do not need to use Button 3, which is a combination guiding button that lets you enter the first letter when you enter GG, because you do not have the same button problem.) Just press Button 4 twice.

MOON

6, 7 + 6 + 6, 4 + 6

R L R R L R

M O O N

HIGH

6 + 4, 9 + 4, 4, 6 + 4

R L R L L R L

      H I G H

POKE

7, 7 + 6, 4 + 5 + 3

L L R L R R

P O K E

YIELD

7 + 9, 9 + 4, 4 + 3, 9 + 5, 3

L R R L L R R L R

      Y I E L D

SEXY

8 + 7, 4 + 3 + 9, 7 + 9

R L L R R L R

      S E X Y

STRIKE

8 + 7, 8, 9 + 7 + 4, 4 + 5 + 3

R L R R L L L R R

      T R I K E

POST

7, 7 + 6, 8 + 7, 8

L L R R L R

P O S T

POPCORN

7, 7 + 6, 7, 7 + 2 + 6, 9 + 7, 4 + 6

L L R L L R R R L L R P O P C O R N

POPOFF

7, 7 + 6, 7, 7 + 6 + 3 + 3

L L R L L R R

P O P O F F

ING (currently in progress)

9 + 4, 4 + 6, 4

R L L R L

      I N G

IN

9 + 4, 4 + 6

R L L R

      I N

IS

9 + 4, 8 + 7

R L R L

      I S

ED (past)

4 + 3, 3

L R R

      E D

OF

7 + 6 + 3

L R R

       O F

OFF

7 + 6 + 3 + 3

L R R R

       O F F

BE

4 + 2 + 3

L R R

      B E

ON

7 + 6, 4 + 6

L R L R

      O N

YOU

7 + 9 + 6, 4 + 8

L R R L R

        Y OU

I

9 + 4

R L

      I

SS in word

8 + 7 + 7

R L L

      S S

ZZZ

8 + 9 + 9 + 9

L R R R

      Z Z Z

LOVE

7 + 5 + 6 + 8, 4 + 3

L R R R L R

      L O V E

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

In lowercase mode

When Hi, I am Susy is to be entered in uppercase or lowercase,

To enter H, I, S in uppercase

In the conventional multi-tap method

Although it was necessary to change the character mode in the capital letter mode,

As a twin,

Without changing the character mode, in lower case mode

As a second group letter input method

You can type capital letters as shown below.

6 + 4 ~, 9 + 4 ~, 8 + 7 ~

    H I S

While holding down button 6 with your right hand, press button 4 with your left hand for at least 0.5 seconds to enter an uppercase H,

While holding down button 9 with your right hand, press button 4 with your left hand for at least 0.5 second to enter an uppercase I,

While holding down button 8 with your right hand, press button 7 with your left hand for at least 0.5 seconds to enter an uppercase S.

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Let's enter A ~ Z

If you type in the conventional multi-tap method, you will get: (total 74)

2, 2, 2, 3, #, 3, 3, #, 3, 3,

A B C D E F

4, 4, 4, 4, 5, 5, 5, 5, 5,

G H I J K L

6, #, 6, 6, #, 6, 6, 6,

M N O

7, 7, 7, 7, 7, 7, 7, 7, 7, 7, 7,

P Q R S

8, #, 8, 8, #, 8, 8, 8,

Ti V

9, 9, 9, 9, 9, 9, 9, 9, 9, 9,

W X Y Z

The twin method is as follows. (44 total)

Below the button number, L stands for the left hand and R stands for the right hand (depending on the individual preference of the twins).

2, 4 + 2, 7 + 2, 3, 4 + 3, 7 + 3, 4, 6 + 4, 9 +

R L R L R R L R L R L R L R L

A B C D E F G H I

7 + 6, 7 + 6, 7 + 6, 7 + 9, 7 + 8,

R L R L R R L R L R L R L R L R L

J K L M N O P Q R S

8, 4 + 8, 7 + 8, 9, 4 + 9, 7 + 9, 8 + 9

R L R L R R L R L R L R

T U V W X Y Z

As a twin, typing is less than typing in the multi-tap method, and because of the various advantages of the twins at the beginning of this explanatory note, A to Z are also the fastest and convenient way to enter in the small keypad.

(If you want to continue typing the letters of the second letter and the third letter sequentially, you only need to move one line to the 2nd line and the 3rd line in order to press each combination induction button.) In this case, It is also possible to rotate (roll?), So if you use the other way, you can easily input without moving lines.)

I have a lower case a ~ z

Taking 13 seconds to write by hand,

Typing as a twin takes 11 seconds.

And if you enter a word, it may be faster because you have several advantages of twins (mainly 5 to 7 times) including FOLLOW and WING.

So, writing a novel with a cell phone is not too bad.

Let's also enter it once with `* &# method`.

The button * functions as a shift button for inputting the second letter of each button,

Let's assume that button # acts as a shift butt to let you enter the third letter of each button.

2, 3 + 3, # 3, 4, * + 4, # + 4,

A B C D E F G H I

5, * + 5, # + 5, 6, * + 6, # + 6,

J K L M N O

7, * + 7, # + 7, 7, 7, 7, 7,

P Q R S

8, * + 8, # + 8, 9, * + 9, # + 9, 9, 9, 9, 9

T U V W X Y Z

Twins and batters are very similar

The copper wire is very large compared to the twins,

When inputting H and Q, both hands are concentrated in one row,

When entering F, O, and Y, both hands are centered on three rows,

Both fingers interfere with each other, and the stability of holding the device is also noticeable.

Especially

Press button 7 and button * almost simultaneously,

When button 9 and button # are pressed almost at the same time, it becomes deeper.

And since there is no shift butt that lets you enter the fourth letter

To enter S, press button 7 four times in multi-tap mode,

To enter Z, press button 9 four times in multi-tap mode.

And when writing uppercase and lowercase letters like AaBbCcDeFfGgHhIiJjKkLlMmNnOoPpQqRrSsTtUuVvWwXxYyZz,

As twins,

In lower case mode,

The lower case letters are input by the twin first group letter input method,

Upper case letters can be easily input by inputting with the twin second group letter input method without changing the character mode,

Other ways are quite cumbersome.

And the more frequently you add the 1000 words of English, the more you see and check the input, the more you will feel the convenience of the twins.

Since Japanese characters are assigned five characters per button,

As with FOLLOW and CIRCLE,

When there is a consecutive sequence of characters in each button, the number of cases in which the combination-inducing button previously pressed can be used as it is

You might think that 3 to 4 characters per button are much smaller than the English assigned, but since Japanese does not have a space, it reduces the number of situations that are likely to be small, so similar to English, the advantages of such twins are similar to English Lt; / RTI &gt; With this principle,

Since the letter buttons are a combination induction button

Figure 42 As you type `WING`

When the copper wire is 0, the letter button of the previous letter becomes the combination guide button for inputting the later letter.

In the state where the copper line is 0, the combination induction button for inputting the previous letter is a letter button of the later letter,

The advantages of other twins, including the minimization of copper lines, can also be expressed at similar frequencies to English.

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Let's make sure that the advantages of applying twins in English are implemented in the characters of all languages including Hangul, while typing Korean words by applying twins.

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Let's take an example of applying twins to the Samsung Heavenly Way method of <Figure 22>: Heavenly Man: Improvement: 2 lines per button.

In the case of a sequence of letters in the same sequence, such as when entering FOLLOW or CIRCLE, you can use the previous combination-induction button as it is, thus reducing the number of strokes and eventually reducing the number of strokes.

(This occurs not only between the beginning and the end of the same syllable, but also occurs in some or all of the range of the beginning, middle, and end of the first syllable, the beginning, middle, and end of the syllable. It is easy to understand how to improve the Hangul input method other than one method.

In the back, I have given an example of typing an upcoming `` say '' to see what happens.

Let 's type `tall`.

If you enter it using the conventional method, you need: (total 6)

6, 6, 2, 3, 5, 5,

     I. ㅡ d

The twin method is as follows. (4 total is needed)

4 + 6 + 3 + 5

    ㅗ ㄹ

Since 2 is the second letter of button 6, ㅗ is the second letter of button 3, and 이 is the second letter of button 5

If you press the button 4, which is a combination induction button for inputting the second letter, with the left hand and press the buttons 6, 3, 5 with the right hand, `Toll` is inputted.

Let 's type `missing'.

If you enter it in the conventional way, it is as follows (9 total is needed)

 7, 7, 7, 1, 2, 1, 8, 8, 8

         ㅃ ㅣ. ㅣ ㅆ

The twin method is as follows. (4 total is needed)

9 + 7 + 5 + 8

      ㅃ ㅐ ㅆ

ㅃ is the third letter of button 7, ㅐ is the third letter of button 5, and ㅆ is the third letter of button 8

The user presses the button 9, which is a combination induction button for inputting the third character, with the right hand while pressing the buttons 7, 5 and 8 with the right hand.

Let 's type `say'.

If you enter it using the conventional method, you need: (total 12)

 8, 8, 1, 2, 5, 5, 0, 0, 1, 2, 5, 5

     ㅎ ㅣ. ㅁ ㅁ ㅣ. D

The twin method is as follows. (7 total is needed)

6 + 8 + 1 + 5 + 0 + 1 + 5

      ㅎ ƒ ƒ ƒ

Since 'a, d, a, a, d' are the second letters of buttons 8,1,5,0,1,5,

1, 5, 0, 1, and 5 with the left hand while pressing the button 6, which is a combination inducing button for inputting the second letter, with the right hand, D '

(You can use the same combinatorial button for different syllables.)

Since the letter buttons are a combination induction button

Figure 42 As you type `WING`

In the state where the copper line is 0, the previous letter button becomes a combination induction button for inputting later letters,

(It also occurs not only between the beginning and the end of the same syllable, but also between the beginning, middle, and end of the first syllable, and between the beginning, middle, and end of the backward syllable. It is easy to understand that it is easy to assume that the phonemes are input in a row without consecutive digits.

Let 's type `wed'.

If you enter it in the conventional way, you will get the following (8 total is needed)

 8, 8, 8, 2, 3, 1, 2, 1

           ㅆ. ㅡ ㅣ. ㅣ

The twin method is as follows. (4 total is needed)

7 + 8, 8 + *

    ㅆ ㅙ

(It is much faster because there are many differences in the numbers and fewer copper lines)

이 Because this is the third letter of button 8

While holding the button 7, which is a combination inducing button for inputting the third character, with the left hand, press the button 8 with the right hand to enter the key,

Because ㅙ is the fourth letter of the button *

With the right hand already on button 8,

Press the button * with the right hand while pressing the button 8 with the right hand to enter the fourth letter, and then press ㅙ.

[(If you assign the ㅙ to the third letter of the button *

9 + 8 + * can also be entered as a third.

    ㅆ ㅙ

(For example, in the back of the Pantech series, ㅆ and ㅙ are placed in the same order of the different buttons, so you can input `

At this time,

ㅆ This is the third letter of button 8 and the third letter of the button *

You can press button 8, * with your left hand, while holding down button 9, which is a combination induction button to input the third letter, with your right hand)

Even if you enter it on a computer keyboard, you need a total of four.

To enter ㅆ, hold down the shift button and press ㅅ button with ㅆ assigned to the second letter,

To input ㅙ, you must input ㅗ and ㅐ in combination.

On a computer keyboard

To enter Hangul pair consonants, you must press the button assigned to each pair of consonants while holding down the shift key.

To enter all of the remaining voices except the voicemail, you will need two voices to enter the voicemail.

because,

ㅖ ㅒ must be pressed by pressing the assigned button while pressing the shift key,

The reason for this is that you have to type in a combination of component short vowels.

So on a computer keyboard

With double consonants

All the diphthongs except ㅐ ㅔ ㅒ ㅒ

You always need four strokes to enter the combined letter.

However, in a small keypad, when all the phonemes are assigned to the completed type and input as twins,

You can enter any pair of consonants in less than two letters,

You can enter all the double beeps within 2 lines.

If the two consonants and diphthongs you want to input are assigned in the same order of the other buttons, you can also enter them in three letters.

In other words, when you type these letters, you have a speed faster than a computer keyboard.

Since the letter buttons are a combination induction button

Figure 42 As you type `WING`

When the copper line is 0, the previous letter button becomes a combination induction button for inputting a later letter.

In the state where the copper line is 0, the combination induction button for inputting the previous letter is a letter button of the later letter,

A case in which a phenomenon occurs in which both cases occur and the copper wire is minimized

(There are more cases where only one of the two is occurring.)

Let 's type `must'.

If you enter it in the conventional way, you will get the following (total 6)

 4, 4, 4, 2, 3, 4

          ㄲ. ㅡ a

The twin method is as follows. (5 total is needed)

9 + 4, 4 + 3, 4

   ㄲ ㅗ a

(The difference is not so great, but it is much faster because both hands are used evenly and the copper wire is very small.)

ㄲ Because this is the third letter of button 4

Press the button 9, which is a combination induction button for inputting the third letter, with the right hand, press the button 4 with the left hand,

If the left hand is already on button 4 and the copper line is 0

Because ㅗ is the second letter of button 3

Press and hold Button 4, which is a combination induction button that allows you to enter the second letter, with your left hand, and then press button 3 with your right hand to enter ㅗ.

If the left hand is already on button 4 and the copper line is 0

Since a is the first letter of button 4

Press button 4 with your left hand in unison to enter a.

Pantech family, LG EZ, Motorola method,

If you enter the twin in parallel mode, or twin-only mode

All phonemes can be entered in less than two letters,

If you double-click a phoneme,

If there is a sequence of letters in the same order of each button, as in the case of inputting English FOLLOW or CIRCLE, you can use the previous combination push button as it is,

Since the letter buttons are a combination induction button

Figure 42 As you type `WING`

When the copper line is 0, the previous letter button becomes a combination induction button for inputting a later letter.

In the state where the copper line is 0, the combination induction button for inputting the previous letter is a letter button of the later letter,

The phenomenon of minimizing the copper line occurs and the word can be input very quickly.

Please try it yourself.

Let's just add a few words to the twins in a way other than the Heavenly Way.

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

`<Figure 25>: Pantech series: Sky Curitel: Improvement: 2 lines per button

Let 's type `wed'.

If you enter it with the conventional sky method, you will get the following (6 total is needed)

 7, 7, 7, 9, 3, 2

        ㅆ ㅗ ㅣ

The twin method is as follows. (3 total required)

9 + 7 + 5

      ㅆ ㅙ

ㅆ is the third letter of button 7 and ㅙ is the third letter of button 5

While pushing the button 9, which is a combination induction button for inputting the third letter, with the right hand, press the buttons 7 and 5 in order with the left hand.

Let 's type `set'.

If you enter it with the conventional sky method, you will get the following (6 total is needed)

 7, 7, 6, 2, 7, 7

     ㅅ ㅓ ㅣ

The twin method is as follows. (6 total)

6 + 7, 7 + 6, 6 + 7

    ㅅ ㅔ ㅅ

(The difference is not so great, but it is much faster because both hands are used evenly and the copper wire is very small.)

Because this is the second letter of button 7

While holding down the button 6, which is a combination induction button for inputting the second letter, with the right hand, press the button 7 with the left hand to input the word,

With your left hand already on button 7,

Because ㅔ is the third letter of button 6

Press button 7, which is a combination induction button for inputting the third character, with the left hand, press button 6 with the right hand to input,,

With your left hand already on button 7,

Because this is the second letter of button 7

Press button 6, which is a combination induction button for inputting the second letter, with the right hand while pressing the button 7 with the left hand.

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

`<Figure 29>: LG EZ: Improvement: 2 lines per button`

Let 's type `wed'.

If you input with the conventional LG EZ system, you will get the following (5 total is needed)

 7, #, 6, 3, 9

    ㅆ ㅗ ㅣ

(If you want to enter a), you have to double-click the button 7 to open it and press the button #

The twin method is as follows. (3 total required)

8 + 7 + *

      ㅆ ㅙ

ㅆ is the fourth letter of button 7, and ㅙ is the fourth letter of button *

Button 8, which is a combination induction button for inputting the fourth character, is input by pressing the button 7, * with the left hand in a state in which the right button is pressed.

Let 's enter only `

If you input it with the conventional LG EZ system, it is as follows (10 total is needed)

 5, *, 3, 9, 7, *, *, 3, 3, 4

     ㄹ

(You need a large copper line up to four lines to press the button *

If both hands are used to input a letter, since button 7 and button * are in one row, if both hands are biased in one row, finger interference occurs and the device tilts to one side.

The twin method is as follows. (8 total is needed)

4 + 5 + 9, 9 + 7, 4 + 3, 4

    ㅐ ㅐ ㄹ ㄹ

(Even though there is difference in the number of teeth, there is no copper wire to 4th row evenly using both hands loads, and it is much faster because there is very little copper wire because it has following copper wire reduction effect.)

Since f is the second letter of button 5 and ㅐ is the second letter of button 9

Press button 4, which is a combination induction button for inputting the second letter, with the left hand, and then press button 5, 9 with right hand, and input `boat`.

With the right hand already in button 9,

Since this is the third letter of button 7

Pressing the button 7 with the left hand while pressing the button 9, which is a combination induction button for inputting the third letter, with the right hand,

(It is also possible to input the line 0 between the last syllable of the syllable and the backslash of the syllable, not the same syllable.

Because ㅓ is the second letter of button 3

Press and hold Button 4, which is a combination induction button that allows you to enter the second letter, with your left hand, and then press button 3 with your right hand to enter ㅓ.

If the left hand is already on button 4 and the copper line is 0

Because this is the first letter of button 4

Press button 4 with your left hand and press d.

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

`<Figure 35>: Motorola: Improvement: 2 lines per button

Let 's type `pretty`.

If you enter it with the conventional Motorola method, you will get: (5 total)

 7, 7, 6, 3, 9

    ㄲ ㅗ ㅣ

The twin method is as follows. (3 total required)

9 + 1 + 0

      ㄲ ㅙ

ㄲ is the third letter of button 1, and ㅙ is the third letter of button 0

Press button 9, which is a combination induction button for inputting the third letter, with the right hand while pushing buttons 1 and 0 with your left hand.

Let `s enter` `table` `.

If you enter it using the conventional Motorola method, you will get:

 7, #, 6, #

      ㅛ ㅛ

(A large copper wire to the fourth row is required when pressing the button #

If both hands are used, the button # and button 6 are assigned to the same row of 3 rows, so both hands are biased in 3 rows, resulting in finger interference, and the device may tilt to one side.

The twin method is as follows. (4 total is needed)

6 + 7, 7 + 6

    ㅛ ㅛ

(Although the number of teeth is the same as in the prior art, the conventional problems mentioned above are solved, the copper lines are very few, and the two-hand loads are evenly distributed, so that it is possible to input faster and more comfortably. If such an effect appears, it will happen.

You can only enter it with button 6 and button 7.)

Since it is the second letter of button 7

While holding down the button 6, which is a combination inducing button for inputting the second letter, with the right hand, press the button 7 with the left hand and input the value

With your left hand already on button 7,

Because ㅛ is the third letter of button 6

Press button 7, which is a combination induction button for inputting the third character, with your left hand, and press button 6 with your right hand to input ㅛ.

Let 's type `scalp`.

If you enter it using the conventional Motorola method, you will get: (6 total)

 4, 6, 6, 7, #, 9

 ㅜ

(A large copper wire to the fourth row is required when pressing the button #

When both hands are used, the button # and button 9 are assigned to the same row of three rows, so both hands are concentrated in three rows, resulting in finger interference and the device may tilt to one side, which reduces the stability of the device.

The twin method is as follows. (6 total)

4, 4 + 6, 6 + 7, 9

ㅜ

(Although the number of teeth is the same as in the prior art, the conventional problem described above is solved, the copper wire is very few, and both hand loads are evenly distributed. This happens when the same effect occurs.)

Since c is the first letter of button 4

Press button 4 with your left hand and press `d`.

If the left hand is already on button 4 and the copper line is 0

Because ㅜ is the second letter of button 6

Press button 4, which is a combination induction button for inputting the second letter, with the left hand, press button 6 with the right hand to input ㅜ,

If your right hand is already on button 6,

Because this is the second letter of button 7

While holding down the button 6, which is a combination inducing button for inputting the second letter, with the right hand, press the button 7 with the left hand and input the value

Because l is the first letter of button 9

Press button 9 with your right hand and type `ㅣ`.

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Entering English and Korean in a small keypad consisting of 4 ~ 8 buttons

(It is also applicable to other character systems.

Rather than claiming that the following are very practical, they only suggest that the following are possible using twins. <Figure 55> is quite interesting.

Of course, in this case as well, the combination induction button may precede or follow the character button. )

Using twins, you can easily enter characters on the miniature keypad.

If you happen to be typing letters in an MP3 or wrist watch, or if you produce a cell phone with fewer buttons in line with the trend toward miniaturization,

Even if only the first group letter input method is applied

You can also enter text with a small number of buttons.

sure

2nd ~ 5th group If you use letter input method, you can also reduce the number of buttons.

In most cases, you can enter the multiplet method and twins in parallel, or you can only enter them as twins

You can change the font assignment of each button to any number.

I'll draw a long rectangular button to help you understand.

first,

In English

As shown in <Figure 49> below

It is possible to input all English phonemes within 2 pages by assigning English to 8 buttons.

Four characters per button are assigned.

Button 3 or button 4 is used as a combination induction button for inputting the second letter,

The button 5 or the button 6 is used as a combination induction button for inputting the third letter,

Button 7 or button 8 as a combination induction button for inputting the fourth letter

(Button 1 or Button 2 does not need to be a combinatorial button.

if not

Button 1 or button 2 may be used as a combination induction button for inputting the first letter)

Of each button

The first character can be entered as a single character, or the character with the target character can be input by pressing the button 1 or button 2,

In the second letter, press button 3 or button 4 and press the letter button assigned to the target letter,

In the third letter, press button 5 or button 6 and press the letter button assigned to the target letter.

In the fourth letter, press and hold button 7 or button 8, and press the letter button to which the target letter is assigned.

You can enter it only as a twin as above,

If you want to enter numbers in normal text mode, you can assign one or two numbers per button, and enter them in another group letter input method (for example, second or third group letter input method). The same is true with the following description.

And if you have fewer button spaces, including the example below, if there are too many phonemes to be assigned,

It is not necessary to print all the phonemes, but only the first phoneme for each button. In particular, since English is assigned in the standard enumeration order, it is not difficult to calculate the sequence of the unprinted phonemes.

Or as shown in the two tables in <Figure 50> and <Figure 51> below.

The six buttons are assigned letters,

You can divide the letters for each button into two groups and input them in the 1st ~ 2nd group letter input method (you can add more special characters or emoticons to the vacant space).

The letters in the first line of each letter button are defined as letters of the first group,

The character in the second line of each letter button is defined as the character in the second group,

Button 3 or button 4 is used as a combination induction button for inputting the second letter,

Button 5 or button 6 is used as a combination induction button for inputting the third letter,

(Button 1 or Button 2 does not need to be a combinatorial button.

if not

Button 1 or button 2 may be used as a combination induction button for inputting the first letter)

Among the first group letters of each button

The first character may be input as a single character, or the character button to which the target character is assigned may be input by pressing the button 1 or 2 while the button 1 is pressed,

In the second letter, press the letter button assigned to the target letter by pressing the button 3 or button 4,

In the third letter, press and hold button 5 or button 6, press the letter button assigned to the target letter,

Of the second group letters of each button

The first character may be entered as a first character or the character button to which the target character is assigned in a state in which the button 1 or the button 2 is pressed is inputted in a short stroke,

In the second letter, pressing the button 3 or the button 4 and pressing the letter button assigned the target letter,

In the third letter, press button 5 or button 6 and press the letter button to which the target letter is assigned.

Or as shown in <Figure 52>

The four buttons are assigned letters,

It is also possible to divide the letters per button into three groups and input them in the first through third group character input methods.

The letters in the first line of each letter button are defined as letters of the first group,

The character in the second line of each letter button is defined as the character in the second group,

The character on the third line of each letter button is defined as the character of the third group,

Button 1 or button 2 is used as a combination induction button for inputting the second letter,

Button 3 or button 4 is used as a combination induction button for inputting the third letter,

Among the first group letters of each button

The first letter is entered as a single letter,

In the second letter, when the button 1 or button 2 is pressed, the character button to which the target letter is assigned is inputted in a single stroke,

In the third letter, when the button 3 or button 4 is held down, the letter button assigned to the target letter is pressed at a single stroke,

Of the second group letters of each button

The first character is entered as the first character,

In the second letter, when the button 1 or the button 2 is held down, the character button to which the target letter is assigned is inputted in a short stroke,

In the third letter, when the button 3 or the button 4 is pressed, the character button to which the target character is assigned is inputted in a short stroke,

Among the third group letters of each button

The first letter is blank in the letter,

In the second letter, after double-clicking button 1 or button 2, do not remove your finger from button 1 or button 2, press and hold the letter button assigned to the target letter

In the third letter, after double-clicking button 3 or button 4, do not remove your finger from button 3 or button 4, but press and hold the letter button assigned to the target letter.

In other languages or in the Hangul language mentioned below

If you use a method other than the first group letter input method including the second to fifth group letter input method as in the method of inputting the above-mentioned alphabet

You can easily enter even a few buttons like the above.

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Now let's take a look at Hangul phonetic input from the ultra-small keypad.

As shown in the table below

8 buttons and 40 Hangul phonemes are assigned to completion type,

You can enter all the phonemes within two digits.

Five characters per button are assigned.

Button 1 or button 2 is used as a combination induction button for inputting the second letter,

Button 3 or button 4 is used as a combination induction button for inputting the third letter,

Button 5 or button 6 is used as a combination induction button for inputting the fourth letter

Button 7 or button 8 is used as a combination induction button for inputting the fifth character,

Of each button

The first letter is entered as a single letter,

In the second letter, press button 1 or button 2 and press the letter button assigned to the target letter,

In the third letter, press button 3 or button 4 and press the letter button assigned to the target letter,

The fourth character is input by pressing the letter button assigned to the target character while the button 5 or the button 6 is pressed,

In the fifth character, press and hold button 7 or button 8, and press the character button to which the target character is assigned.

You can enter it only as a twin as above,

Also,

On six buttons

The vowel, like the way of heavenly people,

All consonants were assigned to 19 consonants,

A vowel is a method of inputting a conventional method (ㅣ ㅡ)

Consonants can be entered in two or less, all using twins.

(The conventional consonant input required three strokes.)

The first letter of button 1 is

The second letter of button 1 is b

The third letter of Button 1 is c

The fourth letter of Button 1 is d,

The first letter of Button 2 is ㅁ

The second letter of Button 2 is

The third letter of Button 2 is

The fourth letter of Button 2 is o,

The first letter of button 3 is

The second letter of button 3 is

The third letter of button 3 is ㅋ

The fourth letter of button 3 is &lt; RTI ID = 0.0 &gt;

The first letter of button 4 is cloth (ㅣ)

The second letter of button 4 is

The third letter of button 4 is

The fourth letter of button 4 is ㄲ,

The first letter of button 5 is (.)

The second letter of button 5 is ㄸ

The third letter of button 5 is ㅃ

The fourth letter of button 5 is ㅆ,

The first letter of the button 6 is "

The second letter of button 6 is ㅉ

What is the third letter of button 6?

The fourth letter of Button 6 is! to be.

Button 1 or button 2 is used as a combination induction button for inputting the second letter,

Button 3 or button 4 is used as a combination induction button for inputting the third letter,

Button 5 or button 6 is used as a combination induction button for inputting the fourth letter,

Of each button

The first letter is entered as a single letter,

In the second letter, press button 1 or button 2 and press the letter button assigned to the target letter,

In the third letter, press button 3 or button 4 and press the letter button assigned to the target letter,

In the fourth letter, press button 5 or button 6 and press the letter button assigned to the target letter.

You can enter it only as a twin as above,

However, even when the multi-tap method and the twin are input in parallel,

In buttons 4, 5, and 6, which are assigned to the global characters (ㅣ, ㅡ), it is recommended that characters beyond the second number can be entered only as twins.

This is to enable you to input the vowel as it is in the conventional way.

In addition

As shown in <Figure 55> below

On four buttons

The vowel is assigned to the Heavenly Man (ㅣ ㅡ)

Consonants like 획 추가 add additional consonants

You can also assign them as shown in the table below.

In other words,

Samsung Electronics is also applied to cell phones, To input  , ".", And "ㅡ", which are necessary phonemes (or strokes), are assigned to one or more buttons of a few prime numbers (eg, four) ㅡ "to input a vowel,

Also applied to LG Electronics mobile phones In the case of the tracked method (= ez method)  The basic phonemes (or basic phonetics, that is, ㅇ) and functions (= Pair consonant  function, Add stroke  Function). "" "," "", "ㅁ", "ㅅ", "ㅇ", " Add stroke  function", " Pair consonant  Quot; function &quot; is assigned to one or more of the prime number (e.g., four) buttons, Nagle  Like the way "a, b, d, k, g, Add stroke , Pair consonant "Is used to input consonants.

It is highly recommended to assign "ㅣ", ".", And "ㅡ", which are necessary to enter a vowel, to the first character of three buttons among a few buttons,

"A" required to enter consonants. "" "," "", "ㅁ", "ㅅ", "ㅇ", " Add stroke  function", " Pair consonant  Function "to a small number of buttons, In number  It is recommended to allocate, At that time  Already "a". "" "," "", "ㅁ", "ㅅ", "ㅇ", " Add stroke  function", " Pair consonant  , "." And "ㅡ" are assigned to the button to which you want to assign one or more of the "Functions", "ㅣ", " A ". "" "," "", "ㅁ", "ㅅ", "ㅇ", " Add stroke  function", " Pair consonant  Function "is most recommended.

For example, there is an assignment form as shown in Figure 55 below.

( Button 1's  The third assignment, "?", Is blank and has just been assigned.)

The vowel input speed is the same as that of the conventional one,

The consonant input speed is 1.5 times that of the conventional LG EZ method.

The first letter of button 1 is cloth (ㅣ)

The second letter of Button 1 is the stroke add-

What is the third letter of Button 1? ego

The first letter of button 2 is (.)

The second letter of button 2 is a pair of consonants,

The third letter of Button 2 is a

The first letter of button 3 is b.

The second letter of Button 3 is

The third letter of Button 3 is ㅁ

The first letter of the button 4 is "

The second letter of button 4 is

The third letter of button 4 is o.

Button 1 or button 2 is used as a combination induction button for inputting the second letter,

Button 3 or button 4 is used as a combination induction button for inputting the third letter,

Of each button

The first letter is entered as a single letter,

In the second letter, press button 1 or button 2 and press the letter button assigned to the target letter,

In the third letter, press button 3 or button 4 and press the letter button assigned to the target letter.

(Which may be entered in the multi-tap method. In particular, the present invention if the consonant button is assigned to "l" or "" or "Ao" is not assigned is easier to enter the multi-tap method.)

The use of the vowel Chun Jiin is similar to the traditional Chun Jiin

In consonants

In the conventional EZ method, all of the ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ‰ ƒ could be input

It is now possible to enter b only, and only the twins are entered as ㄱ ㅁ ㅅ ㅇ,

(This is to enter the vowel as it is in the conventional way.)

For consonant, stroke addition

Conventionally, button *, a function consonant with the pair # And to act as a dedicated button for adding strokes

Now you can enter twin consonants and stroke add-ons as if they were letters (= function).

If you want to enter

You can add a stroke to the shape, and you can create a shape by adding a stroke to the shape. (It depends on the rules, but B is recommended.)

A. Change to 1 + 4, 2 + 1, 2 + 1 and enter

           Good

B. 1 + 4, 2 + 1 + 1.

          Good

A way to begin with

Since g is the second letter of button 4,

Press the button 1 to enter the second letter. While holding the button 1, unlock the button 4 and put the word on the screen.

Since the stroke addition function is the second letter of button 1,

Press the button 2 to enter the second letter. While holding down the button 1, press the button 1 to perform the stroke addition function,

Since the stroke addition function is the second letter of button 1,

Press and hold button 2 to enter the second letter, then press button 1 to make the stroke add function.

To illustrate method B

Since g is the second letter of button 4,

Press the button 1 to enter the second letter. While holding the button 1, unlock the button 4 and put the word on the screen.

Since the stroke addition function is the second letter of button 1,

Press and hold Button 2 to enter the second letter, and press Button 1 twice to make the stroke add-on function 2 times.

,

If you want to type ㅉ

A. 1 + 4, 2 + 1, 1 + 2.

          ㅉ ㅉ

B. 1 + 4, 1 + 2 + 2.

         ㅉ ㅉ

A way to explain

Since g is the second letter of button 4,

Press the button 1 to enter the second letter. While holding the button 1, unlock the button 4 and put the word on the screen.

Since the stroke addition function is the second letter of button 1,

Press the button 2 to enter the second letter. While holding down the button 1, press the button 1 to perform the stroke addition function,

Since the double consonant function is the second letter of button 2,

Press and hold button 1 to enter the second letter, then press button 2 to make the stroke add function.

To illustrate method B

Since g is the second letter of button 4,

Press the button 1 to enter the second letter. While holding the button 1, unlock the button 4 and put the word on the screen.

As shown in Fig. 28, since it is the second pair of consonants of button 7,

Since the double consonant function is the second letter of button 2 in <Figure 55>

Press and hold Button 1 to enter the second letter, and then press Button 2 twice to make the second pair of consonants function twice.

(This is a method that should be done with the conventional method in mind.)

The vowel input does not need to be explained separately,

As for the consonant input, only the conventional " A " EZ Here is a list of all the input methods for each consonant with the same principle as below.

(As shown in Figure 55, "a". "ㄴ", "" "," ㅁ "," ㅅ "," ㅇ "," Add stroke  function", " Pair consonant  Function "is assigned. If you assign it differently, you will know it without explanation. For example, "ㅣ", ".", "ㅡ" are assigned to a button in the second or higher order Do a good job  Or " Add stroke  Function "or" Twin consonant function "May be assigned to the first letter of a button,

"ㅣ", ".", "ㅡ", and "A". "" "," "", "ㅁ", "ㅅ", "ㅇ", " Add stroke  function", " Twin Sound function "button shown in Figure 55 Different  And the assignment order diagram Different  That means you can.

Since &quot; a &quot; is the third letter of button 2, &quot; a &quot; is input when button 2 is pressed while button 3 or button 4, which is a combination induction button for inputting the third letter,

Since &quot; b &quot; is the first letter of button 3, &quot; b &quot; is input by pressing button 3 once,

"C" is a character generated by adding a stroke to "b." Since the stroke addition function is the second character of the button 1, a button 1 which is a combination induction button for inputting the second character after " Or button 2 When button 1 is pressed while button 2 is being pressed, the stroke addition function is exerted, the c is converted into c, "c" is input,

Since " d "is the second letter of button 3, &quot; d &quot; is input when button 3 is pressed with button 1 or button 2 being a combination induction button for inputting the second letter,

Since "ㅁ" is the third letter of the button 3, when the button 3 is pressed while the button 4 is pressed among the button 3 or the button 4 which is the combination induction button for inputting the third letter, "ㅁ"

Since the stroke addition function is the second letter of the button 1, the letter " F &quot; is a letter generated by adding a stroke to the letter &quot; Pressing button 1 while holding down button 2 of button 2 exerts the stroke addition function, and ㅁ is converted to 되어, "ㅂ" is input,

Since "x" is the second letter of button 4, if button 4 is pressed while button 1 or button 2, which is a combination induction button for inputting the second letter, is pressed, "x"

Since &quot; o &quot; is the third letter of button 4, &quot; o &quot; is input when button 4 is pressed while button 3 is being pressed among button 3 or button 4 which is a combination induction button for inputting the third letter,

"X" is a character created by adding a stroke to "X" Stroke add-on Button 1's  Since it is the second letter, you can enter the second letter after typing "ㅅ" Button 1  or Button 2  Between Button 2  When you press button 1 while holding the button, the stroke addition function is activated, the cursor is changed to "i"

Since the stroke addition function is the second letter of the button 1, the button "1", which is a combination induction button for inputting the second letter after " If you press button 1 while holding button 2 in button 2, the stroke add function will be activated,

Since the stroke addition function is the second letter of the button 1, the button " 1 ", which is a combination induction button for inputting the second letter after " Or button 2 while button 2 is being pressed, button 1 is pressed, the stroke addition function is displayed,

Quot; is a character generated by adding a stroke to " c ", and since the stroke addition function is the second character of the button 1, the button 1, which is a combination induction button for inputting the second character after " Or button 2 while button 2 is being pressed, button 1 is pressed, the stroke addition function is exerted, c is converted into 되어, "ㅌ" is input,

Since the stroke addition function is the second letter of the button 1, the button 1, which is a combination induction button for inputting the second letter after " F ", is added to the letter " If you press button 1 while holding button 2 in button 2, the stroke add function will be activated,

"He" is a character generated by adding a stroke to the character "o", and since the stroke addition function is the second character of the button 1, a button 1, which is a combination induction button for inputting the second character after " Or button 2 in button 2 while pressing button 1, the stroke addition function is exerted,

Is a character generated by converting the letter " a " into a pair of consonants, and since the double consonant function is the second letter of the button 2, If you press button 2 while holding button 1 in button 2, the twin consonant function will be activated, converted to a new one, "ㄲ" will be input,

"ㄸ" means "ㄷ" Into a double consonant  Is the generated character, Double consonant function Button 2  Since it is the second letter, you can enter the letter "c" Button 1  or Button 2  Between Button 1  If you press button 2 while holding the button, the twin consonant function will be activated, 이 will be converted to 되어, "ㄸ" will be input,

Is a character generated by converting "F" into a pair of consonants, and since the twin consonant function is the second character of the button 2, a button 1 which is a combination induction button for inputting the second character after inputting " If you press button 2 while holding button 1 in button 2, you will be able to use the twin consonant function, convert it to 이, enter "ㅃ"

Since the character of "2" is a character generated by making the character "ㅅ" a pair of consonants, and the function of the double consonant is the second character of the button 2, a button 1 which is a combination induction button for inputting the second character after inputting " Or button 2 while holding down button 1 Button 2  Press Double consonant function  In addition, The To  Quot; is &lt; / RTI &gt;

"ㅉ" means "I" Into a double consonant  Is the generated character, Double consonant function Button 2  Since it is the second letter, it is a combination induction button to input the second letter after inputting " Button 1  or Button 2  Between Button 1  While holding down Button 2  Press Double consonant function  In addition, I To  Quot; is &lt; / RTI &gt;

When either A or B method is used, when a consonant is input

The basic letter input speed of ㅇ ㅇ except b is 2 times as many as that of the conventional LG EZ method,

When you add a stroke or perform a double consonant function, you need 2 strokes, so you need 2 strokes,

If you use the B method when typing ㅆ or,, when you input the second twin consonant or the second additional stroke, the number of the first twin consonant or the first additional stroke is increased by one more than the number of strokes There is no difference between the two methods,

Since there are four buttons and very few copper lines,

It is estimated that the consonant input speed will be 1.5 times that of the conventional LG EZ system.

The vowel input speed is the same as that of Samsung.

So, in the end, consonants and vowels are calculated to take about 1.2 to 1.3 times as much as the conventional combination of the skype and the EZ method.

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

T9 Detailed description

Let's see what the T9 method is, how twins do it in parallel with the T9 mode, and how it helps the T9 input method.

The T9 method

The definition of the term is given in the Application Nos. 88 to 90 as follows.

T9, etc.: The user can present one or more words that can be formed by combining the spellings assigned to the buttons that are pressed even when the spelling is not confirmed by using the word DB, and the user can select a desired word It is to be said through the conventional way of doing.

For example, if you enter more than one character in a single button, you can type in the spelling in a candidate character that has not yet been spelled, When a device presents one or more possible words to a user, the user selects a word with a spelling desired by the user. T9 mode in Samsung, iTAP mode in Motorola, and PREDICTIVE TEXT INPUT mode in Nokia. For example, in the case of the T9 method, when `4663` button is pressed,` GHI` is assigned to `4`,` MNO` is assigned to `6`, and` DEF` is assigned to ` , `HOME`,` HOOD`, `HOOF`,` HONE`, and `GOOF` are displayed in order from the device in the dictionary database. .

(The PREDICTION method of the Japanese input method is also a type of `T9 etc.` method.) It is a form to input only the definite letters, not the candidate letters in the general multi tap method, T9 ", etc., can be applied to the PREDICTION method.)

Disadvantages of the T9 method are as follows.

Words that are not in DB need to be changed to multi-tap mode, input desired words, register them in DB, go back to T9 mode, and input other words in T9 mode.

so

The system should have a vocabulary dictionary configuration in advance (because it requires more DB memory than when applying twins, the price will go up).

There is a drawback in that new entries must be continuously registered in the vocabulary dictionary by increasing the use of new words and abbreviations. In particular, it is practically impossible to register all vocabularies required in an information communication environment such as a person's name, an Internet address, and a homepage address in advance. In addition, if a vocabulary that is not actually registered in advance is inevitably used in combination with a multi-tap method, there is a limit to the rule of one key per character, and the number of combinations of characters inputted by a plurality of characters inputted, There is a disadvantage that the system load such as a dictionary search is large.

(The price is higher because you have to use a higher-performance chip than when you apply twins. You do not need a chip to do this process when you apply twins.)

In addition, Korean and Japanese have a problem that the mother part is not fixed and the back part changes in various forms, so that it can not accommodate the number of many cases and thus it can not be adapted to such mother language.

(I also do not know if I have a problem with using the T9 method because of the English edited ~ ed, the present progressive ~ ing, the plural form ~ s, etc.

Anyway, even if the T9 system is embedded in a mobile phone with a small keypad, it is inconvenient to input characters. So far, people who input a lot of letters in countries other than Korea are purchasing mobile phones with QWERTY keyboards.)

And when the candidate words are presented a lot, it is quite troublesome to move the cursor to the desired word several times and to select it.

And, the more likely a character system has a large number of assigned characters per button, the more likely the proposed candidate word will increase sharply.

(So, in the case of 5 characters per button, like Japanese, instead of 3 (or 4) characters assigned to each button like English, we use the PREDICTION method, which is a variant of T9,

So, I have been criticizing the T9 method for many patent applications for the character input method.

The benefits of twins in T9 mode are:

In T9 mode, all the phonemes can be input with 2 taps.

A definite way to enter is to input the phonemes in all sequences, including the first letter, as twins.

The first character is input by pushing the combination induction button for inputting the first character and pressing the character button to which the target character is assigned in the state,

The second letter is input by pushing the letter button assigned the target letter while holding the combination induction button for inputting the second letter,

The third letter is the letter of the third letter, while holding down the combination induction button,

The fourth character is input by pushing the letter button assigned to the target character while holding the combination induction button for inputting the fourth character

That is, the input of the candidate character is input as a single character (that is, the conventional T9 method can be input as well)

Twins are entered as fixed letters (that is, twins can be concatenated without changing the character mode).

therefore .

- It is possible to input definitively all the phonemes in T9 mode with two taps, without changing the word not in DB, into multi-tap mode,

- Even if some spelling is confirmed, the number of candidate words suggested by the device is rapidly reduced, so that the user can quickly input words

When you enter a search term, you can see the effect of reducing the candidate word even if only one letter is fixed. Of course, the more definite characters in a query, the fewer the candidate words.

In addition

With twins, the special character * or? So it is useful for you to search for words and phone numbers using any letters (* or?) Just like on a computer.

(In computer queries

* Means an arbitrary number of any alphabet,

? Means one alphabetic character.

However, in the following application

In the case of the computer,

Any of the letters on your computer? In the meaning of the application,

In the application, * was used as a candidate for all the letters assigned to a button.

Be confused with the general idea, so be careful when reviewing that part of the application.)

In the T9 mode, special characters or emoticons on each button,

It is recommended that only twin characters be allowed to be recognized as candidates to be entered as single characters.

There are several advantages of the twin in combination with other conventional T9 modes, details of which are detailed in application number 406-473. It is as follows.

T9, and the like, the method of the present invention is applied to determine the spelling of some or all of the words, so that the number of candidate words to be presented by the device can be reduced so that the user can quickly input words.

For example, in the case of T9 method, when the user desires to input `HOOD`, conventionally, when` 4663` button is pressed, `GHI` is assigned to` 4`, `MNO` is assigned to` 6`, `DEF` is assigned to the device. Therefore, the device searches the dictionary database for the combination of them, and` GONE`, `HOME`,` HOOD`, `HOOF`,` HONE`, and `GOOF` The user must move the cursor to `HOOD` to select it, but if the` D` of `HOOD` is inputted by applying the method of the present invention, the device presents only one word` HOOD`, You do not have to move. It is because it can be learned that it is convenient to confirm a few spelling in experience while using conventional T9 method and the like. For example, the less frequently used alphabet, the more number of candidates will be reduced.

For example, `button 1` or` button 3` may be used as a combination inducing button to write the first letter assigned to the next on button, `button 4`, Or `button 6` as a combination induction button that causes the second letter assigned to the next on button to be written, and` button 7` or `button 9` to write the third letter assigned to the next on button If you do not want to confirm spelling as `D` above, just press` button3` alone, and if you want to confirm spelling `D`, press` button1` while holding down ` 3 '.

And since some spellings can be confirmed to reduce the number of candidate words a lot, the number of candidate characters required to complete the word (the number of letters assigned to the pressed button) ) Or unknown characters (a state in which no spelling can be predicted at all, the computer usually searches for words using `*` or `?`), Will not be much, and the user will be able to enter only a part of it.

T9, etc., each time a character is input, the most frequently displayed words are displayed consecutively corresponding to the number of characters inputted so far. Therefore, only a part of a word is spelled (a candidate character, a definite character or an unknown character) If the user wants to display the candidate word of the desired word, it is also necessary to give a signal that the user has input only a part of the spelling. (The reason for giving only a part of the spelling is that if there is no signal, If there is no signal, the device automatically assumes that the number of spellings is less than the number of spells of the word desired by the user. All words or phrases (including = spelling) It is possible to reduce the number of candidates by giving a signal that the number of spellings is equal to the number of spells to be automatically counted as displaying the candidate words or candidate phrases, . It should be noted that a method of giving a signal indicating that the number of spellings is small and the same is determined in this way can be arbitrarily determined by the manufacturer or the user.

For example, in the case of T9 and the like, in the usual case, each time a character is input, the word is continuously displayed with the most frequent words corresponding to the number of characters input so far,

If the user presses the button 4 to write the word `HOOD`, the most frequent` G` in the first letter of `G, H, I` assigned to 4 is displayed first, The most frequently used `IO` in the combination of the buttons 4 (G, H, I) and 6 (M, N, O) is displayed first, HON` which is the most frequently used in the combination of button 6 (M, N, O) and button 6 (M, N, O) is displayed first and then button 3 is pressed, The most frequent `GONE` is displayed first in combination with buttons I (6) (M, N, O) and 6 (M, N, O) Then, move the cursor to `HOOD` followed by` HOME` and `HOOF ', which are displayed in order after that. (The frequency or displayed characters are expressed arbitrarily.)

The number of candidate characters required for completing the word above (the number of letters assigned to the pressed button without being spelled) or the determined letter (the spelling is fixed) or the unknown letter For example, if you are not typing in a word, you can use a `*` or `?` To search for a word.

When the user wants to use the word `HOMEPORT`, the button 4 (G, H, I), the button 6 (M, N, O) (P, R, S), button 6 (M, N, O), button 7 (P, R, S) A candidate word group including `HOMEPORT` as a candidate word is displayed. However, when the method of the present invention is applied, the user can select a combination candidate button + button 4 (determined as` H`), a button 6 (M, N, Enter a combination induction button + button 6 (determined by `M`), button 3 (D, E, F), combination induction button + button 7 (determined by` P`) and signal that only some spelling of the word By button 3, the 4 digits are almost definitively set to `HOME` (of course, by confirming each of the letters of the word` HOME`, of course) If you display `HOMEPLATE` and` HOMEPORT` as words, you can select `HOMEPORT` Expression becomes possible. Of course, you can also give an unknown character signal while typing up to `P` (for example, you might indicate another unknown character as a` * `or other symbol at the 3-digit position of the button).

If `P` is not confirmed and the user signals that only a part of the spelling of the word is entered,` P`, `R` or` S` can be recognized even if `HOME` is confirmed, `,` R`, and `S` are the candidate words, that is,

Too many words, such as HOMEPLATE, HOMEPORT, HOMER, HOMERANGE, HOMERIC, HOMERULE, HOMERUN, HOMESCHOOLING, HOMESCREEN, HOMESECRETARY, HOMESELLING, HOMESICK, HOMESIGAL, HOMESITE, HOMESPUN, HOMESTAND, HOMESTAY, HOMESTEAD, HOMESTEADER, HOMESTEADING, The user must select a desired word in the displayed state.

The examples so far are not necessarily realized as they are, but are arbitrarily set as the frequency, the candidate word to be displayed, etc. to explain only the concept.

In the conventional method such as T9, `HOME` has not been confirmed, so the actual candidate word will be much more. When there are a large number of candidate words, when a desired word is located in the back by alphabetical order or frequency, a situation in which a very large number of cursor movement buttons are pressed is unfolded.

And, even though it is an input method mode such as T9, it does not need much time to input all the spelling of the word and enter it as it will not use the input method such as T9. The combination of the two buttons to enter spelling is both hands, so one hand only takes one button, so when you master, you can enter almost the same speed as when you press the button with just one button, and the spelling input method such as T9 It is unnecessary to move the cursor to the desired word among the displayed candidate words which are almost essential in the display of the candidate words. Therefore, the time required to input a desired word may be faster than the conventional T9 or the like.

Also, if all the spellings are confirmed and entered, the selected bodywork can also be programmed to be omitted.

T9 and the like, the method of the present invention is applied in parallel with the conventional method. For example, when inputting the word &quot; HOMEPORT &quot;, a word is inputted in a letter input mode such as T9, Spelling can be performed by combining various methods such as the conventional method, the method according to the present invention, or the method similar to the present invention without modifying the mode. A method characterizing this is also claimed to be novel in the present invention. (In the conventional T9, if there is no word to be input in the DB, there is an inconvenience that it is necessary to switch to the multi-tap mode, completely input the desired word, and then return to the T9 mode etc. In particular, This is true when you type in people, foreign words, technical words, etc.)

The various ways to enter letters to display the candidate words mentioned above are the methods of combining the methods 1 and 2 below.

1. The type of the letter is either `go` (fixed letter) or` me` (candidate letter) or `da` (unknown letter)

2. The number of spellings to be entered is `ra '(the total number of spellings) or` do' (the number of spellings is insufficient)

If the combination of 1 and 2 is possible, the number is +,, +,, +, +, +, +, +, +, +, +, +, There are a number of cases such as + +, + +, +, +, +, +, +, +, and + Let's take a few examples from the search.

Let's take a few specific examples of how to write a text message: (For example, enter HOMEPORT, the English alphabet is a definite letter, the number is a candidate letter, and the `* 'is an unknown letter.

First, we use the combination of the conventional T9 method `I` and `LA`

(Enter `46637678` so that candidate words can be displayed.

(D, E, F), buttons 7 (P, R, S), buttons 6 (M, N, O) , Button 6 (M, N, O), button 7 (P, R, S) and button 8 (T, U, V). Hereinafter, the detailed description will be omitted.)

Second, you can use the combination of `I` and `

(Enter `46637` so that the candidate words can be displayed, and then give a signal that the number of spellings is insufficient.) As mentioned above, the case and method of signaling the number of spellings input can be decided by the manufacturer or the user, In a database with the same few records, there are not a lot of candidates including spelling, so it would be better to give a signal that the number of spells is the same, without giving a special signal if the number of spells is insufficient.

Thirdly, the combination of `` and `

(It confirms as `HOMEP` so that the candidate words can be displayed and inputs a signal that the number of spellings is insufficient)

Fourth, the combination of `` and ``

(`HOMEPORT` confirms all spelling, so there is only one candidate word and you do not have to choose it)

Fifth, a method of inputting a combination of `` and `` `and` `and` `

(Enter `H6 * EP67T` to match the desired word and spelling number so that candidate words can be displayed.)

The sixth is to input the combination of `` and `` and `` and ``

(Input `H6 * EP6` so that the candidate words can be displayed, signal that the spelling number is insufficient, or input` * EP6` and give a signal that the spelling number is insufficient)

One example of the definition of a term is that an unknown letter (eg `%` in the example below) may be used to replace two or more consecutive letters. And a method of inputting a search word by dividing the part of the search term into delimiters.

Why is this useful?

First, in the case of English, not only spelling but also spelling can be precisely understood by sound alone.

Second, in the case of English, the first part (= mainly root) is the same, and the spelling change at the end part tends to differentiate into words such as various parts of speech. In this case, as an application example of the first method, it is possible to input a spelling by combining a `` to `` method from a `` to `` not a final part of a word and a final part. One unknown letter may replace two or more consecutive letters, so the unknown letter is used as a delimiter that separates the last part from the last part of the desired word. That is, before entering the last part, you will be given a special symbol (eg%) indicating that the last part will be input, and you will enter the last part.

SENSING, SENSING, SENSIBILITY, SENSIBLY, SENSITIVE, SENSITIVITY, SENSITIZE, SENSOR, SENSORIAL, SENSORY, SENSUAL, SENSITIVITY, SENSUALLY, SENSUOUS, SENSUALIST, SENSEULISM, SENSUALIZE, SENSUALITY etc. there is

Observation shows that it is possible to reduce the candidate words by inputting only the root `SENS` and the end of the word. Words like English have many variations due to the spelling of the end.

If you list some examples of how to input a search term when `SENSUALIST` is the desired word you want to input (in the example below

As an example of a query by the first method

1. S% N% U% LIST

2. SE% SU% * 7T

3. You can create candidate words that contain `SENSUALIST` by typing the search term with NS% AL

As an example of a query by the second method

1. SENS% IST

2. 7367% 478

3. S3 * 7% * 7T

4. S3 * 7% 7T

5. S3 * 7% T

6. S3 * 7% 8

7. You can also type in 3 * 7% 8 to generate candidate words containing `SENSUALIST`

In addition, in applying the method of inputting the spelling by combining the above `from` to `the above`, the number of records such as the telephone directory of the mobile phone is significantly smaller than that of the language dictionary It is very easy to understand when you think of it as a phrase. Because there are fewer records, retrieving records with multiple words is useful because there are fewer candidate records. This method is also useful in many devices such as a computer keyboard, since it is useful when there are only a few records regardless of whether there are many letter buttons or not, and of course, it can also be applied to improvement methods such as T9. Here's how to apply:

1. How to enter letters when there is only one spelling in one letter (or cursor) like English

(Here are just a few examples of VOLFGANG AMADEUS VON MOZART, where the English alphabet is a definite letter, the number is a candidate letter, and the `*` is an unknown letter. A slash (/) is used to represent a space, a space is actually represented by a space, and separators between characters are represented by a comma (,) or `#`. Can be replaced with other symbols)

First, you can use the combination of `I` and `LA`

For example, in order to display the candidate records, one or more search words are selected from among the words of the record to be finally selected, and the candidate letters are input by matching the complete spelling number to the selected word (MOZART Type `661278` to search for a word or` 2623387 866` to search for the word AMADEUS VON.)

Second, you can use the combination of `I` and `

E.g

Enter only the first character of each word (type `8 2 8 6` and signal that there is a word that lacks spelling).

Or enter more than the first word of each word. (Enter `86 26 8 661` and give a signal that there is a word that is not spelled enough.

Or just a part of the word you want. In this case, type 387 to search for AMADEUS's EUS, and then signal that there is a word that lacks spelling.

Thirdly, the combination of `` and `

E.g

Confirm the first letter of each word (enter `V A V M` and give a signal that there is a word that lacks spelling).

Or enter more than the first word of each word. (Enter `VO AM V MOZ` and signal that there is a word that is not spelled enough.)

Or candidate words to be displayed, a definite letter is input as a spelling number which is insufficient for a word selected by selecting one or more words for search among the words of the record to be finally selected (`MOZ` for searching only with the word MOZART) After you enter only, it gives a signal that there are words that are missing spelling.

Fourth, the combination of `` and ``

For example, one or more search words are selected from among the words of the record to be finally selected so that the candidate records can be displayed, and a definite letter is input by matching the complete spelling number to the selected word (MOZART) Enter `MOZART` to do this or` AMADEUS VON` to search for the word `AMADEUS VON`.)

Fifth, a method of inputting a combination of `` and `` `and` `and` `

For example, in order to display the candidate records, one or more search words are selected from among the words of the record to be finally selected, and a definite letter, a candidate letter, or an unknown letter is entered in accordance with the total number of spellings. (Type `M6 * 2 * T` to search for the word MOZART or` A6 * 3E8S V * 6` to search for the word `AMADEUS VON`.)

The sixth is to input the combination of `` and `` and `` and ``

For example, one or more search words are selected from among the words of the record to be finally selected so that candidate records can be displayed, and a definite character, a candidate character or an unknown character is input as a short spelling number for the selected word. (Type `M6 * 2` to search for the word MOZART, or` A6 * 3E V * `to search for the word` AMADEUS VON`, EUS VON `to search for the word` * 8S V * `and then the word is spelled enough to give a signal that there are words)

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Chinese Input Details

In addition, in application number identification numbers 474 to 517, a method of easily inputting Chinese characters, such as Chinese characters, in combination with a conventional pinyin and T9 method is described in detail. In the application form, the following section is followed by the "T9 Detailed Explanation" section.

(In the content of the application below, * was used as a candidate letter to indicate all of the letters assigned to a button.

Be confused with the general idea, so be careful when reviewing that part of the application.)

`2. How to input letters when there is a unique note for each letter, such as Hangul or Chinese or Japanese, and it is expressed as a combination of one or more spellings to produce the note. (In case of Chinese or Japanese, Is included in the contents of the field of the record and its own character is automatically interpreted as a Pinyin notation similar to the English alphabet. Similar to the example `3` that comes after a few dozen lines,` President of the Republic of China ` , It means that it is possible to search the data in the DB by using a Pinyin symbol similar to the English alphabet, assuming that it is automatically retrieved internally as `JUNG, HWA, MIN, GUK DE, TONG, LIONG`.)

In the following description, the number of spellings entered as a search word is the number of the desired character (s) The number of spellings may be less than the number of spellings of a character, a comma (in the case of Korean, only the first character is input, (#) Is used as the delimiter between characters in the same case, but the delimiter between characters in the above two cases can be any symbol (including no delimiter or blank) , But if the delimiter between characters is a single space, the delimiter between words can be two spaces And may also to other symbols.)

For example, the third and sixth examples of English above are examples of "Kim Jong-hyeong Hanja 2 teacher" and "Chinese President Kim Dae Jung". (Here, Hangul, alphabet is a definite letter, numbers are candidate letters, For example, a number is actually represented by a slash (/) before or after a number, and the spacing is actually represented by a space. Delimiters between characters are represented by a comma (,) or `#`. When applying, it is possible to replace the unknown letter or the actual number, or the spacing or delimiter between letters, with other symbols)

Thirdly, the combination of `` and `

E.g

Enter only the first letter of each word

(After typing `ㅎ ㅎ`, give a signal that there is a word that lacks the spelling number.

Or the first letter of each word.

After typing `` `,` `,` `and` `, you will be given a signal that there is a word for which there is not enough spelling.

`JHMG DTL`,` J, H, M, G D, T, L` or `J, H D, T,

If the opposite concept

Spelling followed by sequential letters

If there is a comma, the sequential spelling from any position in any character unit position due to the pinyin of the unique character of the desired word is signaled in order,

If there is no comma, it is possible to make a logic that it is a signal that only the first alphabet of the alphabet corresponding to each unique character due to the binarization of the unique character of the desired word is inputted (the same method as Hangul).

E.g

`JHMG,` or `JH,` have a comma at the end, so that each alphabet is regarded as a sequence of alphabetical characters of Chinese characters and can be searched for `JUNG, HWA, MIN, GUK DE, TONG and LIONG` can not do. `JUN,` or `JUN, H` or` JUN, H, MIN` can be searched by placing a comma after the successive letters from any position in any character unit position.

`JHMG` or` JH` does not have a comma at the end, so each alphabet is regarded as a sequential alphabet from any position in any character unit position of the Pinyin character, and `JUNG, HWA, MIN, GUK DE, TONG, LIONG `Search is possible, and so on.

Alternatively, one or more search words are selected from among the words of the record to be finally selected so that candidate records can be displayed, and a definite letter is input as a short spelling number for the selected word

(To search only for the word `jun - jung`, it gives a signal that there is a word for which the number of spellings is insufficient after inputting `j 'or` j'.

`D, T`, or` D, T, L`, or `DTL` just to search for the word` DE, TONG,

If you want to search for `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `` `,` `` `` `` `` `` `` ` After typing in a week or a week, or a week, a week, it signals that there is a word that lacks spelling.

Or `TONG`, but if you want to input only a part of` TO`, you can input it as `D, TO, L`,

If you do not want to search for `` given '' due to `` week '', you can use `# 'or` After typing `# 'or` #, # #' or `#,` #, ``, `` or ``, it signals that there is a spelling missing word. In this case, you can not search for "Junjun" and as a result, you can not search for "Junjun Kimjunja 2".

If you do not want to search for `TONG` due to` TO`, type `D, TO # L` as a delimiter to indicate that it is the same number of spells as` TO`, Or `L` gives a signal that the spelling is insufficient. In this case, `TONG` can not be searched and as a result,` JUNG, HWA, MINGUK DE, TONG, LIONG `can not search.

The sixth is to input the combination of `` and `` and `` and ``

For example, one or more search words are selected from among the words of a record to be finally selected so that candidate records can be displayed, and a predetermined character or a candidate character or unknown character is input do. (To search for the word `teacher`, type` 5 'or `5` or` 5` or `5,' and give a signal that there is a word for which there is a lack of spelling.)

(Or `/` indicates that `2` is actually a number, not a candidate character) to search for the word` `Kim Jong Hyang Hanja 2``, Give.

`DE, T * N, 5` or` DE, TO * 4 # 5` or `* E, TO * G #, L, or L to search for the word` DE, TONG, * 6 ', and give a signal that there are words that are not spell-counted.)

3. From the beginning, you can use one or more delimiters in the middle of a word to input and search. It can be applied to languages similar to English, but it has little advantage in utilization. When there is a unique note for each unique letter, such as Chinese, if you input the note as a similar word in English alphabet, How to enter a search term according to the format that you entered when applying a delimiter to a desired location

For example, I do not know how to read "President of the Republic of China" in Chinese, but assume that it reads as "President of the Republic of China", so when the user stores it in DB, he tries to input it as a pinyin type `JUNGHWAMINGUK DETONGLIONG` Let's say you enter `JUNG, HWA, MINGUK DE, TONG, LIONG` using a comma separator. `Republic of China` of `the Republic of China` entered without separator.

 There are various ways of inputting a keyword to display `JUNG, HWA, MINGUK DE, TONG, LIONG` as candidates to be selected. However, only the third and sixth examples of English above are just a few examples. In fact, a number is represented by a slash (/) before or after a number, and the spacing is actually expressed as a space. The separator between characters is represented by a comma (,) or `#`. In practice, unknown characters or actual numbers, spaces or delimiters can be replaced by other symbols)

Thirdly, the combination of `` and `

E.g

Enter only the first letter of each word (type `J D`, then give a signal that there is a word that lacks the spelling number).

(Enter `J, H, M, D, T, L` and give a signal that there is a word for which there is not enough spelling.)

Alternatively, one or more search words are selected from among the words of the record to be finally selected so that candidate records can be displayed, and a definite letter is input as a short spelling number for the selected word

(To search only for the words `JUNG, HWA, MINGUK`

`J, H` or` J, H, M` signals that there is a word for which the number of spellings is insufficient after input.

Or `MINGUK`, but if you want to input only a part of` MING`, input it as `J, H, MING`, then give a signal that there is a word lacking the spelling number, or input` H, MING` or `HW, MING` Later, it signals that there is a word that lacks spelling.

If you do not want to search for `MINGUK` due to` MING`, you can use `# ', which is the same as the number of spelling of` MING`, as a separator to use `J, H, MING #` or `JUN, H, MING # `and then a word that is not spelled gives a signal.

In this case, `MINGUK` can not be searched, and as a result,` JUNG, HWA, MINGUK DE, TONG, LIONG `will not be able to search.

The sixth is to input the combination of `` and `` and `` and ``

For example, one or more search words are selected from among the words of the record to be finally selected so that candidate records can be displayed, and a definite character, a candidate character or an unknown character is input as a short spelling number for the selected word.

(`J, *, 6` or` JUN, H * A, 6` or `JUNG, ** A # 6` or` JUNG, A, 6`, etc. to search with the words `JUNG, HWA, And give a signal that there is a word that is missing spelling.)

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

*&#detailed description

The conventional `* &# method`

When no characters are assigned to button * and button #

Use the button * as a shift button to input the second letter assigned to each button,

Button # is used as a shift button for inputting the third letter assigned to each button.

(or

Use the button * as a shift button to input the first letter assigned to each button,

Button # may be used as a shift button for inputting the third character assigned to each button.

Hereinafter, the button * or button #

Second, or third letter of the character string. In this case,

Think of it the same way when you act as a shift button that lets you enter the first or third letters.)

In other words

If you press the letter button after turning the button * on (or off), the second letter assigned to the letter button is entered,

When the character button is pressed after the button # is turned on (or after it has been turned off), the third character assigned to the character button is input.

(The button * or button # may be followed by a letter button.)

As if from LG EZ

Use the button * as a stroke add button,

Button # was used as a double consonant button.

(So the LG EZ method is almost the same as the `&# method 'problem below).

  The Motorola way is that the button * does not have character conversion and is used as a button add button only, so there are about half the problems of LG EZ or `&# '.)

And, in the preceding explanation, I have only criticized the `* &# method`, but if the gear prefers the` * &# method`, the twins can also work with the `* &# method`. (Ie, the multi-tap method, the `* &# method`, the twins can do this without changing the character mode, but this is not recommended).

To be more specific,

Even if the function of the stroke addition button (button *) and the function of the double consonant button (button #) are left intact on the LG EZ, when the twin and the `* &# method '

You can use the button * and button # as combination induction buttons to input the sixth letter as in Figure 07 or Figure 30 or as the second pair consonant button as in Figure 31,

If the other button is not turned on until the button * or button # is turned on and then turned off, that is, when the button is pressed, the function of the conventional `* &# method` is maintained while pressing the button * and button # Pressing another button can be used as a combination induction button that performs another specific function.

If this is confusing, the button * and button # may leave the combinatorial button untouched, but only the conventional function, even when the twins are combined.

The disadvantage of the `* &# method`

Since the button * and button # are used only as a shift button,

It can not be applied to the character system of the language assigned more than 4 characters per button including improved Hangul assignment form, roman including Japanese, Japanese, Thai.

Even in English,

Since there are no shift buttons for inputting the fourth character in the standard keyboard such as FIG. 03 in which four PQRS buttons are assigned to button 7 and four WXYZ buttons are assigned to button 9,

To enter S, press button 7 four times in a row,

When entering Z, press button 9 four times in succession.

As shown in Fig. 04, there is no shift button for inputting the first character even in the form of only 3 alphabets per button, which is not used in Korea, except for Korean keyboard assignments. Therefore, it is not possible to input the first letter in T9 mode Therefore, it can not be combined with the T9 mode.

When the button * or the button # is pressed in the fourth row, the bending angle of the last node of the thumb is also uncomfortable.

Another `* &# method` disadvantage is

Despite the fact that both hands must cover 1 to 4 rows,

To press the button * or button #

Since most of the characters are assigned to the first to third lines,

It is necessary to move from the second row, which is an approximate value of the vertical average position of the character buttons, to the fourth row with the button * or button #, that is, two rows,

The average vertical line is two large rows

Using the combination induction button table as shown in <Fig. 07> and applying the twin using the letter assignment table as in <Fig. 03>

In the second row, which is the average position approximation value of the buttons to which the character is assigned,

The average vertical line up to the second row, which is the average position assigned to the combination direction button, becomes zero rows.

The `* &# method`

The left hand must cover all of the first, second, and third columns, and the right hand must cover all the first, second, and third columns. However, since twins have a left hand covering the first row, a third row covering the right hand, and a second row covering the right or left hand depending on the situation, there are fewer horizontal lines, better equalization of the two hands, .

To be more specific,

The conventional `* &# method`

In order to use both hands alternately, it is necessary to cover all of the first, second and third rows of the left hand, and to cover all the first, second and third rows of the right hand, that is,

In order to input the second character, it is necessary to always use the button * only as a combination induction button, so that any one of the thumbs of both hands always conducts only one row,

In order to input the third character, since only the button # is used as the combination induction button at all times, any one of the thumbs of both hands is always moved in only three rows

The average transverse line of one hand is one

The horizontal line of motion was large (again the average line,

(Note that the `* &# method` is a method in which, even if the average horizontal line for pressing the combination induction button is one row, to continuously input the letters of the second letter and the third letter sequentially , The twins must move two rows in three rows and one row in a row, and twins move only one row in two rows and three in order to press each combination induction button. The distance between the two rows of the cell phone keypad is about three rows, that is, about three times as many wires as the twins, and one twin in the twin moves rather than actually moving the thumb It is also possible to do so because it is possible to do so, so that there is almost no copper wire if you use the other method like that. It is known by the examples below.)

When twins are applied

The first column is the left hand,

The third column is the right hand,

In the situation where the left hand or right hand is responsible for the situation according to the second column,

In other words, in the case where the average horizontal hand position is 1.33 rows for the left hand and 2.67 rows for the right hand,

A combination induction button for inputting the second letter

A combination induction button for inputting the third letter

Since there are two each, one in each of the first column and the third column, so that any one of the closest ones can be selected and pressed. (When entering with both hands, the horizontal average position of the thumb of the both hands is 1.33 columns for the left hand and 2.67 columns for the right hand. Therefore, the average line should be moved from the 1.33 row to the 1 row and the right hand from the 2.67 row to the 3 row. The average line to the line is 0.33 rows. The line width is only 33% of the `* &# method`.)

This paragraph also applies to `contiguous key input method '.

In the `* &# method` above

To explain more precisely the fact that even if the average transit line for pushing the combination induction button is one, and the second and third consecutive letters are to be successively inputted,

E.g,

A word or a series of characters including the case where the second letter of the first column button and the third letter of the third column button are continuous,

HO ME, HY DRO, HOQY

A word or character sequence including the case where the second letter of the first column button and the third letter of the second column button are continuous,

H A L T, H A L L, CHLQV

A word or a series of characters including the case where the second letter of the second column button and the third letter of the third column button are continuous,

Q UO TE, G UY , BFKOUY

A word or a series of characters including the case where the second and third letters of the one-column button are continuous,

HR, H A R D, IQ, HRIQ

In a word or character sequence that includes the case where the second and third letters of the second column button are continuous,

LA B , LUL L, BLUCKV

In a word or character sequence including the case where the second and third letters of the three-column button are continuous,

A F X, OX EN, FNYEOX

As the word including the case where the second letter and the third letter of the same button are continuous,

B A C of button 2, EF FECT of button 3, HI GH of button 4,

SPRIN KL E of button 5, M ONO of button 6, T UV ALU of button 8,

Button 9 SE XY

, You can clearly see that there is a great difference in the circles between the twins and the * &# method when you type these.

Especially

One row

The second letter of button 4, H

The second letter of button 7, Q

Three rows

The third letter of button 3, F

The third letter of button 6, O

The third letter of button 9, Y

Is contained in the word in succession, both hands are concentrated in one row, but all move to the third row, and the movement is very large.

(E.g,

When you enter HO in HOME,

That's when you enter HYDRO's HY.

When the second letter of the first column button of the third row and the third letter of the third column button of the third row are successively input, the interference between the fingers also becomes large.)

For example, if HO

To enter as twin

6 + 4, 7 + 6, the copper wire is input very small,

R L L R

    H O

To enter the `* &# method`

*, 4, #, and 6

     H O

*, And 4, both hands are concentrated in one row,

When manipulating # and 6, both hands are concentrated on the third row. And the line from button * to button # is big.

OH , OH IO, OH M, and OH P, which contain the opposite spelling of OH as OH .

At first glance, although it seems that inputting speed will not affect the input speed a little by a small difference in the small keypad, there is a considerable difference in whether or not you can input more than one stroke due to the difference between the two.

(If you enter it as a twin, you may rarely have more than one hit in the `* &# method`. If you enter it as a twin, you can use` * &# method ` Because it can be entered faster.

With one hand

The speed at which the buttons 2 and 5 are pressed alternately

The speed at which the copper wire alternates between the large button 2 and the button *

The speed at which you alternately press Button 2 and Button #

The speed at which button 2 and the right button are pressed alternately

It is easy to see if you compare.)

For example, NH, RY, or even HE, RO (or OR).

When NH is inputted,

If you type in &#,

* + 6 + 4

(With the left hand holding the button *, which is the combination induction button for inputting the second letter, press the button 6 and the button 4 with the right hand in order to enter NH)

And inputting it as three strokes.

(When the right hand moves to the large line from the third row to the first row and the button 4 is pressed while the button * is pressed, the thumb of both hands is biased in one row so that the interference of both fingers occurs, Inconvenience occurs.)

If you enter it as a twin,

6 + 4, 4 + 6

(Press button 4, which is a combination induction button for inputting the second letter, with the left hand while pressing the button 6 with the right hand to input N,

If button 4 already has a left hand and button 6 already has a right hand,

Press button 6, which is a combination induction button for inputting the second letter, with the right hand while pressing the button 4 with your left hand.

Even if you enter 4,

It is much faster and easier to input because there is much less circulation than the * &# method and there is no bias of both hands.

(The same goes for non-NH HNs.)

The case of inputting RY

If you type in &#,

# + 7 + 9

(With the right hand holding button #, which is the combination induction button for inputting the third letter, press button 7 and button 9 with your left hand in order to input RY.)

And inputting it as three strokes.

(When the left hand moves to the large line from the first row to the third row and the button 9 is pressed while pressing the button #, the thumb of both hands is biased to the third row and is vertically aligned, , And the stability of holding the device is also reduced to the maximum.

If you enter it as a twin,

9 + 7, 7 + 9

(Pressing the button 9, which is a combination induction button for inputting the third character, with the right hand while pressing the button 7 with the left hand, inputs R,

If button 7 already has a left hand and button 9 already has a right hand,

Press button 7, which is a combination induction button that allows you to input the third letter, while holding the button 7 with your left hand, press button 9 with your right hand and enter N.)

And input it in 4

It is much faster and easier to input because there is much less circulation than the * &# method and there is no bias of both hands.

(The same is true for YR, not RY.)

In the case of inputting HE,

If you type in &#,

* + 4 + 3

(Pressing the button *, which is a combination induction button for inputting the second letter, with the left hand, pressing the button 4 and the button 3 with the right hand in order, the HE is input).

(When the right hand moves to a large copper wire from the first row to the third row and when the button 4 is pressed while the button * is pressed, the thumb of both hands is biased in one row so that interference occurs between the two fingers, Inconvenience occurs.)

If you enter it as a twin,

6 + 4 + 3

(Press button 6, which is a combination induction button for inputting the second letter, with the right hand while pressing the button 4 and button 3 with the left hand to input HE)

(6 + 4, 4 + 3 as shown below) is recommended.

6 + 4, 4 + 3

(Press button 4, which is a combination induction button for inputting the second letter, with the left hand while pressing the button 6 with the right hand to input N,

With button 4 already on the left hand,

Press button 4, which is a combination induction button that allows you to enter the second letter, while holding your left hand, press button 3 with your right hand and enter E.

Even if you enter 4,

It is much faster and easier to input because there is much less circulation than the * &# method and there is no bias of both hands.

(The same is true for EH, not HE.)

In the case of inputting RO,

If you type in &#,

# + 7 + 6

(With the right hand holding the button # which is the combination induction button for inputting the third letter, input the RO by pressing the button 7 and the button 6 with the left hand in succession).

(When the left hand moves to a large line from the first row to the third row and when the button 6 is pressed while pressing the button #, the thumb of both hands is concentrated on the third row, interference between the two fingers occurs, This happens.)

If you enter it as a twin,

9 + 7 + 6

(Press button 9, which is a combination induction button for inputting the third letter, with the right hand while pressing the button 7 and button 6 with the left hand, and input RO)

(9 + 7, 7 + 6 as shown below) is recommended.

9 + 7, 7 + 6

(Pressing the button 9, which is a combination induction button for inputting the third character, with the right hand while pressing the button 7 with the left hand, inputs R,

With button 7 already on the left hand,

Press and hold Button 7, which is a combination induction button that allows you to enter the third letter, with your left hand, and press O 6 with your right hand.

Even if you enter 4,

It is much faster and easier to input because there is much less circulation than the * &# method and there is no bias of both hands.

(The same is true for OR rather than RO.)

In addition, the `* &# method` is a method in which a button 7 is pressed while a button 7 is pressed, a button 9 is pressed while a button 9 is pressed, a button 7 and a button 9, So that both thumbs come into contact with each other and interfere with each other, making the writing of writing more inconvenient.

Particularly, while holding the button * with the left thumb, pressing the button 7 with the right thumb, pressing the button # with the right thumb, and pressing the button 9 with the left thumb,

Also, the `* &# method` can be used to combine a button * or a button # to write a specific sequence number assigned to another button only when no character is assigned to the button * or button #.

(For example, to explain why,

When a character is assigned to a button * but functions as a combination inducing button for writing a second character assigned to another button, there is no combination inducing button for writing the second character assigned to the button *

This is because, when a character is assigned to the button # but functions as a combination inducing button for writing the third character assigned to another button, there is no combination inducing button for writing the third character assigned to the button #.)

However, since most phones do not have a `* &# method`, almost 99% of mobile phones are assigned 1 ~ 7 special characters in button * or button #, so if you do not move them to another button It is practically impossible to use `* &# method`.

When the first and second letters of the same button are continuous, the same button problem occurs when the * and # method is performed in parallel with the multi-tap method. In this case, a space button of 4 lines in case of English, The button will cause a large movement to move the cursor artificially.

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Detailed description of adjacent key

The contents of `adjacent key input method` are shown in the application reference number 198 ~ 219 as follows.

The term `adjacent key input '

The `adjacent key input method` has been developed to combine the up, down, left, and right buttons of the rectangles of the assigned button. However, the ` `And` # `When combined with other button buttons, the upper and lower sides of the button are interfered more frequently than the` * `and` # ` The more likely they are to do so.

Also, pressing the adjacent button with both hands creates a problem that the keyboard is blocked much. When you try to press the letter button, both the thumbs of both hands should be in charge of all 1, 2, and 3 rows.

To describe the adjacent key input method,

For example, if three letters are assigned to one button,

If the button with the desired letter is assigned to a single letter, enter the second (= center) assigned letter

The button on the left side of the button to which the desired letter is assigned becomes the combination guide button for inputting the first letter assigned to the button to which the desired letter is assigned,

The button to the right of the button assigned to the desired letter is assigned to the combination letter button to input the third letter assigned to the button to which the desired letter is assigned

When button 4 is assigned `G, H, I`

If you want to input `H`,

If you want to input `I`, you can use button 5 on the right side as a combination induction button and input it in combination with button 4

If you want to enter `G`, try to input the combination of buttons on the left with the button combination 4 with the combination button on the left, but there is no button on the left. It is inconsistent (so there is a general rule that the left button or the top button is a combination-induction button that allows you to enter the first letter).

As a result, buttons 1, 4, and 7 in column 1 have the same problem as above.

In addition, the buttons 3, 6, and 9 on the third row have no right button, so it is not possible to use the lower button as a combination induction button where the third letter is written. Will be a combination induction button that will let you enter the third letter.)

As a result, when entering the first letter assigned to a button in column 1 and the third letter assigned to a button in column 3, it is easy to be confused if you are not a master of what button to apply with the combination induction button.

Furthermore, in the case of button 1, there is no left button or no upper button, so there is no way to write the left character (= first character), so only two letters can be assigned to button 1.

Therefore, when a certain button acts as a combination induction button, a combination induction button is selected in consideration of a spatial positional relationship with a combination induction button with a button assigned with a desired letter, There is a problem that the combination inducing function when the same button acts as a combination inducing button is changed and inconsistency is lost.

For example, Button 2

Because it is on the right side of button 1, it functions as a combination induction button that writes the third letter assigned to button 1,

Because it is located on the left side of button 3, it also functions as a combination induction button that writes the first letter assigned to button 3, so it is necessary to check the number of letters assigned to the desired letter to determine the combination induction button .

In a slide-type mobile phone

If you try to press button 1 with the right hand thumb while holding button 4 with the left thumb, it is difficult to press button 1 because the thumb of the right hand is clogged on the upper slide with liquid crystal,

If you try to press button 3 with your left thumb while pressing button 6 with your right thumb, it is difficult to press button 3 because your left thumb is clogged with the upper slide with liquid crystal.

In addition

Twins mainly use 1 and 3 rows of buttons as a combination guiding button, so there is less movement of the thumb and the stability of holding the device is also good,

In the adjacent key input method, when the third letter of the first row button and the first letter of the third row button are input, the two rows of buttons must always be used as a combination induction button, so that the movement of the thumb is also large, .

In addition

The `adjacent key input method`

This is only applicable when there are three letters per button

In the standard keyboard such as PQRS 4 with 4 buttons and WXYZ 4 with button 9, there is no shift button to input the 4th character, so it is useless in the standard keyboard,

(There are no shift buttons for inputting the fourth character in the standard keyboard like Figure 03 in which 4 PQRS buttons are assigned to Button 7 and 4 WXYZ are assigned to Button 9,

To enter S, press button 7 four times in a row,

Z must be pressed four times in succession)

As shown in Fig. 04, there is no shift button for inputting the second character even in the case where only three or less alphabets are assigned to the keyboard layout allocator button that is not used in Korea, so that the second letter can not be input definitively in the T9 mode , And T9 mode.

Also, the left hand must cover all of the first, second, and third columns, and the right hand must cover all the first, second, and third columns.

However, since twins have a left hand covering the first row, a third row covering the right hand, and the second row covering the right or left hand depending on the situation, there are fewer moving lines, better hand balancing on both hands, .

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

2-TOUCH Detailed Description

In the 2-TOUCH method,

It seems to have been a method widely applied to early cell phones of the 1980s.

(It seems that Korean was also inputted by 2-TOUCH method.),

When you press the button, all the letters assigned to the button are displayed on the display screen, and then you press the number of the desired letter sequence to enter the phoneme.

E.g,

When ABC is assigned to button 2, if you want to enter C

If you press button 2, the ABC assigned to button 2

1 was A, 2 was B, 3 was C, and C was pressed.

The display of the assigned letters on the display screen is omitted and the user can recognize the order displayed on the buttons and select the desired letter by pressing the number in that order.

In the 2-TOUCH method, up to 12 characters per button can be entered as two strokes,

There is a very big disadvantage that the first letter requires two strokes,

Both hands are biased to the first or third row, causing interference between the thumbs of both hands, and there is a disadvantage in that the stability of holding the device is deteriorated.

In addition, there are no advantages such as the advantages of the twin, such as not being able to use the multi-tap method or the T9 method.

Mostly, we abandoned the 2-TOUCH method and introduced the multi-tap method.

Samsung's patent for Japanese input method registered in 2007 (Applicable to all languages including Japanese Patent No. 10-2006-0023897)

Similar to the 2-TOUCH method described above,

The Japanese keyboard has five characters per button,

Assuming that Button 2 is assigned ABCDE,

When you press button 2, the ABCDE assigned to button 2 appears on the display screen with the cursor on C,

If you press the OK button immediately, C is input,

Press the left button once to enter B,

Press the left direction button twice or press and hold A for input,

Press the right button once to enter D,

Pressing the right button twice or pressing and holding the button E is the input type.

(I think that it is better to press twice because it can do double click three times in the time required for long depression.)

The disadvantage of this method is

1 Taro can not enter letters and requires at least two strokes,

When you enter a letter A or E that is farther from the first cursor, you will need one more beat (long press) (same as a total of three or more)

Since the direction button must be operated away from the small keypad, the line is too large and seems to be a more disadvantageous method than the conventional 2-TOUCH method.

Also, there are not many advantages of twins such as multi-tap or T9.

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Detailed description of multi-tab

The multi-tap approach

As the most universally used method in the world,

When multiple letters are assigned to the same button, they are pressed continuously until the desired letter appears.

For example, when A B C is assigned to Button 2,

Button 2

Press once to display A on the cursor,

Press twice to display B on the cursor,

Press C three times to show C on the cursor.

In the Samsung method

Consonants are entered using the multi-tap method

Button 4 is assigned to a blah blah,

Button 4

Press once to appear in the cursor,

If you press twice, b appears on the cursor,

Press 3 times to display the cursor on the cursor.

(The more characters you have assigned to each button, the greater the number of bats.)

And as above

If the second or more letters are input,

In the multi-tap method, when the user presses several times, only one hand presses several times, so the hand currently used is very busy and does not use unused hands,

Twins use both hands to spell each spell, so when you look at it, both hands look relaxed, but you can type faster than the multi-tap method.

(The multi-tap method is to go to the goal point with two or three unilateral consecutive runs, changing the foot, and running the unicycle. The twins walk normally (or jump) to the target point with their hair.

Even if we compare only the input of the letters of the second order and the letters of the third order,

In the multi-tap approach

You have to double-click one hand to enter the second letter of the sequence, triple-click with another hand to enter the third letter, and each time you type each letter, your hands are very busy and the other hands are playing ,

Twins

One hand presses the combination induction button to input the second letter, the other hand presses the button to which the desired letter is assigned,

One hand presses the combination induction button for inputting the third letter and the other hand presses the button to which the desired letter is assigned,

From the viewpoint of one hand, the muscle contraction interval of the thumb is twice as long as that of the input by the multi-tap method, so that it is much more leisurely.

Combination with the combination induction button gives the twin a number of advantages, including a one-sided feeling, even if it is two strokes.

In addition, the multi-tap method has a fatal disadvantage that the same button problem occurs.

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Maximum twin expansion (not recommended)

So far, we have made it possible to make only six combinations of buttons per group by making pairs of buttons.

However, its effectiveness is not much, but even if it is likely that there is a case that I will introduce only in the form of expansion at the maximum.

In the English standard keyboard like Figure 03, there are no letters assigned to button 1, button *, button 0, button #.

Even if the combination induction button precedes the letter button

When a button for which a character is not assigned is used as a combination induction button, it is not necessary to assign the assigned function to twins to make a combination induction button, and such combination induction button is distinguished from when it precedes and follows the character button You can also designate a combination induction button with different functions.

However, because the twins are not designated, the advantages of the twins mentioned above, such as the interference of both hands, the increase of the copper wire and the decrease of the stability of the device, disappear, It is not recommended because it is designated as combination induction button and can cause great confusion.

For example, you can do the following:

As a basic condition that the combination induction button precedes the character button

When the button 1 precedes the letter button, it functions as the first function combination induction button,

When the button 1 follows the letter button, it functions as the second function combination induction button,

Button * When this character button is preceded, it functions as a third function combination induction button,

Button &lt; / RTI &gt; &lt; RTI ID = 0.0 &gt;

When the button 0 precedes the letter button, it functions as the fifth function combination induction button,

When the button 0 follows the letter button, it functions as the sixth function combination induction button

Button # If preceded by this letter button, it acts as a seventh function combination induction button,

When the button # is followed by the letter button, it functions as the eighth function combination induction button,

Button 4 and button 6 character button, it acts as a ninth function combination induction button,

Button 7 and the 9-letter button, it functions as a tenth function combination induction button,

When the button 2 and the button 8 are preceded by the letter button, the button functions as the eleventh function combination induction button,

When the button 5 and the button 3 are preceded by the letter button, it functions as a twelfth function combination induction button

Each button button can be configured as a function of the thirteenth function.

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

It is recommended that the following items be selected (changed) by the user on the device.

1 Allows the user to change (select) the function of the letter button as a combination induction button.

2 Allows you to change (select) the assignment of the characters assigned to the button (especially the added Hangul phonemes, punctuation marks, symbols, and emoticons).

(It would be better if the changes such as the organic light-emitting diode button could be reflected in the button.

Conventional buttons are mostly printed with paint, so changes can not be reflected on the buttons. )

E.g,

You can show the assignment status based on the button number, make it changeable,

(For example, if you select button 5 in the mode that shows the assignment status based on the button number, it shows the letter assignment status of all groups including the first to fifth groups of button 5 in normal letter mode, .

You can also show the assignment status on a character (special character) basis and make it changeable.

(E.g,

When the heart emoticon is already assigned to the third letter of button 5 on the display screen, which is the second group of the normal letter mode,

In the mode that shows the assignment status based on each special character, if you select the heart drawing emoticon,

2153 is displayed in the information field (or next to it) of the heart icon, so that the user can change it.

When the bouquet emoticon is not yet assigned to the normal letter mode, the information field of the bouquet picture icon (or next to it) is displayed as 0000 so that the user can change it. )

The triplet dedicated mode can be newly added to the twin dedicated mode.

The twin-only mode means that the first letter is entered as a single letter and the remaining letters are entered as a twin combination.

4 Allows you to change (select) the input method of letters for groups 1 ~ 5 group letters.

5 Allows you to select whether to display characters including special characters and graphic characters by taking a part of the display screen.

6. Allows you to select whether you want to add newly added characters (especially in Hangul input), whether you can input them in multi-tab, or how many you can input in multi-tab.

7 Allows you to change (select) the auto cursor time setting time.

8 Miscellaneous new things mentioned so far

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

In the past, it was difficult to input characters from a small keypad in English

(If twins are applied, why can you input Greek, Roman characters including English, faster than Hangul?)

26 alphabetic characters, 40 alphabetic characters

On the surface, I had to be much easier to type in English.

The biggest reason is that the same button problem occurs more frequently in English than Hangul in multi-tap mode.

Hangul is followed by a neutral (vowel) followed by a consonant (consonant), and there may or may not be a consonant.

Therefore, when a small keypad is divided into buttons and vowels assigned only to consonants,

The same button problem did not occur in the multi-tap method because it occurs only when the first letter consonant and the second letter consonant are assigned to the same button.

So, using the method that included the multi-tap method, it was able to input at a high speed in the world.

(And like ELJ EZ, if the consonant input is not a multi-tap type, the same button problem does not occur at all, so the usage method is a bit complicated. If it is a thumb, it is much easier to input characters than the method of introducing multi tap.

 However, in the case of English, the button assignment itself is not divided into consonants and vowels, and even spelling of words is not a structure that comes after the consonants, so that a lot of the same button problems occur in random cases, The abbreviation of abbreviation of common word in English and the abbreviation of abbreviation such as chatting term is not made abbreviated as a combination of consonant and vowel like Hangul, and it is often made after the first letter of the word. Therefore, .

In the case of English,

There is no consonant that plays the role of `

There is no vowel that acts as a `

The rule that the vowel comes after consonants is further decayed,

The separation of consonant and vowel buttons, like Hangul,

Causing more button problems to occur.

As mentioned above, the English language itself

There is no `H`

With the absence of the Hangul vowel `ㅡ ()`,

Compared with Hangul,

The English alphabet substitutes one consonant (prefix `ㅇ`) and one vowel (`ㅡ ()`) with a space, so when you write a letter by hand or enter a character in a QWERTY keyboard, It is advantageous to reduce the action to express the sound.

However, small keypads have the disadvantage of causing a lot of the same button problems that cause such an advantage.

There are a lot of pronunciations in the English language. So, I do not use the vowel that serves as the Hangul vowel `ㅡ ()`.

The same button problem occurs because S, P, R assigned to button 7 must be input consecutively because there is no vowel meaning `Hangul 'in Hangul. If there is a Hangul phoneme on the button, it means that the same button problem has not occurred. You can type the additional phoneme which functions as `ㅡ`, or the same button problem and move the cursor to the space button. However, moving the cursor to a space-only button is psychologically very burdensome because it seems to do unnecessary work, and the space-only button is on line 4, where there are no buttons assigned to the character, Moving the cursor with the right button, like the traditional Hangul input method, gives a greater burden because the line is bigger. .)

If you use `surr 'in English, you will omit` ㅡ `and use`

If you use `Aya` in English, you will omit `ㅇ` and write `ㅑ ㅑ`

If you want to write in English, you should omit `ㅡ` and `ㅇ` and write `ㄸ ㄴ ㅁ ㅁ ㅁ ㅓ ㅄ ㅣ`.

(I have to write b under b, b under b, b under b, and I can not do it in word program, so I just expressed it as ㄸ b ㅁ ㅁ ㅓ ㅓ ㅓ).

If you use Hangul phonemes like this

It will be more convenient when you write by hand or QWERTY keyboard,

If you type on a small keypad, Hangul will have more of the same button problems than before.

(In fact, if you introduce this method into Hangul input, you may want to omit the most used vowel and the first one.)

If you want to input Hangul in English as above,

 When you try to type `

In the sky and curitel method, `ㅑ ㅑ` is assigned to button 3 and is inputted in a multi-tap manner, so that the same button problem occurs even when a vowel is input.

As shown in <Figure 36.9>, Hangul has a smaller number of pads than the EZ, because the input method of Pantech series is less than that of LG EZ. Because the input method of Pantech series is multi-tap type, Therefore, there are many thumb people who prefer the LG method which does not have the same button problem and dislike the method of Pantech family.

The same button problem is that the task of typing tires and it increases the number of strokes and circles.

Hangul is the best character in the creation principle.

However, the Korean input speed was faster than English in the small keypad because it is not scientific and excellent, but the operation of the character itself is used as a rule of operation which causes the same button problem to occur on the small keypad. Even on a computer keyboard, Hangul input speed is not faster than English.

In this situation

It is possible to input all the phonemes in one or two letters while the twins do not have the same button problem occurring in English,

It is possible to input an English alphabet having a smaller number of phonemes than a Korean alphabet.

To put it in more detail, English has fewer phonemes, so fewer characters are allocated per button.

Since all the letters in the second or higher order can be entered as twins, the number of phonemes to be assigned per button may not be significant, but the first character is entered as a single letter, It is because the case is bigger. In English, 8 out of 26 phonemes (up to 12 phonemes) can be entered as singular, but Hangul can input 10 out of 40 phonemes (up to 12) singly.

(The same principle as Greek, Roman, Cyrillic, Arabic, etc. can be entered faster than Hangul.)

Even if the number of phonemes in Hangul is large, all the phonemes can be input within two digits while the same button problem does not occur, and various other advantages of the twins can be expressed, but there are also very slight differences as below.

More specifically, to explain why,

All the buttons except for Button 7 and Button 9 are assigned 3 characters per button. Since only the combination induction button is required to input the third character, the combination induction button for inputting the fourth character is rarely used.

If you want to input all 40 Hangul phonemes in less than 2 words, you have to allocate the phonemes that are not assigned to the completion type in the conventional way anyway, so that the button with 4 letters assigned is more than English.

In that case, you should use the combination induction button to input the fourth letter more often than English.

With reference to the previous example (Figure 07 ~ 07.6)

Using the combination induction button to input the fourth letter is somewhat inconvenient than using the combination induction button to input the first to third letters.

As shown in Fig. 07, if the combination induction button for inputting the fourth character is within the first to third lines but exists in the second column, it is more inconvenient than when the button pressing is in the first column or the third column.

It is not inconvenient because it is a combination guide button. In the case of inputting ordinary numerals or characters even in the conventional character input method, if the two-handed input is performed, the buttons in the first column and the third column are easy to press. It is a little inconvenient than pressing the button.

This is because when you use both hands, pressing one row of the left hand and row three of the right hand is easier than pressing the two rows. This is because the average position of both hands is 1.33 columns for the left hand and 2.67 columns for the right hand.

If there is a combination induction button on the fourth line to input the fourth letter as shown in Figure 07.3, the copper wire increases.

So it means uncomfortable.

In Korean, T9 method does not input phonemes,

Since the combination induction button for inputting the first letter is rarely used,

As shown in figure 07.51, if the combination induction button for inputting the fourth letter is assigned to the first or third column of the third row, it is possible to input it more conveniently and quickly.

And

If you enter English as a twin, both the character button and the combination induction button are all within one to three lines, so only one to three lines of copper are required,

If Hangul is applied to twins in parallel with the conventional method, characters are assigned to button 0 like Samsung Cheonjin and LG EZ method. (Pantech system Sky and Curitel method are all 4-line button *, 0, # character. Motorola system is 4-line button *, 0 character is assigned. The copper wire is more frequent.)

It is possible to assign characters only in 1 to 3 columns, but it is not so good to see because there are 4 buttons with 5 characters per button.

Here are a few more reasons to mention that there are more button problems in the English language than the Hangul in the past (see pages 7, 8, and 9 below).

In the case of one verb,

When adding the endings of the past (ed), present progressive (ing), ~ person or machine (er), add another consonant.

   In a verb such as: stop, beg, drop, nod, stir, slur, fur, quit, plan,

   If you change the verb with only Stop,

Since Sto pp ed, sto pp ing, sto pp p, so the change stand one more glued to the er, this is the same character p is continuous, there arises the same button issues.

2 short voices + ending with terminal sound

Adjectives, adverbs are comparative, and when you create a superlative, you write one more consonant and then append ~ er, ~ est.

Ex) adjective: big-bi gg er-bi gg est

Adverb: hot-ho t t er-ho tt est

3 It also happens when you create a word derived from a number of prefixes and suffixes.

(It may occur at the point where it is attached to the basic word when it is attached with the prefix, suffix,

The spelling of the prefix and suffix itself can cause the same button problem.

Ex) A word created with the prefix ir: i rr egular

Words created with the suffix ous: autono mo us

Spelling of the prefix itself: omn i ~

Spelling of the suffix itself: ~ i on

The same button problem occurs when the plural form of nouns and the third person singular form of the verb are put in the same plural form of the noun ending with p, q, r assigned to the same button as the s and the third person singular form of the verb.

5 There are many consecutive letters from a to z in common words.

  (Except verb forms, short forms, etc.), such as verbs, adjectives, adverbs, etc.

Yes)

The sequence of a (b aa ),

The sequence of b (e bb ),

Continuous (su cc eed) of c,

a series of d (a dd ),

The continuation of e (b ee )

The sequence of f (o ff ),

g consecutive (e gg ),

The series of h (s hh ),

The sequence of i (hawa ii )

The sequence of j (ha jj )

k is a continuous (?), (kkt is a simplified word)

l of consecutive (ba ll ),

m continuous (h mm ),

Continuous (nn ma er) of n,

the sequence of o (n oo n),

A series of p (?), (there is a shortcut for ppp)

a sequence of q (s qq ),

The sequence of r (bi rr ),

The sequence of s (gla ss ),

The series of t (wa tt )

The sequence of u (m uu m uu )

v is a continuation (?), (vv is an abbreviation)

a series of w (?), (the short word is ww)

a series of x's (?), (xx is an abbreviation)

The series of y (?),

a series of z (fri zz ),

In addition, there are too many consecutive 2 characters among the 3 (4) characters assigned to the same button, and there are quite a few words including three consecutive characters as follows.

Abc sequence of button 2: cab , cab in, cabb age, bac k, etc.

Continuation of def of button 3: def ace, defe r, defe at, fede ral etc.

Continuation of ghi of button 4: nigh t, ligh t, figh t, deligh t, high, etc.

Continuation of mno of button 6: mono , mon ster, Mon day, mon k, onm essage etc.

Pqrs series of button 7: spr ight, spr ing, spr inkle etc.

Continuation of tuv of button 8: tuv a, tuv alu etc.

6. Make `ㅜ` pronounced by overwriting `oo`.

Ex) n oo n

7 It is not essential that vowels follow consonants.

   (So consonant key and vowel key are not separated.)

8 The initials `ㅇ` and the vowel `ㅡ` are used as spaces in English.

9 When you make an abbreviation, you make the first word of the word.

Example) Common Words: BBC (British Broadcasting Corporation

Standard unit: AAA size battery

Chat terms: bb l (be back later: I'll be back later)

10 is assigned to a company exchange, the same ~ ed past injection type of button (Button 4).

11. There are also some psychological factors that think that there are many bats by pressing the same button continuously in 3 tara.

I think that it is enough to double click the same button, but when I press the same button three times, I think that there are a lot of numbers.

When inputting English `O` in multi-tap mode, you have to press button 6 three times to input it.

When a Korean phoneme is inputted by a conventional method, a phoneme input by three or more strokes by different pressures is not considered to be so many.

E.g,

To enter ㅑ in the global method ㅣ. . I have to type in three strokes, but I do not think so many.

In order to enter ㅙ in 천 천 천 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 않는다 않는다 않는다 않는다 않는다 않는다 않는다 않는다 않는다 않는다 않는다 않는다 않는다 않는다 않는다 않는다 않는다 않는다 않는다 않는다 .

Also, when you input ㅙ in the LG EZ method, you can input 3 buttons by pressing ㅗ button, a button and ㅣ button.

12 Many other cases

Here are a few more suffixes and prefixes.

Prefix (prefix)

ac ad: directional access / to

ambi: two sheep / two

an: not / without

ante: previous / before

ant

be: forming a verb / make (transitive verb)

bene: good / good

bi di: two / two

circum: surrounding / arround

de: down / away

dis

en: verb formation / make (transitive verb) in

extra: outside

epi: contact / on

eu: good / good

ex: out / out

for: separation away / away

fore: before / before

hyper: over / over

hypo: under / under

im in: in / on

in im il ir: negative / not

inter: between

mal male: bad / bad

mono: one / one

multi: many / many

mis: bad wrong

ob oc of opp

omni: all / all

out: out

over

pan: all / all

para: beside / beside

per: pass through / wrongly

pre: before / before

pro: forward

proto: First / first

post: after / after

re: repeat after / back again

se: separation away / away

sub: under

syn: same / same

trans: past / pass

un: not / not

uni: one

with: back

semi: half partly

co col com con cor: together / together

contra contro counter: against

Suffix (finally determining the part of the vocabulary)

- Suffix to create a verb

ate: to do (activate) cf) noun + ate = adjective

e: noun ending in th, adjective to verb (breathe: breath)

en: nouns, adjectives to lengthen (lengthen), if attached to the verb P.P form

(i) fy: to make (magnify)

ize, ise: ~ (to be) (to modernize)

I do not know what to do.

- Suffix to make a noun

cy, ce, age, ion, tion, ety, ity, ment, th, tude, ty, y, ness, ing

ics, logy, name, ry, ship, al, ary, ory

- suffix to make man (this is also a noun)

ant, ist, ian, ard, er, or, ar, ee, ess

- Suffix to make an adjective

ible, ible, ant, ent, ary, ory, ic, ical, (i) ous, some, less, al

ful, ish, ive, ly, y, ate

- Suffix to create an adverb

ly = Adverbs are used to make adverbs, and adjectives to be attached to nouns.

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Composing or playing

Just as you can quickly enter a lot of letters with twins,

Even with products that have a music composition or playing function on their phones,

So that such a function can be executed quickly.

One octave is composed of 12 notes, so you can play 12 notes with 0 ~ 9, *, # 12 buttons, and different octaves can be represented by different group letter input method.

(The twelve notes from above indicate 7 melodies and 5 melodies.

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Shortcuts in call waiting mode

Not in text mode,

In the normal state, that is, in the standby mode

A combination of two or more buttons can be used as shortcut keys.

At this time, it is not necessary to designate two combination induction buttons having the same function, and two or more buttons to be combined

It is not necessary to have only 12 buttons of 0 ~ 9, *, #,

A call button, a direction button, an OK button, and the like.

In the conventional mobile phone, only a menu frequently used by many users such as a text message, a phone book, a camera, a volume control, an MP3 operation, and an Internet connection is used.

I personally used notes and voice memo frequently, but I was inconvenienced because I did not have a shortcut for such a menu.

To record a voice memo, I had to select `Digital diary`, `Voice memo`, and `Record voice memo` after pressing `Menu button`

now

E.g,

1 + 2 (press button 2 while holding down button 1), you can go directly to the screen just before the recording of the voice memo,

1 + 3 (press and hold button 1 and press button 3), you can go directly to the `Voice memo` screen and check what you recorded before.

In addition

View subway map view (eg 9 + 0), view route 1 (eg 9 + 1), view route 2 (eg 9 + 2), view route 3 (eg 9 + 3)

Game directories (eg 3 + 0), bomb games (eg 3 + 1), go-top games (eg 3 + 2)

Cell phone music directory (eg 4 + 0), cell phone performance (eg 4 + 1), mobile phone composition (eg 4 + 2)

Memo directories (such as 5 + 0), notes (such as 5 + 1), memo views (such as 5 + 2)

Current world time directory (eg 6 + 0), US time (eg 6 + 1), UK time (eg 6 + 2)

I would like to be able to make the user's favorite menu shortcuts arbitrary.

In a mobile phone with a touch screen, you can do the above functions by clicking the icon on the touch screen, but it is worth a push for a mid to low-end mobile phone without a touch screen.

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

When a combination induction button is required to input the first letter

1. If you want to solve the same button problem that occurs when twins are in parallel with the multi-tap method and the first letter of the same button is input continuously (not necessary when solving the same button problem with auto cursor time setting)

2. When you assign a letter to a button that functions as a single character in the character input mode. When you input the first letter

(As an example of the type of button that functions as a single character in the character input mode

Mainly button * or button #

A character mode change button, a button for selecting a candidate character in the T9 mode, or a stroke addition button or a double consonant button in the Hangul input method,

Or a function button other than the 12 character buttons including the call button and the end button.)

3. When the twins are in T9 mode, if you enter the first letter of the button as a definite letter instead of the candidate letter

4. When the twin is in parallel with the 2-TOUCH method, if you enter the first letter of the button

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Now, the first part of this

`Twins' Multiple Advantages` and

`Prove the fastest way to type in twins on the mini-keypad: Let's go back to the lesson and enjoy it again.

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Below is a video script.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 01: Introduction to twin character input method

<Let's make improvements in English>

Hello?

I will explain twin character input method.

In devices with miniature pads made of 0 ~ 9, *, # buttons, such as mobile phones, the speed with which to input / characters / the fastest character in the world / is currently Hangul.

If you anticipate the twin character input method in a word,

These letters, including Greek and Roman letters,

Such Japanese characters,

Almost every character in the world, including Hangul,

When inputting from a mobile phone with a small pad

It is possible to use various conventional input methods as it is, without changing the character mode,

All phonemes can be hinted / dithered, minimizing / routing, equalizing the load on both hands, stably holding the phone, etc.

Improves the speed and convenience of inputting Hangul which is the fastest input in the world,

Improves the ability to input Greek / Roman characters, including the English alphabet, faster / easier than the improved Hangul input speed.

In mobile phones with compact pads, Hangul has been developed in Korea and has maintained its pride in a way that can only give the first place in the speed of text input.

Whether it is Korean, Greek or Roman characters, including the English alphabet, you can type in a mobile phone with a small pad, a little faster than the speed of scribbling on paper by hand through the twin input method.

Or you could say that you can enter all of the phonemes on the compact pads a little faster than pressing the phone number with one hand or taking a touchpad with the stylus pen.

So it becomes possible to write novels on mobile phones.

Nowadays, it is a necessary way for the situation of internet activity on mobile phones.

The Japanese characters Hiragana and Katakana can be entered much faster than the hand-scribing speed.

Because Chinese characters are often entered using the English alphabet, Chinese characters can also be entered quickly.

It is very easy to apply only to input a few letters when entering phone book search terms, not necessarily long ones.

(<Qwerty Mobile phone picture>)

As a conventional character input method, it is too troublesome to input a character in a mobile phone having a small-sized pad

At present, overseas sales of 15 ~ 20% of mobile phones with QWERTY keyboards,

Just as you do not need a phone with a QWERTY keyboard to type Hangul /

There is almost no need for a phone with a QWERTY keyboard to enter foreign characters.

(Figure 22)

It's a great way to apply it to high-end phones,

I think that it is necessary to apply it to the mid-priced type mobile phone.

We are also researching, developing and marketing the mobile phone manufacturers such as Nokia and Samsung Electronics in order to increase the market share.

Also, special characters such as punctuation marks and emoticons can be entered in the normal character mode, without changing the character mode in / normal character mode.

Entering with / literal characters, either regular characters or special characters, is equivalent to the speed of han- dling when inputting with only one hand, because it uses both hands.

In other words,

The twin character input method

From small pad such as mobile phone keyboard

In this way, almost all characters and special characters including English, Japanese,

It is a fast and convenient way to enter into Hanata or Dota.

Special characters including punctuation marks and emoticons can be input in 2 characters in normal text mode without changing the character mode in normal text mode.

(<Touch pad>)

And even if it is a touch pad, it can be applied to a small-sized pad type touch pad in which a plurality of characters are assigned to one button.

(Figure 22)

In addition, it is possible to use the conventional Hangul input methods such as Samsung's Moakiki method, Chinjin method, and LG Electronics' EZ method, and the conventional method such as the multi-tap method and the "T9" Concurrent use. That is, the user can use the conventional method as soon as the Chinese character input is performed, or the twin character input method can be used without changing the character mode. Therefore, there is no risk in applying twin character input method in the enterprise.

The twin character input method is not a method of discarding the conventional character input method, but a method of helping the conventional character input method.

However, it can be applied differently from the conventional input method.

And it can be applied to QWERTY keyboard like computer keyboard.

It is also possible to apply the twin input method in the state of the following / conventional keyboard.

The conventional English keyboard is the same as <Figure 03>

The conventional Japanese dial is shown in <Figure 17>

The conventional keyboard of Korean Hangul is shown in <Figure 22>.

For more details and many other benefits, please refer to the guidebook.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\\\

Movie 02: The principle of twin character input method

<<<<< 468 >>>>>

(<Figure 05>)

I will talk about the principle of twin input method.

In the conventional input method mode, it is possible to input even in the conventional input method,

Without changing the character mode,

The twin input scheme can be applied,

(<Figure 03>)

The twin input method

If you press the letter button while holding down the shift button on the computer keyboard, the second letter is entered,

In the mobile phone keyboard, a shift button for inputting the 2nd to 6th letters is used.

It does not actually add multiple shift buttons,

It is a method to use for a while with various kinds of shift buttons which let you enter the 12th button of conventional button *, #, 0 ~ 9, the 2nd to 6th letter of each button.

<<<<< 478 >>>>>

If you choose twin shift buttons of various kinds

When you press a button once, that is, when you release a button without pressing another button while a button is pressed, the first letter assigned to each button is input as usual (but in special cases, 1, or 3 may be used for a while with a shift button that allows you to enter the first letter assigned to each button.)

Button 4 or 6 is temporarily used with a shift button for inputting the second letter assigned to each button,

The button 7 or 9 is temporarily used as a shift button for inputting the third character assigned to each button,

Button 2 or 8 is temporarily used with a shift button for inputting the fourth character assigned to each button,

Button 5 or 0 is temporarily used with a shift button for inputting the fifth character assigned to each button,

The button * or # is used for a while with the shift button that allows you to input the sixth letter assigned to each button.

To summarize the function of the shift button, once again, I have decided that 1,2,3,4,5,6.

(Of course, you can set it differently: 1,2,3,4,5,6 This can be easily remembered.) It is possible for a button to change the way it acts as a shift button that allows you to enter the number of letters assigned to each button. There is.)

<<<<< 496 >>>>>

[Place <Figure 03>]

Note that,

(Both Samsung's Anycall or Pantech Sky or Curitel mobile phones are also exported to PQRS on Button 7 and WXYZ on Button 9.)

The twin input method can be applied as the standard English version as shown in <Figure 03>

If applied to an improved keyboard in which a special character is additionally assigned to a standard English keyboard such as <Figure 16.5>

Button 7

To enter the first character, P, simply click button 7 once,

To enter the second letter Q, double-click the button 7, or press the button 7 while holding down the shift button 4 or 6, which allows you to enter the second letter without changing the character mode (button 4 Would not it be a lot easier to use button 6 as a shift button?

To enter the third letter R, press the button 7 three times in a row or press the button 7 while holding down the shift button 7 or 9 which allows the third letter to be entered without changing the character mode Since you can not press button 7 again while pressing and holding button 7 as a shift button, press button 7 while holding button 9, and enter R.)

<<<<< 497 >>>>>

To enter the fourth letter S, press button 7 seven times in a row or press button 7 with button 2 or button 8 being the shift button to enter the fourth letter without changing the character mode Would it be much easier to use button 8 as a shift button than button 2?),

The user presses the button 7 in a state in which the button 7 is pressed five times consecutively or the button 5 which is the shift button for inputting the fifth character without changing the character mode or the button 0 is pressed,

To enter the sixth character, tear-dropping expression, press button 7 seven times in a row or press the button 7 while holding down the button * or button # which is a shift button for inputting the sixth character without changing the character mode (It would be much easier to use button # as a shift button rather than button *),

PQRS Dollar Display Assigned to Button 7 Let's quickly enter the tear-drop expression again.

PQRS Dollar Display Tearful Expression

Is it too easy to type?

 <<<<< 502 >>>>>

The reason why the same multi-tap type input method and twin input method can be performed in parallel without changing the character mode is as follows.

Conventionally, in the character input mode, as soon as the contact point of the button is turned on, the character is not inputted but the character is inputted when the button is turned off.

In text entry mode

When the button is pressed shortly, the alphabet is input in the English mode and the Korean phoneme is input in the Hangul mode,

Press and hold for one second to enter the number.

In other words, it was a different signal depending on the time from when the button was turned on to when it was turned off.

In this case, the operation principle of the shift button on the computer keyboard is introduced, and when another button is turned on, it becomes another signal until a certain button is turned on and then turned off.

In this case, when a shift button that has the same function is designated as two or more twins, a button having a character assigned thereto can be made as a shift button, so that a larger number of shift buttons can be generated, a copper line can be shortened, And the ability to hold the device steadily.

<<<<< 516 >>>>>

Also, a user who wants to input by a multi-tap method, which is a method of inputting by pressing the same button several times in the conventional manner, is able to input while circulating only the PQRS even if the user presses the button 7 a plurality of times as before, and the dollar display and the tear- You can "limit" it so that it can only be entered in a twin fashion without change.

And, if the letters of the third or higher order are to be entered by using the shift button to input the letters of the corresponding order, is it possible to reduce the number of strokes?

If the second character is input, the second character is double-clicked. Even if the shift button for inputting the second character is depressed and the button for which the desired character is assigned is also pressed,

It is recommended that you use the shift button to enter the second letter as well, since using the shift button will evenly distribute the load on both hands and there will be more advantages to be explained later.

<<<<< 517 >>>>>

What has been described so far is the description of how to input the six letters of the first group of each button, and the total of 18 letters in the second to third groups of the six buttons, , You can easily enter 2 to 3 characters without changing the character mode in normal text mode.

Please refer to the following videos and explanations for various applications such as inputting uppercase letters and special characters in lower case mode without changing the character mode.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 03: Why You Need to Improve Text Input on Small Keypads

<<<<< 104-0037 0008? 104-0039 >>>>>

(<Figure 03>)

I would like to talk about why you need to improve the way you enter text in a small keypad.

<<<<< 104-0038 0012 >>>>>

(Figure 14.5)

And I know that a small pad is a touch pad like this one, but it also includes a small pad type.

<<<<< 104-0043 0015 >>>>

(Picture of QWERTY keyboard)

The majority of consumers in the world 80-90% (99.9% in Korea)

Without choosing a phone with such a QWERTY keyboard.

<<<<< 104-0045 0007? 104-0033 >>>>>

Ultimately, we will choose a mobile phone with such a small keypad.

<<<<< 104-0047 0022 >>>>>

The specific reasons are as follows.

QWERTY keyboard phone

Since the size of the mobile phone itself is large, it is often inconvenient to carry,

Even if it is small in size, it usually becomes a horizontal folder or a horizontal slide. It feels uncomfortable when you press a phone number or call with one hand,

<<<<< 104-0051 0020 >>>>>

Unlike this, the size of the button is much smaller than that of the finger, so that it is difficult to press the right button properly,

Though some phones are equipped with a small keypad and a QWERTY keyboard, they are thicker.

<<<<< 104-0052 0017 >>>>

And the design is not sophisticated, and most are expensive.

However, in countries outside of Korea, QWERTY keyboard phones are not yet a choice for most users who do not write text very much.

<<<<< 104-0056 0025 >>>>>

(Figure 20)

So I bought a mobile phone with a small keypad like this,

After purchasing, I feel uncomfortable when I input a few letters of a search term when I search for a phone number, or when I need to input characters. However, the next time you buy a cell phone, you must buy a cell phone that has a QWERTY keyboard.

<<<<< 104-0072 0026 >>>>>

(<Qwerty Keyboard Photo>)))))

Conventionally,

Korean characters with the fastest character input speed

In countries other than Korea, it is too inconvenient to input characters even if you use various input methods including multi-tap type and T9 type in a small keypad. In case of inputting a lot of characters, the user has to purchase a mobile phone having a QWERTY keyboard However,

<<<<< 104-0074 0031 >>>>>

Since the twin input method is now developed, characters expressing other languages such as English in the small keypad can be input faster than the Hangul input speed,

In regions where the sales of QWERTY mobile phones in some regions other than Korea have increased by 10 ~ 20%, QWERTY mobile phone sales ratio will decrease like Korea, as the small keypad can input characters at speeds of more than one character.

<<<<< 104-0076 0015 >>>>>

(We know that worldwide 2008 QWERTY sales target rate is about 15%

We know that Samsung Electronics' target sales ratio of Qwerty handset in 2008 is about 15%.)

<<<<< 104-0080 0028 >>>>>

However, even if the QWERTY mobile phone sales ratio has increased in the future, it will be at least 50% due to the advantages inherent in the small size pad.

Currently, 1 billion phones are sold worldwide per year, so 50% is 500 million, or at least 500 million units a year.

<<<<< 104-0084 0036 >>>>

A cell phone with the lowest price is nothing but a cell phone having such a small keypad,

The twin input method has to be applied so that the user can input characters conveniently.

Twin-input systems will have to be applied to mid- and low-end handsets, which are in high demand in poor countries and developing countries, or home and office line phones.

Cost reduction in the mobile phone market, which has been intensifying competition in emerging countries, has become a major issue in the mobile phone industry these days.

<<<<< 104-0086 0015 >>>>>

(Especially, in recent years, technology has been leveling up and price has become the biggest differentiator.) One of the reasons is that emerging markets such as Southeast Asia, Latin America and Africa are emerging as growth engines, and Nokia, Samsung, Motorola, LG, Sony It has become even more important that Ericsson's "Big Five" companies monopolize 80% of the entire market and how efficiently they can build a "economies of scale" to lower prices.

<<<<< 104-0089 0016 >>>>>

Samsung Electronics also actively tackled emerging markets by adjusting its existing business portfolio focused on high-end products. It is thanks to the success of this strategy that Motorola is second only to the second place.

<<<<< 104-0090 0005? 104-0099 >>>>>

For reference, a little more about Hangul input method

<<<<< 104-0091 0022? 104-0058 >>>>>

By the way,

Even from the perspective of Korean input, which is the fastest way to enter characters in the world on a small keypad,

At the time of purchase, customers who did not select a cell phone with a QWERTY keyboard,

After purchasing, when inputting a character, it is inconvenient to input a few characters while inputting a person's name at the time of searching for a telephone number,

<<<<< 104-0092 0015? 104-0065 >>>>>

I changed the phone maker and it became so hard to enter the characters because of the disadvantages of the keyboard layout and the changed character input method that I did not know before.

I have a lot of background.

<<<<< 104-0093 0018? 104-0067 >>>>>

In particular, many people say that when the Umi who used to input characters by LG Electronics EZ method is using Samsung's Chunji method or Pantech's Sky or Curitel method, we need to buy LG's mobile phone again.

<<<<< 104-0094 0006? 104-0068 >>>>>

The elderly rather prefer Samsung's method of heavenly people.

<<<<< 104-0095 0012? 104-0069 >>>>>

In order to achieve customer satisfaction in this situation, it is necessary to improve the character input method on the small keypad in such a way that both the novice and the Umbil are satisfied.

<<<<< 104-0096 0034 >>>>>

Combining each of the conventional methods including twinning method of Samsung Electronics, EZ method of LG Electronics, Sky or Curitel method of Pantech series, and Motorola method and twin input method,

In each of the conventional character modes,

While it is possible to input in the same way as in the past,

Without changing the character input mode

In parallel with the twin input method

You can input all 40 Hangul phonemes as one or two, and special characters can be entered easily and quickly in normal text mode.

<<<<< 104-0098 0016 >>>>>

so

People who prefer the conventional method are satisfied, and even those who crave faster character input can be satisfied.

So, there is no risk to the manufacturer or carrier in adopting the twin input method.

<<<<< 104-0101 0010 >>>>>

So now

- Samsung is the best way of heaven,

- The best thing about the EZ EZ way,

- The Motorola way is the best.

<<<<< 104-0103 0024 >>>>>

- It's the best way to combine Samsung's Tianjin method with twin input method,

- The combination of the LG EZ system and the twin input system is the best,

- The best way is to combine Pantech Sky and Curitel with twin input,

- The combination of motorola and twin input is the best way to get the word out.

<<<< 104-0105 0008 >>>>>

Anyway, when you send a letter on a small keypad, the way you apply the twin style is unconditional first place.

<<<<< 104-0111 0040 >>>>>

(Is currently

If you look at the various mobile community bulletin boards and portal site comments,

`Samsung's approach to the world can be learned quickly, but if you write a lot of strokes and the same button, the characters assigned to the same sequence, you have to manually move the cursor, etc. There are many problems and inconvenience` EZ method is difficult to learn because it has a lot of hidden phonemes (= derived), but once it learns it has fewer number of strokes than the way of heavenly one, and since the problem of inputting consecutive phonemes of the same button does not occur, It is interjection.

<<<<<< 104-0120 0045 >>>>>

Actually, in the case of the LG EZ system, it is ranked first in the various letter input competitions, and it is said that excellence is recognized in the speed.

(However, the LG EZ method has 15 phonemes requiring more than 3 strokes to input, and there are various problems such as the button for the stroke addition function on line 4, the line for pushing the button # for the double consonant function is large, etc. ,

If you combine the conventional two-way method with twin mode, you can input all the phonemes in one or two tones, and you can make the lines very small in 1 ~ 3 lines and evenly load both hands.

<<<<< 104-0123 0009 >>>>>

Forward,

When combined with the twin, the skypeed method can be input much faster than the conventional LG EZ method.

<<<<< 104-0124 0008 >>>>>

However, I do not know if it will be faster than the combination of the conventional EZ and twin input methods.)

<<<<< 999 >>>>

10 second finish

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 04: Improvement of English input method Introduction (- Bright)

I would like to introduce you to the case of entering English.

Conventional English version on cell phones

Detailed description of

There are <Picture 03> or <Picture 04> type.

<Figure 03> Type

Button 1 is not assigned an alphabet,

 Button 7 is assigned `P.QRS`

Button 9 is assigned `WXYZ`

Button 1, *, 0, # to / (slash): (colon). (Period), (comma) @? ! Depending on the manufacturer, 0 ~ 7 are assigned. There are many types that are assigned two or three.

<Figure 03> Type is a keyboard layout applied to almost all mobile phones in the world. You can say `standard`.

LG Electronics and Motorola are in the <Figure 03> type for both Korean sales and export.

Sharp Electronics, Nokia, etc. are also produced only in <Figure 03> type.

However, Samsung Electronics, Pantech Group SKY and Curitel are sold in Korea as <Figure 04> type, but export type is <Figure 03> type.

<Figure 04> Type

Button 1 is assigned `QZ`,

 Button 7 is assigned `PRS`

Button 9 is assigned `WXY`.

In the future, I will describe it as a standard keyboard <Figure 03> type.

The state of keyboard that can apply twin input method does not matter in any condition.

As shown in <Figure 03>, the conventional keyboard can be applied as it is,

As shown in <Figure 16.6>, it is also possible to add a red punctuation mark to the conventional keyboard,

As shown in <Figure 16.5>, it is also possible to add a few emoticons to a conventional keyboard,

You can move the alphabet below numbers as in <Figure 05>, add more emoticons,

You can also add one more emoticons as in <Figure 06>.

And it can be further expanded by combining the various keyboard states mentioned above and the various states that make up part of the following display screen.

The display screen

As shown in <Figure 16.1>, it can be applied by adding punctuation marks,

You can also add emoticons as shown in <Figure 16>.

Or display screen

The first page shall be assigned from the punctuation mark as in <Figure 16.1>

The second page is assigned from the punctuation mark as in <Figure 16>

The following pages can also be followed by special characters.

The aspect of inputting a part of the display screen is conventionally

The special characters are so entered,

As shown in <Fig. 15>, Hangul is displayed only on the display screen in the Hangul input mode so that Hangul can also be input from mobile phones distributed in Japan. Actual input is also typed by pressing the keyboard.

My suggestion is to use the / display screen to enter special characters by changing / special character mode / not to enter special characters

In the text mode, you can use the "call" key, which has no "no" response, as a toggle key to show / hide the special character table

It is a differentiating point that / special characters are displayed even in normal text mode so that special characters can be easily entered in / normal character mode.

In the Text mode, you can also make a lot of special character assignment pages like the conventional one by using the two volume control buttons that make no response / volume up or down / as the page change button on the display screen.

With this improved method, you can enter special characters without changing the character mode in normal text mode, but you can also change to special character mode and input in the conventional way.

For more details and applications, please refer to the instruction manual.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 05 98

Improvement of English input method 1 Brightness

Let's take a look at how to enter English.

You can enter other characters such as Japanese or Korean in the same way as English input method.

The keyboard is the same as the <Picture 05> in the various keyboards presented in the video description above,

The display screen will be explained with an example as shown in <Figure 16>.

sure

The keyboard is the same as the conventional keyboard <Figure 03>

The display screen can be of the form shown in <Figure 16.1> assigned from the punctuation marks.

Let's divide the letters of each button in <Figure 05> into two groups into two groups.

To explain the current character mode with / button 6 in lower case mode

The first group is lowercase m n o? (Look in love) 6,

The second group is divided into six upper case letters M N O, even in lower case mode.

(We have set these assignment rules to enter capital letters in lower case mode without changing the mode)

In the case of button 9,

The first group will have six small letters w x y z% (absurd expressions)

The second group will be in upper case WX Y Z (bottle) (sun) even though it is in lower case mode.

And if you set the six kinds of shift buttons as twins

Press any button once to enter the first letter, (in special cases use buttons 1 and 3 as the shift button to enter the first letter assigned to each button)

The buttons 4 and 6 are used as a shift button for inputting the second letter assigned to each button,

The buttons 7 and 9 are used as shift buttons for inputting the third letter assigned to each button,

Buttons 2 and 8 are used as shift buttons for inputting the fourth letter assigned to each button,

(Use the buttons 2 and 8 as a shift button for inputting the fourth letter assigned to each button, as described above, rather than using the buttons * and # as shift buttons for inputting the fourth letter assigned to each button I tried this because I think it would be more beneficial to enter the English s and the English z, but you can also change the button * and # to the shift button, which lets you enter the fourth letter.)

Button 5,0 is used as a shift button for inputting the fifth character assigned to each button,

I will use buttons * and # as shift buttons to input the sixth letter assigned to each button.

To summarize the functions of the shift button, once again, I have set the following: 1,2,3,4,5,6 (although you can set it differently: 1, 2, 3, 4, It can be varied.)

Let's talk about button 6 in lower case mode.

The first group of buttons 6, lowercase m n o? (Facial expressions that fall in love) First,

The lower case m can be entered by pressing button 6 once,

The lower case letter n is entered by pressing the button 6 while holding down the button 4 or button 6, which is a shift button that allows you to enter the second letter without changing the character mode or by double-clicking the button 6. (You can not press button 6 again while holding down button 6, so press and hold down button 4 and press button 6 to enter the lower case letter n.) As you will see later, It is more advantageous to press the button, so we recommend that you press and hold the button 4 and press the button 6 to enter.)

Press the 6 button three times to enter the lower case o, or press the button 6 or 7 while holding down the button 7 or 9, which is the shift button to enter the third letter without changing the character mode. (By the way, if you press button 6 while pressing button 9, both hands are concentrated on row 3, so interference of both hands occurs and stability of holding mobile phone is not good. Pressing button 6 while pressing button 7 It is recommended to enter.

In this way, there are two shift buttons that perform the same function, so you can select and use them as you like.)

 The question mark (?) Is inputted by pushing the button 6 by pressing the button 6 while holding the button 2 or the button 8 which is the shift button for inputting the fourth character without changing the character mode,

The heart is input by pushing the button 6 five times in succession, or by pressing the button 6 with the button 5 or the button 0 being the shift button for inputting the fifth letter without changing the character mode,

Press the button 6 for 6 times in a row and hold down the button * or button # which is the shift button to input the sixth character without changing the character mode. Would not it be a lot easier to use the button * as a shift button?

Lowercase m, n, o,? , Heart, Let's quickly enter the expression that is in love again.

Lowercase m, n, o,? , Heart, the expression I fell in love.

(Not related to Button 6

S, assigned to the fourth letter on Button 7,

Press button 7 to enter the 4th letter, press button 2 or button 8, and press S (demonstration)

Z assigned to the fourth letter on button 9 is

You can easily enter by pressing button 9 while holding button 2 or button 8 which is the shift button to enter the fourth character. Z (Demonstration)

The second group of buttons 6, capital letters m, n, o Beer We'll explain how to enter carrots in the next video.

For more details and applications, please refer to the instruction manual.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 06 103

Improvement of English input method 2

Next, we will explain how to enter the upper case M N O 6, the second group of button 6, in lower case mode.

The input method of the second group is

In lower case mode, I will use the example of pressing the letter button for about 0.5 seconds while holding down the shift button without changing the character mode.

(Of course, you can do it with another push.)

Then,

In the lower case mode, press the button 6 for about 0.5 second while holding down the button 1 or button 3, which is a shift button for inputting the first letter of the capital letter M. (Depending on the rule, the button 6 You can also press and hold for about 0.5 seconds to enter the number.

In lower case mode, press button 6 for about 0.5 seconds while pressing button 4, which is a shift button that allows you to enter the second letter in capital letters

In lower case mode, press and hold button 7 or button 9, which is a shift button that allows you to enter the third letter of uppercase letter O (0), and press button 6 for about 0.5 seconds.

Beer button 2 or button 8, which is the shift button to enter the fourth letter, press button 6 for about 0.5 seconds

Press the button 5, which is the shift button to enter the fifth character, or button 0, and press the button 6 for about 0.5 seconds to enter (missing from the recording)

Carrots are a shift button that allows you to enter the sixth letter. * Hold down button # or button # and press button 6 for about 0.5 second

In lower case mode, let's try typing capital letters m, n, o, beer, cherry, carrot quickly again.

In lower case mode, capital letters m, n, o, beer, cherry, carrot,

Type this:

Although I generally use a long press to avoid speaking,

Conventionally, even if the character mode is changed or the character mode is changed, it is necessary to change the page several times and to return to the normal character mode again,

By using the twin method, you can input much more easily than usual without changing the character mode in normal text mode.

At this time, you can use a part of the display screen to show the special character assignment table to input more special characters in the normal character mode.

For example, in the text mode, you can use the call button, which has no response even when you press it, as a toggle key to show or hide the special character table on the display screen.

If you press the call button in the normal text mode and the special character table like <Figure 16> appears on the display screen, you can enter the special character on the display screen without changing the character mode in the normal character mode.

Special characters on the display screen are now considered the third group.

Hereinafter, a method of inputting the third group of buttons 6, the card, the kitchen knife, and the three masked facial expressions will be described.

The input method of the third group is

For example, in lower case mode, without changing the character mode, you can double-click the shift button and then press the letter button without releasing your finger.

(Of course, you can do it with another push.)

Then,

Double-click button 1 or button 3, which is a shift button that allows you to enter the first letter of the card, then press button 6 without releasing it

The knife is double-clicked on button 4, which is a shift button that allows you to enter the second letter, then press button 6 without releasing it

Press the button 6 or 7 while holding down the button 7 or button 9 which is the shift button for entering the third letter.

In the text entry mode, you can also change the page of the special character table on the display by pressing two volume control buttons that have no response.

Even if the page is changed, special characters on the display screen can be input by the third group input method.

The keyboard is the same as in the previous example, and the first page of the display screen is assigned from the punctuation mark as shown in <Figure 16.1>, the second page is as shown in <Figure 16> You can also assign special characters.

In this case, the characters in the syllable are input by the first group character input method of the twins without changing the conventional input method or the character mode, and the characters on the display screen are input by the second group character input method of the twins.

Of course, you can change to special character mode and select the special character you want.

You can also press the Call button again to hide the special character table on the display screen. Even if you can not see the special character table, you can input it by the 3rd group input method if you memorize the table that was just seen.

You do not have to explain how to enter the button 9 and the other buttons assigned to it.

For more details and applications, please refer to the instruction manual.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 07 # 139

Seven common misconceptions about twin input methods

There are six common misconceptions about the twin input method.

As the first misunderstanding

It is a misconception that the conventional input method can not be used when using the twin input method.

The twin input method can use the twin input method without changing the character mode in the conventional input method.

In other words

For example, to illustrate button 6 in Figure 16.5,

To enter the first letter m, simply press button 6 once,

To input the second letter n, double-click the button 6, or press the button 6 while holding the button 4, which is a shift button for inputting the second character without changing the character mode,

To enter the third letter O, press button 6 three times in a row or press button 6 while pressing button 7, which is a shift button that allows you to enter the third letter without changing the character mode.

As a second misunderstanding

It is a misconception that in the character mode, which can use the twin input method, it can not be input by one hand.

As I said in the first misunderstanding

Since the twin input method can use the twin input method without changing the character mode in the conventional input method, if the conventional method can be inputted by one hand, it can be inputted by one hand even when inputting according to the conventional method.

The third misunderstanding

It is a misconception that the button becomes too complicated because the emoticon must be marked on the button.

You do not necessarily need to mark punctuation marks or emoticons on your buttons.

For example, in English

Buttons can be marked exactly as shown in <Figure 03>, and special characters can be displayed only on the display screen as in <Figure 16.1>.

As an example of Hangul

In the input method of Tianjin

Buttons can be marked exactly as shown in <Figure 20>, and the complete phoneme can be additionally assigned as shown in <Figure 22.8> or <Figure 16.2> on the display screen, or special characters can be displayed as in <Figure 16.1>.

And also to suggest a solution,

You do not have to worry about this, you can produce the mobile phone keyboard in the following two forms.

If you take an example with the Korean Hangul Keyboard,

Although the twin input method as shown in <Fig. 20> is applied, the same type as the conventional keyboard

As shown in Figure 22,

You can produce phone board in two forms.

By the fourth misunderstanding

It is a misconception that the twin input method can not be applied to the touch pad.

Even with the touch pad, it is also applicable to the touch pad of the small-sized pad type in which several characters are assigned to one button as in <Figure 14.5>.

As the fifth misunderstanding

It is a misconception that it can not enter the same situation as the conventional one because the character code and the emoticon are displayed on the keypad of the mobile phone, and the same button is repeatedly pressed by the multi-tap method as in the conventional method.

For example, in English

In the conventional keyboard like <Figure 03>

Only button M, N, and O were assigned to button 6, so we were able to enter "M", "N" and "O" while pressing button 6 several times.

Now, even if you assign more buttons, hearts, and expressions to button 6 on the same keypad as in Figure 16.5,

When you press button 6 several times in multi-tap mode, you only "cycle" M, N, O,

?, Hearts, and facial expressions can be restricted so that they can only be entered using the twin input method.

Even in Hangul

As shown in Figure 22, in an improved keyboard of a keyboard of a heavymetal system, for example

The multi-tap method of pressing button 9 several times

You can only type "Cycle"

Vowels, parentheses, hearts, stars, and facial expressions can only be entered using the twin input method.

By the sixth misunderstanding

It's a misconception that you can not display emoji on a button.

I explained in detail that there is enough room for displaying emoticons,

Even if you do not have enough space to display emoticons like this, I think it is possible to express them in a simplified way.

By the seventh misunderstanding

Button * or 0 or # is used as a phonetic conversion function such as a pair consonant button or a stroke addition button, or when a character mode change function or an alphabetic character plate is used as any function button such as an upper / lower case conversion function, It is a misconception that it can not be used as a shift button.

 These buttons can also be used with the Shift button for a while, even though the letters 0 to 9 are assigned letters, ie the letter button can be used with the shift button for a while in the twin input mode.

For more details and applications, please refer to the instruction manual.

For more details and applications that have not been mentioned up to now, please refer to the detailed instructions in this cafe.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 08 412 times

Alphabet A to Z

<<<<< 412 >>>>>

Before you type an English word,

First, let's enter A to Z, which are all alphabets.

In the multi-tap mode, which is a conventional input mode,

You can enter the same button by pressing the multi-tap method one or several times,

In multi-tap mode, I will enter the twin input mode without changing the character mode.

<<<<< 417 >>>>>

As a conclusion, you can enter A to Z so quickly.

A, B, C, D, E, F ... ... ... ... X, Y, Z

<<<<< 420 >>>>> - Bright picture quality

Let's try typing on a real mobile phone.

A, B, C, D, E, F ... ... ... ... X, Y, Z

<<<<< 425 >>>>>

The more you practice, the faster you can type.

Let's try typing it again slowly.

A, B, C, D, E, F ... ... ... ... X, Y, Z

<<<<< 430 >>>>>

In the above description, with the keyboard having a lot of emoticons including <Figure 05> as an example, the twin input method can use special characters including punctuation marks and emoticons, I think you would agree that you can easily enter 2 characters in normal text mode.

From now on, please feel that you can input alphabet more quickly and conveniently than Hangul phoneme with input speed of 1 in case of mobile phone with small size pad by using twin input method, even in the same conventional keyboard like Fig.

Through the twin input method, even a mobile phone with a small-sized pad can input an alphabet faster than the speed of scribing it by hand.

(<Qwerty Keyboard Photo>)

It seems that the input speed difference with the mobile phone with QWERTY keyboard is almost not.

It is also possible to write novels on mobile phones with compact pads.

The main reasons for this quickness are

You can enter the same alphabet as C, F, I, L, O, R, S, V, Y,

The same alphabet as B, E, H, K, N, Q, U, and X assigned to each button, which can be input by double clicking, Tarot input,

Even when the alphabet assigned to the same button is continuously input, for example, when A, B, and C are continuously input, the cursor does not need to be moved using the space button even in the multi-tap mode,

There are two shift buttons 4 and 6 for inputting the second letter,

There are two shift buttons 7 and 9 for inputting the third letter,

There are two shift buttons in the button 2 or 8 so as to input the fourth letter,

(Since it is better to use only button 8 as a shift button to enter the fourth letter when entering only alphabets)

There is no large moving line to the fourth row in the shift button only in the second and third rows,

Since there are two in the first and third columns, the copper wire is small at the current position of the thumb, and both thumbs are not so concentrated in the first row or the third row, so that the stability of holding the mobile phone is not deteriorated This is because you can select the shift button.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 09 448

English Alphabet A to Z Quick Introduction Demonstration of Demonstration 1

<<<<< 448 >>>>>

You already know how to enter the alphabet A ~ Z, but I will explain it in detail.

(If you already know, you do not need to look at the following.)

In the case of inputting only the English alphabet except the special character by the twin input method

The shift button to enter the second letter is button 4 or 6,

The shift button to enter the third letter is the button 7 or 9,

To enter the fourth letter, the shift button is button 8, which you only need to know.

Because buttons 7 and 9 only have 4 letters assigned.

<<<<< 451 >>>>>

A presses button 2 only once,

B can be entered by pressing button 2 while holding button 4 or 6 which is a shift button for entering the second character. I pressed button 4 and pressed button 2 to enter the rain.

You do not need to artificially move the cursor, even if A and B are assigned to the same button, and you type A followed by B consecutively.

C can input the seed by pressing button 2 while holding button 7 or 9 which is a shift button for entering the third letter. I pressed button 2 while pressing button 7 and entered the seed.

B and C are assigned to the same button, and you do not need to artificially move the cursor, even if B is followed by C consecutively.

<<<<< 452 >>>>>

D presses button 3 only once,

E can be entered by pressing button 3 while holding button 4 or 6, which is a shift button for entering the second letter. I pressed button 4 and pressed button 3 to enter it.

D and E are assigned to the same button, and you do not need to artificially move the cursor, even if you are typing E followed by E in succession.

F can be entered by pressing button 3 or 7 while holding button 7 or 9, which is a shift button for entering the third letter. I pressed button 3 while pressing button 7 and entered the fps.

You do not need to artificially move the cursor, even if E and E are assigned to the same button, and E is followed by E in succession.

<<<<< 454 >>>>>

G is pressed once by button 4,

H can be entered by pressing button 4 while holding button 4 or 6, which is a shift button to enter the second character. However, since you can not press button 4 while pressing button 4, press button 3 while holding button 6, and enter HI.

G and G are assigned to the same button, and you do not have to artificially move the cursor, even if you enter G followed by H in succession.

I can input a child by pressing button 4 while holding button 7 or 9, which is a shift button for entering the third letter. I pressed button 4 while pressing button 9 and entered the child.

H and I are assigned to the same button, and you do not need to artificially move the cursor, even if you are typing H followed by I in succession.

<<<<< 456 >>>>>

J is pressed once by button 5,

K can be input by pressing button 5 while holding button 4 or 6, which is a shift button to enter the second character. I pressed button 5 while pressing button 4, and entered k.

It is not necessary to artificially move the cursor, even if J and K are assigned to the same button, and J is followed by K consecutively.

L can be entered by pressing button 5 while holding button 7 or 9, which is a shift button for entering the third letter. I pressed button 5 while pressing button 7 and entered EL.

K and L are assigned to the same button, and you do not need to artificially move the cursor, even if you enter K followed by L consecutively.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 10 457

Alphabet A to Z Quick description

<<<<< 457 >>>>>

M is pressed once by button 6,

N can be entered by pressing button 6 while holding button 4 or 6, which is a shift button for entering the second character. However, you can not press button 6 while pressing button 6, so press button 6 while holding button 4 and enter yen.

M and N are assigned to the same button, and you do not need to artificially move the cursor, even if M is followed by N consecutively.

O can be entered by pressing button 6 while holding button 7 or 9, which is a shift button for entering the third letter. I pressed button 6 while pressing button 7, and entered the wrong number.

N and O are assigned to the same button, and you do not have to artificially move the cursor, even if you enter N followed by O consecutively.

<<<<< 458 >>>>>

P is pressed once by button 7,

Q allows you to enter a cue by pressing button 7 while holding button 4 or 6, which is a shift button to enter the second character. I pressed button 7 while pressing button 6 and entered the queue.

P and Q are assigned to the same button, and you do not need to artificially move the cursor, even if you enter P followed by Q consecutively.

R can be input by pressing button 3 while holding button 7 or 9, which is a shift button for entering the third letter. However, since you can not press button 7 while pressing button 7, while holding button 9, press button 7 to input the egg.

You do not need to artificially move the cursor, even if Q and R are assigned to the same button, and you are typing R followed by Q in succession.

Press and hold button 2 or 8, which is a shift button that allows you to enter the fourth letter, and press S to enter the letter S. I pressed S button while pressing and holding button 8.

You do not need to artificially move the cursor, even if R and S are assigned to the same button, and you follow R followed by S in succession.

<<<<< 459 >>>>>

T pushes button 8 one time only,

Press and hold button 4 or 6, which is a shift button for U to enter the second letter, and press button 8 to enter a u. I pressed button 8 while pressing button 4, and entered u.

You do not need to artificially move the cursor, even if T and U are assigned to the same button, and you are typing T followed by U in succession.

V can input V by pressing button 8 while holding button 7 or 9, which is a shift button for entering the third letter. I pressed button 8 and pressed V, while holding down button 7.

You do not need to artificially move the cursor, even if U and V are assigned to the same button and you are typing V followed by V.

<<<<< 460 >>>>>

W is pressed once by button 9,

X can be input by pressing button 9 while holding button 4 or 6, which is a shift button to enter the second character. I pressed button 9 and pressed X while I was holding down button 4.

W and X are assigned to the same button, and you do not need to artificially move the cursor, even if W is followed by X consecutively.

Y can be entered by pressing button 9 while holding down the 7 or 9 button which is the shift button to enter the third character. However, since you can not press button 9 while holding button 9, you press button 9 and press button 9 to enter the wye.

You do not need to artificially move the cursor, even if X and Y are assigned to the same button, and you are typing X followed by Y consecutively.

Z can be entered by pressing button 9 while holding button 2 or 8, which is a shift button that allows you to enter the fourth character. I pressed the button 8 and pressed the button 9 to enter the jet.

You do not need to artificially move the cursor, even if you have Y and Z assigned to the same button, and you want to continue typing Z followed by Z.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 11 526

New Advantages of Entering Words with Examples of English Words

<<<<<< 526 >>>>>>

(<Figure 03>)

Let's try typing the following words quickly:

MONO FOLLOW ING STOP TAXI

<<<<<< 527-0046 >>>>>>

Let's take a look at some of the new benefits of typing words in real English.

By twin input method

All spells can be entered as one or two,

The button with the letter assigned is also used as a twin with the shift button,

In addition to the advantages mentioned above that the copper wire of the thumb is small, there is no interference of the thumbs of both hands, the load of the thumb of both hands is evenly distributed,

By twin input method

Whether it is actually an English word, a Japanese word, a Korean word,

You will find that there are five major additional benefits:

<<<<<< 542-0025 >>>>>

First, even if you assign consecutive phonemes assigned to the same button, you do not have to do unnecessary actions that artificially move the cursor with the space-only button or the right-hand button.

Let's enter Mono.

If you use the conventional method, multi-tap method, you need twelve.

<<<<< 543-0100 >>>>>>

Press button 6 once to enter / M,

Press the space button to move the / cursor,

Press button 6 three times to enter /

If you press the button 6 three times without moving the cursor with the space button in front of you, it changes into the previous one, and then it changes into O and then it is converted into Em again.

Press the space button to move the / cursor,

Press button 6 twice to enter / yen

Press the space button to move the / cursor,

Press button 6 three times to enter / O.

<<<<<<<< 547-0039 >>>>>>>

Thus, when you try to enter the spelling assigned to the same button / sequence, if you do not move the cursor to the space button or wait for two seconds, only the character / is displayed in the current cursor.

Since this phenomenon occurs more frequently in English words than in Hangul, it was one of the biggest causes that the conventional multi-tap method could not input English faster than Hangul. Now the twin input method has been developed so that English can be input faster than Hangul You are now.

<<<<< 549-0053 >>>>>

If MONO is input as a twin input method, only 7 is needed instead of 12.

Press button 6 once to enter Em,

To input the third letter, press button 6 while pressing button 7 from among buttons 7 or 9,

To enter the second letter, press button 4 while holding button 4 in button 4 or 6, enter the letter yen,

To enter the third letter Press and hold button 7 among buttons 7 or 9, and then press 6 to enter the letter er.

<<<<<< 554-0033 >>>>>

Let's try typing again.

Do you want to enter it on your mobile phone?

Do you want to enter it soon?

The movement of your thumb is also very small, and you can easily enter it?

In the case where ACC of ACCEPT is inputted as ACC,

DEFECT DEF DEF If you enter this way,

The HI of HIDE is HI,

KL of WRINKLE is input into KL,

PR PR of PRAY This is the case when PR is input,

ER ERS RS If this is the case,

VULGAR's VU, VU, and so on,

WY of SNOWY is entered as WY,

There are too many cases such as XYLOPHONE's XY, XY and so on.

<<<<<< 562-0059 >>>>>>

However, when the twin input method is "parallel" in the multi-tap mode, when the first letter assigned to each button is continuously input, it may occur that the cursor is moved manually.

However, at this time, if the user presses a button 1 or 3 which is a shift button for inputting the first letter rather than pressing the space button, the cursor does not have to be artificially transferred, the number of lines is small, the load on both hands is made even, There are many advantages to pressing the space button, such as not being biased.

Introducing auto cursor time setting or twin input mode only does not cause such a situation at all. For more information, please refer to the detailed instructions.

<<<<<< 564-0059 >>>>>

Secondly.

When there is a sequence of characters in the same order of each button, you can use the shift button previously held in the same way, so the number of bats is greatly reduced. Japanese is more useful for entering Japanese words because there are no spaces between words.

Let's enter FOLLOW.

Would you like to input it using the conventional multi-tap method? (17 total required)

3, 3, 6, 6, 6, 5, 5, 5, 5, 5, 6, 6, 6, 9

Type this:

<<<<<< 570-0040 >>>>>

If you type in the twin input method, you will enter this .. (only 7 is needed instead of 17)

Since FOLLO of FOLLOW is the third letter of buttons 3, 6, 5, 5, and 6, press button 7 from among buttons 7 or 9, which is a shift button for inputting the third letter. , Then press 6 to enter.

CIRCL CIRCL CIRCL If you type

If BE is input in BE of BECOME and

BECOME CO CO This is when you type

OFF is OFF.

There are too many cases, for example, when you enter POE's KE into KE.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 12 575

New Advantages of Entering Words with English Words as Examples 6 2

<<<<< 575-0022 >>>>>

Third, as the letter button is shifted, the letter button at the time of inputting the previous letter becomes a shift button for inputting a letter at a later time. With the copper line zero, the copper wire is minimized, and the endorphin soars as it saves nearly one shot.

<<<<< 587-0110 >>>>>

Let's enter IN of ING.

Aien

Since the child is the third letter of button 4, press the button 7, which is the shift button to enter the third letter, or button 9 of the 9, and press button 4 to input the child.

Since the yen is the second letter of the button 6, the button 4, which is the shift button for inputting the second letter, or the button 4 of the 6, is used. When the letter " Was on button 4, so you do not have to move your thumb to another position, just press button 4 and press button 6 to enter the yen.

Irene

PY of COPY is entered as PY

IX in SIX and IX in this case

LIE IE IE

SYMBOL SY SY

There are too many cases, such as when OH is entered as OH.

<<<<< 594-0020 >>>>>

Fourth, since the letter button is made to be a shift button, the shift button for inputting the previous letter has the effect of saving almost one note by minimizing the copper line, which is the letter button of the later letter, Endorphins are soaring

<<<<< 597-0052 >>>>>

Let's enter ST of STOP.

Estee

Since Ss is the fourth letter of button 7, press button 7 while holding button 2 or 8 button 8, which is the shift button for entering the fourth letter, and enter Ss.

Since the tee is the first letter of the button 8, the button 8 is used as the shift button, and the button 8 is used as the shift button when entering the letter S, so that the thumb has already been located on the button 8, Without the need to press the button 8 directly in place and enter the tee.

Estee

When ING is NG input NG

If you enter the POP's OP in this way

There are too many cases, for example, when you type SU in SUSPEND SU.

<<<<< 600-0029 >>>>>

Fifth, the advantages of the third and fourth also occur simultaneously during the input of two spellings.

In other words, as the character button is shifted, the character button of the previous character is a shift button for inputting a later character, and a shift button for inputting the previous character becomes a character button of a later character at the same time Sometimes.

<<<<< 610-0124 >>>>>

Let's enter the XI of TAXI.

X-Eye

Since X is the second letter of button 9, press button 4, which is the shift button to enter the second letter, or button 4 of 6, and press button 9 to input X.

Since the child is the third letter of the button 4, the user tries to press the button 7, which is the shift button for inputting the third letter, or the button 9 of 9, and the button 9 is used as the letter button when inputting the previous letter X. Therefore, Since I was at button 9, I do not have to move the thumb to another place to press the shift button, so I press the button 4 while holding the button 9 in place and press the button 4 to input the child. Since the thumb was already on button 4, I pressed the button 4 directly in order to press the button 4 without having to move the thumb somewhere else.

X-Eye

<<<<< 615-0050 >>>>>

As with the second to fifth advantage, when the first letter of each button is placed between two spellings, those advantages are almost as they are, as well as when there are two spellings that cause such a situation.

And a shift button for inputting the second and third letters such as designating the button 2 or 5 as a shift button for inputting the fourth and fifth letters as a shift button for inputting the second and third letters The benefits can be made more frequent.

For more details and applications, please refer to the detailed instruction manual.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 13 674 times

Quickly enter 40 English words

<<<<< 674-0029 >>>>>

I'm going to type in about 40 English words / quickly.

For information on how to input / refer to the previous movie or detailed explanation.

A detailed description of each of the 40 word entries is detailed in the detailed instructions.

In this video

Blue ballpoint pen means left thumb,

Red ballpoint pen means right thumb.

<<<<<< 688-0147 >>>>>>>

Please note that the following twinned input methods are well implemented:

.

First, both blue and red move in only one to three lines, never going to four lines with large copper lines,

Secondly, I put the same functioning shift buttons on columns 1 and 3 and on both sides as twins.

Most of the blue ballpoint pen, which means the left thumb, can be pressed only by one row, sometimes by pressing the second row occasionally, without pressing the third row at all,

A quick-color ballpoint pen that means the thumb of the right hand can be pressed only by three rows, pressing two rows occasionally, without pressing one row at all,

The two hands do not have such a one-row, three-row bias, there is no interference between the thumbs of both hands, the stability of holding the mobile phone is excellent, the load is evenly distributed to both hands,

Third, as you move the buttons assigned to the letters mentioned in the previous video, you can see if the "new six advantages of entering words using English word input" are implemented correctly.

In conclusion, you can see that the lines of both thumbs are small, comfortable and fast.

Particularly, please pay attention to whether you can input alphabetic characters faster than Hangul, which is the first in the world in the case of a character input speed in a small-sized keyboard mobile phone.

<<<<<<<< 690-0026 >>>>>>>

And there are scenes to enter into real mobile phones,

Although the alphabet arrangement of my mobile phone differs from the English standard keyboard such as <Figure 03>

Assume that it is the same as the English standard keyboard like <Figure 03>.

Samsung Anycall or Pantech's SkyNa Curitel also exports the same alphabetical arrangement as the English standard keyboard like <Figure 03>.

MONO FOLLOW ING STOP TAXI

<<<<<< 1696-0022 >>>>> Slowly in Figure 03

<<<<<< 702-0015 >>>>> Quickly in Figure 03

<<<<<< 705-0017 >>>>> Quickly on your phone

FOLLOW, NAKED, REMEMBER, LADY, COTTON, C I R C L E

<<<<<< 1707-0028 >>>>> Slowly in Figure 03

<<<<<< 719-0013 >>>>> Quickly in Figure 03

<<<<<< 725-0013 >>>>> Quickly on your phone

W I N G SMALL GAME STORE

<<<<<< 1730-0022 >>>>> Slowly in Figure 03

<<<<<< 732-0016 >>>>> Quickly in Figure 03

<<<<<< 738-0015 >>>>> Quickly on your phone

CONSIDER CAMP FAR C O P Y T A X I

<<<<<< 1746-0027 >>>>> Slowly in Figure 03

<<<<<< 755-0018 >>>>> Quickly in Figure 03

<<<<<< 762-0017 >>>>> Quickly on your phone

S T Y L E SI S P E N D F E E D M O N O

<<<<<< 1768-0029 >>>>> Slowly in Figure 03

<<<<<< 775-0017 >>>>> Fast in Figure 03

<<<<<< 790-0016 >>>>> Quickly on your phone

SIX HAPPY ADD EGG MOON HIGH POKE YIELD

<<<<<< 1802-0031 >>>>> Slow in Figure 03

<<<<<< 803-0020 >>>>> Quickly in Figure 03

<<<<<< 812-0018 >>>>> Quickly on your phone

SEXY STRIKE POST POPCORN

<<<<<< 1815-0032 >>>>> Slowly in Figure 03

<<<<<< 822-0018 >>>>> Quickly in Figure 03

<<<<<< 827-0017 >>>>> Quickly on your phone

POPOFF ING IN IS ED OFF BE

<<<<<< 1829-0038 >>>>> Slowly in Figure 03

<<<<<< 835-0024 >>>>> In Figure 03,

<<<<<< 837-0022 >>>>> Quickly on your phone

ON YOU I SS ZZZ LOVE

<<<<<< 1858-0031 >>>>> Slowly in Figure 03

<<<<<< 871-0017 >>>>> Quickly in Figure 03

<<<<<< 872-0019 >>>>> Quickly on your phone

order number minute second

One 674 29

2 688 One 47

690 26

One One Slowly in Figure 03 3 696 22

One 2 In Figure 03, 4 702 15

One 3 Quickly on your phone 5 740 17

2 One Slowly in Figure 03 6 707 28

2 2 In Figure 03, 7 719 13

2 3 Quickly on your phone 8 739 13

3 One Slowly in Figure 03 9 730 22

3 2 In Figure 03, 10 732 16

3 3 Quickly on your phone 11 738 15

4 One Slowly in Figure 03 12 746 27

4 2 In Figure 03, 13 755 18

4 3 Quickly on your phone 14 762 17

5 One Slowly in Figure 03 15 768 29

5 2 In Figure 03, 16 794 17

5 3 Quickly on your phone 17 790 16

6 One Slowly in Figure 03 18 802 31

6 2 In Figure 03, 19 803 20

6 3 Quickly on your phone 20 812 18

7 One Slowly in Figure 03 21 815 32

7 2 In Figure 03, 22 822 18

7 3 Quickly on your phone 23 827 17

8 One Slowly in Figure 03 24 829 38

8 2 In Figure 03, 25 835 24

8 3 Quickly on your phone 26 837 22

9 One Slowly in Figure 03 27 858 31

9 2 In Figure 03, 28 871 17

9 3 Quickly on your phone 29 872 19

674

Slowly in total in Figure 03 260

Quick total in Figure 03 158

Quickly add up on your phone 154

total 674

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 14 1696 times

Sample 40 English words slowly input

MONO FOLLOW ING STOP TAXI

<<<<<< 696-0022 >>>>> Slowly in Figure 03

FOLLOW, NAKED, REMEMBER, LADY, COTTON, C I R C L E

<<<<<< 1707-0028 >>>>> Slowly in Figure 03

W I N G SMALL GAME STORE

<<<<<< 1730-0022 >>>>> Slowly in Figure 03

CONSIDER CAMP FAR C O P Y T A X I

<<<<<< 1746-0027 >>>>> Slowly in Figure 03

S T Y L E SI S P E N D F E E D M O N O

<<<<<< 1768-0029 >>>>> Slowly in Figure 03

SIX HAPPY ADD EGG MOON HIGH POKE YIELD

<<<<<< 1802-0031 >>>>> Slow in Figure 03

SEXY STRIKE POST POPCORN

<<<<<< 1815-0032 >>>>> Slowly in Figure 03

POPOFF ING IN IS ED OFF BE

<<<<<< 1829-0038 >>>>> Slowly in Figure 03

ON YOU I SS ZZZ LOVE

<<<<<< 1858-0031 >>>>> Slowly in Figure 03

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 15

The reason why I entered the English alphabet later than Hangul

(= Twin input method, such as Greek, Roman characters, etc., can be entered faster than Hangul)

<<<<< 102-0717 0042 >>>>>

The English alphabet is 26 characters, and the Korean alphabet is 40 characters including 19 consonants and 21 vowels.

On the surface, I had to be much easier to type in English than I could.

It is said that the principle of Korean language is scientific,

It is a right thing to say that the principle of Hangul is a scientific character that can not be found in the world, but it is not the fastest way to input Hangul in the world.

On a computer keyboard, it is slightly inconvenient to input Hangul in English rather than English, for example, there are several phonemes that need to use the shift button to enter Hangul.

<<<<< 102-0719 0036 >>>>>

The reason why I was able to input Hangul in the mobile phone faster than English is because the input speed is slower than the Hangul input speed even if I input it in any way developed up to now including the conventional multi tap method or the T9 method,

Now, typing English into the twin input method is faster than any conventional Hangul input method, or it is more convenient and faster than the improved Hangul input method which is much easier and faster through the twin input method.

<<<<< 102-0721 0008 >>>>>

Now let's see what kind of problem the twin input method would solve when entering the English alphabet.

<<<<< 102-0723 0027 >>>>>

Two common methods of inputting English

Multi-tap method and T9 method,

The T9 method is more uncomfortable and slower than the traditional Hangul input method because it has various disadvantages described in the video "Improvement of T9 input method".

However, the T9 method is also faster than the conventional Hangeul input method in parallel with the help of the twin input method.

<<<<< 102-0724 0052 >>>>>

The multi-tab method, the most popular English input method,

In other alphabets, when entering the alphabet assigned to the same button in succession, you had to manually enter the latter alphabet after moving the cursor.

For example, to enter MONO

Press button 6 once to enter Em,

Press the space bar to move the cursor,

Press button 6 three times to enter O,

Press the space bar to move the cursor,

Press button 6 twice to enter the yen

Press the space bar to move the cursor,

Press button 6 three times to enter O.

<<<<< 102-0734 0031 >>>>>

The multi-tap approach makes it very annoying because you need to move the cursor manually to the / 4 line / line and you feel it is unnecessary. This is the same button problem from now on.

This same button problem was the biggest factor that made it impossible to input English quickly, but if you type in the twin input method, the same button problem may not occur at all.

<<<<< 102-0735 0039 >>>>>

The same button problem does not occur in the Hangul way and the Pantech Sky or Cupid input method.

However, this occurs only when the consonant is input, and it also occurs only when the last character is assigned to the same button.

The LG Electronics does not have the same button problems at all. So, LG Electronics is popular for Korean youth and college students. I even hate Samsung's way of heavenly people.

<<<<<< 102-0736 0012 >>>>>

I was not able to enter the English quickly because of the same button problem anyway,

Now let's see why there are many of these same button problems in English.

<<<<< 102-0742 0036 >>>>>

First,

As the biggest factor,

In the case of English, the button assignment itself is not divided into consonants and vowels, and even the spelling of the words is not a consonant followed by a vowel, followed by consonants. A large amount is generated.

So there are too many consecutive 2 letters of the alphabet assigned to the same button, so there are quite a few words that contain 3 consecutive letters.

<<<<< 102-0746 0019 >>>>>

Button 2 is assigned to ABC. When you look at the word CABBAGE, there are five alphabets assigned to Button 2 in succession, called CABBA.

You can see the same below.

(((((

Continuation of abc of button 2: cab, cabin, cabbage, back etc.

Button 3's def continuation: deface, defer, defeat, federal, etc.

Button 4 ghi sequence: night, light, fight, delight, high, etc.

Continuation of mno of button 6: mono, monster, Monday, monk, onmessage, etc.

Continuation of pqrs of button 7: spright, spring, sprinkle, etc.

Continuation of tuv of button 8: tuva, tuvalu, etc.

)))))

<<<<< 102-0756 0017 >>>>>

The second,

The abbreviation of common word in English and chatting term is not a shortened syllable unit like consonant and vowel like Hangul, but it creates the same button problem more because it is made after the first letter of the word.

<<<<< 102-0766 0021 >>>>

(((((

Common Words: BBC (British Broadcasting Corporation

    Standard unit: AAA size battery

      Chat terms: bbl (be back later: I'll be back later)

)))))

.

<<<<< 102-0773 0029 >>>>>

Third

In a verb, when there is a verb such as STOP, which ends with a short vowel + terminal tone, like stopped, stopping, stopper,

When attaching ed, the ending of the past form, and attaching ing, the present progressive ending, and adding the er, which is the person or machine, I will.

<<<<< 102-0781 0026 >>>>

For the fourth time

Ends with a short vowel + a terminal tone

For example, when you have an adjective called BIG, like big-bigger-biggest

Adjectives and adverbs are comparative, and when you make the highest grade, you attach one more G, that is, one more consonant, and put ~ er, ~ est.

<<<<< 102-0797 0007 >>>>>

Fifth

It also occurs when you create a derived word by suffixing a number of prefixes and suffixes.

<<<<< 102-0810 0048 >>>>>

E.g,

When the prefix IR is added to the word Irregular, R, which is the same alphabet,

When you attach the suffix OUS to the root Autonom, the last letter of the root, M, and the first letter of the suffix, O, are both consecutive alphabets assigned to button 6,

Spelling of the prefix itself can cause problems,

Omni's omn is a sequence of alphabets assigned to Button 6

Spelling of the suffix itself can cause problems,

ON of the ION, the noun ending, is a sequence of alphabets assigned to Button 6.

(((((

    Example: Words created with the prefix ir: irregular

      Words created with the suffix ous: autonomous

Spelling of the prefix itself: omni ~

Spelling of the suffix itself: ~ ion

)))))

<<<<< 102-0811? 0840 0014 >>>>>

There are many other prefixes and suffixes.

There are prefixes like this.

There are prefixes like this.

These suffixes are also connected.

There are also such suffixes.

<<<<< 102-0812 0019 >>>>

 For the sixth time

Because the plural form of nouns and the third person singular form of a verb are attached with ~ s, the same button problem occurs when the plural form of noun ending with p, q, r assigned to the same button as s, and the third person singular form of the verb are entered.

<<<<< 102-0815 0008 >>>>>

In the seventh

The verb 's past and past editions of ~ ed are assigned to the same button (button 4).

<<<<< 102-0818 0003 >>>>>

In the eighth

There are many other cases.

<<<<< 102-0819 0007 >>>>>>

I have found out why the same button problem in English words is more than Hangul.

<<<<< 102-0821 0042 >>>>>

There are some reasons why the same button problem causes an increase in the number of strokes,

There seems to be a psychological factor.

First, it is more annoying because it seems unnecessary to move the cursor when the same button problem occurs

Secondly, DoubleClick is a popular method for computer mice.

When typing in English, it is very unlikely to press the same button three times in succession when entering the third letter of each button, C, F, I, L, O, R, V,

<<<<< 102-0834 0037 >>>>

because,

Even if the Korean phonemes are input in the conventional way, it is unlikely that the phonemes input by more than three strokes with different buttons are considered to be so many.

E.g,

In the input method of Tianjin

To enter.. . I do not think so many bats when I type in three.

When I type ㅙ, I sometimes think that I need to type.

<<<<< 102-0837 0027 >>>>>

However, I was not able to input the English alphabet sooner than Hangul in the past because of the psychological issues I mentioned so far, and since the twin typing method solves all the problems that occur when typing in English, I can input it faster than Hangul.

Also, when applying the twin input method, it is also a little convenient when inputting English than Hangul.

<<<<< 102-0999? 0841 0003 >>>>.

For details, please refer to the detailed explanation here.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 16 247 times

Introduction to Japanese characters and problems of conventional input method

Let's take a moment to introduce Japanese characters and learn about the problems of inputting Japanese characters in mobile phones.

Japanese characters are called "50", so you can easily think of them as 50 characters.

The English alphabet is pronounced like a capital letter and a lowercase letter

The Japanese pronunciation is the same, but it is divided into hiragana and katakana.

So you can think of 50 hiragana and 50 katakana.

(<Hiragana table>)

Let's find out about Hiragana.

The Hiragana 50 tone chart is like this.

(Read)

You can think of 50 like this.

(<Katagana table>)

The Katatana 50 tone chart is like this.

The character shape is different from Hiragana and the pronunciation is like Hiragana.

(Read)

You can think of 50 like this.

In addition, Hiragana mode and Wataru Katana are assigned to each button of 0 ~ 9, 10 buttons of mobile phone with 5 characters per one button per mode.

In the hiragana input mode (<hiragana picture>), the hiragana are assigned to each of the five buttons in this way

In the Katakana input mode (<Katagana Picture>), Katakana is assigned to five of these buttons.

However, as shown in <Fig. 17>, the notation on the phone keyboard is indicated by the first letter of the five letters assigned to each button in the hiragana state as representative letters.

It is not confused even if only representative letters are shown.

because,

In this way, if 'I' is indicated on the button 5, 'Nani Nunno' is assigned to the button 5,

This is because Button 6 is assigned to "HaHiFuHeHo" in Bottom 6 if "Ha" is indicated on Button 6.

so

E.g,

In hiragana mode,

To enter Hiragana, press 1 ~ 5 times.

In the English keyboard like <Figure 03>, it is said that it is difficult to input from the conventional input method in the small-sized pad even though the number of the alphabet per one button is only three or fewer. However, I explained that this was a nice solution.)

(Figure 17)

Japanese characters are more clamorous because they are assigned 5 characters per button.

Also, if you type consecutively letters assigned to the same button, there are many inconveniences to move the cursor as you would in the conventional English alphabet.

So, if you enter some letters of the word you want to input, your mobile phone presents candidate words that contain some of the letters, and PREDICTION, that is, predicting function, is used.

If you take an example with a Korean word

Trying to enter 'school dance'

If you enter a `` academic '' letter,

School, academy, school, academy, academy, school, academy, academy, academy, academy, academy, academy, The candidate word such as school is presented, and the user selects 'school dance'

In fact, if you type Japanese in this way, you will have to move the cursor several times to the desired word,

It is still difficult and inconvenient because it is not always in the database until new words, foreign words, / "research" in Korean and Japanese are in the DB in many cases.

So I try to use commercial phrases such as "Hello" and "Where are you?" In Japanese mobile phones, but it is still inconvenient.

(Figure 18)

Just as the Korean input does not need this PREDICTION,

If the twin input method is applied to Japanese character input, even without such a prediction function,

As the alphabet input is improved by the twin input method, it is faster and easier to input than Hangul,

Japanese characters are faster than Hangul and can be entered conveniently. Special characters, such as punctuation marks and emoticons, can be easily input in 2 characters without changing the character mode in Japanese character mode.

Of course, the first letter is only pressed once.

Of course, you can use the same method of pressing the same button multiple times as in the conventional multi-tap input method, just like applying the twin input method when inputting the English alphabet, but you can do the twin input method without changing the character mode.

And

In button 1 of the conventional keyboard like <Fig. 17>. @ / :, but these "extremely few" special characters can not be entered in the Japanese input mode, and the input mode can not be input unless the character mode is changed in the English mode or the special character mode.

(Figure 18)

When the twin input method is applied, the punctuation marks and the emoticon can be input in the second mode without changing the character mode in the hiragana mode or the katakana mode without changing the character mode in the special character mode, can.

I'll explain it in the next video.

For more details and applications, please refer to the instruction manual.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 17 274 times

Japanese input method improvement

(<Figure 18> just)

Applying the twin input method to inputting Japanese on a small keypad is the same as improving the English input method

For more information, please refer to the video description and detailed explanation of how to enter English.

The state of keyboard that can apply twin input method does not matter in any condition.

As shown in <Figure 17>, the conventional keyboard can be applied as it is,

As shown in <Figure 19.5>, it is possible to add a red punctuation mark to each button in the conventional keyboard,

As shown in <Figure 18>, you can add one more emoticons to the conventional keyboard.

Even in this state

For example, in hiragana mode,

Taking Button 6 as an example,

Six hiragana and question marks, including the hiragana ha, are defined as the first group, and five katagana and bouquet are grouped as the second group,

The first hiragana assigned to each button can be input in one tar,

The second to fifth hiragana can be input in two strokes,

You can enter five katakana characters, punctuation marks such as question marks, and emoticons, such as bouquets, in 2 hiragana mode, without changing the character mode.

Let's try it once.

Button 6 has the hiragana 'ha' as the representative letter. In other words, "Hahifu Heho" is assigned to Button 6. (Please refer to the previous video, Japanese introduction movie, for the reason)

In the Hiragana mode, enter Hiragana "Hahifu Heho" and six question marks as the first group of button 6.

 "Hahifu Heho question mark"

(The first letter, Hiragana 'Ha', was typed with one click and the rest entered as two.)

In Hiragana mode, Katakana "HaHiHuHeHo" and six bouquets are defined as the second group of buttons 6, so in hiragana mode, you do this without changing the character mode.

Katakana 'HaHifu HeHo Bouquet'

A very simple introduction to the principle,

Button 6

Each group

A button 1 or 3 is used as a shift button for inputting the first character,

A button 4 or 6 is used as a shift button for inputting a second letter,

A button 7 or 9 is used as a shift button for inputting the third letter,

A button 2 or 8 is used as a shift button for inputting a fourth character,

Button 5 or 0 is used as a shift button for inputting the fifth character,

A button * or # is used as a shift button for inputting a sixth character,

In hiragana mode

The letters of the first group

Hiragana 'Ha', the first letter, was entered once by typing

In the 2nd to 6th characters, while holding down the SHIFT button, shortly press button 6 assigned to the character to be input,

The letters of the second group

In the 1st to 6th characters, press button 6, which is assigned to the letter you want to input, while pressing the SHIFT button, for about 0.5 seconds.

Detailed explanation can be found by watching the English input improvement video or detailed instruction book.

Of course, the conventional method, multi-tap input by pressing the same button multiple times with one hand, can be entered without changing the character mode, such as twin input method and can be done in parallel without changing the character mode.

Also, when inputting characters assigned to the same button consecutively, conventionally, there was the inconvenience of moving the cursor.

And there are many other benefits.

The twin input method would be a great gift for entering Greek and Roman letters, including English,

The twin input method will be a blessing to enter Japanese characters.

You can move the alphabet below the numbers as shown in <Figure 19>, and add more emoticons.

Even in this state

For example, in hiragana mode,

Taking Button 6 as an example,

In the Hiragana mode, enter Hiragana "Hahifu Heho" and six question marks as the first group of button 6.

 "Hahifu Heho question mark"

(The first letter, Hiragana 'Ha', was typed with one click and the rest entered as two.)

In the Hiragana mode, enter six words such as lip, rice, red pepper, anchovy, card, and mask in the second group.

Lips, rice, pepper, anchors, cards, mask

The input principle is now as described when entering the letters of button 6 in <Figure 18>.

And it can be further expanded by combining the various keyboard states mentioned above and the various states that make up part of the following display screen.

The display screen

As shown in <Figure 16.1>, it can be applied by adding punctuation marks,

You can also add emoticons as shown in <Figure 16>.

Or display screen

The first page looks like Figure 16.1,

The second page looks like Figure 16,

The following pages can also be followed by special characters.

Special characters on the display screen can be easily entered by defining the characters in the third group without changing the character mode.

I will now assign a card, a knife, and a mask of the characters on the display screen to the third group of the button 6, and press the button on the keyboard.

(Figure 19)

Card, cooking knife, mask

The letters of group 3 are input by double-clicking the shift button and then pressing the button 6 assigned to the character to be input without releasing the hand.

For a detailed explanation of what has just been demonstrated and explained, a special character sheet on the display screen to make it look like a call key, and a detailed explanation about changing the special character sheet page of the display screen with the volume control button, You can see it.

(<Samsung patent>)

Note that

There is a Japanese input method patent (patent no. 10-2006-0023897) registered in Samsung Electronics in 2007

Let me introduce it.

Assuming that Button 2 is assigned ABCDE,

When you press button 2, the ABCDE assigned to button 2 appears on the display screen with the cursor on C,

At this time, when the OK button is pressed, C is inputted,

Press the left button once to enter B,

Press the left direction button twice or press and hold A for input,

Press the right button once to enter D,

Pressing the right button twice or pressing and holding the E key twice will cause E to be entered.

The disadvantage of this method is

1 Taro can not enter letters and requires at least two strokes,

The 1st and 5th letters will require 3 digits or long press.

In addition, the directional button must be operated out of the 12 buttons called buttons 0 ~ 9 and * #, which are compact pads, so the copper wire is too large.

Also, there are not many advantages of twin input method such as multi-tap or T9.

For more details and applications, please refer to the instruction manual.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 18 152 times

Introduction to the method applied to the Samsung Anycall Tianjin input method

I would like to introduce the introduction of the method of concurrent twin input method in the conventional Samsung Anycall light input method without changing the character mode.

(Figure 22)

I will explain how to use Samsung's input method and twin input method in parallel without changing the character mode.

The principle of twin input method Introduction of video and English input method Video, input method of English If you have seen two videos, I have nothing to say but I will explain it briefly assuming that you did not see it.

If you do not understand it, you can now look at 4 videos about how to type in English quickly.

<Figure 20> shows the conventional keypad of Samsung Electronics Anycall.

The green characters in Figure 21 are hidden, not shown in ㄲ, ㄸ, ㅃ, ㅆ,..

To introduce the conventional input method

The vowel is a combination of the ichijin (ㅣ ㅡ)

Press the key repeatedly until the desired letter appears in the multi-tap mode.

The Hangul phoneme consists of 40 consonants, totaling 19 consonants and 21 vowels,

<Figure 21.5> shows how to input 40 Korean phonemes in the conventional method.

<Figure 21.5> In the summary at the end of the table,

13 phonemes needing 3 strokes

Four phonemes require four strokes

There are two phonemes that require five strokes,

As a result, you can see that there are a total of 19 phonemes that require more than three strokes.

The phonemes that need 4 and 5 strokes are many, and there are many typos.

For example, to type ㅞ

Press button 3, 2, 2, 1, 1 in <Figure 20> in order.

However, as shown in <Figure 22.7>, phonemes / red not assigned as / completion type are assigned to /

While the conventional method can be input without changing the character mode, the conventional twin input method character mode and the twin input method can be concurrently performed, so that 19 phonemes requiring more than three ratios can be input in two strokes.

In other words, you can input all 40 Hangul phonemes as one or two.

It is possible to input two tones in a more comfortable posture and a faster speed in parallel with the twin input method without changing the phoneme and the character mode capable of inputting two tones by the conventional method, It is possible to prevent the occurrence of consonant collisions.

It introduces the auto cursor time setting method introduced in the detailed explanation book, or consonant collision phenomenon does not occur at all in the twin input method exclusive mode.

As shown in <Figure 22>, special characters can also be assigned so that special characters can be input in 2 to 3 characters in full-screen input mode without changing the character mode in special character mode.

In the conventional input mode, the twin input method can be used, but also the conventional input method can be used. Therefore, there is no inconvenience to the person who likes the conventional method. Not at all.

In addition, in the conventional input method mode, it is possible to satisfy even those who want to input Korean characters and special characters at a time in parallel with the twin input method without changing the character mode.

Actually

The state of keyboard that can apply twin input method does not matter in any condition.

As shown in <Figure 20>, even in the same state as the conventional one, / using a call key that has no response in the character input mode as a toggle key

As shown in <Figure 22.8>, we can use a part of the display screen

In the conventional keypad, you can input the red phonemes by pressing the actual keypad without changing the character mode, after the unassigned / red phonemes / assigned to the completed type / virtual keyboard of the display screen are displayed. Of course, you can press the call key again to erase the virtual keyboard of the display screen, or if you remember the red phoneme assignment even though you are gone, you can enter a red phoneme.

In addition

As shown in Figure 22.7,

It is possible to additionally allocate the red / green phonemes / keyboards which are not allocated to the actual keyboard /

As shown in Figure 22.6,

You can also assign additional punctuation marks (such as?., () '"/ ~!).

(Here, in the past, the English alphabet was written under the Hangul phoneme, but in order to secure space, the English alphabet was written under the number.)

In addition

As shown in Figure 22.5,

You can also apply additional emoticons,

As shown in Figure 22,

You can also apply a few additional emojis to apply.

In addition

You can also apply one more emoticon by adding one more line like <Figure 22.4>.

You can also enter special character on the display screen in 2 ~ 3 characters in normal character mode by combining various virtual keyboard states mentioned above and various virtual keyboard states which are part of the following display screen.

The display screen

As shown in <Fig. 16.2>, it is possible to apply additional phonemes that require more than three strokes,

As shown in <Figure 16.1>, it can be applied by adding punctuation marks,

You can also add emoticons as shown in <Figure 16>.

Or display screen

The first page looks like <Figure 16.2>

The second page looks like Figure 16.1,

The third page looks like Figure 16,

The following pages can also be followed by special characters.

The aspect of inputting a part of the display screen is

Conventionally, special characters are input as such,

As shown in <Fig. 15>, in order to input Hangul from mobile phones distributed in Japan, a virtual keyboard with Hangul displayed on the display screen in the Hangul input mode, and the input can be input by pressing the actual keyboard.

My suggestion is to use the / display screen to enter special characters by changing / special character mode / not to enter special characters

In character mode, you can use the "call" key, which has no "no" response, / as a toggle key, to show / not show /

It is a differentiating point that / special characters are displayed even in normal text mode so that special characters can be easily entered in / normal character mode.

In the Text mode, you can also make a lot of special character assignment pages like the conventional one by using the two volume control buttons that make no response / volume up or down / as the page change button on the display screen.

With this improved method, you can enter special characters without changing the character mode in normal text mode, but you can also change to special character mode and input in the conventional way.

For more details and applications, please refer to the instruction manual.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 19 186

How to Apply to Samsung Anycall Wide Area Input Method 1

(Figure 22) (just)

Following the introduction on the improvement of the Chunji-in method

Let's look at how to apply twin input method to Samsung Anycall's input method.

This is the same as improving the English input method.

As I mentioned in the previous video

The keyboard is the same as the conventional keyboard

As shown in <Figure 22.8>, the display screen is divided into a part of the display screen. In the conventional keypad, it is also possible to allocate additional / red phonemes / completed phonemes not assigned to completion.

You can also use the keyboard as shown in <Figure 22.7>, and the display screen as shown in <Figure 16.1>.

First, the keyboard is as shown in <Figure 22> of the various keyboards presented in the previous video description,

The display screen will be explained with an example as shown in <Figure 16>.

(Figure 22)

It is possible to input data by the conventional method,

Without changing the character mode,

The twin input scheme can be applied,

The twin input method

If you press the letter button while holding down the shift button on the computer keyboard, the second letter is entered,

In the mobile phone keyboard, a shift button for inputting the 2nd to 6th letters is used.

It does not actually add multiple shift buttons,

It is a method to shift the conventional button *, #, 0 ~ 9 momentarily.

And if you choose twin shift buttons of various kinds

Pressing a button once will cause the first letter to be typed, as in the past, and in special cases, the button 1 or 3 may be used as a shift button to enter the first letter assigned to each button.

Button 4 or 6 is used as a shift button for inputting the second letter assigned to each button,

Button 7 or 9 is used as a shift button for inputting the third character assigned to each button,

Button 2 or 8 is used as a shift button for inputting the fourth letter assigned to each button,

Button 5 or 0 is used as a shift button for inputting the fifth character assigned to each button,

I will use the button * or # for a moment with the shift button to enter the sixth letter assigned to each button.

To summarize the function of the shift button, once again, I have decided that 1,2,3,4,5,6.

(Of course, you can set it differently, you can easily do 1,2,3,4,5,6, and so on.)

Let's split the letters of each button into two groups.

When the current character mode is the character input mode in which the character is in the middle /

Based on Button 6,

Easy

The first group consists of,,,, ㄸ vowel, 4,

The second group can be divided into four parentheses, broken hearts, lips, rice,

Slightly more difficult

The first group consists of ㄷ, ㅌ, ㄸ, vowel, left parenthesis, 6 broken hearts,

The second group is divided into lip, rice, and two.

(The easy way to split the input is to just tell the following explanation about the difficult division.)

Let's talk about button 6 when the current character mode is the character input mode.

To describe the first method of inputting the first group of button 6,,, ㅌ, ㄸ, vowel, left parenthesis, and six broken hearts,

As in the conventional method, the button 6 is pressed once,

Press and hold button 4 or button 6, which is a shift button that allows you to enter the second character without changing the character mode, by double-clicking button 6 or pressing button 6 to enter it. (However, since you can not press button 6 again while pressing button 6, you can press button 6 while pressing button 4 and press button 6 to input it.) As you will see later, It is more advantageous to press this button, so we recommend that you press button 6 while pressing button 4 to input.)

Press button 6 three times in succession or press button 7 or button 9, which is a shift button that allows you to enter the third letter without changing the character mode. (By the way, if you press button 6 while holding button 9, both hands are concentrated on row 3, so interference of both hands occurs and stability of holding mobile phone is not good. Press and hold button 7 and press button 6 to input It would be much easier to recommend.

In this way, there are two shift buttons that perform the same function, so you can select and use them as you like.)

 Pressing the button 6 while pressing the button 6 or the button 8 which is a shift button for inputting the fourth character without changing the character mode is inputted by pushing the button 6 four times continuously,

The left parenthesis is a button 5, which is a shift button for inputting the fifth character without changing the character mode, by pressing the button 6 five times in succession, or pressing the button 0,

A broken heart can be entered by pressing button 6 six times in a row or by pressing button 6, which is a shift button * or #, which allows you to enter the sixth character without changing the character mode. Would be much easier to use as a shift button?

Let's try typing ㄷ,,, ㄸ, vowel, left parenthesis, broken heart again quickly.

Type c, ㅌ, ㄸ, vowel, left parenthesis, broken heart.

In addition, in the conventional method, in the case of the multi-tap method, that is, even if the same button is pressed several times, the added letter can be limited to the twin input method so that it can be input in the same situation as the conventional one.

Then, for example

If you press button 6 several times, you can only enter / c, ㅌ, ㄸ, and vowel, parentheses, broken hearts, lips and bobs are limited to twins.

Also, if you press the button 1 several times, you can only enter / vowel, and the rest vowel vowel, clear, period, single quote, despair, car can only be entered in twin input mode.

Button 9

I know how to enter the letters, words, vowels, right parentheses, how to enter hearts, and how to enter other buttons, even if you do not explain them.

And

The Hangul phoneme consists of 40 consonants, totaling 19 consonants and 21 vowels,

If you enter 40 Hangul phonemes in the conventional method,

13 phonemes needing 3 strokes

Four phonemes require four strokes

There are two phonemes that require five strokes,

As a result, you can see that there are a total of 19 phonemes that require more than three strokes.

 Using the twin input scheme,

While you can enter the conventional method as it is, you can input 19 phonemes that require more than three strokes in parallel with the twin input method without changing the character mode.

In other words, you can input all 40 Hangul phonemes as one or two. And consonant collision can be eliminated.

In addition, the improved Hangul phoneme assignments introduced so far, including <Figure 22>, were all 40 Hangul phonemes assigned to completion,

You can assign only the necessary phonemes for the 4th, 5th,

Only the phonemes that require more than three strokes can be assigned to completion.

I will explain how to input the second group of buttons 6, lips, two bobs and characters on the display screen without changing the character mode in the next video. Very easy.

For more details and applications, please refer to the instruction manual.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 20 219

How to Apply to Samsung Anycall Typhoon Input Method 2

(Enter the 3-2th group to improve the way to the sky)

(Figure 22)

 next,

In the second character group of the button 6,

Let's see how to input without changing the character mode.

The input method of the second group of each button is

In the normal text mode, without changing the character mode, I will use the example of pressing the character button for about 0.5 seconds while holding the shift button.

(Of course, you can do it with another push.)

Then,

The lips that are the first letter of the second group of buttons 6 are in the state of normal letter mode in which the button 6 is pressed for 0.5 seconds while the button 1 or button 3, which is a shift button for inputting the first letter, Press and hold to enter. (Depending on the rules, you can also press button 6 for about 0.5 seconds without needing a shift button.

You can still do this by typing in the numbers by pressing and holding for about 1 second in the normal text mode.)

Bob, the second character of the second group of button 6, is in the normal character mode of the overturning mode, while pressing button 4, which is a shift button for inputting the second character without changing the character mode, pressing button 6 for about 0.5 seconds Type. Da da ev

If you increase the number of special characters assigned to the button

As in <Figure 22.4>, the second group of buttons 6

Lips, rice, cherries, cooking knives, cards, masks.

The third letter of the second group of the button 6 is the letter Chung-in. In normal letter mode, press the button 7 or button 9, which is a shift button for inputting the third letter, Press and hold to enter. (It would be a lot easier to use button 7 as a shift button rather than button 9?)

The cooking knife, which is the fourth letter of the second group of button 6, is a shift button that allows the user to input the fourth character without changing the character mode in the normal letter mode, Press and hold for seconds

The fifth character of the second group of button 6 is the general character mode in the general character mode. In the normal character mode, the button 5, which is a shift button for inputting the fifth character without changing the character mode, Press and hold to enter.

In the sixth character of the second group of button 6, the masked expression is that in the normal character mode of the overturning mode, the button 6 or 5 is pressed in a state in which the button * or #, which is a shift button for inputting the sixth character, Press and hold for seconds. (It would be much easier to use the button * as a shift button rather than the button #.)

The second group of buttons 6

Let's try typing the lips, rice, cherries, cooking knife, card, mask once again quickly. (Lips, rice, cherries, cooking knife, card, mask one expression) so easy to type.

In the past, it was inconvenient to enter even if there were only three letters assigned to the buttons. But with the twin input method, even if there are twelve letters on the button, can you type so easily?

In addition, in the following video description, even special characters on the display screen can be entered without changing the character mode in normal text mode.

Now, how do you express the many letters assigned to buttons?

If left parentheses, broken hearts, lips, and rice,

In the normal letter mode, the 3rd letter of the second group is pressed by pressing the button 7 or button 9, which is a shift button for entering the third letter, for about 0.5 seconds. (It would be a lot easier to use button 7 as a shift button rather than button 9?)

In the normal text mode, Bob, the fourth character of the second group, presses button 6 for about 0.5 seconds while holding button 2 or button 8, which is a shift button for inputting the fourth character

(Figure 22)

Although we used long press, which is a pushing method that does not like to use when inputting Hangul phonemes,

When entering special characters, conventionally, the character mode must be changed to the special character mode, and even if the mode is changed to the special character mode, it is necessary to change the page several times to find and input a desired special character, I needed a lot of bats to get back to

By using the twin method, you can input much easier than before without changing the character mode in the normal character mode.

You do not have to explain how to enter the 2 groups of letters assigned to other buttons.

I will explain how to input characters on the display screen, the third group of button 6, without changing the character mode in the next video.

For more details and applications, please refer to the instruction manual.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 21 230 times

How to Apply to Samsung Anycall Wide Area Input Method 3

(Entering special characters displayed on the display screen)

(Figure 16)

next

Let's look at how to display the characters on the display screen in normal text mode without changing the character mode.

If you want to enter more special characters in normal character mode, without changing the character mode, you can use this part of the display screen to show the special character assignment table like this one.

For example, in the Text mode, you can use the unanswered call button as a toggle key to show / hide the special character table on the display screen.

Again, the keyboard returns to the state shown in Figure 22,

If you press the call button in the normal text mode and the special character table like <Figure 16> appears on the display screen, you can enter the special character on the display screen without changing the character mode in the normal character mode.

Special characters on the display screen are now considered the third group.

Now, to describe how to enter the third group of buttons 6, a card, a cooking knife, and three mask expressions,

The input method of the third group of each button is

In the normal character mode, we will use the example of pressing the letter button without releasing the hand after double-clicking the shift button without changing the character mode.

(Of course, you can do it with another push.)

Then,

The first letter of the third group of button 6 is the letter (<Figure 22>). In normal letter mode, double-click button 1 or button 3, which is a shift button that allows you to enter the first letter without changing the letter mode Then, without releasing your finger, press button 6 to enter. like this

(Figure 16)

The cooking knife, which is the second letter of the third group of button 6, is selected by double-clicking the button 4, which is a shift button for inputting the second character without changing the character mode in the general character mode (Fig. 22) Without releasing, press button 6 to enter. like this

(Figure 16)

The masked face, which is the third letter of the third group of button 6, is a double-click button 7 or 9 that is a shift button that allows the third character to be entered without changing the character mode in the normal character mode (FIG. 22) After clicking, do not release your finger and press button 6 to enter. like this

In the character entry mode, you can also change the page of the special character table on the display by pressing the / volume control button with no response.

Even if the page is changed, special characters on the display screen can be input by the third group input method.

However, you can change the special character mode as usual and select the special character you want.

And, as another method,

Special characters on the display screen as shown in <Figure 16> are regarded as part of the second group,

Card, cooking knife, three face mask,

, (Figure 22)

In the normal character mode, the first and second letters of the second group of the button 6 are regarded as the second and third letters of the second group of the button 6, followed by the second group letter input method Maybe.

The second group text entry method is explained in the previous video, so even if you do not explain it again, you will know.

You can also press the Call button again to hide the special character table on the display screen. Even if you do not see the special character table, you can input it by 3rd group input method if you memorized the <Figure 16> table that was just shown.

And the keyboard is the same as the conventional one,

The first page of the display screen assumes that all the phonemes have been assigned as completed, as in <Figure 22.8>

The second page of the display screen is assumed to be assigned from a punctuation mark as in <Figure 16.1>

The third page of the display screen is as shown in <Figure 16>, and the subsequent pages can also be assigned special characters.

In this case, only the red one of the phonemes on the first page of the display screen as shown in <Figure 22.8> is added compared with <20 in the conventional keyboard

The characters in the conventional keyboard such as <Figure 20> and the characters in <Figure 22.8> in the first page of the display screen can be changed to the normal twin input mode, Group character input method in which a character button is short-pressed in a state in which the user presses and holds a character,

The letters on the second page or more of the display screen can be input by the second group letter input method by pressing and holding the shift button for about 0.5 second while holding the shift button.

You do not have to explain how to enter the 3 groups of letters assigned to other buttons.

For more details and applications, please refer to the instruction manual.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 22 # 101-0016

New Advantages of Entering Words in Korean Example

<<<<<< 101-0016 0048 >>>>>

Let's enter a few words in parallel with twin input method in Samsung's Anycall Hangul input method.

To tell you the conclusion

As shown in <Fig. 20>, let us explain the method of twin input method in parallel with the conventional keypad,

For ease of explanation, for example, in a keyboard in which a red finished phoneme is additionally assigned to a conventional keyboard as shown in <Figure 22.7>

You can enter 'Kitchen knife, lost, say, kok, kyo, hyo, frame' in twin type easily and quickly as follows.

<<<<<< 101-0042 0025 >>>>>

Cutlery, lost, say, sure, hyo, frame (fast)

<<<<<< 101-0050 0025 >>>>

Do you want to type in the phone quickly?

Cutlery, lost, say, sure, hyo, frame (fast)

<<<<<< 101-0060 0133 >>>>>>

Let's try typing it again slowly.

Cutlery, lost, say, sure, eff, frame

<<<<<< 101-0076 0100 >>>>>>>

Thus, even in the case of a keyboard in which a phoneme is additionally assigned to a conventional keyboard,

In the conventional Hangeul input method mode including the one-touch input method at each instant of inputting one phoneme, it is possible to input in the same manner as the conventional input methods such as inputting with one hand, and inputting with the twin input method without changing the character mode I know that you can know that you can do it.

Let's see what the advantages of the twin typing method are for typing the words you have already entered.

There are many advantages

In parallel with the traditional Hangul input methods such as the EZ method of the LG Electronics Cyon, the Pantech series Curitel or Sky method, the Motorola method, or the conventional Hangul input method, English, Japanese or twin input method, The benefits are the same.

<<<<<< 101-0080 0224 >>>>>>

As mentioned in the detailed commentary or in the previous video, the type of keyboard that can be applied to the twin input method is

As shown in <Figure 22.7>, a red finished phoneme is additionally assigned to a conventional keyboard, or

In addition to punctuation marks as in <Figure 22.6>,

(<Figure 22>) This type of punctuation or additional emoticon or other special characters

The keyboard is the same as the previous one (Fig. 22.8), and a part of the display screen is allocated as shown in Fig. 22.8.

In this form,

If you are using a touch pad keyboard,

In the case of a general pushbutton keyboard, the pushbutton plate as in <Fig. 20>

Conventionally, as a toggle key for displaying or not displaying a virtual key board having a part of a display screen, for example, a call key, which is no longer responded to in a character input mode (FIG. 22.8)

Now, in the character input mode, you can press the call key to see the virtual keyboard, and then press the keyboard with the actual push button.

Of course, you can also enter additional assigned phonemes, including these red phonemes, in a twin input format, by pressing the call key again to make the virtual keyboard disappear from the display.

<<<< 104-0081 0008? 104-0520 >>>>>

Think of the call button as a function key to show or hide the cheat sheet.

<<<<< 104-0082 0024? 104-0527 >>>>>

In Korean input mode, when input Hangul at Samsung Electronics mobile phone, which is exported to Japan, a part of the display screen is allocated in the Hangul input mode (Fig. 15) Figure 17) It is the same as the form to input by pressing the real keyboard which does not show Korean at all.

<<<<< 104-0083 0014? 104-0516 >>>>>

Now, in a wide variety of forms, including examples

As shown in <Figure 22.7>, we will describe the red keyboard with the additional phoneme assigned to the conventional keyboard.

<<<<< 104-0084 0013? 104-0533 >>>>>

You can also think of typing in the twin character input method by pressing the same keyboard as above, just like this on the display screen.

<<<<< 104-0085 0014? 104-0517 >>>>>

This is to explain that the twin input method is efficient even when inputting only the common Hangul phonemes instead of special characters in the twin input method.

<<<<<<< 101-0083 0112 >>>>>>

Also, please note that the following twin input methods are well implemented:

First, I put the same shift buttons in columns 1 and 3 and twins on both sides.

Most of the blue ballpoint pen, which means the left thumb, can be pressed only by one row, sometimes by pressing the second row occasionally, without pressing the third row at all,

A quick-color ballpoint pen that means the thumb of the right hand can be pressed only by three rows, pressing two rows occasionally, without pressing one row at all,

The two hands do not have such a one-row, three-row bias, there is no interference between the thumbs of both hands, the stability of holding the mobile phone is excellent, the load is evenly distributed to both hands,

Second, the advantages mentioned in the previous video, "Six New Advantages of Entering Words in English Word Entry", are as follows.

Let's try typing words once again slowly.

<<<<<<< 101-0087 0125 >>>>>>

One of the first things mentioned in the video, "Six New Advantages of Entering Words with Examples of English Words"

As an example of the advantage that you do not have to do unnecessary actions to artificially move the cursor with the space-only button or the right-hand button, even if you input consecutive phonemes assigned to the same button.

In order to input in the conventional way, the key of a letter and the letter of a letter are assigned to the button 4 which is the same button, and since it is input continuously, after inputting the letter, move the cursor to the right button and input Therefore, excessive circulation of the right button is necessary, and it seems to do unnecessary work, which gives considerable psychological stress,

If you type in the twin input method

When you enter a, you do not need to move the cursor with the right button, you can press the button 4 while holding the button 6 out of the buttons 4 or 6 which are the shift buttons to input the second letter. .

I do not need excessive circulation, I do not give stress psychologically.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 23 # 101-0096

New Advantages of Entering Words in Korean

<<<<<< 101-0096 0156 >>>>>>

But if you're trying to enter 'curves' for example

Although the frequency of a and 'period' is two times consecutively, and the frequency of 'a' and 'period'

In the case where the first letter of a certain button is two consecutive times, even if the twin input method is applied, when the conventional multi-tap type consonant input method and the twin input method are concurrently performed, I think there are likely to be situations that need to be moved, but here are three ways

If you press the button 4 while holding the button 1 or 3 button 3, which is the shift button that allows you to enter the first letter, instead of moving the cursor using the first direction button It is much smaller, easier and faster to type than the right button.

In other words, enter the following a. A

Secondly, it allows you to adjust the auto cursor time setting like the Japanese mobile phone, so if you move the cursor within 0.5 seconds after the letter is displayed and 2 seconds have elapsed, you can move the cursor to the right You can also move the cursor after a second,

Thirdly, it is possible to set the mode for exclusive use of the twin input method so that the first letter of each button is input unconditionally in combination with the shift button, and the cursor can be moved by the right button.

<<<<<< 101-0109 0120 >>>>>>

The second-mentioned advantage of the video, "Six new advantages in word entry with examples of English words"

When each button has a sequence of letters in the same sequence, you can use the previous shift button as it is, so let's enter 'missed' and 'say' as an example of the advantage of dramatically reducing the number of digits.

If you enter 'Take' in the conventional way, you need 9 total.

7, 7, 7, 1, 2, 1, 8, 8, 8

       ㅃ ㅣ. I need a total of nine to make it.

If you use twin input method, you need only 4 tones instead of 9 as usual.

9 + 7 + 5 + 8

      ㅃ ㅐ ㅆ

ㅃ is the third letter of button 7, ㅐ is the third letter of button 5, and ㅆ is the third letter of button 8

While holding down button 9 with your right hand, press button 7, 5, or 8 with your left hand in the button 7 or 9, which is the shift button to enter the third letter, and then type ㅃ, ㅗ, ㅆ.

<<<<<<< 101-0113 0121 >>>>>>

Let 's type `say'.

If you enter it with the conventional method, you will need 12 strokes.

 8, 8, 1, 2, 5, 5, 0, 0, 1, 2, 5, 5

     ㅎ ㅣ. ㅁ ㅁ ㅣ. D

If you apply the twin input method, you will only need 7 tries instead of 12 as usual.

6 + 8 + 1 + 5 + 0 + 1 + 5

      ㅎ ƒ ƒ ƒ

Since 'a, d, a, a, d' are the second letters of buttons 8,1,5,0,1,5,

While holding down button 6 of the button 4 or 6, which is a shift button for inputting the second letter, with the right hand, press the button 8, 1, 5, 0, 1, , Enter a, d `

<<<<<< 101-0114 0112 >>>>>

In addition, you can input two voices such as ㅙ and 모음 which you needed to enter in the input method of mid-way input.

In a state in which button 8 is depressed among buttons 2 and 8 which are shift buttons for inputting the fourth letter,

Press button * to enter ㅙ,

Press button # to enter ㅞ.

Let's enter 'pretty'.

Since the first letter is the third letter of the button 4, among the buttons 7 and 9 which are the shift buttons for inputting the third letter, the button 4 is pressed while the button 9 is being pressed,

ㅙ is the fourth letter of the button *, so press and hold button 8 among the buttons 2 or 8, which are the shift buttons to enter the fourth letter, and press the button * to enter ㅙ.

<<<<< 101-0119 0155 >>>>>>>

"The third advantage of six new words in the English word input case

As the letter button is shifted, the letter button at the time of inputting the previous letter becomes a shift button for inputting a letter at a later time. Let's try typing the word 'koku' as an example of the advantage of having a copper wire of 0, minimizing the copper wire, and saving almost one shot.

If you input it in the conventional way, it is the same as the following (5 total is required)

4,4,4,2,3

The twin input method is as follows. (4 total required)

9 + 4, 4 + 3

ㄲ ㅗ

(You can say that the difference is only 1% difference, only about 20%, but it is much faster because you use both hands evenly and there is very little copper wire.)

ㄲ Because this is the third letter of button 4

While holding the button 9, which is a shift button for inputting the third letter, with the right hand, press the button 4 with the left hand to enter the key,

Because ㅗ is the second letter of button 3

I tried to press button 4, which is a shift button that allows you to enter the second letter, with your left hand, but because your left hand was already on button 4,

Immediately press button 4, then press button 3 with your right hand to enter ㅗ.

So you can type this pretty fast.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 24 0125

New Advantages of Entering Words in Korean

<<<<<< 101-0125 0133 >>>>>

The fourth mention of the "New Six Advantages of Entering Words with Examples of English Words"

By shifting the letter button to a shift button, the shift button for inputting the previous letter is a letter button of the latter character, and the advantage of having the effect of saving almost one stroke by minimizing the line with the line 0 being zero Let's enter 'ㅗ a' of 'sure' as an example.

ㅗ

Because ㅗ is the second letter of button 3

Press and hold Button 4 with your left hand, and press Button 3 with your right hand to enter ㅗ.

Since this is the first letter of button 4

I want to press the button 4 with the left hand, but since the left hand is already on the button 4, press the button 4 immediately after the copper line is 0,

So that's why you can type so quickly ('a')

In the end, the third and fourth benefits are words that appear at the same time.

Let's try typing again. exactly

<<<<<< 101-0131 0134 >>>>>>

The fifth mention of the "Six New Advantages of Entering Words with Examples of English Words"

The advantages of the third and fourth are that they occur at the same time while entering only two spellings.

In other words, as the character button is shifted, the character button of the previous character is a shift button for inputting a later character, and a shift button for inputting the previous character becomes a character button of a later character at the same time Let's try typing Hyo as an example of the advantage of doing that.

Hyo

Since this is the second letter of button 8, hold down button 6 of button 4 or 6, which is the shift button to enter the second letter, and press button 8 to enter 'ㅎ'.

Because the button is the second letter of the button 6, it is trying to press the button 8 from the button 2 or 8 which is the shift button for inputting the fourth letter. Since the button 8 has already the left hand thumb,

I am trying to press button 6 while doing so, but since there is already a thumb of my right hand on button 6, press button 6 immediately on the spot to enter 'ㅛ'.

Hyo

<<<<< 101-0134 0146 >>>>>>

The sixth mention of the "Six New Advantages of Entering Words with Examples of English Words"

As an example when explaining the second to fifth advantages, not only when there are two spellings in succession, but also when the first letter of each button is between the two spellings, these advantages are expressed almost as they are Let's just try to enter a 'frame' with the first letter of each button between the two spellings in a situation where the second advantage occurs.

frame

The second letter, button 6,

Between the second letter of button 5

Even if the first letter of button 3 is inserted

You can still use button 4, which is a shift button that allows you to enter the second letter you used when typing.

In other words

Press button 6 while holding button 4 among buttons 4 or 6 which is a shift button for inputting the second letter,

Press button 3 momentarily to enter ㅡ,

Press and hold button 4, which is the shift button to enter the second letter that you used when typing, and then press button 5 to enter it.

ㅌ Ao Ao ㅌ d d

<<<<< 101-0146 >>>>>

And

Button 5 or 0 which is a shift button for inputting the fifth character

The button * or #, which is a shift button that allows you to enter the sixth letter

Second, third, and fourth letters, and so on, or by changing the function of each button as a shift button, May be more frequently manifested.

The advantages of typing Hangul words and quick typing are

Because it is like the advantages of inputting English words and demonstration of fast typing, it is possible to use "A to Z fast input test" video and "6 words" Demonstrate fast input of 40 English words "Please watch these videos after watching this video because there are detailed explanations and examples in the videos.

For more details and applications, please refer to the detailed instructions.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 25 299

Improved Hangul input method of Pantech's Sky Curitel

(<Figure 25> just)

The way to improve the Hangul input method of Pantech series Sky or Curitel in the small keypad is the same as the method of improving the input method of Anycall in Samsung Electronics,

For details, please refer to the video description and the detailed explanation of how to improve the input method of Tianjin.

<Figure 23> shows the conventional keyboard of Pantech Sky or Curitel.

The green characters in Figure 24 are hidden, not shown in ㄲ, ㄸ,., ㅆ, ㅉ,..

To introduce the conventional Pantech series input method

The consonants and short vowels are input by pressing multiple times until the desired letter is displayed by the multi-tap method, and the double vowels are input by combining continuous vowels.

(More detailed in the detailed description)

The Hangul phoneme consists of 40 consonants, totaling 19 consonants and 21 vowels,

<Figure 24.5> shows how to input 40 Korean phonemes in the conventional Pantech series input method.

<Figure 24.5> In the summary at the end of the table,

You can see that there are 10 phonemes that require 3 strokes.

However, in the conventional Pantech keyboard as shown in <Figure 26.7>, the phonemes not assigned to / completion type / red are assigned to the completed /

Even if you can enter it in the conventional way, you can input 10 phonemes in 10 characters that need more than three characters in parallel with the twin input method in the conventional character mode without changing the character mode.

In other words, you can input all 40 Hangul phonemes as one or two.

In the conventional method, two phonemes can be input, two phonemes can be input in a more comfortable posture, a faster speed, and two phonemes can be input without changing the character mode, twin input method, The disadvantage is that when entering consecutive phonemes assigned to the same button, the consonant collision that causes the inconvenience of moving the cursor to the directional key may be minimized.

It introduces the auto cursor time setting method introduced in the detailed explanation book, or consonant collision phenomenon does not occur at all in the twin input method exclusive mode.

As shown in <Figure 25>, special characters can also be assigned, so that special characters can be input in 2 characters in the Hangul input mode without changing the character mode in the special character mode.

Since the conventional input method can be input even in the conventional input method and the twin input method can be used without changing the character mode, there is no inconvenience to the person who likes the conventional method. Therefore, the twin input method There is no risk involved.

In addition, in the conventional input method mode, it is possible to satisfy even those who want to input Korean characters and special characters at a time in parallel with the twin input method without changing the character mode.

In fact, the state of the keyboard that can apply the twin input method does not matter in any state

As shown in <Figure 23>, even in the same state as the conventional one, / using the call key that has no response in the character input mode as a toggle key

As shown in <Figure 26.8>, you can use a part of the display screen

In the conventional keyboard, after the virtual keyboard of the display screen is displayed, which is not allocated to the completed type / red phonemes / assigned to the completed type / display screen, the actual keyboard is pressed without changing the character mode in the Hangeul input mode, You can type. Of course, you can press the call key again to erase the virtual keyboard on the display screen, or if you remember the red phoneme assignment status even though you are gone, you can enter a red phoneme.

In addition

As shown in Figure 26,

It is possible to additionally indicate the red / green phonemes not assigned as / complete type to the conventional keyboard,

As shown in Figure 26.6,

You can also assign additional punctuation marks (such as?., () '"/ ~!).

(Here, in the past, the English alphabet was written under the Hangul phoneme, but in order to secure space, the English alphabet was written under the number.)

In addition

As shown in Figure 26.5,

You can also apply additional emoticons,

As shown in Figure 25,

You can also apply a few additional emojis to apply.

In addition

As shown in <Figure 26>, you can assign one more emoticon to apply.

In the keyboard in this state, in the Hangul input mode, for example, the button 12 is assigned to the button 6,

ㅓ ㅕ ㅔ ㅖ Left bracket Right bracket is defined as the first group of button 6,

A lips rice cherry cooking knife, and a card mask as a second group of buttons 6,

If you want to enter all of these things directly in Hangul input mode, without changing the character mode with special characters, type this.

ㅓ ㅕ ㅔ ㅖ Left parenthesis Right parentheses Lips rice cherries Cooking knife, card face mask Type like this.

You can find out how to enter it by watching the English input method improvement video or Samsung Anycall Inner input method improvement video or the detailed explanation book.

(Figure 16.2)

By combining various virtual keyboard states mentioned above and various virtual keyboard states that are part of the following display screen, even special characters on the display screen can be input in 2 ~ 3 characters by pressing the actual keyboard in normal character mode I have.

The display screen

As shown in <Fig. 16.2>, it is possible to apply additional phonemes that require more than three strokes,

As shown in <Figure 16.1>, it can be applied by adding punctuation marks,

You can also add emoticons as shown in <Figure 16>.

Or display screen

The first page looks like <Figure 16.2>

The second page looks like Figure 16.1,

The third page looks like Figure 16,

The following pages can also be followed by special characters.

For example, as shown in <Figure 16.1>

One of the characters in the display screen, the sun bouquet is now designated as the third group of button 6, so press the button on the real keyboard to enter it in the Hangul input mode and the special character mode without changing the character mode.

(Figure 26)

Single Quote Sun Bouquet

For more information on how to enter such information, how to make the special character table on the display screen look like a call key or not, or to change the special character page page of the display screen with the volume control button, etc., You can find out by seeing the detailed explanation book.

In addition, in the conventional method, when a multi-tap method is used, that is, when the same button is pressed several times, the added letter can be limited to the twin input method

For more details and various applications, please refer to the videos and detailed explanations.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 26 # 354

CJon's EZ Hangul input method improvement of LG Electronics 1

<<<<< 0354 0200 >>>>>

(<Figure 29> just)

The method of improving the Hangul input method of CJ's EZ method in the small keypad is the same as the method of improving the input method of Anycall in Samsung Electronics,

For more information, please refer to the video and detailed instructions for how to improve the input method of Tianjin.

The conventional EZ system of the LG Electronics Cyon is shown in <Figure 27>.

<Figure 28>

The blue letter "ㄲ ㄲ ㅆ ㄸ ㄸ ㅃ ㅑ ㅑ ㅑ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅑ ㅑ ㅑ ㅑ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ, * Alternatively, you can press the button #, which is a double consonant button, once or twice. That is, it is not assigned to completion type.

The conventional input method of the EZ method of the LG Electronics Cyon is described in detail in the detailed explanation book

The Hangul phoneme consists of 40 consonants, totaling 19 consonants and 21 vowels,

<Figure 28.5> shows the method of inputting 40 Hangul phonemes as EZ type input method of conventional LG Electronics Cyon.

In the final summary,

13 phonemes requiring 3 strokes,

There are two phonemes that require four strokes,

You can see that there are a total of 15 phonemes that require more than three.

<<<<< 0360 0302 >>>>>

However, as shown in <Figure 32.7>, in the traditional EZ-style Hangul keyboard of LG Electronics Cyon, phonemes not assigned to / completion type / red and blue are assigned to /

In the conventional character mode, if twin input method is performed concurrently, it is possible to input 15 phonemes requiring more than three bits without changing the character mode.

In other words, you can input all 40 Hangul phonemes as one or two.

In the conventional method, it is possible to input two phonemes in which phonemes can be input in a two-tone manner, a character mode is not changed,

Entering a double-sided tone containing the blue character "ㄲ ㄲ ㅆ ㅆ ㅉ ㄸ ㄸ ㅃ ㅑ ㅑ ㅕ ㅕ ㅕ ㅕ ㅕ ㅕ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ" which is another disadvantage of the conventional EZ system input method Each time / every phoneme is assigned to a button, followed by a button, which is a button for adding a stroke, or a button #, which is a double consonant button, a large copper line is generated every four lines, The twin input method eliminates the need to have only one button and a pair of consonant buttons, so that both hands are biased in one or three rows, causing interference with both hands and poor stability in holding the phone.

.

In addition

As shown in <Figure 29>, special characters including picture emoticons can be additionally assigned. In special characters mode, it is also possible to input 2 special characters in Hangul input mode without changing the character mode.

Since the conventional input method can be input even in the conventional input method and the twin input method can be used without changing the character mode, there is no inconvenience to the person who likes the conventional method. Therefore, the twin input method There is no risk involved.

In addition, in the conventional input method mode, you can enter Hangul and special characters in two strokes in parallel with the twin input method without changing the character mode, so you can satisfy those who want to input quickly.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 27 363 times

CJONE's EZ Hangul input method improvement of LG Electronics 2

<<<<< 0363 0345 >>>>>

In fact, the state of the keyboard that can apply the twin input method does not matter in any state

As shown in <Figure 27>, even in the same state as before, / In the character input mode,

As shown in <Figure 32.8>

In the conventional keyboard, after the red / blue / phonetic / phonetic / phonetic keyboard of the display screen is displayed, in the Hangeul input mode, the actual keyboard is pressed without changing the character mode, You can input the blue phonemes in perfect form. Of course, you can press the call key again to erase the virtual keyboard of the display screen. If you remember the red and blue phoneme assignment status even though you are gone, you can input red and blue phonemes.

In addition

As shown in Figure 32.7,

The phonemes of / red and blue which are not assigned to the conventional keyboard / complete type can be additionally written in the completed form on the actual keyboard /

As shown in Figure 32.6,

You can also assign additional punctuation marks (such as?., () '"/ ~!).

(Here, in the past, the English alphabet was written under the Hangul phoneme, but in order to secure space, the English alphabet was written under the number.)

In addition

As shown in Figure 32.5,

You can also apply additional emoticons,

As shown in Figure 29,

You can also apply a few additional emojis to apply.

In addition

As shown in <Figure 32>, you can assign one more emoticon to apply.

Also in the case of the keyboard in this state, in the Hangeul input mode, if the button 6 is taken as an example,

ㅗ ㅜ ㅛ ㅠ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,

A lips rice cherry cooking knife, and a card mask as a second group of buttons 6,

In the Hangul input mode, Hangul phonemes that were previously assigned can be input in the conventional way, but all of them are input in the special Hangul mode without changing the character mode in the conventional Hangul input mode.

ㅗ ㅜ ㅛ ㅠ Left bracket Right bracket lip Bob cherry Cooking knife, card mask One look

You can find out how to enter it by watching the English input method improvement video or Samsung Anycall Inner input method improvement video or the detailed explanation book.

<<<<< 0367 0256 >>>>>

(Figure 16.2)

By combining various virtual keyboard states mentioned above and various virtual keyboard states that are part of the following display screen, even special characters on the display screen can be input in 2 ~ 3 characters by pressing the actual keyboard in normal character mode I have.

The display screen

As shown in <Figure 32.8>, red and blue phonemes which are not assigned to the completion type can be additionally assigned to the completion type,

As shown in <Fig. 16.2>, it is possible to apply additional phonemes that require more than three strokes,

As shown in <Figure 16.1>, it can be applied by adding punctuation marks,

You can also add emoticons as shown in <Figure 16>.

Or display screen

The first page looks like <Figure 32.8>

The second page looks like Figure 16.2,

The third page looks like Figure 16.1,

The fourth page looks like Figure 16,

The following pages can also be followed by special characters.

For example, as shown in <Figure 16.1>

One of the characters in the display screen, the sun bouquet is now designated as the third group of button 6, so press the button on the real keyboard to enter it in the Hangul input mode and the special character mode without changing the character mode.

(Figure 32)

Single Quote Sun Bouquet

For more information on how to enter such information, how to make the special character table on the display screen look like a call key or not, or to change the special character page page of the display screen with the volume control button, etc., You can find out by seeing the detailed explanation book.

In addition, conventionally-assigned characters can be input using the conventional input method in the same situation as before,

The added characters can be limited to twin input method

For more details and various applications, please refer to the videos and detailed explanations.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 28: New Advantages of Entering Words in Korean Word Input Examples (Application to LG Electronics)

<<<<< 103-861 0017 >>>>>

(Figure 27)

In the case where the twin input method is performed in parallel with the input method of the LG Electronics ez Hangul

Let's see how convenient it is to actually enter words.

Of course, you can enter the conventional input method as it is, but try to input it as a twin input method without changing the character mode.

<<<<< 103-0864 0012 >>>>>

The keyboard is made the same as the conventional one,

(Fig. 32.8>

You can only do this on the display screen,

<Figure 32.7>

You will notice that the keyboard bodywork can be transformed in this way.

<<<<< 103-0866 0026 >>>>>

In fact, I found out the convenience of entering the word for the case of twin typing in the Samsung Electronics input method in the previous video called "Six New Advantages of Typing Hangul Words" It's almost the same in other input methods, so you do not need to try again, but let's look at it briefly.

<<<<< 103-0869 0013 >>>>>

For a detailed description of the moment when the effect occurs, how it works, and how it works more often, please see the video titled "Six New Advantages of Entering Words in Korean."

<<<<< 103-0870 0006 >>>>>

"The six new advantages of entering words with the Korean word input example"

<<<<< 103-0873 0028 >>>>> Time Hold

The first mentioned advantage

As an example of the advantage of not having to perform unnecessary actions that artificially move the cursor with the space-only button or the right-hand button, even when the phonemes assigned to the same button are input consecutively

There is no such example.

This is because the consonants of the LG Electronics ez Hangul input method are not inputted by the multi-tap method which is a method of inputting consonants in the Tianjin input method.

<<<<< 103-0874 0014 >>>>>

The second mentioned advantage

When there is a sequence of characters in the same order of each button, the shift button that was previously pressed can be used as it is from behind,

<<<<< 103-0875 >>>>>

Let 's enter the' etw 'and' bone 'and' tofu '.

<<<<< 103-0878 0024 >>>>>

Let's type 'wed'. ㅆ ㅙ

ㅆ is the fourth letter of button 7

Because ㅙ is the fourth character of the button *

Press button 8 and press button 7 and button * continuously to select the button 2 or 8 which is the shift button to enter the fourth letter.

<<<<< 103-0880 0024 >>>>>

Let's type 'bone'. ㅃ ㅕ

ㅃ is the fourth letter of button 5

Because ㅕ is the fourth letter of button 3

Press button 8 and press button 5 and button 3 successively while pressing button 8 of button 2 or 8 which is the shift button to enter the fourth letter.

<<<<< 103-0882 0029 >>>>>

Let's enter 'tofu'. ㅋ ㅜ

Because ㄷ ㅜ ㅋ ㅜ is the second letter of the second, sixth, fifth, and sixth,

In order to enter the second letter, press button 4 of button 4 or 6 which is the shift button, and press button 2, 6, 5, 6 continuously.

<<<<< 103-0884 0019 >>>>>

The third mentioned advantage

As the letter button is shifted, the letter button at the time of inputting the previous letter becomes a shift button for inputting a letter at a later time. As an example of the advantage of having a copper wire of 0, minimizing the copper wire and saving almost one shot

<<<<< 103-0886 00004 >>>>>

Let 's enter' third 'and' adopt '.

<<<<< 103-0888 0039 >>>>>

Let's try typing. ㅉ ㅔ

Since this is the 5th letter of button 7,

Button 5, which is a shift button 5 or 0 which allows the user to input the fifth character, while pressing button 5,

Since ㅔ is the third letter of button 8,

I want to press button 7 from button 7 or 9 which is the shift button to enter the third letter. Since there is already a left hand on button 7, press button 7 immediately, and then press button 8 to input ㅔ .

<<<<< 103-0889 0003 >>>>>

ㅉ ㅔ

<<<<< 103-0891 0044 >>>>>

Let's enter 'Adoption'. ㅐ ㅐ ㅐ ㅐ ㅐ

This effect has occurred when you enter the name of the nick and the name of the nick.

Press button 4 of button 4 or 6 which is the shift button to enter the second letter, press button 9 to enter ㅐ

Since this is the third letter of button 2,

I want to press button 9 from the button 7 or 9 which is the shift button to input the third letter. Since there is already the right hand of button 9, press the button 9 immediately, and press the button 2 to enter

<<<<< 103-0892 0003 >>>>>

ㅐ ㅐ

<<<<< 103-0893 0017 >>>>>

The fourth mentioned advantage

By shifting the letter button to a shift button, the shift button for inputting the previous letter is a letter button of the latter character, and the advantage of having the effect of saving almost one stroke by minimizing the line with the line 0 being zero For example,

<<<<< 103-0894 0002 >>>>>

Let 's type the word' ch '.

<<<<< 103-0898 0035 >>>>>

ㅐ ㅐ

Since this is the third letter of button 7,

The button 7 is pressed while the button 9 is being pressed from the button 7 or 9 which is the shift button for inputting the third letter,

Since ㅐ is the second letter of button 9,

I am trying to press button 9 while holding button 4 from button 4 or 6 which is the shift button to enter the second letter. Since there is already a right hand of button 9, press button 9 and enter ㅐ

<<<<< 103-0904 00003>

ㅐ ㅐ

<<<<< 103-0905 0026 >>>>>

The fifth mentioned advantage

The advantages of the third and fourth are that they occur at the same time while entering only two spellings.

In other words, as the character button is shifted, the character button of the previous character is a shift button for inputting a later character, and a shift button for inputting the previous character becomes a character button of a later character at the same time For example,

<<<<, 103-0906 0003 >>>>>

Let's enter 'huh' and 'chi'.

<<<<< 103-0912 0044 >>>>>

Let's try typing 'huh'. 'ㅎ ㅠ'

Since this is the second letter of button 8,

In the button 4 or 6 which is the shift button for inputting the second character, while holding the button 6, press the button 8 to input the key,

Because? Is the fourth letter of button 6,

The user tries to press the button 8 from the button 2 or 8 which is the shift button for inputting the fourth character. However, since the button 8 has the left hand, the user immediately presses the button 8 on the spot, Since there is a right hand on button 6, press button 6 on the spot and type ㅠ

<<<<< 103-0913 0003 >>>>>

Hehe

<<<<< 103-0917 0028 >>>>>

Do you want to type 'chi'? 'び ㅣ'

Since this is the third letter of button 7,

Button 7, which is a shift button for inputting the third letter, while pressing button 9,

I want to press button 9 to enter 'ㅣ', but since there is already a right hand on button 9, press button 9 on the spot to enter ㅣ

<<<<< 103-0919 0002 >>>>>

ㅣ

<<<<< 103-0921 0026 >>>>>

As the sixth mentioned advantage

As an example when explaining the second to fifth advantages, not only when there are two spellings in succession, but also when the first letter of each button is between the two spellings, these advantages are expressed almost as they are As a matter of fact, in the situation where the second advantage occurs, the first letter of each button is interleaved between the two spellings

<<<<< 103-0923 0003 >>>>>

Let's enter 'Popo' and 'Closed'.

<<<<< 103-0944 0044 >>>>> Time Hold

Let's type in a popo. ㅃ ㅗ ㅃ ㅃ

이 Because this is the fourth letter of button 5

Button 8, which is a shift button 2 or 8 which allows the user to input a fourth character, press button 5 to input a character,

Button 6 is pressed to enter the key,

<<<<< 103-0947 0015 >>>> Time Hold

When you type the second ㅃ

Since there is already a left hand on button 8, press the button 8 immediately in that position, press button 5 in that state to enter another button,

Press button 6 and enter ㅗ.

<<<<< 103-0948 0006? 103-0967 >>>>>

Let's type in a popo. ㅃ ㅗ ㅃ ㅃ

<<<<< 103-0949 0022? 103-0972 >>>>>

Even though the first letter of button 6 is between the fourth letter of button 5 and the letter ㅃ

Even if you enter the next letter, you can press the button 8, which is the shift button that allows you to enter the fourth letter that was used to enter the first letter, with the line 0 being the same.

ㅃ ㅗ ㅃ ㅃ

<<<< 103-0951 0005 >>>>>

Do you want to type "Closed"? ㅖ ㅖ ㅙ ㅙ

<<<<< 103-0955 0037 >>>>>

Since this is the third letter of button 5,

Button 9, which is a shift button which is a button for inputting the third character, is pressed, the button 5 is pressed,

Since ㅖ is the fourth letter of button 8,

Button 8, which is a shift button which is a button for inputting the fourth character, while holding the button 8 with the right hand, press button 8,

Press button 7 to enter g,

Because ㅙ is the fourth letter of the button *

You want to press button 2 with your right hand from button 2 or 8, which is a shift button that allows you to enter the fourth letter. Since your right hand is already on button 2, press button 2 immediately on the spot and press the button * Type..

<<<< 103-0956 0004 >>>>>

ㅖ ㅖ ㅙ ㅙ

<<<< 103-0965 0021 >>>>>

Even if the first letter of button 7 is interposed between the fourth and fourth letters of button 8 and button *

When you type ㅙ, you can press button 2, which is a shift button that allows you to input the fourth letter that was used when you type ㅖ, directly on the spot with the line 0.

- End - No finishing

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 29 324

Improvement of Korean input method of Motorola 1

(<Figure 35> just)

The way to improve the Korean input method of Motorola in the small keypad is the same as the way to improve the input method of Samsung Electronics'

For details, please refer to the video description and the detailed explanation of how to improve the input method of Tianjin.

The traditional Korean keyboard of Motorola is shown in <Figure 33>.

<Figure 34>

The green letters ㄲ, ㄸ, ㅃ, ㅆ, ㅉ, are assigned to completion type, but are not hidden and are hidden.

The blue character "ㅑ ㅕ ㅛ ㅠ" can be entered by pressing button 3 or button 6 once or twice and then pressing the button #, which is a phonetic conversion button, without being marked. That is, it is not assigned to completion type.

The traditional Korean input method of Motorola is described in detail in the detailed explanation book

The Hangul phoneme consists of 40 consonants, totaling 19 consonants and 21 vowels,

<Figure 34.5> shows how to input 40 Korean phonemes by conventional Motorola input method.

In the summary at the end of Figure 34.5,

Three phonemes are needed,

There are two phonemes that require four strokes,

You can see that there are nine phonemes that require more than three.

However, in the conventional Motorola Korean keyboard, as shown in <Figure 36.65>, phonemes not assigned to / completion type / red and blue are assigned to /

While the conventional method can be input, if you use the twin input method in parallel with the conventional character mode without changing the character mode, you can input the nine phonemes that require more than three strokes in two strokes.

In other words, you can input all 40 Hangul phonemes as one or two.

It is possible to input two tones in a more comfortable posture and at a higher speed in parallel with the twin input method without changing the phoneme,

Whenever you enter the second phoneme of the consonant button, which is another disadvantage of the conventional Motorola input method, or whenever you input a character that is a stroke added to the basic vowel / A large copper wire is generated in each of the four rows, and both hands are concentrated in three rows, interference between both hands occurs, and the stability of holding the mobile phone is not lowered. ,

In the conventional motorola input method, since the first consonant of each consonant button, for example, a consonant and a consonant, e.g., ㄲ, is inputted in a multi-tap manner, i.e., the same button is pressed several times, It is possible to prevent consonant collision, which causes inconvenience to move the cursor to the direction key when entering consonants continuously.

It introduces the auto cursor time setting method introduced in the detailed explanation book, or consonant collision phenomenon does not occur at all in the twin input method exclusive mode.

.

As shown in <Figure 35>, special characters can also be assigned, and special characters can also be entered in the Hangul input mode with two characters, without changing the character mode in the special character mode.

Since the conventional input method can be input even in the conventional input method and the twin input method can be used without changing the character mode, there is no inconvenience to the person who likes the conventional method. Therefore, the twin input method There is no risk involved.

In addition, in the conventional input method mode, it is possible to satisfy even those who want to input Korean characters and special characters at a time in parallel with the twin input method without changing the character mode.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 30 343 times

Improvement of Korean input method of Motorola 2

In fact, the state of the keyboard that can apply the twin input method does not matter in any state

As shown in <Figure 33>, even if you are in the same state as before, you can use the call key that has no response even when you press / character input mode as a toggle key

As shown in <Figure 36.66>

In the conventional keyboard, after the red / blue / phonetic / phonetic / phonetic keyboard of the display screen is displayed, in the Hangeul input mode, the actual keyboard is pressed without changing the character mode, You can input the blue phonemes in perfect form. Of course, you can press the call key again to erase the virtual keyboard of the display screen. If you remember the red and blue phoneme assignment status even though you are gone, you can input red and blue phonemes.

In addition

As shown in Figure 36.65,

The phonemes of / red and blue which are not assigned to the conventional keyboard / complete type can be additionally written in the completed form on the actual keyboard /

As shown in Figure 36.6,

You can also assign additional punctuation marks (such as?., () '"/ ~!).

(Here, in the past, the English alphabet was written under the Hangul phoneme, but in order to secure space, the English alphabet was written under the number.)

In addition

As shown in Figure 36.5,

You can also apply additional emoticons,

As shown in Figure 35,

You can also apply a few additional emojis to apply.

In addition

As shown in <Figure 36>, you can assign one more emoticon to apply.

In the keyboard in this state, in the Hangeul input mode, for example, when the button 6 is selected,

ㅗ ㅜ ㅛ ㅠ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ ㅛ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,

A lips rice cherry cooking knife, and a card mask as a second group of buttons 6,

Conventional Hangul phonemes can be input in Hangul input mode in the conventional way, but all of them are input in the special Hangul mode without changing the character mode in the conventional Hangul input mode.

ㅗ ㅜ ㅛ ㅠ Left bracket Right bracket lip Bob cherry Cooking knife, card mask One look

You can find out how to enter it by watching the English input method improvement video or Samsung Anycall Inner input method improvement video or the detailed explanation book.

(Figure 16.2)

By combining various virtual keyboard states mentioned above and various virtual keyboard states that are part of the following display screen, even special characters on the display screen can be input in 2 ~ 3 characters by pressing the actual keyboard in normal character mode I have.

The display screen

As shown in <Figure 36.66>, red and blue phonemes which are not assigned to the completion type in the conventional keyboard can be additionally applied to the completion type,

As shown in <Fig. 16.2>, it is possible to apply additional phonemes that require more than three strokes,

As shown in <Figure 16.1>, it can be applied by adding punctuation marks,

You can also add emoticons as shown in <Figure 16>.

Or display screen

The first page looks like <Figure 36.66>

The second page looks like Figure 16.2,

The third page looks like Figure 16.1,

The fourth page looks like Figure 16,

The following pages can also be followed by special characters.

For example, as shown in <Figure 16.1>

One of the characters in the display screen, the sun bouquet is now designated as the third group of button 6, so press the button on the real keyboard to enter it in the Hangul input mode and the special character mode without changing the character mode.

(Figure 36)

Single Quote Sun Bouquet

For more information on how to enter such information, how to make the special character table on the display screen look like a call key or not, or to change the special character page page of the display screen with the volume control button, etc., You can find out by seeing the detailed explanation book.

In addition, conventionally-assigned characters can be input using the conventional input method in the same situation as before,

The added characters can be limited to twin input method

For more details and various applications, please refer to the videos and detailed explanations.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 31 101-179

LG ELECTRONICS Motorola Hanlode Code Unique Application to Hangul Input Method

<<<<<< 101-179 0011 >>>>>

In this video, we will explain how to apply the twin input method to the ez Hangul input method of LG Electronics Cyon in a slightly different way than the method we have already introduced.

<<<<< 101-0180 0144 >>>>>

To mention what has been frequently mentioned as a disadvantage of Cion's EZ input method of conventional LG Electronics,

Since the Korean phonetic conversion button called the stroke addition button or the double consonant button exists in the fourth line

If you enter 13 consonants, except for the basic consonants, which are printed here, among the 19 consonants, and ㅑㅕㅛ ㅌ ㅌ ㄲ ㄲ ㄲ, and when you enter ㅑㅕㅛ ㅑㅕㅛ ㅒ ㅒ ㅒ in the vowel, There is a big disadvantage that the large consecutive line to the fourth line is necessarily required since the double consonant button must be operated once or twice inevitably,

In the case of inputting using both hands, there are cases where both hands are biased in one row like this, so that there is interference between the thumbs of both hands, the stability of holding the mobile phone is also decreased,

Since there is only one button for the stroke addition button and only one button for the twin consonant button, the shift button of the same function as the twin input method does not exist in both the first and third columns, so that the curvature becomes larger and the load is evenly distributed to both hands There was also a disadvantage that it was not conspicuous.

Motorola also uses the # button on the 4th row as a phonetic conversion function, so the disadvantages of the LG Electronics method are almost the same, so the contents of this video can be applied in the same way.

<<<<< 102-0185 0010 >>>>.

The function of the buttons * and # in Hangul code Hangul input method can be inputted much more convenient and faster than the conventional one even if it is applied only as shown in this video.

Hangul code Hangul input method in the fourth row

I use the button * as the phonetic end function and use the button # as the shift button to input the third letter. However, since the drawbacks are almost similar to those of the LG electronic method, the twin input method It is much easier and faster to input than before.

<<<<< 101-0189 0055 >>>>>>

These disadvantages of the conventional &lt; RTI ID = 0.0 &gt;

So far as twin input methods are described

It can be solved completely by using the shift button to input 2, 3, 4, 5, 6th letter of the button to which the letter is assigned, but it is possible to solve all the 40 Korean phonemes and special characters by one or two without changing the character mode And other various conveniences.

But for those who still do not have access to the convenience, we introduce a transitional phase. In other words, although it is not actively recommended, the disadvantage of the conventional input method of the LG Electronics is completely solved by the twin input method, so that it comes into contact with the skin, so that I can accept the form that I strongly recommend.

<<<<<< 101-0194 0103 >>>>

Let's see how to apply the twin input method.

The contents are simple.

It is possible to use the conventional functions of the double consonant button and the stroke addition button in the conventional line 4 as they are, that is, to input them as they are in the conventional manner, and to change the character mode to the new twins The input method is to input.

I have tried to designate button 1 and button 3 as shift buttons that function as a double consonant,

I tried to assign Button 4 and Button 6 as shift buttons to add strokes.

In conventional LG electronic keyboards, Button 7 is labeled only, while Button 3 is labeled only. However, for clarity, we have also labeled the hidden phonemes, ㅊ ㅆㅉ ㅆㅉ and ㅑ ㅕ.

(((((

<Figure 30>: Shift button assignment table

(Do not worry about the numbers in parentheses at this stage)

1 (pair consonants)

    2 (4) 3 (double consonant)

ㅓㅓ ㅑㅕ

4 (add stroke) 5 (5) 6 (add stroke)

7 (3)

  ㅊ ㅊ 8 (4) 9 (3)

* (6)

Add stroke 0 (5) # (6)

Pair consonant

)))))

<<<<< 101-198 0035 >>>>>>

In the past, to enter `

7, *, # You have typed this.

Press button 7 to display the display on the display screen.

You can create strokes by adding a stroke by clicking on the button Add strokes button * on line 4,

Pressing the # button, which is a pair of consonant buttons on line 4, makes a pair of consonants.

In other words, there are two large lines in four lines.

<<<<<< 101-0218 0139 >>>>>

Now, I try to input by the twin input method. In the conventional LG method, by pressing the shift button while depressing the button assigned to the basic phoneme, such as pressing the stroke addition button or the double consonant button after the basic phoneme, I will operate the button afterwards.

Of course, you can also manipulate it as before.

To enter `ㅉ` by applying the twin input method

Since this is the second pair of consonants of button 7,

While pressing button 7, it is more convenient to press button 3 from the button 1 or 3, which is a double-consonant shift button, with the right hand.

7 + 3 + 3

There are no large copper lines in 4 rows as in the past, and other copper lines are less easily.

(How to operate it depends on the rules, so you do not have to guess why.

In the past, even when using the button *, which is a stroke addition button, and the button #, which is a twin consonant button, the rule is changed by inputting 7, #, # instead of 7, *, It means that it is possible.

<<<<< 101-0220 0109 >>>>>

In addition

In order to input the input signal in the conventional input method,

7, *, *.

Press button 7 to display the display on the display screen.

You can create strokes by adding a stroke by clicking on the button Add strokes button * on line 4,

I also added a stroke by clicking the button * which is a stroke addition button.

There is also a large line in 4 rows.

By applying the twin input method

To enter a quotation

Since this is the second phoneme of button 7,

While pressing button 7, it is more convenient to press button 6 with the right hand among button 4 or 6 which is a shift button of the stroke addition function, so press button 6 twice to enter the number.

7 + 6 + 6

There are no large copper lines in 4 rows as in the past, and other copper lines are less easily.

<<<<< 101-0221 0057 >>>>>

In addition

In the past, to enter `

3, 3, * This is the input.

Double-click button 3 to display ㅓ on the display screen.

Press the button * to add a stroke.

There is also a large line in 4 rows.

To enter twos by applying the twin input method

Because ㅕ is the second phoneme of Button 3,

While pressing button 3, it is more convenient to press button 4 with the left hand among button 4 or 6, which is a stroke addition button. Press button 4 twice to input ㅕ.

3 + 4 + 4

There are no large copper lines in 4 rows as in the past, and other copper lines are less easily.

<<<<<< 101-0228 0050 >>>>>>

(((((((

<Figure 31.5>: Shift button assignment table

(Do not worry about the numbers in parentheses at this stage)

1 (first pair consonant) 2 (second pair consonant) 3 (first pair consonant)

ㅓㅓ ㅑㅕ

4 (first stroke added) 5 (3) 6 (first stroke added)

7 (second stroke added)

ㅊ ㅊ 8 (second pair consonant) 9 (second stroke added)

* (4)

Add stroke 0 (3) # (4)

Pair consonant

)))))))

In the form of another twin input method

like this

The shift button of the double consonant function is divided into a first pair consonant shift button and a second pair consonant shift button,

The shift button of the stroke addition function can be divided into the first stroke addition shift button and the second stroke addition shift button.

so

Buttons 1 and 3 are designated as shift buttons for inputting the first pair of consonants,

Buttons 2 and 8 are designated as shift buttons for inputting the second pair of consonants,

Buttons 4 and 6 are designated as shift buttons for inputting the first stroke additional sound,

I tried to assign buttons 7 and 9 as a shift button to input the second stroke added note.

<<<<< 101-0241 0037 >>>>>

now

 To type `ㅉ`

Since this is the second pair of consonants of button 7,

While holding Button 7 depressed, press button 8 of button 2 or 8, which is the second pair of consonantation shift buttons, to enter..

7 + 8

Now, as in the past, there are no large circles in the 4th row, and fewer other circles are available and the number of balls is reduced.

By applying the twin input method

To enter a quotation

Since this is the second phoneme of button 7,

While pressing button 7, it is more convenient to press button 9 with the right hand among button 7 or 9 which is the shift button of the second stroke addition function.

7 + 9

Now, as in the past, there are no large circles in the 4th row, and fewer other circles are available and the number of balls is reduced.

To enter twos by applying the twin input method

Because ㅕ is the second phoneme of Button 3,

While pressing button 3, it is more convenient to press button 7 with the left hand among button 7 or 9 which is the shift button of the second stroke addition function, so press button 7 to input ㅕ.

3 + 7

There are no big circles in the 4th row like the previous one, and the other circles are few and comfortable and the number of balls is reduced.

<<<<< 101-0242 0004 >>>>>

Please refer to the detailed explanation for details.

For more details and applications, please refer to the detailed instructions.

To enter `ㅉ` by applying the twin input method

Since this is the second pair of consonants of button 7,

While holding Button 7 depressed, press button 8 of button 2 or 8, which is the second pair of consonantation shift buttons, to enter..

7 + 8

Now, as in the past, there are no large circles in the 4th row, and fewer other circles are available and the number of balls is reduced.

By applying the twin input method

To enter a quotation

Since this is the second phoneme of button 7,

While pressing button 7, it is more convenient to press button 9 with the right hand among button 7 or 9 which is the shift button of the second stroke addition function.

7 + 9

Now, as in the past, there are no large circles in the 4th row, and fewer other circles are available and the number of balls is reduced.

To enter twos by applying the twin input method

Because ㅕ is the second phoneme of Button 3,

While pressing button 3, it is more convenient to press button 7 with the left hand among button 7 or 9 which is the shift button of the second stroke addition function, so press button 7 to input ㅕ.

3 + 7

Now, as in the past, there are no large circles in the 4th row, and fewer other circles are available and the number of balls is reduced.

For more details and applications, please refer to the detailed instructions.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 32

Solution of dilemma of Hangul input method and unification method of Hangul input method

<<<<< 102-0857 0015? 103-0064 >>>>>

For foreign language characters other than Hangul

Phoneme assignments on small keypads are standardized.

For example, the English alphabet is standardized.

Only character input method is different by multi tap method and T9 method.

<<<<<< 102-0858 0015 >>>>>

In the case of Hangul

Phoneme assignments are different depending on the character input method.

Because Hangul is easy to make different phonemes by modifying the basic phonemes, the phoneme assignment depends on how the basic phoneme is set.

<<<<< 102-0859 0015 >>>>>

If you want to change your cell phone because it is not a standard enumeration that goes out to phonemic leveling, you should consider whether the character input method is your preferred type.

So I try to unify the keyboard, but even that is not negotiable.

<<<<< 102-0860 0017 >>>>> Time Hold

In the case of Samsung's input method

As shown in <Figure 20>

The basic phoneme (?) Of the vowel is the heaven and earth (ㅣ. ㅡ)

All consonants are assigned to the completed consonants even by the hidden phonemes, and are inputted by the multi-tap method.

<<<<< 102-0867 0015 >>>>> Time Hold

For Motorola

The basic phoneme of a vowel is ㅓ ㅓ ㅗ ㅡ ㅣ

The basic phoneme of the consonant is like this. Enter all the consonants by the multi-tap method and stroke addition to the hidden phonemes.

<<<<< 102-0870 0018 >>>>> Time Hold

In case of LG Electronics' EZ input method

The basic phoneme of a vowel is ㅓ ㅓ ㅗ ㅡ ㅣ

The basic phoneme of the consonant is ㄱ ㄴ ㅁ ㅇ ㅇ ㅇ. Enter the hidden consonant vowel with additional consonants and strokes.

<<<<< 102-0875 0019 >>>>> Time Hold

In case of Pantech's Sky and Curitel

The basic phoneme of a vowel is ㅑ ㅑ ㅗ ㅗ ㅗ ㅛ ㅜ ㅠ ㅡ ㅣ

Here is the basic phoneme of the consonant. All the consonants are assigned to the completion type by the hidden phoneme and input by the multi-tap method.

<<<<< 102-0877 0010 >>>>> Time Hold

In addition, there are various other methods and will continue to be born in the future.

If you are a Korean person, you can create a new way of entering characters.

<<<<< 102-0881 0039 >>>>>

However, there is a dilemma in Hangul input method.

There is a drawback in that it is easy to input a stroke by assigning a stroke required for handwriting to a keyboard and pressing a button assigned a required stroke according to the stroke order. This way, you do not have to memorize the keyboard, so I prefer the person who enters the character once, and the thumb is uncomfortable.

That's the way Samsung is doing it.

The Chunji method is the method that is preferred by more than 30 people who input fewer characters.

<<<<< 102-0888 0030 >>>>> Time Hold

If you enter the consonant with ㅇ ㅡ Ⅰ / \ (circles, diagonal lines, diagonal lines, left diagonal line, right diagonal line) and optional phonetic ending button or double consonant button, The method is very easy, but there are a lot of bats.

If you enter consonants like this and enter the vowel in the way of the sky, you can say that it is a true filament phone.

<<<<< 102-0895 0043 >>>>>

In addition

When a phoneme assigned to a completed type including a hidden phoneme is inputted in a multi-tap manner,

If the phoneme assignments are not in the standard enumeration order of the alphabetic order, then the phoneme assignments are difficult to memorize first, and if the phoneme assignments are memorized, the input method is simple. However, When inputting, there is a fatal disadvantage that you have to manually move the cursor by pressing the right button.

This is the case when you enter consonants in Samsung's Chungjin method and Pantech's Sky or Curitel method.

<<<<< 102-0933 0035 >>>>>

If a hidden phoneme among the phonemes assigned to the completion type including the hidden phoneme is input using a phonetic conversion button such as a double consonant button or a stroke addition button,

The phoneme assignment is not in the standard enumeration order of the alphabetic order, but the phonemes are assigned so that it is difficult to memorize the phoneme assignment state at first. Even if the phonemic assignment is memorized, the phoneme conversion button It takes a long time to get used to the big circulation to the line, but there is less number of balls.

<<<<< 102-0935 0019 >>>>>

I prefer the thumbs because they have fewer numbers when entering the pair consonants and vowels (especially the double vowels).

For example, the consonant and vowel input method of the LG EZ method is such.

The Motorola way is that way too.

Teenagers, 20s with a lot of character input is the preferred method.

<<<<< 102-0938 0010 >>>>>

However, the twin input method has been developed and we can see that there are many disadvantages. I will tell you later.

<<<<< 102-0939 0012 >>>>>

In other words, each character input method has unique advantages, but it also has unique disadvantages. In other words, there is no merit only method, and there is no disadvantage.

<<<<< 102-0948 0036 >>>>>

From 2001 to 2007, ETRI, Korea Electronics and Telecommunications Research Institute,

TTA, the telecommunication technical committee, has consulted with the cell phone manufacturers several times in order to unify the keyboard layouts. However, the manufacturers have always taken their own way as standard. However, it is also because there are a lot of people who prefer each method rather than selfishness.

<<<<< 102-0961 0037 >>>>>

However, as mentioned above, there are advantages and disadvantages for each character input, and each method is preferred by the user. At the time when the twin input method is developed, a part of the display screen is allocated as described above, If the unattached phonemes are assigned to the completed type, and the twin input method is performed in parallel without changing the conventional mode and the character mode, 40 Chinese phonemes can be input in one or two digits, regardless of the input method of the conventional input method Therefore,

<<<<< 102-0970 0014 >>>>>

Consumers who prefer the conventional input method can also be satisfied, and even the thumbs who crave faster input can be satisfied.

It becomes possible to exchange information quickly in the era when the internet becomes a mobile phone.

<<<<< 102-0972 0025 >>>>>

So you can say that you do not have to try to unify, but if you still need unification

Now, even if it is not perfect unification, it is easy to unify the degree of assigning the standard of assignment to allocate 40 Hangul phonemes as a completed type by allocating a part of the display screen as shown in <Figure 16.3>.

<<<<< 102-0973 0007 >>>>>

So you can add one Hangul input mode called standard input mode mode.

<<<<< 102-0977 0016 >>>>>

However, it is important to think that complex phonemes in Hangul are breaking through the stereotypes of typing basic phonemes only through combination of combinations and inputting as many phonemes as possible.

<<<<< 102-0979 0013 >>>>>

The English alphabet, in fact,

ㅡ Ⅰ / \ ⊂ ⊃ J O U U You can complete all alphabets with a combination of degrees,

All alphabets are assigned to completion type only.

<<<<< 102-0994 0016 >>>>>

Actually,

Consisting of the consonants in the way of heaven and earth, all of the consonants were already assigned to the completion type. The same is true of Pantech Sky and Curitel.

<<<<< 103-00005 0027 >>>>>

I used the consonant drawing add button or the double consonant button of the LG EZ method, and the blue consonant except blue letter was input only through the corresponding button, so it was all the same as the one assigned to the completion type.

This is also the case with Motorola.

<<<<< 103-0006 0006 >>>>>

Now all you have to do is to assign all the vowels to the completion type and enter them in the twin input method.

<<<<< 103-0008 0012 >>>>

anyway,

It is possible to use the conventional method,

All the Korean phonemes should be assigned to completion type so that they can enter quickly and be satisfied with the expert.

<<<<< 103-0009 0035 >>>>>

Therefore,

- Samsung is the best way of heaven,

- The best way to use the EZ EZ

There is no meaning,

from now on

- It's the best way to combine Samsung's CheonJin with twin typing,

- The combination of the LG EZ system and the twin input system is the best,

- The best way is to combine Pantech Sky and Curitel with twin input,

- The combination of motorola and twin input is the best way to get the word out.

<<<<< 103-0010 0008 >>>>

Anyway, when you send a letter on a small keypad, the way you apply twins is unconditional.

(Until now

If you look at the various mobile community bulletin boards and portal site comments,

`You can quickly learn from Samsung, but if you use a lot of strokes, and if you input consecutive phonemes assigned to the same button, you will have a lot of problems to manually move the cursor using the right button. And'Elge EZ method is difficult to learn because there are many phonemes hidden (= derived), but once you learn, you can enter easily and quickly because you do not have the same number of buttons and you do not have the same button problem.

In fact, in the case of the LG EZ system, it takes the first place in various letter input competitions, and it is said that the superiority is recognized in the speed.

(However, if you look at it, there are 15 phonemes that require more than 3 strokes to input the EZ-EZ method, and there is a problem that there is a lot of movement for pushing button * (stroke addition function) and button # (double consonant function) ,

The twin input method solves all the problems of the conventional input method, whether it is a global input method or an electronic ez method, so that all the phonemes can be input in one or two digits in a twin input manner without changing the character mode in the conventional input method mode , And copper lines can be made very small within 1 ~ 3 lines.)

<<<<< 103-0026 0031 >>>>

Detailed explanations Figure 36.9 summarizes the table in this way.

40 Korean phonemes

Samsung Cheonjiyang way

9 phonemes can be input with one tar

There are 12 phonemes that can be input with 2 tones.

13 out of 3

4 other 4

There are two 5s and an average of 2.45s is needed,

The average Pantech Sky or Curitel method is 1.95.

<<<<< 103-0030 0004 >>>>>

The average EZ method is 2.18.

<<<<< 103-0031 0004 >>>>>

Motorola's average is 1.98.

<<<<< 103-0042 0028 >>>>>

I use all 12 buttons of my mobile phone except Samsung Chungjin.

Even if you list all 40 phonemes on 12 buttons, the average is 2.2, which is not much different from the conventional ones.

As you can see from the above, conventional methods could reduce the number of phonemes on the buttons, but they did not contribute much in reducing the average number of bats.

The number of vowels represented by the Chunji method, the LG method, and the Pantech method was merely an option rather than a special method.

<<<<< 103-0050 0005? 103-0063 >>>>>

Conventionally, the more phonemes assigned to completion type, the smaller the average number of bats

<<<<< 103-0057 0033 >>>>>>

Also, after listing 40

When the twin input method is applied, the average number of strokes is only 1.7, and the fatal disadvantages of the conventional input methods do not arise. Thus, the six advantages of the inputting of the word " If there are successive letters of the same order of each button, which is the effect presented in the video, if the advantages such as the various effects such as the fact that the shift button which was previously pressed can be used as it is, You can enter the QWERTY keyboard at an average speed of 1.2 to 1.3 rpm.

<<<<<< 9999 >>>>>

Wrap-up

For more details and applications that have not been mentioned up to now, please refer to the detailed instructions in this cafe.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 33: Proof of the fastest twin input method on your phone

<<<<< 103-0975 0041 >>>>>

Let's prove that the twin input method is the fastest when entering characters in mobile phones with compact pads.

A cell phone with a small base pad has 12 buttons, button *, #, 0 ~ 9.

Since there are twelve buttons, only twelve characters assigned to the button in the first order can be entered by pressing the button once.

It is not efficient to input characters such as alphabet and hangeul, not special characters. Therefore, we will exclude the method of long press.

<<<<< 103-0977 0023 >>>>>

Now you have to think about typing the second or more letters,

Pressing the same button several times until the desired letter is displayed by the multi-tap method

If there are many strokes and the characters assigned to the same button are input in succession, there will be a fatal problem to move the cursor manually.

<<<<< 103-0981 0021 >>>>>

So if you enter a combination of 2 buttons, you can enter 2,

It is impossible to memorize and input the combination of 144 combinations and 144 letters by 12 combinations of 12 previously pressed buttons and 12 later pressed buttons without any combination rule,

<<<<< 103-0986 0023 >>>>>

It is more efficient to enter a specific combination rule that is easy to remember and convenient,

Among the methods with such a combination rule

When input by the twin input method,

These videos

((((((

1 "Fast alphabet A to Z input from conventional keyboard"

2 "New advantages when entering words with English word input 6 types 1"

3 "new words when input words like English words 6 types 2"

4 "Quickly enter 40 English words"

or

5 "How to Apply to Samsung Anycall Light Source Input Method 1"

6 "Method to apply to Samsung Anycall Tianjin input method 2"

7 "How to Apply to Samsung Anycall Wide Input Method 3"

))))))

, The twin input method has the fastest character input speed in mobile phones with small size pads.

<<<<< 103-0991 0043 >>>>>

In addition,

The button with the letters assigned

It is possible to shift the buttons assigned to a certain function such as the character mode change function, the case change function, and the double tone sound addition function to twin shift buttons, so that the functions of the shift button can be variously assigned, Since it has various advantages such that it can be easily input even if it is assigned a character, special characters such as punctuation marks and emoticons can be entered easily in normal character mode without changing character mode in special character mode.

So the special character input speed is also the fastest.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

Video # 34

Implement CLR, INS, DEL, ENTER functions in letter format

<<<<< 102-0623 0013 >>>>>

CLR, INS, DEL, ENTER function

As shown in <Figure 05>, the English keyboard can also be assigned to buttons 1, 2, 3,

<<<<< 102-0629 0030 >>>>>>

In the Korean language keyboard like <Figure 06>

I have assigned CLR, INS, and DEL functions to the 4th letter of buttons 1, 2, and 3,

I have assigned the Enter () function to the sixth letter of button 5

This is the computer keyboard button, but the phone keypad has been added to eliminate the inconvenience.

It seems to be a necessary function in the age of the Internet with a cell phone.

<<<<< 102-0630 0013 >>>>>

The Enter function

In the character entry mode, you will need it when you want to enter a sentence and then wrap it,

You can also use it as a confirmation button function when it is not in the character input mode.

<<<<< 102-0634 0017 >>>>>

In a conventional mobile phone, in the character input mode, the CLR button functions as a backspace of the computer keyboard,

I did not have an insert button and a delete button on the computer keyboard, so I added the INS and DEL functions.

<<<<< 102-0641 0035 >>>>>

And, even if the conventional mobile phone had a CLR button, why add the CLR function?

If you input a wrong phoneme while typing Hangul,

In the past, when the CLR button is pressed,

Now, if you want to erase only the phonemes that you have not mistakenly entered

Erase one phoneme

Including stroke add-on or double consonant /

I would like to use it as a function.

<<<<< 102-0647 0053 >>>>>

For example,

When you operate the Global button to input ㅙ

. ㅡ ㅣ. We have to operate in order

. When you enter ㅡ ㅣ ㅣ

  The function does not erase the whole Korean characters, but erroneously erases only the phonemes that have not been entered correctly,

Since the CLR function is the fourth letter of Button 1

After pressing the assigned button 1 while holding down the shift button to enter the fourth letter and erasing only the last one that was entered incorrectly. You can enter more in order.

<<<<< 102-0652 0029 >>>>

In the past, in order to press the CLR button, you have to press the CLR button, which is located directly above the 12 keyboards, so the line is cut.

Now, even if you use the CLR function with two shifts, you can be more convenient than the conventional one if you master the twin input method because there are much fewer lines.

<<<<<< 102-0656 0031 >>>>

If you want to continuously perform functions such as CLR, INS, DEL, and ENTER,

E.g

If you want to continuously demonstrate the DEL function

DEL is assigned to the fourth letter of button 3

Press the button 2 from among the buttons 2 or 8 which is the shift button to enter the fourth letter, and press and hold this button 3 times continuously in the state.

<<<<<< 102-0659 0013 >>>>

You can also add functions such as the HOME button, END button, PAGE UP button, PAGE DOWN button, and ESC button on the computer keyboard in the same way.

<<<<<< 0660 >>>>>

Wrap-up

For more details and applications that have not been mentioned up to now, please refer to the detailed instructions in this cafe.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

Video # 35

Quick space input

<<<<< 102-0662 0026 >>>>>

On the computer keyboard, the space button is the most commonly used button for entering sentences, so the button size is the largest.

And when you input characters in multi-tap on a small keypad, you need to move the cursor to the space function when you input characters assigned to the same button continuously.

<<<<<< 102-0664 0031 >>>>>

So, in fact, you have to be able to enter spaces faster and more conveniently than ordinary alphabets or Hangul phonemes.

To tell you the conclusion,

The batting number is 2, but the copper line is 0, so the conventional method is 1, but it is much easier and quicker than pressing the right button or the dedicated space button.

<<<<< 102-0667 0016 >>>>>

There are two ways to enter spaces in conventional mobile phones.

First, as in the case of Hangul, there is a way to use the right button as a space button.

<<<<< 102-0670 0025 >>>>>

Secondly, there is a way to use the space button button as the button *, or 0, or the button # like here,

Every time you type a space,

Large vertical lines in four rows are required,

Each time you press the space button on both hands, you will also need a large horizontal line.

<<<<< 102-0677 0016 >>>>>>

The space button on the keyboard of the computer is always easy to catch on both thumbs without moving hands, but in case of mobile phone, it is troublesome to move the thumb consciously with space dedicated button.

<<<<< 102-0681 0025 >>>>>

On a computer keyboard, the thumb is used only when the space button is pressed,

Mobile phones with QWERTY keyboards push all of these buttons with their thumbs, so if you want to enter a space, you have to move your thumb with the space-only button here anyway, which is cumbersome.

<<<<< 102-0684 0020 >>>>>

In any case, conventional cell phones were not the most frequent letters in space.

So, I will introduce 4 ways to easily handle the space in such small pad.

The third and fourth methods are recommended.

<<<<< 102-0687 0023 >>>>>

First,

As in Figure 22, CLR, INS, DEL, and Enter functions are assigned as if they were letters.

There is a way to set the space for a specific sequence number of a button.

The more space you assign the letters to several buttons, the more convenient it will be.

Detailed explanation can be found in the detailed explanation.

<<<<< 102-0690 0035 >>>>>

The second,

Just like the shift button of the stroke add button or the twin consonant button when the twin input method is uniquely applied to the Hangul input method of LG Electronics,

By pressing the space button function as a shift button and pressing any button while holding down the space function button, space is input.

(The more space buttons you have, the more space you will have to enter.)

Detailed explanation can be found in the detailed explanation.

<<<<< 102-0696 0039 >>>>>

(<Mobile phone>)

Third,

When there is a state where two or more buttons are pressed at the same time, a space is inputted. Whichever position your current two-handed thumb is, you just close your eyes and press anything more than two. It can be applied to almost all conventional character input methods.

However, in the character input method using twin input method, it is not possible to use this method because the twin input method is a method of pressing the shift button and pressing the button assigned the desired letter.

<<<<< 102-0701 0055 >>>>>

(<Mobile phone>)

So there is a way to propose the fourth

When there is a state where any button or three or more buttons are pressed at the same time, a space is inputted. Whatever your current two-handed thumb is, just close your eyes and press anything more than three.

In reality, you can imagine that the two thumbs are at the current thumb position, two for each hand, and a total of four for about 0.2 seconds.

If so, more than three are pressed anyway.

You can see that it is easy to do by yourself, as it is pressed so that the button and the button are close to the center of the pressing part of the thumb.

In this way, types with a border between buttons and buttons are also pressed well.

<<<<< 102-0704 0027 >>>>>

The third and fourth methods

Where is your current thumb

Just press it on the spot,

Since you only need to press this button to move to the next button, you will have a speed increase of about one (1) rider because the line to enter only the space is 0 (ZERO).

<<<<< 102-0709 0036 >>>>>

You need to press more than two buttons, but it is much faster because you have much less copper than you press the conventional right button, and it's quicker and easier because you have fewer copper lines than you press a 4-line space-only button. So it is best to use 3 and 4.

Of course, it can be done by pressing the right button of the conventional way or by pressing the space dedicated button of 4 lines.

You can also combine steps 1, 2, 3 and 4 together.

<<<<<< 9999 >>>>>

Wrap-up

For more details and applications that have not been mentioned up to now, please refer to the detailed instructions in this cafe.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 36 # 101-0351

T9 input method improvement 1

<<<<< 101-0351 0043 >>>>>

(<Figure 03>)

In fact, even before the twin input method was developed, the T9 method was not necessary for the input of Hangul. However, now that the twin input method has been developed, there is no need for the T9 method in any character input including English.

For example, twin typing allows you to enter English into twin typing more quickly than Hangul, which has a huge increase in typing speed.

However, there are some users who prefer the T9 method, so the twin input method solves the fatal disadvantages of the conventional T9 method to provide convenience.

<<<<< 101-0358 0039 >>>>>

The most commonly used character input method in the world is a multi-tap method in which the same button is pressed several times until the desired letter is displayed.

The next most popular method is the T9 method

When inputting Korean alphabet in Korean mode and English input mode, input only multi tap mode

Except for a few countries including Korea, there are two types of built-in character input method, multi-tap method and T9 method.

<<<<< 101-0365 0120 >>>>>>

What is the T9 system?

If you enter spelling in a word that has not been spelled and / or is in a candidate character state with a single push of a button, multiple words are assigned to a single button. / / If the device / The user / is the way / letter input method of selecting the desired word.

That's why it's called single-tap.

T9 mode in Samsung Electronics, iTAP mode in Motorola, and PREDICTIVE TEXT INPUT mode in Nokia.

For example, if you press the `4663` button

Button 4 'is assigned `GHI`,

Button 6` is assigned `MNO`,

Button 3 `is assigned` DEF`

If the device searches for a combination of these in the dictionary database and the device presents `GONE`,` HOME`, `HOOD`,` HOOF`, `HONE`, and` GOOF` in order of frequency of use, This is the format you choose.

<<<<< 101-0374 0152 >>>>>

It seems to be very convenient to look at, but there are following disadvantages.

In other words,

Words that are not in the DB can not be input in T9 mode. You can enter the desired word by changing to multi-tap mode, register it in DB, return to T9 mode, and input other words in T9 mode.

so

There is a disadvantage that you have to register the vocabulary dictionary DB beforehand in the system, but you still have to register the new vocabulary and abbreviated words that will be generated continuously. Especially, it is impossible to register all the vocabulary required in the information communication environment such as person's name and internet address in advance in DB.

So, if you do not actually register in the dictionary, you must use the multi-tap method, so there is a limit to the rule of single-tab method, one key per character.

In addition, Korean and Japanese are not fixed in fixed part, and because they change in various forms, they can not accommodate all of them, so they can not adapt to such language.

(It is also likely that there are obstacles in using the T9 method because you attach ~ ed to the past in English and attach the present progressive ~ ing and attach plural form ~ s.)

Even if there is no such problem, Hangul can input a word quickly even in a conventional way, not a twin input method, so there was no need for a T9 method in which a cursor was moved to a desired word among candidate words.

<<<<< 101-0389 0057 >>>>>

Anyway, even if the T9 system is embedded in a mobile phone with a small keypad, it is inconvenient to input characters. So far,

(<Qwerty Keyboard Photo>)

I am buying a mobile phone with such a QWERTY keyboard.

Now you can type in twin input mode too fast on a small padding pad, so this QWERTY keyboard phone is not needed like in Korea.

The T9 method is very troublesome because it requires a large number of strokes when moving a cursor to the desired word several times when many candidate words are presented.

And, Japanese is assigned 5 characters per button. However, the more the number of characters assigned to each button is, the more the candidate words to be presented are increased sharply.

<<<<< 101-0390 0029 >>>>>

(<Figure 03>)

As for the method of applying the twin input method in the T9 mode,

In the T9 mode, you can use the conventional T9 method, but you can use the twin input method without changing the character mode

In T9 mode, all the phonemes can be input definitively with 2 taps.

The definite input method is to input the phonemes of all sequences, including the first letter, in a twin input format.

<<<<<< 101-0394 0059 >>>>

Assigned to each button

Use the button 1 or the button 3 for a while with the shift button for inputting the first character,

The button 4 or the button 6 is temporarily used as a shift button for inputting the second letter,

Button 7 or button 9 is temporarily used as a shift button for inputting the third letter,

It is a twin input method such as using the button 2 or the button 8 for a while with the shift button to input the fourth letter.

In other words, the twin input method differs from the twin input method in that the first letter assigned to each button is also input by the twin input method, as compared with the case where the multi-tap method and the twin input method are concurrently performed.

finally,

If it is entered as a single line, it is input as a candidate character and is regarded as inputting by the conventional T9 method,

If you use the shift button as the twin input method, it is input as the fixed letter.

Thus, there are three advantages to improving the disadvantages of the conventional T9 scheme

<<<<< 101-0397 or 102-0397 102-0003 0022 >>>>

First, you can input definitively all the phonemes in T9 mode as one or two, without changing the word in DB, without changing to multi-tap mode, and you can enjoy various advantages of twin input method as it is.

<<<<< 101-0410 0031 >>>>>

(MONO FOLLOW ING STOP TAXI)

For example, when typing in the twin input method in the multi-tap mode, the first letter of a button called M, WGTPTA is entered as a singleton, but now the twin input method in the T9 mode The speed difference with the last is not much.

<<<<< 101-0411 0016 >>>>>

(MONO FOLLOW ING STOP TAXI)

(Quick typing demonstration)

<<<<<< 101-0420 0045 >>>>>

In the first letter, M, W G T P T A, I also used the shift button to quickly enter the words here.

However, it is much faster than the conventional multi-tap method or conventional Hangul input speed.

Because all the phonemes can be entered as one or two, the load is evenly distributed to both hands, the shift button of the same function is only in one to three lines, there are no large copper lines in four lines, Because it is on both sides, the copper line becomes smaller, and it is convenient and can enter it with one beat at a time.

<<<<< 101-0422 0041 >>>>

Let's try typing it again slowly.

(MONO FOLLOW ING STOP TAXI)

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

Video # 37

Improved T9 input method 2

<<<<< 101-0431 0019 >>>>>

Secondly, although it is secondary,

Even if only one spelling is confirmed, the number of candidate words suggested by the device is rapidly reduced, so that the user can quickly input the word

The more definite the letter, the more candidate words are reduced.

<<<<<< 101-0436 0105 >>>>>

For example, to enter `HOOD`

If you press 4663 in the conventional T9 method, you need to move the cursor to HOOD by selecting 6 words `GONE`,` HOME`, `HOOD`,` HOOF`, `HONE`, and` GOOF` as candidate words.

Now, only 466 and the final letter D are definitively entered, that is, when the button 1 is pressed from the button 1 or 3 which is a shift button for inputting the first letter of D, and the button 3 is pressed to input D definitively, `HOOD` only one candidate word, so users can move the cursor to the desired word, such as making a choice without having to move the cursor quickly.

The less frequently used alphabet, the fewer the number of candidates.

<<<<< 101-0437 0014 >>>>

A suffix with a lot of derivations, or a word with a prefix or a root, has a huge number of candidate words, but even if only one or two letters are fixed, the number of candidate words is reduced.

<<<<< 101-0443 0044 >>>>>

Third, it is also a subordinate one. Using the twin input method, the special character * or? , So you can easily find words and phone numbers using a * or? That is a whopping letter like on a computer.

And

In T9 mode, special characters including punctuation marks and emoticons added to each button to make the best use of the twin input method,

In the conventional T9 method, that is, in the case of inputting with a single line, it is preferable to restrict the input to only the twin input method while preventing it from being recognized as the candidate letter.

<<<<< 101-0445 >>>>>

For more details and applications, please refer to the detailed instructions.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 38: Improving the way T9 searches for Hanja words or searches in English-speaking countries

<<<<< 104-0128 0016 >>>>>

This video is called "T9 Input Method Improvement 1,2", so you can understand it first and explain this video very briefly.

<<<<< 104-0131 0030 >>>>>

If you type Chinese characters in your mobile phone in China

After expressing Chinese in the English alphabet, it is most often used to select multiple Chinese characters or Chinese characters that match it and select the one you want.

It is the same as when you type Chinese characters in Hangul word processor and then convert them to Hangul, which uses Hangul instead of Hangul.

<<<<< 104-0136 0044 >>>>>

If the name of the President of the Republic of China is in the telephone directory or the word database,

If you express this in English alphabet,

It is expressed as JUNGHWAMINGUK DETONGLIONG.

In the past, the President of the Republic of China called the Korean alphabet,

(((((

1 JUNG

2 JUNGHWA

3 JUNGHWAM

4 JUNGHWAMINGUK DE

5 JUNGHWAMINGUK DETONGLI

6 JUNGHWAMINGUK DETONGLIONG

)))))

In this way, you have to enter the search terms in order from the beginning.

<<<<< 104-0146 0030 >>>>>

But if you enter your search terms this way

If you enter a short search term like 1.2

It is difficult to input the English alphabet in the conventional multitasking method even if the input is short, and too many candidate words are presented,

If you want to enter a search term longer than 5,6 such that a small number of candidate words are presented, there is a lot of effort to enter the search term.

<<<<< 104-0147 0037 >>>>

My suggestion

The method is to input only part of the variant of each kanji into the English alphabet as a search term.

And each kanji is separated by a separator such as a space or a comma.

I will use a comma in this video.

You can also omit the comma when you use only the first alphabetic character of each kanji. That is, if there are no commas in the query, only the first letter of each kanji is written.

<<<<< 104-0157 0054 >>>>>

This is the first alphabet of the conversion of the President of the Republic of China into the alphabet, J H M G D T L.

(((((

The first letter of JUNGHWAMINGUK DETONGLIONG

J

J D

J DTL

JH

JH DT

JHM

JHM D

JHMG

DTL

TL

JHMG D

JHMG DT

JHMG DTL

)))))

<<<<< 104-0171 0103 >>>>>

Even if you use only the first alphabet, you can use the comma separator between the Chinese characters to enter the search word in this way.

Here we have omitted here.

Anyway, you can search this way.

(((((

JUNGHWAMINGUK DETONGLIONG

J

J D

J D, T, L

J, H

J, H D, T

J, H, M

J, H, M D, L

J, H,, G

DTL

TL

J,, M, G D

J, H, M, G D, T

J, H, M, G D, T, L

)))))

<<<<< 104-0175 0055 >>>>>

If you have a comma, do not just use the first alphabet

like this

(((((

1 J, HWA, M, GU

2 JU, HW, MI, GUK

3 JUNG, HWA, M, G D, T, L

4 JUN, H, MIN, GU DE, TONG, L

5 JUNG, HWA, MIN, GUK DE, TONG, LIONG

6 J, HWA, MIN, GUK D, TONG, LIONG

7 J, H, M, G D, T, LIONG

8 J,,, DE, TONG, LIONG

9 J, HWA, MI, GUK DE, T, LIONG

10 J, H, MIN, GUK D, T, L

11 JUN, HW, MIN, G DE,, LI

12 JUNG, HWA, M, G DE, T, L

)))))

And so on.

<<<<< 104-0183 0029 >>>>>

And,

If you use * and?, Which are the weight characters in the computer, to the number of the candidate characters of the conventional T9 method

5 queries ((5 JUNG, HWA, MIN, GUK DE, TONG, LIONG

)) Can be modified in many ways including this case.

* Also used,? The number is also used.

((((((

JUNG, HWA, MIN, GUK DE, TONG, LIONG

JUN ?, H ??, MI ?, GU? D ?, TO ??, LI ???

5U6 ?, H ??, MI?, G8? D ?, T6 ??, L4 ???

J *, H *, MI?, GU * D ?, TONG, LI? NG

6 *, 4 *, MI ?, G8 * D ?, T66G, LI? N4

5864, 492, M ?, G85 D *, * O6G,? IONG

)))))

However, as we have seen so far

You can enter many types of search terms

You can easily and quickly find the desired Hanja data while typing in the most comfortable form of your search.

<<<<< 104-0189 0059 >>>>>

And

Also in English-speaking countries

VOLFGANG AMADEUS VON MOZART

As a search term to search for that name

VOLFGANG AMADEUS VON If you use some spelling of MOZART,

You can use these different search terms.

These things are so simple.

You can easily and quickly find the data you want.

(((((

VOLFGANG AMADEUS VON MOZART

1 669278

2 2623387 866

3 387

4 VA V M

5 VO AM V MOZ

6 MOZART

7 A6? 3E8S V * 6

8 M6 * 2

9 A6 * 3E V *

10 * 8S V *

)))))

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 39: Text Conversation with Text Emoticons

<<<<< 103-0001 0026? 103-0999 >>>>

The twin character input method allows you to enter punctuation marks or emoticons easily and quickly.

When you are talking with a cell phone text message, you can insert a lot of punctuation marks or emoticons so that you can communicate more meaningfully and have more emotional and fun conversations.

Many people have already longed for it.

<<<< 104-0013 0050 >>>>>

Let's start with a conversation consisting of plain text without punctuation or emoticons.

I can not exactly know the emotional state and intention of men and women, such as how joyful I am when I am happy with jokes or angry conversations.

Read for 30 seconds

((((((((

Man: baby what are you doing now

Woman: Just stay home.

Man: do the bath

Woman: It's crazy to be cold.

Man: Congratulations on your birthday today.

Woman: Thank you. But you are the only one.

Man: I'll give you a birthday present. I also watch movies

Woman: Yeah, we'll watch a movie, eat some rice, have a cocktail and have a glass of beer.

Man: Good, even karaoke.

Woman: Let's have a look

Man: All right.

)))))))

<<<<< 104-0027 0107 >>>>>

Here are a few of the more common punctuation and emoticons.

We can express well the psychological state of man and woman, and the meaning transfer becomes clearer, more sensible and interesting conversation progresses.

You will want to chat more and more.

At the end of the sentence, if you write only these hearts often,

The elderly will also send a lot of letters to their children, colleagues and friends.

((((((((

Man: baby (((, what are you doing now?

Woman: Just stay home.

Man: Do you take a bath? ♨

Woman: Being cold ~. I'm crazy ~

Man: You say it's your birthday today? congratulations.

Woman: Thank you. But there is only you.

Man: I'll give you a birthday present. Watching movies like this ~

Woman: Okay, we'll watch the movie, have some rice, have a cocktail, and have a glass of beer.

Man: Good, even karaoke ~

Woman: Let's see.

Man: All right.

)))))

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 40 times

Quick Composition or Play

<<<<< 102-0617 0041 >>>>>

With the twin input method, as you can quickly enter a lot of letters including letters, character codes, and emoticons,

Even with products that have a song or play function on your mobile phone, you can use the twin input method to quickly draw and play notes.

One octave is composed of 7 fundamental tones and 5 semitones, totaling 12 tones,

 0 to 9, *, # 12 buttons to produce 12 notes, and different octaves can be expressed using different function shift buttons.

<<<<< 102-0618 0035 >>>>>

Each button is pressed once to express the reference octave,

If you represent six different octave shift buttons,

A total of 7 octaves can be easily expressed.

Because all the notes of seven octaves are used in one or two and two, you can use both hands, so you can input in one beat, and six advantages in inputting words, such as the advantages of various twin input methods is.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

Videos 41 101-256

Hangul input with 4 ~ 8 button mini keyboard

<<<<< 101-0256 0049 >>>>

While mobile phones are becoming larger and larger,

In the future, it is possible to develop a smallest mobile phone with few buttons,

There is one inconvenience in using recording and recording apparatuses such as a conventional digital camcorder, a digital camera, and a digital recording apparatus,

The name of the recorded or recorded file is only stored as a serial number with numbers, and the device may not be able to do so even if the user wants to change the file name to a letter format.

However, there are at least four to eight buttons on the device, including a four-way button, so I would suggest that you assign letters or numbers to those buttons and enter characters.

<<<<< 101-0262 0057 >>>>

First, let me introduce how to input Hangul with 4 buttons.

The vowel is input by Samsung Electronics'

Consonants are almost the same type as the ez method of LG Electronics.

Let's take a closer look.

<Figure 55>

1 ㅣ Stroke? 2 . Pair

3 4 ㅡ ㅇ ㅇ

Button 1's

The first letter is the Chun Jiin's cloth (ㅣ)

The second character is the stroke addition function

The third letter is just a special character? And,

Button 2

The first letter is the name of the.

The second letter is a pair of consonants,

The third letter is a

Button 3

The first letter is b.

The second letter is

The third letter is Klitschko

Button 4

The first letter is the person's (ㅡ), or vowel

The second letter is

The third letter is ㅇ.

<<<<< 101-0274 0038 >>>>>

Button 1 or button 2 is used as a shift button for inputting the second letter,

Button 3 or button 4 is used as a shift button for inputting the third letter,

Of each button

The first letter, ichijin and d, are entered as a single line,

In the second letter, press button 1 or button 2 and press the button assigned to the letter you want to input,

In the third letter, press button 3 or button 4 and press the button assigned to the letter you want to input.

<<<<< 101-0276 0055 >>>>>

The use of the bundle, the Chu Jiin (pointing), seems to be a way of using traditional Samsung cell phones

In consonants

Previously, in the EZ method of LG Electronics, all of the ㅁ ㅅ ㅇ

Now it is possible to input it as a binary input, and only input as a twin input method,

(This is because you want to enter the vowels in the conventional way.)

In addition

For the consonant function, or for the stroke addition function

Conventionally, buttons * or # are placed on dedicated buttons

Now, the function of the double consonant function and the stroke addition function will be displayed in the form of a character input.

<<<<< 101-0278 0021 >>>>>

If you want to enter

As with the conventional electronic system, you can add a stroke to a song, create a song, add a stroke to it,

There are two ways A and B (depending on the rules, we recommend the B method).

<<<<< 101-0280 0046 >>>>>

First, type A

Since g is the second letter of button 4,

Press and hold button 1, which is a shift button for entering the second letter, and press button 4 to display the word on the screen,

Since the stroke addition function is the second letter of button 1,

Press button 2, which is a shift button that allows you to enter the second letter, press button 1 to display the stroke add-on function,

Press and hold Button 2, and then press Button 1 to add more strokes.

Shall we?

The

<<<<< 101-0281 0039 >>>>>

Type B as input

Since g is the second letter of button 4,

Press and hold button 1, which is a shift button for entering the second letter, and press button 4 to display the word on the screen,

Since the stroke addition function is the second letter of button 1,

Press button 2, which is a shift button that allows you to enter the second letter, and press button 1 twice to make the stroke add-on twice.

Shall we?

The

<<<<< 101-0293 0107 >>>>>

So I tried to type in A, B

Vowel input speed is the same as Samsung's conventional method.

For consonant input

It requires 2 strokes when inputting basic letters except and adding strokes or performing double consonant functions, so it requires twice as many strokes as compared with conventional LG EZ system,

B method, there is no difference from the conventional EL EZ method because the number of additional letters of the second pair consonant or the second stroke is increased by one more than the number of letters of the first pair consonant or the first stroke additional letter ,

Since there are four buttons and very few copper lines,

It is calculated that the consonant input speed will be 1.5 times that of the conventional LG EZ system.

So, in the end, consonants and vowels are estimated to take about 1.2 to 1.3 times as long as the combination of conventional Ez method and conventional Ez method.

<<<<<< 101-0308 0121 >>>>>

Now let's see how to enter Hangul with 6 buttons.

(Figure 54)

It is almost similar to the traditional Samsung electronic input method.

The vowels are input to the conventional input method using the first letter of buttons 4, 5, and 6,

Button 1 or button 2 is used as a shift button for inputting the second letter,

Button 3 or button 4 is used as a shift button for inputting the third character,

Button 5 or button 6 is used as a shift button for inputting the fourth letter.

19 consonants including ㄲ ㄸㅃ 전체 You can input 2 special characters in a total of 19 single or double letters in the twin input method.

In the conventional Samsung electronic input method, consonant collision occurs when 9 consecutive buttons are used, and 3 consecutive consonants are required. However,

Thus, even if you have 6 buttons, you can enter all the consonants as 1 or 2 and there is no consonant collision phenomenon.

In some ways, it can be said to be more efficient than the conventional Samsung Electronics.

<<<<< 101-0309 0034 >>>>>

Now let's see how to enter Hangul with 8 buttons.

(Figure 53)

All 40 Hangul phonemes were assigned to the completion type with 5 for each button

Shift button operation is set to 2,3,4,5

You can enter all 40 Hangul phonemes as one or two.

In all conventional phones, even though the 12 buttons were used, it was not possible to input 40 whole Hangul phonemes within 2 pages, and 3,4,5 was needed.

<<<<< 101-0316 0034 >>>>

And,

Numbers in numeric mode

By assigning 1 ~ 3 numbers per button, you can input more easily than text.

But,

If you want to enter numbers in normal text mode, you can assign 1 to 3 numbers per button, and input them in other group letter input method (eg 2nd ~ 3rd group letter input method).

Please refer to the detailed explanation for details and various applications other than the above-mentioned contents.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 42 101-318

Enter 4 to 8 buttons in English

<<<<< 101-0318 0048 >>>>>

While mobile phones are becoming larger and larger,

In the future, it is possible to develop a smallest mobile phone with few buttons,

There was one inconvenience in using a recording and recording device of a conventional digital camcorder, a digital camera, and a digital recording device,

The name of the recorded or recorded file is only stored as a serial number with numbers, and the device sometimes does not have such a function even if the user wants to change the file name to a character form.

However, there are at least four to eight buttons on the device, including a four-way button, so I would suggest that you assign letters or numbers to those buttons and enter characters.

<<<<< 101-0327 0104 >>>>>

Let's see how to enter the alphabet with 8 buttons first.

<Figure 49>

1 A B C D 2 E F G H

3 H I J K 4 L M N O

5 P Q R S 6 Ti V W

7 X Y Z? 8 ! & $

Four characters per button are assigned.

I've assigned space and four special characters.

Shift button operation is operated by 2, 3, 4.

(Button 3 or button 4 is used as a shift button for inputting the second letter,

Button 5 or button 6 is used as a shift button for inputting the third character,

Button 7 or 8 as a shift button for inputting the fourth character

(You do not need to shift buttons to button 1 or button 2.

if not

Button 1 or button 2 may be used as a shift button for inputting the first letter)

(<Figure 03>)

In the conventional mobile phone, although the nine buttons including the space button are used,

c, f, and I lor svyz. If you enter 10 consecutive letters assigned to the same button, you can continue typing after moving the cursor to the space button. Now, with these 8 buttons, And special characters and spaces can be entered in one or two strokes, and characters assigned to the same button can be entered continuously without the need to artificially move the cursor.

<<<<< 101-0328 0028 >>>>>

Now let's see how to enter the alphabet with 6 buttons.

<Figure 50>

1 A B C D

   E 2 F G H I

    J

3 K L M N

   O 4 P Q R S

   T

5 U V W X

   Z 6 Y? ! ~

Each button has 4 letters and special characters assigned on the first line, and one letter and space on the second line.

Shift button operation is operated as 2, 3, 4,

Long press on the second line.

<<<<< 101-0335 0034 >>>>>

It can also be done in this form.

Per each button

The first line contains three alphabetic or special characters,

The second line contains two alphabetic or special characters.

<Figure 51>

1 A B C

   D E 2 F G H

    I J

3 K L M

   N O 4 P Q R

   S T

5 U V W

   X Y 6 Z? !

   ~

Shift button operation should be 1, 2, 3, and 2nd letter should be entered as second group letter input method?

Detailed instructions on how to enter it after that are described in detail.

<<<<< 101-0341 0044 >>>>>

Now let's enter the alphabet with four buttons.

<Figure 52>

1 A B C

   D E F

     G ~ 2 H I J

    K L M

N @

3 O P Q

   R S T

     U? 4 V W X

    Y Z

      /:

Of each button

The first letter of the first line is defined as the first group,

The second line is defined as the second group,

The third line is defined as the third group,

It is also possible to divide the data into three groups and input them in the first to third group twin character input methods.

Button 1 or button 2 is used as a shift button for inputting the second letter,

Use button 3 or button 4 as a shift button to enter the third letter.

For more details, please refer to the detailed explanation.

<<<<<< 101-0342 0032 >>>>>

And

Numbers in numeric mode

By assigning 1 ~ 3 numbers per button, you can input more easily than text.

But,

If you want to enter numbers in normal text mode, you can assign one or two numbers per button, and enter them in another group letter input method (for example, second or third group letter input method).

Please refer to the detailed instruction book for more details and various applications other than the above-mentioned contents.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

Video # 43

Comparison of twin input method and star &# method

<<<<< 102-0406 0054 >>>>>

Like the twin input method, there is a method of using the shift button,

I named it '* &# way'.

The conventional `* &# method`

When no characters are assigned to button * and button #

Use the button * as a shift button to input the second letter assigned to each button,

Use the button # as the shift button to enter the third letter assigned to each button.

In other words

When you press a button * and then press any letter button after you release your hand, the second letter assigned to a letter button is entered,

Pressing the button # and releasing your hand, then pressing any letter button, is the expression that the third letter assigned to a letter button is entered.

(You can also follow the button * or button # to the letter button.)

<<<<< 102-0420 0115 >>>>>

By the way, almost all phones have buttons * or buttons #

It can be used as normal character assignment as in Korea, as a Hangul phoneme conversion function button, as a character mode conversion function button,

In other countries, there are 1 ~ 7 special characters assigned, or they are used as function keys for character conversion, case conversion and space functions. If you do not move them to other buttons, the `* &# method It is practically impossible to speak.

As if the EZ Hangul input method of LG Electronics Cyon

Use the button * as a stroke add button,

An expression that uses the button # as a double consonant button.

(So the LG EZ Hangul input method will cause the problem of `* &# method 'which will be mentioned soon.

  In Motorola Hangul input method, button * does not have character conversion function, characters are assigned, and button # only is used as stroke addition button, which causes about half of LG EZ method or `* &# method '.)

<<<<< 102-0455 0133 >>>>>>

The disadvantage of the `* &# method`

Since the button * and button # are used only as a shift button,

As shown in <Figure 22.7>, it is possible to use an improved Korean keyboard with buttons with 4 characters per button,

It can not be applied to virtually any language system with a button with more than four characters per button, including English, Roman, Japanese, and Thai.

Even in English,

In the standard keyboard like Figure 03, where 4 PQRS buttons are assigned to button 7 and 4 WXYZ buttons are assigned to button 9, the `* &# method 'does not have a shift button to input the fourth letter,

If the 4th assigned S and Z can not be entered as 2,

To enter S, press button 7 four times in a row,

To enter Z, press button 9 four times in succession.

As shown in <Fig. 04>, there is no shift button for inputting the first letter in the `* &# way` even in the case where only three alphabets are assigned to each button in the English alphabet that is not used in Korea. Since the first character can not be entered definitively, the `* &# method` can not be combined with the T9 mode without changing the rubbing mode.

<<<<<< 102-0461 0033 >>>>>

Another `* &# method 'disadvantage is

Button * or Button # In this line 4, every time you press the button * or button #, you need a large line to line 4, so the line of vertical line is bigger. And when you press *, # on line 4, the thumb bending angle is too big.

The twin input method

There is no large line to line 4 because you can shift button operation to 2, 3, or 4.

<<<<< 102-0473 0054 >>>>>

The `* &# way`

The left hand must cover all 1, 2, and 3 rows, and the right hand must cover all 1, 2, and 3 columns, so the horizontal line is large.

When entering the second letters H and Q of the first row and the third letters F, O, Y of the third row, the thumb of both hands is concentrated on the first row and the third row, and interference occurs between the thumbs of both hands.

Especially

To enter Q, press button * with your left thumb, then press button 7 with your right thumb

Pressing button # with your right thumb to enter Y and then pressing button 9 with your left thumb will further deepen both thumb interference

<<<<< 102-0475 0030 >>>>>

If you enter H, the second letter in column 1 and O, the third letter in column 3, like HO, then the shortcomings mentioned immediately will occur in succession

When you enter the second letter of the first column and when you enter the third letter of the third column in succession, the second and third letters are entered consecutively in any of the columns 1, 2, 3, The copper wire also becomes larger.

<<<<< 102-0476 0027 >>>>>

This is also true when H and I, which are the second and third letters of button 4,

This is also true when K and L, which are the second and third letters of button 5, are input as K and L,

This is also true for K, O, which is the second letter K of button 5 and the third letter O of button 6.

<<<<< 102-0482 0045 >>>>>

However, the twin input method

Since there are two shift buttons having the same function in the first row, third row and two columns (pointing to two), it is preferable that the shift button is shifted from the current position of the right thumb or the left thumb in two shift buttons having the same function when the shift button is pressed The left hand is covered by the left hand, the right hand is covered by the third row, and the right hand or the left hand covers the second row in accordance with the situation, so that there is no horizontal line of movement, no interference of the thumbs of both hands, Equalization is better, and the stability of holding the device is also improved.

<<<<< 102-0485 0031 >>>>>

If you input H, the second letter of column 1 and O, which is the third letter of column 3, like HO, you can enter the H O by twin input method very little, and you can enter it easily and quickly.

 `* &# Method rather than the HO input, such as the twin input method is very easy to enter HO is very convenient for many other reasons.

<<<<< 102-0487 0028 >>>>>

At first glance, although it seems that inputting speed will not affect the input speed a little by the difference of the copper line on the small keypad, if you actually input it, there will be a big difference in whether you can input more than one more due to the difference of the copper line.

There are a few real examples, including HO, in the detailed instructions book, which will come to your skin.

<<<<< 102-0491 0022 >>>>>

So far, I have only criticized `* &# method`, but if you prefer `* &# method`, you can also use `` &# method ``. In multi-tap mode, you can use `* &# method` and twin input method without changing the character mode.

<<<<< 102-0494 0010 >>>>>

For more details and applications that have not been mentioned up to now, please refer to the detailed instructions in this cafe.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

Video # 44

Comparison of twin input method and adjacent key input method

Detailed description of adjacent key

<<<<< 102-0543 >>>>>

The adjacent key input method uses a shift button like the twin input method,

The adjacent key input method,

As a method to be used when three characters are assigned to one button

To illustrate button 5, for example,

When button 5 is pressed once, the character K, which is the second assigned character, is input,

When button 5 is pressed while button 4 on the left side of button 5 is pressed, the left button 4 is briefly used by the shift button so that J, which is the first letter of button 5,

Press button 5 on the right side of button 5 and press button 5, and then use the right button 6 to shift to the third letter of button 5 by using the shift button.

<<<<< 102-0547 0008 >>>>>

A disadvantage of the adjacent key input method is

This is only used when there are three or less letters assigned to the button,

<<<<< 102-0550 0006 >>>>>

As shown in <Figure 22.7>, it is possible to use an improved Korean keyboard with buttons with 4 characters per button,

<<<<< 102-0555 0045 >>>>>

It can not be applied to the character system of virtually any language with / with buttons assigned more than 4 characters per button, including English, Roman, Japanese and Thai.

Even in English,

In the English standard keyboard as shown in FIG. 3, in which four PQRS buttons are assigned to the button 7 and four WXYZ buttons are assigned to the button 9, the `adjacent key input method` has no shift button for inputting the fourth letter,

If the 4th assigned S and Z can not be entered as 2,

To enter S, press button 7 four times in a row,

To enter Z, press button 9 four times in succession.

<<<<< 102-0560 0038 >>>>>

As shown in <Fig. 04>, in the English keyboard layout buttons 7 and 9, which are not used in Korea, only the alphabet within 3 is assigned, the adjacent key input method `does not have a shift button for inputting the second letter. Mode, the 'adjacent key input method' can not be concurrently performed with the T9 method without changing the character mode.

We explained in detail earlier that twin input method can be performed without changing T9 method and character mode.

<<<<< 102-0561 0021 >>>>>

And,

By adjacent key input method

I tried to press the left button of column 1 to try to enter the first letter of column 1, but because there is no left button in column 1, if there is no left button, it becomes impossible to use the upper button.

<<<<< 102-0565 0020 >>>>>

E.g

When button 4 is assigned `G, H, I`

If you want to input `H`,

If you want to input `I`, press button 5 on the right side and press button 4 to input

<<<<< 102-0570 0032 >>>>>

If you want to enter `G`, try to use the button on the left of button 4 as a shift button and try to input it as a combination of that button and button 4. But there is no button on the left of button 4, And then press button 4 while pressing button 1 to enter G. This is inconsistent

<<<<<< 102-0577 0028 >>>>> In the end, when I type the first letter of buttons 1, 4, and 7 in column 1, I get the same problem now.

In addition, Button 1 has no left button and no buttons at the top, so you can not assign the first letter to Button 1, and you can only assign two letters and two third letters.

<<<<< 102-0584 0039 >>>>>

I want to press the right button of the third column button to input the third letter of the third column, F, O, Y. Since there is no right button in the third column, if there is no right button, The law of falling has also been created.

To enter Y, the third letter of button 9, use the # button on the 4th line with large copper lines as the shift button.

The twin input method

There is no large line to line 4 because you can shift button operation to 2, 3, and so on.

<<<<< 102-0596 0054 >>>>>

In addition

When entering the first assigned letters G and P assigned to buttons in column 1 and the third assigned letters F, O, Y in button 3 column, use the shift buttons to specify which buttons should be applied Not only is it easy to be confused if you are not a master, but there are two buttons that are combined vertically so that both hands are centered on one or three rows, causing severe interference between the thumbs of both hands, It occurs more frequently than the # method.

In addition, the left hand must cover all 1, 2, and 3 columns, and the right hand must cover all 1, 2, and 3 columns.

<<<<< 102-599 0031 >>>>>

In a slide-type mobile phone

If you try to press button 1 with the right hand thumb while holding button 4 with the left thumb, it is difficult to press button 1 because the thumb of the right hand is clogged on the upper slide with liquid crystal,

If you try to press button 3 with your left thumb while pressing button 6 with your right thumb, it will be difficult to press button 3 because your left thumb is clogged with the upper slide with liquid crystal.

<<<<< 102-0605 Copy >>>>>

However, the twin input method

Since there are two shift buttons having the same function in the first row, third row and second column (pointing to two), there are two shift buttons having the same function when the shift button is pressed. The left hand is covered by the left hand, the right hand is covered by the third row, and the right hand or the left hand covers the second row in accordance with the situation, so that there is no horizontal line of movement, no interference of the thumbs of both hands, Equalization is better, and the stability of holding the device is also improved.

<<<<< 102-0610 0010 Copy >>>>>

For more details and applications that have not been mentioned up to now, please refer to the detailed instructions in this cafe.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 45:

Others - Improved computer keyboard - Improved toggle keys such as HanYoung key

<<<<< 104-0200 0010 >>>>>

This video is described as an example of a toggle key on a computer keyboard, but it can also be applied to a toggle key on a keyboard of a mobile phone, a PDA, or the like.

<<<<< 104-0201 0037 >>>>>

A toggle key is a key that changes mode each time you press a key.

The computer keyboard has the following toggle keys.

This is HanYoungKey, which is the toggle key to switch between Korean and English

This is the CAPS LOCK key, which toggles between uppercase and lowercase modes

This is the INSERT key, which is an insert or modify toggle key when entering text

Other than that

There are also NUM LOCK and SCROLL LOCK keys.

<<<<< 104-0202 0007 >>>>>

I make a lot of mistakes when changing modes with toggle keys on my computer keyboard.

<<<<< 104-0206 0029 >>>>>

I'm trying to type in English.

Even if the current language mode is in English mode properly, it is wrong to know that the mode is Hangul mode,

I'm trying to type in English.

The current language mode is Hangul mode, but I do not know it is in English mode, and I do not know how to make a mistake when Hangul is typed without typing Hangul key,

<<<<< 104-0209 0031 >>>>>

I want to type in capital letters.

Even though the current character mode is in upper case mode correctly, it is wrong to know that it is a lower case mode and press the Caps Lock key,

I want to type in capital letters.

Although the current character mode is in lower case mode, it is not known to be in upper case mode and many mistakes are made such as writing lowercase letters when typing without pressing caps lock key.

<<<<< 104-0212 0019 >>>>>

And

If you want to change the character mode to English capital letter while typing Hangul at the moment.

When you need to change between language mode and uppercase and lowercase modes, you make more mistakes.

<<<<< 104-0215 0020 >>>>>

The Caps Lock key makes a lot of mistakes even when the lamp that indicates the current mode is here.

This is because you think you are right, even though you misjudged the current mode, or you do not look at the lamp well because you think it might be right, and it's annoying to look at it.

<<<<< 104-0216 0029 >>>>>

However, it is easy to make a mistake when you are involved in a task involving a toggle key, without getting close to your mind.

In this situation, I have blamed these mistakes so far for pure selflessness, but I think that I have been using the computer for almost 20 years and still have many toggle key mistakes, and now I think I should fix the system to avoid mistakes.

<<<<< 104-0221 0028 >>>>>

System is not huge,

Since such a mistake has occurred because a mode change signal is given such that the mode is changed to the English mode after the same signal of the same pressing method,

Now, if you give a mode change signal for different signals in different modes, it seems that such mistakes will hardly happen.

<<<<< 104-0224 0049 >>>>>

There are many ways to give different signals for each mode.

I will explain the example of Han Young Key.

First, you can press the HanYoung key once to select Hangul mode, or double click to switch to English mode.

Second, if you press the Hangul key, Hangul mode or English key can be set to English mode.

Thirdly, if you press the key for HanYoung alone, any key other than Hangul mode or HanYoung key can be changed to English mode by pressing it with HanYoung key,

Fourth, you can change Korean or English mode by voice command.

<<<< 104-0225 0015 >>>>>

Now let's talk a little more about the first method, which is different for each mode.

Other methods can be applied in the same way. For details, please refer to the application.

<<<<< 104-0228 0038 >>>>

If you distinguish between push and double click signals

In the way of pressing the Haneyoung key

In this case, unconditional Hangul mode

If you double-click it, you can set it to English mode unconditionally.

In the manner of pressing the caps lock key

If this is the case,

If you double-click to set the mode to unconditional capital letters,

If you change the mode by pressing the HanYoung or Caps Lock key, there will be almost no chance of changing the mode.

<<<<< 104-0231 0030 >>>>>

so

If you do not know whether the current mode is Hangul mode or English mode, you can press Hangul key to enter Hangul mode,

If you do not know whether the current mode is Korean mode or English mode, you can double-click the HanYoung key to confirm it in English mode.

<<<<< 104-0235 0028 >>>>>

In addition

I want to type in lower case, but I do not know whether the current mode is Hangul mode or English mode. If you do not know whether English mode is in lower case mode or upper case mode

Just double-click the HanYoung key to confirm it in English mode,

In the confirmation phase, the Caps Lock key is unlocked and fixed in the lower case mode.

<<<<< 104-0237 0028 >>>>>

In addition

I would like to type in capital letters, but I'm not sure whether the current mode is Hangul or English mode, and if you do not know whether English mode is in lower case mode or upper case mode

Just double-click the HanYoung key to confirm it in English mode,

To confirm, double-click the Caps Lock key to confirm it in uppercase mode.

<<<<< 104-0238 0027 >>>>>

It is much better to check the lamp than to check the lamp mode and check the language mode displayed on the computer screen. It seems to be a way to make sure you get the mode you want, even with less energy.

<<<<< 104-0239 0010 >>>>

So, it would be great to make it a habit to push the toggle keys to the desired mode of operation in confirmation mode.

<<<<< 104-0240 0014 >>>>>

Even when using an electronic calculator, it is similar to habit of pressing 0 or clear button 2 or 3 times when making a new calculation because previous calculations will be added to the next calculation.

<<<<< 104-0241 0035 >>>>>

When you enter your password when you sign up for the Internet site, your input is not written in numbers or letters. Instead, it is displayed as multiple dots. So it is doubtful whether the letters you typed are correctly entered in English lowercase mode. In case of confirmation, double-click the HanYoung key to confirm it in English mode, and once you set the Caps Lock key to single-letter mode, you will be able to work with confidence.

<<<<< 104-0244 0020 >>>>>

Some programs do not display the language mode on the computer screen, and some programs hide the language mode display on the desktop. If you apply the toggle key push method that I suggested, it would not be a problem at all It is.

<<<<< 104-0245 0006 >>>>>>

For reference, if you are most likely to make the mistake of changing the mode of the toggle key,

<<<<< 104-0249 0027 >>>>>

In order to maximize the task window at all times, the Taskbar Auto-hide mode is set on the Windows desktop taskbar menu. When the task window is maximized, the Taskbar disappears. You can not see the language mode at all when you work on the internet site while maximizing the task window in auto hide mode.

<<<<< 104-0251 0020 >>>>>

Some programs, such as Notepad, do not display the language mode in the program itself, so the language mode can not be checked. Even though the current language mode is uncertain, move the mouse pointer to the bottom of the monitor screen It is annoying to check the language mode, and since it is highly likely that the current language mode is the desired language mode, the user simply enters the letter in that state. Unfortunately, There are many.

<<<<< 104-0254 0030 >>>>>

In addition, when entering the ID or password when registering on the Internet site, especially when entering the password, only the point entered by the user is displayed. Therefore, the user is prompted to enter the password and the error message There is a lot of effort to enter again after changing to English mode and there is a lot of effort to input again, and since the current character mode is entered in English capital letter mode even though it should be input in lower case letter, it displays an error message.

Even though I was trying to enter an ID or password in English lowercase letters at a site where I can input capital letters mode, I typed in capital letters in English because I was in capital letter mode at that time, I remember that I was embarrassed when I could not log in.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 46

Others - Computer keyboard enhancement - shift control Alt button on top

<<<< 104-0313 0017 >>>>>

Computer keyboard

The control button, shift button and alt button are not depressed independently to perform any operation. Instead of pressing the control, shift, or alt button, the user presses another button, that is,

<<<<< 104-0316 0022 >>>>>

There is no problem in doing such a task with both hands,

It is very difficult to do such a task with one hand, such as when the right hand is in the mouse and you want to do such a task only with your left hand.

This is because the arrangement of the control buttons, shift buttons, and alt buttons is not ergonomic.

<<<<< 104-0317 0014 >>>>>

This is because the position of the finger and the button that presses the other button with the left hand index finger or the thumb with the left hand little finger holding the buttons is not correct.

<<<<< 104-0319 0012 >>>>>

As an example, copying and pasting is a common command when you are working on a computer and it may be faster to use a keyboard shortcut rather than a mouse to do it,

<<<<< 104-0323 0026 >>>>>

To copy, press and hold the control button, press the C button while connected,

To paste, press the V button while holding down the control button.

However, the angle of the fingers does not fit well, so the wrists can not do so naturally, and should be turned upwards, the muscles of the back of the hand is very hard because it is rigid.

<<<<< 104-0326 0027 >>>>>

If the control button is on the upper side, you do not have to bend the wrist so deliberately, and your hands are not so rigid.

If this is a control button

Control + C can do this comfortably.

Control + V can do this comfortably.

<<<<< 104-0329 0026 >>>>.

I think it's more ergonomic to have the control, shift, and alt buttons on top.

Although there are ergonomically bent keyboards in the past, control, shift, and alt buttons are more difficult than these, and you can not bend the keyboard in your notebook.

<<<<< 104-0330 0015 >>>>>

Again, control buttons, shift buttons, alt buttons

Currently, it is at the bottom,

Moving those buttons upwards will allow you to work on shortcuts with one hand.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 47: Guitar - Improving the Computer Keyboard

1 <<<<< 104-0270 0014 >>>>>

This is what a typical computer keyboard looks like.

By dividing into three zones

This is where the letter buttons are

And

This can be divided into the number pad part.

2 <<<<< 104-0298 0016 >>>>>

However, this layout seems to be the layout that was used until now before the mouse was developed.

So, there is one inconvenience when mouse is on the right side of the keyboard like here.

3 <<<<< 104-0301 0015 >>>>>

When you type here, when you try to move your right hand with the mouse on the right side of the keyboard

Here, when I try to move my right hand with the letter buttons here from the mouse, the line is too big and inconvenient.

4 <<<<< 104-0281 0010 >>>>>

It seems that the conventional keyboard like this can be called left-handed work that puts the mouse on the left side of the keyboard.

5 <<<<< 104-0287 0016 >>>>>

Then, when typing with such a conventional keyboard in the center of the body, the letters are biased to the left so that both hands are shifted to the left from the center of the body.

6 <<<<< 104-0280 >>>>>

And the load on both hands is not evenly distributed.

At this point, the right hand is doing as much as the left hand does, and the work here and the mouse work here should be handled by the right hand alone.

7 <<<<< 104-0289 0005 >>>>>

so

This way,

8 <<<<< 104-0295 0010 >>>>>

If you place the letter buttons right next to the mouse, it will be better because the movement of the right hand, which moves the mouse and the letter button, becomes smaller.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 48: Other - Place the numeric buttons on the calculator close to the display

<<<<< 104-0257 0008 >>>>>

The electronic calculator

Instead of these function buttons

These buttons are used much more frequently.

<<<<< 104-0262 0030 >>>>>

By the way

Conventionally, such function buttons are disposed between the display screen and the number buttons with a frequency that is relatively lower than that of the number buttons, so that the focus of the eyes has to be moved frequently here and there, It is inconvenient because the moving distance is large, and the operation speed is also slowed down.

I felt uncomfortable when I used a lot of industrial calculators.

<<<<< 104-0266 0032 >>>>>

So I would like to change the positions of function buttons and number buttons like this.

Now, the focus of the eyes is mainly here and there, so it is more and more here, so the focus distance of the eyes is reduced and it becomes convenient and the work speed seems to be accelerated.

There are several function buttons between the display screen and the numeric buttons, but I would like to change the position.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 49 Twin character input method Quick description

<<<<< 104-0347 0021 >>>>>

What characters are the fastest characters on your phone?

Until now it was Hangul.

By using the twin character input method, however, foreign words can be entered faster than Hangul. Of course, Hangul is faster and easier to wear than usual.

<<<<< 104-0351 0013 >>>>>

Once the twin character input method was developed, it was now possible to get to know the articles that were wrong.

You can search on Naver or Google.

<<<<< 104-0352 0014 >>>>>

"The science of Hangul is shining more and more in the age of knowledge informationization. Take a look at our young people who send and receive cell phone text messages. There is no 'thumb'

<<<< 104-0355 0009 >>>>>

"It's an incomparable speed compared to the Japanese, which needs to toggle up to five times per key, and the alphabet, which is three times."

<<<<< 104-0357 0011 >>>>>

The hands of the "thumbs" are slim, and they are close to the gods. The speed of life in the information age is also inseparable from the characteristics of Hangul.

<<<<< 104-0359 0011 >>>>>

"It would not have been possible for the 'Umbil family,' who is using cell phones to hit more than 150 strokes a minute, unless it was Hangul created by King Sejong.

<<<< 104-0360 0006 >>>>>

"Is there another character in the world that is as comfortable as Hangul when typing mobile phone text messages?

<<<< 104-0361 0007 >>>>

The speed of Korean character input on a mobile phone is faster than that of a Roman character, as well as Japanese and Hanja. "

<<<< 104-0362 0013 >>>>

 "There are twelve character buttons on the cell phone, and the only people who can transfer their native language most conveniently to a cell phone with this limited character button are the Koreans who speak Korean."

<<<<< 104-0367 0030 >>>>>

The main point of these articles is that Hangul is scientific, so it can be entered as fast as possible on a mobile phone,

I argue that Hangul is not unique in the world but it is scientific, but since Hangul is scientific,

It is irrelevant that the initiating principle of a system of letters is to be entered scientifically and quickly,

<<<<< 104-0368 0030 >>>>>

In the conventional input method, foreign languages other than Hangul can not be input as fast as Hangul. If the twin character input method is adopted, Greek and Roman alphabet including English can be input much faster than Hangul, and Japanese Hiragana Katagana Also, it is possible to input kanji more quickly than in the case of inputting Hangul in the conventional Hangul input method.

<<<<< 104-0369 0007 >>>>>

Of course, if you adopt twin input method, Hangul can be input much faster and convenient than usual.

<<<<< 104-0370 0008 >>>>>

Special characters such as punctuation marks and emoticons can be entered directly without changing the character mode.

<<<<< 104-0372 0016 >>>>

The English alphabet is 26 letters and the Korean alphabet is almost half the speed of Hangul, even though it is composed of 19 consonants and 21 vowels.

<<<<< 104-0373 0035 >>>>>

The most important reason is that Hangul has a rule that a vowel must come after a consonant, but English words do not have such a rule, so there are many consonants and consecutive vowels, so that consonant buttons portions and vowel buttons This is because there is no meaning if you try to divide into sections, so when you arrange the keyboard in the alphabetical standard enumeration order, you have to enter the alphabet assigned to the same button in succession.

<<<<< 104-0378 0105 >>>>

For example, to enter MONO in the conventional way

Press button 6 once to enter M,

O, and O is assigned to button 6 as M, so you can manually move the cursor by pressing the right button or the space button,

Press button 6 three times to enter O,

I want to enter N, and N is assigned to Button 6 like O, so I press the RIGHT button or SPACEBAR to manually move the cursor

Press button 6 twice to enter N,

O, and O is assigned to button 6 as N, so you can manually move the cursor by pressing the right button or the space button

Press button 6 three times to enter O.

<<<<< 104-0379 0003 >>>>>

It is too cumbersome and inconvenient.

<<<<< 104-0381 0007 >>>>>

However, if you want to input MONO with twin character input method, you can input this.

<<<<< 104-0384 0003 >>>>>

M, O, N, O (Demonstration)

<<<<< 104-0385 0001 >>>>

It's too easy, right?

<<<<< 104-0386 0021 >>>>>

On what principle can you enter it,

Buttons 4 and 6 are temporarily used with a shift button for inputting the second letter assigned to each button,

You used buttons 7 and 9 for a while with a shift button that allows you to enter the third letter assigned to each button.

<<<<< 104-0388 0026 >>>>

Again,

Since M is the first letter of button 6, just press button 6 once to enter M,

Since O is the third letter of button 6, press button 7 among buttons 7 or 9 which is a shift button for inputting the third letter, press button 6 to input O,

<<<<< 104-0389 0030 >>>>>

Since N is the second letter of button 6, press button 4 from button 4 or 6 which is a shift button for inputting the second letter, press button 6 to input N,

O is the third letter of button 6, so press button 7 from button 7 or 9, which is the shift button to enter the third letter, and press button 6 to enter O.

<<<<< 104-0390 0004 >>>>>

Let's try it again.

M, O, N, O (Demonstration)

<<<<< 104-0391 0013 >>>>>

Also, every time you input Korean characters, you can input them in the same way as before, without changing the character mode, or you can input them using the twin input method.

<<<<< 104-0395 0037 >>>>>

The twin input method is a shift button for typing 6 letters in the order of 2 ~ 7th letters by tying 2 pairs of twelve mobile phone keyboards so that the letters are input for a while, so that 7 letters Even if it is assigned, the first letter is typed by typing once in the same manner as the conventional one, and the remaining letters are pressed with the appropriate shift button while typing the letter to be input, and the second letter is input.

<<<<< 104-0397 0041 >>>>>

Also, even if there are two riders, two riders use both hands, so it is almost equal to one riding speed when using only one hand.

Since seven characters can be input in one or two tones per button, special characters such as punctuation marks are assigned to the number of free spaces in which seven characters are not allocated, You can easily type in.

Therefore, it is easy to input Japanese characters with 5 letters assigned, and even if you assign 2 special characters per button, you can easily input them.

<<<<< 104-0399 0023 >>>>>

In the conventional method, when a Hangul is input, a phoneme requiring more than 3 out of 40 Hangul phonemes

If you want to enter Samsung Anycall '

There are 15 lines to input in the easy way of LG Cyon, and it is possible to input such phonemes with 2 taps, so Hangul can be input even faster.

<<<<< 104-0400 0004 >>>>>

Let's quickly type the following English words:

MONO FOLLOW ING STOP TAXI

<<<<<< 401 0015 >>>>> In Figure 03,

<<<<<< 402 0017 >>>>> Quickly on your phone

<<<<< 104-0405 0029 >>>>>

The reason for this quick and easy entry is

Not only because all spells can be entered as one or two, but also because there are six different kinds of individuality, such as the movement of the thumb and the interference of both hands, It is because the advantages are exerted. The six advantages are explained in detail in videos 11 and 12.

<<<<< 104-0407 0009 >>>>>

Of course, these advantages of the twin character input method are common when entering characters in all languages, including Hangul.

<<<<< 104-0410 0011 >>>>>

In addition, I have proved that the fastest way to input characters in these keyboards is the twin input method.

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\

Video 50 Investment presentation

<<<<< 104-0411 0020 >>>>>

Will it be possible to generate income from mobile phone text input methods?

A typical example is Samsung's Anycall Hangul input method.

Naver or Google search terms, "Tianjin 90 billion," if you enter a lot of related articles.

<<<<< 104-0412 0003 >>>>>

Let me introduce only two of them.

<<<<< 104-0413 0023 >>>>>

Among the contents reported by sbs on 2004-01-31

"Samsung Electronics' mobile phone Hangul input method 'Cheonjiyin'. So far, over 30 million cell phone keyboards have been adopted for convenience and ease of operation.

It's a patented technology worth 90 billion won if you hit it with money. "

<<<<< 104-0414 0002 >>>>>

There is a part called,

<<<<< 104-0425 0050 >>>>>

Among the contents reported by Chosun Ilbo on June 2, 2006

The court ruled that the patent was granted to an individual who confronted Samsung Electronics with the patent right of the Korean phone input device, which is famous for the "Hanchonien" dispute. In the case of Cho's final victory in the lawsuit, the amount of patent royalties to be received by Cho will be astronomical. Even if Samsung Electronics' cell phone made up to 2002 is calculated, the money that can be received as compensation for damages is 90 billion won (30 million mobile phones, 3,000 won per use fee)

By 2002, the total number of mobile phones manufactured with built-in Chungjin input method was 30 million units, and the royalties of 3,000 won per unit were calculated.

<<<<< 104-0426 0002 >>>>>

There is a part called.

<<<<< 104-0429 0016 >>>>>

Though it is an input method which is limited to Hangul input, the twin character input method which I have patented in Korea is the method that can input the characters of the world the fastest including the Hangul in the mobile phone.

<<<<< 104-0430 0017 >>>>>

How many phones are being produced worldwide per year?

You can find out by typing "1.1 billion mobile phones" as a search word on Naver or Google.

Approximately 1.1 billion units are made in a year.

<<<<< 104-0435 0010 >>>>>

In the case of the Tianjin dispute, I asked for a fee of 3,000 won per unit, so multiplying 3.1 billion won to 3,000 won a year would yield 3.3 trillion won.

<<<<< 104-0436 0008 >>>>>

This is not likely to be the case, but when it comes to commercialization, it generates huge profits.

<<<<< 104-0438 0012 >>>>>

3 trillion

Even if one tenth is achieved, the income of 330 billion a year is generated,

Even if you achieve 1 in 100, you earn 33 billion a year.

<<<<< 104-0440 0015 >>>>>

Knowing that this way of generating mobile phone text input can generate tremendous income, if you have come up with an idea of truly innovative text entry methods, you would think that you should also issue a patent.

<<<<< 104-0441 0017 >>>>>

However, in case you do not know whether or not to register as a patent, you have to file a patent with cost and time, pass the examination. I have already completed the work and have registered the patent for twin character input in Korea.

<<<<< 104-0444 0012 >>>>>

This is the same as patent registration.

The application number is the same, and the registration number is the same.

((((((

- Patents (patent search site: http://www.kipris.or.kr, searchable at http://www.wipo.org)

Twin letter input method Korean patent application number: 10-2007-0093341 (Method of increasing button efficiency of electric and electronic devices)

Twin letter input method Korea patent registration number: 10-0846042 (How to increase button efficiency of electric and electronic devices)

PCT / KR2008 / 000349 (THE METHOD OF PROVIDING MORE BIGGER EFFECT OF BUTTON)

)))))))

<<<<< 104-0454 0028 >>>>>

Since I have applied for a patent in Korea on February 22, 2007 under the international patent law, failure to file a patent application for each country within 30 months from July 22, 2009 will result in patent technology that can be used for free in other countries .

So, you have to file a patent for each country abroad. However, it costs a lot.

<<<<< 104-0455 0016 >>>>>

It costs about 1000 ~ 15 million won for each country including the patent fee for patent attorneys of the Korean side and the fee for translation, patent application and registration fee for each country.

<<<<< 104-0462 0019 >>>>>

We are going to invest 100 million dollars in preference to the top 10 applications in China, USA, India, Japan, Brazil, Europe, Germany, UK, France, etc., which account for 70 ~ 80% of the global mobile phone market.

<<<<< 104-0467 0027 >>>>>>

With 100 million invested

In the above-mentioned one year, the income of 3.3 trillion may be generated,

Even if one tenth is achieved, the income of 330 billion a year is generated,

Even if you achieve 1 in 100, you earn 33 billion a year.

Or 3300 times, or 330 times the amount of your investment.

<<<<< 104-0468? 104-0482 >>>>>

That is every year. It is available for 20 years under patent law.

<<<<< 104-0469 0031? 104-0468 >>>>>

And I want to give investors about 50% of the net profit generated by the investment.

If you can not apply for each country until July 22, 2009, it will be a free patent technology. So, we will offer you a huge amount of money to return investors.

Please refer to the contract for 50% details of the return.

<<<<< 104-0470 0010? 104-0515 >>>>>

In some cases, an investor is considered to have invested 10% of the amount invested by the investor.

<<<<< 104-0471 0016 >>>>>

As a developer, I still have patents in Korea, which is a very small market.

The world market is 1.1 billion units a year, but Korea is only 2.303 million units a year.

<<<<< 104-0472 0013 >>>>>

Naver and Google search query, "domestic mobile phone market in 2008, 230.3 million units" If you try to enter.

<<<<< 104-0474 0012 >>>>>

In other words, the Korean market is only about 2% of the global market.

I would like to share about half of the remaining 98% of the market with investors.

<<<<< 104-0476 0021 >>>>>

I have already proved that I can be registered as a patent. What are you waiting for?

Do not hesitate,

As you come up with a good idea yourself, invest in even a million won for the first patent registration, not me.

<<<<< 104-0487 0020 >>>>>

As you invest, you will become a patriot who will make the people of the world come to your advantage, realize Hongik man, the founding ideology that means to benefit the world widely, and bring a great amount of royalties to Korea. It's a chance.

<<<<< 104-0479 0007 >>>>>

Naturally, the greater the amount invested, the more income will be returned to each investor.

<<<<< 104-0480 0042? 104-0535 >>>>

There are some situations such as bank deposit interest that can determine whether there is a certain profit or not by investing, but there are situations that need to be invested in situations where it is not possible to make a patent. Still, many people are investing in patents. If you enter "patentee 600 million" as a search term in Naver, you will find that the average salary of patent attorneys who act as patents is 600 million, twice as many as doctors and attorneys who are 300 million, and one professional duties.

Please invest in a joyful mind if you are well.

<<<<< 104-0544 0004 >>>>>

It does not seem to be a patent that does not have a single investment cost.

<<<<< 104-0545 0009 >>>>

2009.6.20 If you raise about 100 million or so of investment, the investment attraction may be terminated prematurely.

<<<<< 104-0546 0006 >>>>

If you have any questions, please contact us here.

(((((

Name: Kim Ki-ju

Account Number:

cell phone

e-mail

Cafe

))))))

Thank you.

<<<<< 104-04888 0003 >>>>>

Do you want to know just now?

<<<<< 104-0489 0007 >>>>>

50% divided by 40%, 4% and 6%

<<<<< 104-0493 0009 >>>>>

1. We distribute 40% of net profit directly to investors (investment from 10,000 won)

<<<<< 104-0495 0019 >>>>>

2. Distribute 4% of net profit to people who have invested.

   (Just introducing an investor means that 10% of the amount invested by the referrer is considered to be invested by you.

<<<< 104-0501 0006 >>>>>

However, I need to invest more than 50,000 won to get 4%.)

<<<<< 104-0507 0019 >>>>>

The reason why I set the 50,000 won amount is that I set a minimum amount of money to invite others to invest in conscience.

If you do not even invest 50,000 won, you can invest 1 million won or 10 million won.

<<<<< 104-0508 0015 >>>>>

3. In the investment promotion organization formed by the introduction of the applicant, 6% of the investment amount excluding the investment amount of the person is distributed by 1% until the sixth level based on the person who invested more than 100,000 won

<<<<< 104-0514 >>>>>>

This means, in a nutshell, that you consider yourself investing 1 / 40th percentile, or 2.5%, of the total investment of your team up to level 6, made by your teammate.

.

Claims (11)

For each of a plurality of buttons among characters displayed on the touch pad,
Given a signal,
Before the display on the button changes on the next button displayed on the button,
Some characters are displayed without being changed to another character,
Some other letters are displayed in a different letter .
When the inputable characters displayed on each of the plurality of buttons among the buttons having the characters that can be input among the keyboard buttons including the buttons of the virtual keyboard on the touch pad can be divided into a plurality of groups for each button,
For each of the &quot; plurality of buttons &quot;
Given a signal,
Before the display on the button changes on the next button displayed on the button,
The letters of some groups are displayed without changing to other letters,
The letters of some other groups are displayed in a different letter .
The method according to claim 1,
"Other letters"
Quot; is &lt; / RTI &gt; new to all of said &quot; some letters &quot; or &quot; some other letters &quot;
3. The method of claim 2,
"Other letters"
Quot; is &lt; / RTI &gt; new, compared to both the "some group letters" or "some other group letters" that were displayed on all of the "multiple buttons".
The method according to claim 1,
The "some letters" that are displayed unaltered include plain characters representing languages including Korean and English alphabets,
A "some other letter" that is changed and displayed includes special characters including punctuation marks, symbols, figures, emoticons, or emoticons.
The method of claim 3,
The "some letters" that are displayed unaltered include plain characters representing languages including Korean and English alphabets,
A "some other letter" that is changed and displayed includes special characters including punctuation marks, symbols, figures, emoticons, or emoticons.
3. The method of claim 2,
The &quot; some groups of characters &quot; displayed unchanged include normal characters representing languages including Korean and English alphabets,
A "partially different group of letters" that is changed and displayed includes special characters including punctuation marks, symbols, figures, emoticons, or emoticons.
5. The method of claim 4,
The &quot; some groups of characters &quot; displayed unchanged include normal characters representing languages including Korean and English alphabets,
A "partially different group of letters" that is changed and displayed includes special characters including punctuation marks, symbols, figures, emoticons, or emoticons.
9. A method according to any one of claims 2, 4, 7, or 8,
A "group" is a group of one or more letters.
10. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 9,
Wherein the number of times that can be changed and displayed is two or more times. 10. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 9,
How the changed characters can be entered.